(07.20) 5FF012720 Inglés FORMENTOR...This manual describes the features of the vehicle at the time of drafting this text. Some of the features described below will be intro-duced

F O R M E N T O R

F

OR

ME

NT

OR

Ingl

és (

07.2

0)

5FF012720

Ingl

és 5

FF01

2720

(07

.20)

Owner’s manual

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.All rights on changes are reserved.

❀This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.07.20

Vehicle identification da a

Model:

Vehicle Registration:

Vehicle identification number:

Date of vehicle registration or vehicle delivery:

SEAT Official Service:

Service advisor:

Telephone:

Confirmation of eceipt of documentation and vehicle keys

The following items were delivered with the vehicle: YES NO

On-board documentation

First key

Second key

Correct working order of all keys was checked

Location: Date:

Signature of owner:

IntroductionThank you for your trust choosing a CUPRAvehicle.

With your new CUPRA, you will be able to en-joy a vehicle with state-of-the-art technolo-gy and top quality features.

We recommend reading this InstructionManual carefully to learn more about yourvehicle so you can enjoy all its benefits inyour daily driving.

Information about handling is complemen-ted with instructions regarding the operationand maintenance of the vehicle in order toensure its safety and maintain its value.Moreover, we want to give you valuable ad-vice and tips to drive your vehicle efficientlyand respecting the environment.

We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring.

CUPRA

WARNINGRead and always observe safety infor-mation concerning the passenger'sfront airbag ››› page 33, Fitting and us-ing child seats.

About this manualThis manual describes the features of thevehicle at the time of drafting this text. Someof the features described below will be intro-duced in the future or will only be available incertain markets.

Some of the features described here arenot included in all the types or variationsof the model and they can be varied ormodified based on technical or marketingrequirements without it being consideredmisleading advertising.

Some details on the drawings may vary fromits vehicle and must be interpreted as astandard representation.

The direction indicators (left, right, for-wards, backwards) in this manual refer to thetravel direction of the vehicle unless other-wise stated.

The audiovisual material is only meant tohelp the users better understand some fea-tures of the car. It is not a replacement forthe instruction manual. Access the instruc-tion manual to see the complete informationand warnings.

The features marked with an asteriskare included by default only in certainversions of the model, supplied as op-tional only for certain versions or onlyoffered in certain countries.

Trademarks are marked with ®. The ab-sence of this symbol does not guaran-tee that the term is not a trademark.It indicates that the section continueson the next page.

You can access the information in this man-ual using:

● Thematic table of contents that follows themanual’s general chapter structure.● Visual table of contents that uses graphicsto indicate the pages containing “essential”information, which is detailed in the corre-sponding chapters.● Alphabetical index with many terms andsynonyms to help you find information.

WARNINGTexts after this symbol contain informa-tion about safety and warn you aboutpossible accident or injury risks.

CAUTIONTexts after this symbol indicate possibledamage to the vehicle.

For the sake of the environmentTexts after this symbol contain informa-tion about the protection of the envi-ronment.

®

NoteTexts after this symbol contain addition-al information.

Digital instruction manualThe digital version of the manual can befound on the official CUPRA website:

Fig. 1 CUPRA website

● scan the QR code ››› Fig. 1● OR enter the following address in the navi-gator website:

http://www.cupraofficial.com/owners/cupra-car-model-manuals.html

and select your vehicle.

Table of Contents

Table of ContentsGeneral views of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Overview (left hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Overview (right hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Advice about driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Correct sitting position of vehicle occupants . . . . . . 13Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16The whys and wherefores of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . 16How to properly adjust your seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21PreCrash system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Operation of the airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Safety for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Self-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Information, assistance and emergency call serv-ice* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Tyre repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Tow start and towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Instruments and warning/control lamps . . . . . . . . 64Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Using the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Multifunction steering wheel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Set of vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Sunroof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Vehicle lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper sys-tems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Seats and headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Adjusting seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Transport and practical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Heating, ventilation and cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Auxiliary heating (additional heating)* . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156First steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Overview and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160General instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167CUPRA CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171WLAN access point* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Infotainment operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178voice control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Radio/Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Navigation* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Start and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205DSG automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Hill Descent Control (HDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Driving modes (Drive Profile)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

5

Table of Contents

Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Driver assistance sensors and cameras . . . . . . . . . . . 222Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226emergency brake assistance system (Front As-sist)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228ACC - Adaptive Cruise Control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Proactive speed adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Lane Assist* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Driving Assist (Travel Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Lane departure warning (Side Assist) with rearcross traffic alert (RCTA) and door opening warn-ing (Exit Assist)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Braking and parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Stabilisation and brake assistance systems . . . . . . . . 256Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Help with parking and manoeuvring . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Assisted parking system (Park Assist)* . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Parking aid parking and manoeuvring (ParkPi-lot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Parking System Plus* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Rear parking aid* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Reverse Assist (Rear View Camera)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Towing bracket device* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Electrically unlocking trailer hook* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Practical tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Fuel types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Engine management and emissions control sys-tem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29712-volt battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298Energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Tyre pressure monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Additional service offers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Accessories and modifications to the vehicle . . . 321Accessories, spare parts and repair work . . . . . . . . . 321

Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324Information stored by the control units . . . . . . . . . . . 324Other important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324Information about the EU Directive2014/53/EU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Indications about the technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

6

General views of the vehicle

Exterior view

Levels control– Oil ››› page 291– Brake fluid ››› page 296– Battery ››› page 298Bonnet– Unlocking lever ››› page 290– Open/close ››› page 290

A

B

Towing the vehicle– Towline anchorage ››› page 56– Tow-start ››› page 54

C Driving assistance sensors ››› page 221Front multifunction cameraFront camera “Area View”Front radarParking aid sensorsPark assist sensor

1

2

3

4

5

7


Exterior view

Rear lid– Opening from outside ››› page 102– Emergency opening ››› page 105Towing the vehicle– Towline anchorage ››› page 56– Tow-start ››› page 54Opening and closing– Doors ››› page 100– Central locking ››› page 91– Emergency lock ››› page 100

A

B

C

Fuel tank– Fuel capacity ››› page 328– Open/Close cap ››› page 285Action in the event of a puncture– Anti-puncture kit ››› page 44– Wheel change ››› page 46

D

E

Driving assistance sensors ››› page 221Rear view cameraParking aid sensorsRear radarsPark assist sensor

1

2

3

4

8


Overview (left hand drive)

Electric windows ››› page 106Exterior mirror adjustment ››› page 121Control for lighting and demisting win-dows ››› page 110Turn signal and main beam lever››› page 112Warning lamps ››› page 80Wipers and rear window wiper››› page 119Driver information system ››› page 78

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Infotainment system ››› page 82 ,››› page 156Open bonnet lever ››› page 290Fuses ››› page 57Steering wheel adjustment ››› page 15Hazard warning lights ››› page 115Starter button ››› page 201Electronic parking brake ››› page 254Central locking ››› page 91

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

9


Overview (right hand drive)

Infotainment system ››› page 82 ,››› page 156Turn signal and main beam lever››› page 112Warning lamps ››› page 80Wipers and rear window wiper››› page 119

1

2

3

4

Driver information system ››› page 78Control for lighting and demisting win-dows ››› page 110Exterior mirror adjustment ››› page 121Electric windows ››› page 106Open bonnet lever ››› page 290

5

6

7

8

9

Starter button ››› page 201Central locking ››› page 91Electronic parking brake ››› page 254Hazard warning lights ››› page 115Steering wheel adjustment ››› page 15Fuses ››› page 57

10

11

12

13

14

15

10


Interior view

Armrest ››› page 136Isofix anchors ››› page 34Seat belts ››› page 16Panoramic roof ››› page 108Interior mirror ››› page 121Disconnecting the front passenger frontairbag ››› page 27

1

2

3

4

5

6

Electronic parking brake ››› page 254Seat adjustment ››› page 124

7

8

11

Safety

Safety

Safe driving

Advice about driving

Safety first!

WARNING● This manual contains important informa-tion about the operation of the vehicle,both for the driver and the passengers. Theother sections of the on-board documen-tation also contain further information thatyou should be aware of for your own safetyand for the safety of your passengers.● Ensure that the on-board documentationis kept in the vehicle at all times. This is es-pecially important when lending or sellingthe vehicle to another person.

Before driving

For your own safety and the safety of yourpassengers, always note the following pointsbefore every trip:

– Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turnsignals are working properly.

– Check tyre pressure.

– Ensure that all windows provide a clear andgood view of the surroundings.

– Make sure all luggage is secured››› page 130.

– Make sure that no objects can interferewith the pedals.

– Adjust front seat, headrest and mirrorsproperly according to your size.

– Ensure that the passengers in the rearseats always have the headrests in the in-use position ››› page 125 .

– Instruct passengers to adjust the headrestsaccording to their height.

– Protect children with appropriate childseats and properly applied seat belts››› page 31.

– Assume the correct sitting position. In-struct your passengers also to assume aproper sitting position ››› page 13 .

– Fasten your seat belt securely. Instructyour passengers also to fasten their seatbelts properly ››› page 16 .

Factors influencing safety

As a driver, you are responsible for yourselfand your passengers.

– Always pay attention to traffic and do notget distracted by passengers or telephonecalls.

– Never drive when your driving ability is im-paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).

– Observe traffic laws and speed limits.

– Always reduce your speed as appropriatefor road, traffic and weather conditions.

– When travelling long distances, take breaksregularly - at least every two hours.

– If possible, avoid driving when you are tiredor stressed.

WARNINGDriving under the influence of alcohol,drugs, medication or narcotics may resultin severe accidents and even loss of life.● Alcohol, drugs, medication and narcoticsmay significantly alter perception, affectreaction times and safety while driving,which could result in the loss of control ofthe vehicle.

Safety equipment

Never put your safety or the safety of yourpassengers in danger. In the event of an ac-cident, the safety equipment may reducethe risk of injury. The following points cover

12

Safe driving

part of the safety equipment in your CU-PRA1):

● three-point seat belts,● belt tension limiters for the front and rearside seats,● belt tensioners for the front and rear sideseats,● front airbags,● knee* and central* airbags for the driver● side airbags in the front seat backrests,● side airbags in the rear seat backrests*,● head-protection airbags,● “ISOFIX” anchor points on the front pas-senger seat and on the rear seats for childseats with the “ISOFIX” system,● height-adjustable front headrests,● rear headrests with in-use position andnon-use position,● adjustable steering column.

The safety equipment mentioned aboveworks together to provide you and your pas-sengers with the best possible protection inthe event of an accident. However, thesesafety systems can only be effective if youand your passengers are sitting in a correctposition and use this equipment properly.

Safety is everyone's business!

Correct sitting position of vehi-cle occupants

Correct position on the seat

Fig. 2 The correct distance between the driverand the steering wheel must be at least 25 cm (10inches).

Fig. 3 Correct belt web and headrest positions

The correct sitting positions for the driverand passengers are shown below.

If your physical constitution prevents youfrom maintaining the correct sitting position,contact a specialised workshop for help withany special devices. The seat belt and airbagcan only provide optimum protection if acorrect sitting position is adopted. CUPRArecommends taking your car in for technicalservice.

For your own safety and to reduce the risk ofinjury in the event of an accident or suddenbraking or manoeuvre, CUPRA recommendsthe following positions:

Valid for all vehicle occupants:● Adjust the headrest so that its upper edgeis at the same level as the top of your head, »

1) Depending on the version/market.13

Safety

or as close as possible to the same level asthe top of your head and under no circum-stances below eye level. Keep the back ofyour neck as close as possible to the head-rest ››› Fig. 3 .● Short people must lower the headrestcompletely, even if your head is below its up-per edge.● Tall people must raise the headrest com-pletely.● Always keep your feet in the footwell whilethe vehicle is in motion.● Adjust and fasten your seat belt correctly››› page 19.

The following also applies to the driver:● Move the seat backrest to an almost up-right position so that your back rests com-pletely against it.● Move the steering wheel so it is at least25 cm (10 inches) away from the ster-num››› Fig. 2 and you can hold it with bothhands on both sides, on the outer part, withyour arms slightly bent.● The steering wheel must always point to-wards the chest and never towards the face.● Move the seat in such a way that you canstep on the pedals with your knees slightlybent and with a distance between the kneesand the dashboard of at least 10 cm (4 in-ches) ››› Fig. 2 .

● Adjust the height of the seat so that youcan reach the top of the steering wheel.● Always keep both feet in the footwell sothat you have the vehicle under control at alltimes.

For the passenger, the following applies:● Move the seat backrest to an almost up-right position so that your back rests com-pletely against it.● Move the seat as far back as possible (mini-mum 25 cm between the chest and thedashboard check translation). If you are sit-ting closer than 25 cm, the airbag systemcannot protect you properly.

Number of seats

The vehicle has 5 seats, 2 in the front and 3 inthe rear. All seats are equipped with a safetybelt.

In some versions, your vehicle is approvedonly for 4 seats. 2 front seats and 2 rearseats.

WARNINGSitting in an incorrect position may in-crease the risk of severe or lethal injuries inthe event of sudden braking or manoeu-vring, in case of collision or accident and ifthe airbags deploy.

● Before starting the car, all passengersmust be sitting in a correct position andstay like that for the entire journey. This al-so applies to a correct use of the seat belt.● The maximum amount of people in thevehicle is the same as the amount of seatswith seat belts.● For children, always use a certified pro-tection system, certified and suited fortheir weight and height ››› page 31 .● While driving, always keep your feet inthe footwell. Never place them over theseat or the dashboard, for example, or out-side the window. Otherwise the airbag andseat belt may offer insufficient protectionand also increase the risk of injury in theevent of an accident.

Risks of sitting in an incorrect position

If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all,the risk of severe or lethal injuries increases.Seat belts can provide optimal protectiononly if the belt web is properly worn. Incor-rect sitting positions substantially reduce theprotective function of seat belts and, there-fore, increase the risk of severe or even le-thal injuries. The risk of severe or fatal inju-ries is especially heightened when a deploy-ing airbag strikes a vehicle occupant who hasassumed an incorrect sitting position. The

14

Safe driving

driver is responsible for all people, particu-larly children, inside the vehicle.

The following list contains examples of in-correct sitting positions that could be dan-gerous for all vehicle occupants.

When the vehicle is in motion:● Never stand in the vehicle.● Never stand on the seats.● Never kneel on the seats.● Never tilt your seat backrest too far to therear.● Never lean against the dash panel.● Never lie on the rear seats.● Never sit on the front edge of a seat.● Never sit sideways.● Never lean out of a window.● Never put your feet out of a window.● Never put your feet on the dash panel.● Never place your feet on the bench or onthe backrest of the seat.● Never travel in a footwell.● Never sit on the armrests.● Never travel without wearing the seat belt.● Never travel in the luggage compartment.

WARNINGSitting in an incorrect position increasesthe risk of severe or fatal injuries in theevent of accidents and sudden braking ormanoeuvres.● All occupants must sit correctly duringthe journey and wear the seat belt correct-ly.● Occupants of the vehicle that are not sit-ting correctly, not wearing the seat belt orare not at a proper distance of the airbagrisk suffering very serious or lethal injuries,especially if the airbags deploy and strikethem.

Steering wheel position adjustment

Fig. 4 Lever in the lower left side of the steeringcolumn.

Adjust the steering wheel before your tripand only when the vehicle is stationary.

● Pull the ››› Fig. 4 1 lever down, move thesteering wheel to the desired position and liftthe lever back up until it locks.

WARNINGIncorrect use of the steering wheel adjust-ment function and an incorrect adjustmentof the steering wheel can result in severe orfatal injury.● After adjusting the steering column, pushthe lever ››› Fig. 4 1 firmly upwards to en-sure the steering wheel does not acciden-tally change position while driving.● Never adjust the steering wheel while thevehicle is in motion. If you need to adjustthe steering wheel while the vehicle is inmotion, stop safely and make the properadjustment.● The adjusted steering wheel should befacing your chest and not your face so asnot to hinder the driver's front airbag pro-tection in the event of an accident.● When driving, always hold the steeringwheel with both hands on the outside ofthe ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock posi-tions to reduce injuries when the driver'sfront airbag deploys.● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12o'clock position or in any other manner(e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). Insuch cases, if the driver's airbag deploys,you may sustain injuries to your arms,hands and head.

15

Safety

Pedal area

Pedals

– Ensure that you can always press the accel-erator, brake and clutch pedals unimpairedto the floor.

– Ensure that the pedals can return unim-paired to their initial positions.

– Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas-tened during the trip and do not obstructthe pedals ››› .

Only use floor mats which leave the pedalsclear and which are secured to prevent themfrom slipping. You can obtain suitable floormats from a specialised dealership. Fasten-ers* for floor mats are fitted in the footwells.

If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal mustbe pressed down thoroughly in order to stopthe vehicle.

Wear suitable footwearAlways wear shoes which support your feetproperly and give you a good feeling for thepedals.

WARNING● Restricting pedal operation can lead tocritical situations while driving.

● Never lay or fit floor mats or other floorcoverings over the original floor mats. Thiswould reduce the pedal area and could ob-struct the pedals. Risk of accident.● Never place objects in the driver footwell.An object could move into the pedal areaand impair pedal operation.

Seat belts

The whys and wherefores ofseat belts

Control lamps

It lights up red

The driver or one of the passengers have not fastenedtheir seat belts.

The control lamp lights up to remind thedriver to fasten their seat belt.

Before starting the vehicle:

● Fasten your seat belt securely.● Instruct your passengers to fasten theirseat belts properly before driving off.● Protect children by using a child seat ac-cording to the child's height and weight››› page 31.

When starting to drive, if the vehicle's speedexceeds approx. 25 km/h (15 mph) and theseat belts are not fastened or are unfastenedwhile driving, a warning sound will be heardfor a few seconds. The warning light will alsoflash .

The lamp goes out when the ignition is onand all occupants have fastened their seatbelts.

16

Seat belts

Rear seat belts fastened display*

Fig. 5 Instrument panel: left rear seat occupiedand corresponding seat belt fastened display.

Depending on the model version, when theignition is switched on, the seat belt statusdisplay ››› Fig. 5 on the instrument panel in-forms the driver whether the passengers inthe rear seats have fastened their seat belts.

It indicates that the corresponding seatis empty.Indicates that the seat is occupied andthe occupant is wearing the seat belt.

The seat belt status flashes for a maximum of30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seatsis unfastened while the vehicle is in motion.An audible warning will also be heard if thevehicle is travelling at over 25 km/h (15 mph).

If a seat belt is fastened or unfastened whiledriving in some of the rear seats, the seatbelt status is displayed for approximately 30

seconds. The indication can be hidden bypressing the button on the dash pan-el.

The protective function of seat belts

Fig. 6 Drivers with properly worn seat belts willnot be thrown forward in the event of suddenbraking.

Properly worn seat belts hold the occupantsin the proper position. They also help pre-vent uncontrolled movements that may re-sult in serious injury and reduce the risk ofbeing thrown out of the vehicle in case of anaccident.

Vehicle occupants wearing their seat beltscorrectly benefit greatly from the ability ofthe belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addi-tion, the front part of your vehicle and otherpassive safety features (such as the airbagsystem) are designed to absorb the kinetic

energy released in a collision. Taken togeth-er, all these features reduce the releasing ki-netic energy and consequently, the risk ofinjury. This is why it is so important to fastenseat belts before every trip, even when "justdriving around the corner".

Ensure that your passengers wear their seatbelts as well. Accident statistics have shownthat wearing seat belts is an effective meansof substantially reducing the risk of injury andimproving the chances of survival when in-volved in a serious accident. Furthermore,properly worn seat belts improve the protec-tion provided by airbags in the event of anaccident. For this reason, wearing a seat beltis required by law in most countries.

Although your vehicle is equipped with air-bags, the seat belts must be fastened andworn. The front airbags, for example, are on-ly triggered in some cases of head-on colli-sion. The front airbags will not be triggeredduring minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end collisions, overturns or accidents inwhich the airbag trigger threshold value inthe control unit is not exceeded.

Important safety instructions for theuse of seat belts

– Always wear the seat belt as described inthis section. »

17

Safety

– Ensure that the seat belts can be fastenedat all times and are not damaged.

WARNING● If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not atall, the risk of severe injuries increases. Theoptimal protection from seat belts can beachieved only if you use them properly.● Never allow two passengers (even chil-dren) to share the same seat belt.● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the ve-hicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.● The seat belt should never lie on hard orfragile objects (such as glasses or pens,etc.) because this can cause injuries.● Do not allow the seat belt to be damagedor jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.● Never wear the seat belt under the arm orin any other incorrect position.● Bulky and unfastened clothing (such asan overcoat over a sweater) impairs theproper fit and function of the seat belts, re-ducing their capacity to protect.● The slot in the seat belt buckle must notbe blocked with paper or other objects, asthis can prevent the latch plate from en-gaging securely.● Never use seat belt clips, fastening ringsor similar items to alter the position of thebelt webbing.● Frayed or torn seat belts or damage tothe connections, belt retractors or parts of

the buckle could cause severe injuries inthe event of an accident. Therefore, youmust check the condition of all seat belts atregular intervals.● Seat belts which have been worn in an ac-cident and have been stretched must be re-placed by a specialised workshop. Renewalmay be necessary even if there is no appa-rent damage. The belt anchorage shouldalso be checked.● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seatbelt yourself. The seat belts must not be re-moved or modified in any way.● The belts must be kept clean, otherwisethe retractors may not work properly.

Head-on collisions and the laws ofphysics

Fig. 7 A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrownforward violently.

Fig. 8 The unbelted passenger in the rear seat isthrown forward violently, hitting the driver who iswearing a seat belt.

The effects of the laws of physics in the caseof a head-on collision are easy to explain:the moment a vehicle starts moving, a typeof energy called “kinetic energy” starts act-ing on both the vehicle and its passengers.

The amount of “kinetic energy” depends onthe speed of the vehicle and on the weightof the vehicle and of its passengers. Thehigher they are, the more energy there is tobe “absorbed” in the event of an accident.

The most significant factor, however, is thespeed of the vehicle. If the speed doublesfrom 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph),for example, the corresponding kinetic en-ergy is multiplied by four.

Given that the passengers of the vehicle inour example do not have their seat belts fas-tened, in the event of a collision the entire

18

Seat belts

amount of the passengers' kinetic energy willbe only absorbed by the mentioned impact.

Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod-ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne(1000 kg). At greater speed these forces areeven higher.

Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts arenot “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-oncollision, they will move forward at the samespeed their vehicle was travelling just beforethe impact. This example applies not only tohead-on collisions, but to all accidents andcollisions.

Even at low speeds the forces acting on thebody in a collision are so great that it is notpossible to brace oneself with one's hands.In a frontal collision, unbelted passengers arethrown forward and will make violent contactwith the steering wheel, dash panel, wind-screen or whatever else is in the way››› Fig. 7.

It is also important for rear passengers towear seat belts properly, as they could oth-erwise be thrown forward violently throughthe vehicle interior in an accident. Passen-gers in the rear seats who do not use seatbelts endanger not only themselves but alsothe front occupants ››› Fig. 8 .

How to properly adjust yourseat belt

Fastening and unfastening the seatbelt

Fig. 9 Insert the latch plate of the seat belt intothe buckle.

Fig. 10 Release the seat belt's buckle.

Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle oc-cupants in the position that most protectsthem in the event of an accident or suddenbraking ››› .

Fastening the seat beltFasten your seat belt before each trip.

● Adjust the front seat and headrest correct-ly ››› page 13 .● Engage the seat backrest of the rear seat inan upright position ››› .● Pull the latch plate and place the belt web-bing evenly across your chest and lap. Donot twist the seat belt when doing so ››› .● Engage the latch plate in the buckle of thecorresponding seat ››› Fig. 9 .● Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate issecurely engaged in the buckle.

Releasing the seat beltOnly unfasten the seat belt when the vehiclehas come to a standstill ››› .

● Press the red button on the buckle››› Fig. 10. The latch plate is released fromthe buckle.● Guide the belt back by hand so that it rollsup easily and the trim will not be damaged. »

19

Safety

WARNING● The seat belt cannot offer its full protec-tion unless the seat backrest is in an uprightposition and the seat belt is worn correctly,according to your size.● Unbuckling your seat belt while the vehi-cle is in motion can cause severe or fatal in-juries in the event of an accident or suddenbraking.● The seat belt itself, or a loose seat belt,can cause severe injuries if the belt movesfrom hard areas of the body to soft areas(e.g. the stomach).

Correct seat belt position

Fig. 11 Correct seat belt and headrest positions,viewed from front and the side.

Fig. 12 Position of seat belt during pregnancy.

Seat belts offer their maximum protection inthe event of an accident and reduce the riskof sustaining severe or fatal injuries onlywhen they are properly positioned. Further-more, if the webbing is correctly positioned,the seat belt will hold the vehicle occupantsin the optimum position to ensure the airbagprovides the maximum protection. The seatbelt must therefore always be worn and thewebbing correctly positioned.

Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severeor even fatal injuries ››› page 13, Correct sit-ting position of vehicle occupants.

● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lieon the centre of the shoulder, never acrossthe neck or the arm, under the arm or be-hind the shoulder.● The lap part of the seat belt must lie acrossthe pelvis, never across the stomach.

● The seat belt must lie flat and fit comforta-bly. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take upany slack.

In the case of pregnant women, the seatbelt must lie evenly across the chest and aslow as possible over the pelvis, never acrossthe stomach and must be worn properly atall times during the pregnancy ››› Fig. 12 .

Adapting the position of the belt webbingto your sizeThe position of the seat belt can be adaptedby adjusting the height of the front seats.

WARNINGAn incorrectly worn seat belt web cancause severe or fatal injuries in the event ofan accident.● The shoulder part of the seat belt mustlie on the centre of the shoulder, neveracross the neck or the arm.● The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfort-ably on the torso● The lap part of the seat belt must lieacross the pelvis, never across the stomach.The seat belt must lie flat and fit comforta-bly on the pelvis Pull the belt tight if neces-sary to take up any slack.● For pregnant women, the lap part of theseat belt must lie as low as possible over thepelvis and always lie flat, “surrounding” thestomach ››› Fig. 12 .

20

Seat belts

● Do not twist the seat belt while it is fas-tened.● Once the seat belt is positioned correctly,don't pull it away from your body with yourhand.● Do not lie the seat belt across rigid orfragile objects, e.g. glasses, pens or keys.● Never use seat belt clips, retaining ringsor similar instruments to alter the positionof the belt webbing.

NoteIf your physical constitution prevents youfrom maintaining the correct position ofthe belt webbing, contact a specialisedworkshop for help with any special devicesto ensure the optimum protection of theseat belt and airbag. CUPRA recommendstaking your car in for technical service.

Seat belt tensioners

How the seat belt tensioner works

The seat belts for the front seats and the siderear seats are equipped with belt tensioners.

The belt tensioners are activated by sensors,although only in severe head-on, lateral andrear-end collisions, or in the event of the ve-

hicle overturning in the plug-in hybrid ver-sion of the vehicle.

This retracts and tightens the seat belts, re-ducing the forward motion of the occupants.

The belt pre-tensioners work in combinationwith the airbag system. The belt pre-tension-ers activate in combination with some of theairbags, depending on the collision type.

Note● If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, afine dust is produced. This is normal and itis not an indication of fire in the vehicle.● The relevant safety requirements must beobserved when the vehicle or componentsof the system are scrapped. Specialisedworkshops are familiar with these regula-tions, which are also available to you.

Maintenance and disposal of seat belttensioners

The belt tensioners are components of theseat belts that are installed in the seats ofyour vehicle. If you work on the belt tension-ers or remove and install parts of the systemwhen performing other repair work, the seatbelt may be damaged. The consequencemay be that, in the event of an accident, thebelt tensioners function incorrectly or maynot function at all.

So that the effectiveness of the seat belttensioner is not reduced and that removedparts do not cause any injuries or environ-mental pollution, regulations, which areknown to the specialised workshops, mustbe observed.

WARNING● Improper use or repairs not carried out byqualified mechanics increase the risk of se-vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensionersmay fail to trigger or may trigger in thewrong circumstances.● The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and au-tomatic retractor cannot be repaired.● Any work on the belt tensioners and seatbelts, including the removal and refitting ofsystem parts in conjunction with other re-pair work, must be performed by a special-ised workshop only.● The belt tensioners will only provide pro-tection for one accident and must bechanged if they have been activated.

For the sake of the environmentAirbag modules and belt tensioners maycontain perchlorate. Observe the legal re-quirements for their disposal.

21

Safety

PreCrash system*

How it works

The PreCrash system is an assistance systemthat actives a series of measures to protectthe occupants of the vehicles in potentiallyrisky situations, but which cannot prevent acollision.

It only works completely if no special drivingprofile is selected and if there are no operat-ing anomalies.

Basic featuresDepending on the legal provisions of thecountry and the features of the vehicle, incritical situations (e.g. in certain cases ofemergency braking or loss of control of thevehicle by the driver) the following functionscan be activated separately or at the sametime when the vehicle is travelling faster thanapproximately 30 km/h (20 mph).

● Reversible tensioning of front seat beltsthat are fastened.● Operation of the hazard warning lights.● Automatic closing of the windows untilthey are just cracked open and, dependingon the equipment, of the sunroof.● In the event of overturning, depending onthe equipment, activation of the belt ten-sioners.

Depending on how critical the driving situa-tion is, the belts are either tightened individ-ually, or both belts at the same time.

In addition to Front AssistIn vehicles with Front Assist ››› page 228 ,within the limits of the system, information isassessed on the risk of collision with the ve-hicle in front. The functions of the PreCrashsystem may also be activated if there is a highlikelihood of a rear-end collision, or duringthe activation of Front Assist.

In addition to the Emergency Assist systemIn vehicles with emergency assist, driver sta-tus information is assessed within the limita-tions of this system. The following PreCrashsystems may be activated if a lack of activityis detected:

● Reversible seat belt tensioning of the driv-er's seat belt.● Automatic closing of the windows untilthey are just cracked open and, dependingon the equipment, of the sunroof.

Activation of the PreCrash systemThe PreCrash system can be partially deacti-vated by deactivating the traction and / orstability control, depending on the equip-ment. When these vehicle safety controlsare switched on (by default, every time the

ignition is turned on), the system is fully acti-vated.

Driving profile selection settingsIn vehicles with driving profile selection,PreCrash adapts to suit the special vehicleconfiguration of the corresponding profile››› page 215.

Limited operationThe PreCrash system is not available or onlyhas limited availability in the following situa-tions:

● When the TCS and/or the ESC are discon-nected.● When driving in reverse.● When the airbag control unit is not operat-ing properly.● When there is a fault in the system itself, inthe ESC or in the Front Assist.

Problems and solutionsIf the PreCrash is not working correctly, themessage System unavailable or Systemwith limited features is shown perma-nently on the dashboard display. Go to aspecialized CUPRA Service or Official SEATService and ask for the system to bechecked.

22

Airbag system

WARNINGThe PreCrashsystem cannot overcome thelimits imposed by the laws of physics; it onlyworks within the limits of the system. Risksthat compromise safety are never justifiedby the use of this system. The system is nota replacement for driver awareness andcannot prevent a collision.● Adapt your speed and safe distance tothe vehicle in front of you at all times to suitthe visibility, weather, road and traffic con-ditions.● The system is not always able to recogniseobjects.● The system may not react to people oranimals or objects that cross length-wise orthat are hard to detect.● Metallic objects (e.g. fences) or other el-ements of the public road or adverseweather conditions can hinder its opera-tion and thus its ability to detect collisionrisk.● Never ignore the warning lamps that lightup or the messages shown on the dash-board.

WARNINGDistracting the driver in any way can lead toan accident and cause injuries.● Never change settings on the Infotain-ment System while driving.

Airbag system

Brief introduction

Why is it so important to wear a seatbelt and to sit correctly?

For the inflating airbags to achieve the bestprotection, the seat belt must always beworn properly and the correct sitting posi-tion must be assumed.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seatbelts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle'soverall passive safety system. Please bear inmind that the airbag system can only workeffectively when the vehicle occupants arewearing their seat belts correctly and haveadjusted the headrests properly. Therefore,it is most important to properly wear the seatbelts at all times, not only because this is re-quired by law in most countries, but also foryour safety ››› page 16, The whys andwherefores of seat belts.

The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, soif you are not properly seated when the air-bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju-ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicleoccupants assume a correct sitting positionwhile travelling.

Sharp braking before an accident may causea passenger not wearing a seat belt to be

thrown forward into the area of the deploy-ing airbag. In this case, the inflating airbagmay inflict critical or fatal injuries on the oc-cupant. This also applies to children.

Always maintain the greatest possible dis-tance between yourself and the front airbag.This way, the front airbags can completelydeploy when triggered, providing their maxi-mum protection.

The most important factors for triggering theairbag are the type of accident, the angle ofimpact and the vehicle speed.

Whether or not the airbags are activated de-pends primarily on the vehicle decelerationrate resulting from the collision and detectedby the control unit. If the vehicle decelera-tion occurring during the collision and meas-ured by the control unit remains below thespecified reference values, the front, sideand/or head-protection airbags will not betriggered. Take into account that the visibledamage in a vehicle involved in an accident,no matter how serious, is not a determiningfactor for the airbags to have been activated.

WARNING● Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or as-suming an incorrect sitting position canlead to critical or fatal injuries.● All vehicle occupants, including children,who are not properly belted can sustaincritical or fatal injuries if the airbag is »

23

Safety

triggered. Children up to 12 years oldshould always travel on the rear seat. Nevertransport children in the vehicle if they arenot restrained or the restraint system is notappropriate for their age, size or weight.● To reduce the risk of injury from an inflat-ing airbag, always wear the seat belt prop-erly ››› page 16 .

Description of the airbag system

The airbag system offers additional protec-tion for the occupants in combination withthe seat belts.

The airbag system comprises the followingmodules (as per vehicle equipment):● Electronic control unit● Front airbags for driver and passenger● Knee airbag for the driver● Side airbags● Central airbag for the driver● Head airbag● Airbag control lamp on the instrumentpanel ››› page 25● Key-operated switch for front passengerairbag● Control lamp for disabled/enabled statusof the front passenger airbag.

The airbag system operation is monitoredelectronically. The airbag control lamp will il-luminate for a few seconds every time the ig-nition is switched on (self-diagnosis).

There is a fault in the system if the controllamp :● does not light up when the ignition isswitched on ››› page 25 ,● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignitionis switched on,● turns off and then lights up again after theignition is switched on,● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle ismoving.

The airbag system is not triggered if:● the ignition is switched off● there is a minor frontal collision● there is a minor side collision● there is a rear-end collision

WARNING● The seat belts and airbags can only pro-vide maximum protection if the occupantsare seated correctly ››› page 13 .● If a fault has occurred in the airbag sys-tem, have the system checked immediatelyby a specialised workshop. Otherwise thereis a danger that during a collision, the sys-

tem may fail to trigger, or not trigger cor-rectly.

Airbag activation

The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, withinthousands of a second, to provide additionalprotection in the event of an accident. A finedust may develop when the airbag deploys.This is normal and it is not an indication offire in the vehicle.

The airbag system is only ready to functionwhen the ignition is on.

In special accidents instances, several air-bags may activate at the same time.

Airbags do not activate in the event of mi-nor head-on and side collisions or rear-endcollisions. Airbags only activate if the vehicleoverturns in the hybrid plug-in version of thevehicle.

Activation factorsThe conditions that lead to the airbag systemactivating in each situation cannot be gener-alised. Some factors play an important role,such as the properties of the object the ve-hicle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehi-cle speed, etc.

Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti-vation.

24

Airbag system

The control unit analyses the collision trajec-tory and activates the respective restraintsystem.

If the deceleration rate is below the prede-fined reference value in the control unit theairbags will not be triggered, even thoughthe accident may cause extensive damage tothe car.

The following airbags are triggered in seri-ous head-on collisions:● Driver airbag.● Front passenger front airbag● Knee airbag for the driver.*● Head airbags (depending on the severity ofthe crash).

In the event of serious side collisions,some (or all) of the following airbags canbe activated (depending on the severity ofthe collision):● Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac-cident.● Front side airbag on the side of the acci-dent.● Rear side airbag on the side of the acci-dent*.● Central airbag*.

In an accident with airbag activation:● the interior lights switch on (if the interiorlight switch is in the courtesy light position);● the hazard warning lights switch on;● all doors are unlocked;● the fuel supply to the engine is cut;● in hybrid vehicles, the high voltage systemis switched off;● an emergency call is started*.

Operation of the airbags

Airbag system control lamps

It lights up on the combi-instrument

Fault in the airbag system and seat belt tensioners .Have the system checked immediately by a specialisedworkshop.

It lights up on the roof console

Front passenger front airbag deactivated.Check if the airbag should be kept deactivated

It lights up on the roof console

Front passenger front airbag activated.The control lamp turns off automatically 60 secondsafter the ignition is switched on

Several warning and control lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-ed on, signalling that the function is beingverified. They will switch off after a few sec-onds.

If the airbag and seat belt tensioner systemcontrol lamp remains on or flashes, it indi-cates a malfunction in the airbag and seatbelt tensioner system ››› . Have the systemchecked immediately by a specialised work-shop.

If the front passenger airbag is deactivated,the warning lamp re-mains lit on the dash panel to remind youthat the airbag is deactivated. If, with thefront passenger airbag deactivated, this lampdoes not remain lit or if it is lit along with thecontrol lamp on the instrument panel,there is a fault in the airbag system ››› . Ifthe control lamp is flashing, there is a fault inthe disabling of the airbag system ››› . Havethe system checked immediately by a speci-alised workshop.

WARNINGIn the event of a fault in the airbag and seatbelt tensioner system, the airbags and seatbelts may not trigger correctly, may fail totrigger or may even trigger unexpectedly.● The vehicle occupants run the risk of sus-taining severe or fatal injuries. Have thesystem checked immediately by a special-ised workshop. »

25

Safety

● Do not mount a child seat in the frontpassenger seat or remove the mountedchild seat! The front passenger front airbagmay deploy during an accident in spite ofthe fault.

CAUTIONAlways pay attention to any lit controllamps and to the corresponding descrip-tions and instructions to avoid damage tothe vehicle or harm to the occupants.

Front airbags

Fig. 13 Driver airbag located in steering wheel.

Fig. 14 Front passenger airbag located in instru-ment panel.

The driver's front airbag is housed in thesteering wheel and that of the front passen-ger, on the dash panel. Airbags are identifiedby the word “AIRBAG”.

When the driver and front passenger airbagsare deployed, the covers remain attached tothe steering wheel and dashboard, respec-tively ››› Fig. 13 ››› Fig. 14 .

In conjunction with the seat belts, the frontairbag system gives the front occupants ad-ditional protection for the head and chest inthe event of a severe frontal collision ››› .

Their special design allows the controlled es-cape of the propellant gas when an occu-pant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, thehead and chest are protected by the airbag.After the collision, the airbag deflates suffi-ciently to allow visibility.

WARNING● The deployment space between the frontpassengers and the airbags must not in anycase be occupied by other passenger, petsand objects.● The airbags provide protection for justone accident; replace them once they havedeployed.● It is also important not to attach any ob-jects such as cup holders or telephonemountings to the surfaces covering the air-bag units.

26

Airbag system

Activate and deactivate front passen-ger front airbag*

Fig. 15 Switch for activating and deactivating thefront passenger airbag.

Fig. 16 On the roof console: control lamp for thedeactivation of the front passenger front airbag.

Deactivate the front passenger front airbagonly if you have to use a rear-facing childseat in the front passenger seat.

CUPRA recommends fitting the child seat inthe rear seat to avoid having to deactivatethe front passenger airbag.

When the front passenger airbag is deacti-vated, this means that only the front passen-ger front airbag is deactivated. All the otherairbags in the vehicle remain activated.

Deactivate and activate the front passen-ger front airbag● Switch the ignition off.● Open the door on the front passengerside.● Insert the key into the slot of the switch fordeactivating the front passenger airbag››› Fig. 15. About 3/4 of the key should enter;this is as far as it will go.● Turn the key gently to change its positionto (deactivate) or to (activate). If youhave difficulty, ensure that you have insertedthe key as far as it will go.● Close the front passenger door.● When deactivating the airbag, switch theignition on and check that the control lamp remains lit where it says in the roof console ››› Fig. 16 .● When reactivating the airbag, check thatwhen the ignition is switched on, the control lamp does not light up and the lamp lights up for 60 seconds and then turnsoff.

WARNING● The driver of the vehicle is responsiblefor disabling or switching on the airbag.● Always switch off the ignition before disa-bling the front passenger airbag! Failure todo so could result in a fault in the airbag de-activation system.● Never leave the key in the airbag disa-bling switch as it could get damaged or en-able or disable the airbag during driving.● If for any reason an airbag is deactivated,reactivate it as soon as possible so that itcan fulfil its protective function.

27

Safety

Knee airbag*

Fig. 17 On the driver side: location of the kneeairbag

Fig. 18 On the driver side: airbag action radius forthe knees.

The knee airbag is located on the driver sidebelow the dash panel ››› Fig. 17 . Airbags areidentified by the word “AIRBAG”.

The area framed in red (deployment area)››› Fig. 18 is covered by the knee airbag when

it is deployed. Objects should never beplaced or mounted in this area.

WARNING● The knee airbag is deployed in front ofthe driver's knees. Always keep the deploy-ment areas of the knee airbags free.● Never not fix objects to the cover or inthe deployment area of the knee airbag.● Adjust the driver's seat so that there is adistance of at least 10 cm (4 inches) be-tween your knees and the location of thethis airbag. If your physical constitutionprevents you from meeting these require-ments, make sure you contact a specialisedworkshop.

Central airbag*

Fig. 19 In the inner padding of the driver's seatbackrest: central airbag.

Fig. 20 Fully inflated central airbag (deploymentzone).

The central airbag is installed for the frontseats and is located in the inner padding ofthe driver's seat backrest.

The location of the central airbag is indica-ted by the inscription “AIRBAG” ››› Fig. 19 .

When triggered, the central airbag fills thezone marked in red (deployment zone)››› Fig. 20. For this reason, never place or fixobjects in this zone ››› .

The central airbag triggers in the case of aside collision or if the vehicle overturns*, re-ducing the risk of vehicle occupants suffer-ing injuries.

WARNINGWhen triggered, the airbag inflates at highspeed in milliseconds.● Always keep the central airbag deploy-ment zone clear.

28

Airbag system

● Never attach objects to the central airbagcover or the deployment zone.● Do not allow other people, animals or ob-jects to get between the occupants of thefront seats and the airbag deploymentzone. Make sure that all vehicle occupants,including children, follow this rule.● Never use upholstery or seat covers thathave not been explicitly authorised for theseats of the vehicle. Otherwise, the sideairbag will not be able to deploy if trig-gered.

WARNINGImproper manipulation of the driver andfront passenger seats can prevent the cen-tral airbag from operating correctly andcause serious injuries.● Never remove the front seats from thevehicle or modify their components.● If the backrest side bolsters are subjectedto a lot of force, the central airbag may nottrigger correctly,it may not trigger at all orif may trigger unexpectedly.● Have a specialised repair shop immedi-ately repair any damage to the original seatupholstery or seams in the area of the cen-tral airbag module.

Side airbags*

Fig. 21 Side airbag in driver's seat.

Fig. 22 Illustration of completely inflated side air-bags on the left side of the vehicle.

The side airbags are located in the driver'sseat and front passenger seat backrests››› Fig. 21.

The locations are identified by the text “AIR-BAG” in the upper region of the backrests.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the sideairbag system provides additional protectionfor the upper body in the event of a severeside collision ››› .

In a side collision, the side airbags reducethe risk of injury to passengers to the areasof the body facing the impact. In addition totheir normal protection, the seat belts alsohold the passengers in the event of a sidecollision; this is how these airbags providemaximum protection.

WARNING● If you do not wear a seat belt, if you leanforward, or are not seated correctly whilethe vehicle is in motion, you are at a greaterrisk of injury if the side airbag system is trig-gered in an accident.● In order for the side airbags to providetheir maximum protection, the prescribedsitting position must always be maintainedwith seat belts fastened while travelling.● In a side-on collision the side airbags willnot work if the sensors do not correctlymeasure the pressure increase on the inte-rior of the doors, due to air escapingthrough the areas with holes or openings inthe door panel.● Never drive if the interior door panelshave been removed or if the panels havenot been correctly fitted. »

29

Safety

● Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeak-ers in the door panels have been removed,unless the holes left by the loudspeakershave been closed properly.● Always check that the openings areclosed or covered if loudspeakers or otherequipment are fitted inside the door pan-els.● Occupants of the outer seats must nevercarry any objects or pets in the deploymentspace between them and the airbags, or al-low children or other passengers to travel inthis position. It is also important not to at-tach any accessories (such as cup holders)to the doors. This would impair the protec-tion offered by the side airbags.● The built-in coat hooks should be usedonly for lightweight clothing. Do not leaveany heavy or sharp-edged objects in thepockets.● Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks,must not be exerted upon the backrest bol-ster because the system may be damaged.In this case, the side airbags would not betriggered.● Under no circumstances should protec-tive covers be fitted over seats with side air-bags unless the covers have been approvedfor use in your vehicle. Because the airbagdeploys from the side of the backrest, theuse of conventional seat covers would ob-struct the side airbag, seriously reducingthe airbag's effectiveness.

● Any damage to the original seat uphols-tery or around the seams of the side airbagunits must be repaired immediately by aspecialised workshop.● The airbags provide protection for justone accident; replace them once they havedeployed.● Any work on the side airbag system or re-moval and installation of the airbag compo-nents for other repairs (such as removal ofthe front seat) should only be performed bya specialised workshop. Otherwise, faultsmay occur during the airbag system opera-tion.

Head-protection airbags*

Fig. 23 Location of head-protection airbags.

The head-protection airbags are located onboth sides in the interior above the doors

››› Fig. 23 and are identified with the text“AIRBAG”.

In combination with the seat belts, the SideCurtain Protection® airbags provide addi-tional protection for the upper part of thebody of vehicle occupants in the event of se-rious side collisions or the vehicle overturn-ing* ››› .

The area framed in red is covered by thehead-protection airbag when it is deployed››› Fig. 23 (deployment area). Therefore, ob-jects should never be placed or mounted inthis area ››› .

In the event of a side collision the head-pro-tection airbag is triggered on the impact sideof the vehicle.

The head-protection airbags reduce the riskof injury to passengers in the front and rearside seats facing the impact.

WARNING● In order for the head-protection airbagsto provide their maximum protection, theprescribed sitting position must always bemaintained with seat belts fastened whiletravelling.● For safety reasons, the head-protectionairbag must be disabled in those vehiclesfitted with a screen dividing the interior ofthe vehicle. See your technical service tomake this adjustment.

30

Transporting children safely

● There must be no other persons, animalsor objects between the occupants of theouter seats and the deployment space ofthe head-protection airbags so that thehead-protection airbag can deploy com-pletely without restriction and provide thegreatest possible protection. Therefore,sun blinds which have not been expresslyapproved for use in your vehicle may not beattached to the side windows● The built-in coat hooks should be usedonly for lightweight clothing. Do not leaveany heavy or sharp-edged objects in thepockets. Please, do not hang the clothes oncoat hangers.● The airbags provide protection for justone accident; replace them once they havedeployed.● Any work on the head-protection airbagsystem or removal and installation of theairbag components for other repairs (suchas removal of the roof lining) should only beperformed by a specialised workshop. Oth-erwise, faults may occur during the airbagsystem operation.● The side and head airbags are managedthrough sensors located in the interior ofthe front doors. To ensure the correct op-eration of the side and head-protectionairbags neither the doors nor the door pan-els should be modified in any way (e.g. fit-ting loudspeakers). If the front door is dam-aged, the airbag system may not work cor-rectly. All work carried out on the front

door must be done in a specialised work-shop.


Safety for children

Introduction

For safety reasons, as we have learned fromaccident statistics, we recommend that chil-dren under 12 years of age travel in the rearseats. Depending on their age, height andweight, children travelling in rear seats mustuse a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea-sons, the child seat should be installed in therear seat, behind the front passenger seat orin the centre back seat.

The physical laws involved and the forcesacting in a collision apply also to children››› page 18. But unlike adults, children do nothave fully developed muscle and bone struc-tures. This means that children are subject toa greater risk of injury.

To reduce the risk of injuries, children mustalways use special child restraint systemswhen travelling in the vehicle.

We recommend the use of child safety prod-ucts from the Original Accessories Pro-gramme, which includes systems for all agesmade by “Peke” (not for all countries) (seewww.seat.com). »

31

Safety

These systems have been especially de-signed and approved, complying with theECE-R44. regulation.

CUPRA recommends securing the childseats shown on the website as described be-low:

● Child seats in the opposite direction oftravel (group 0+): ISOFIX and support peg(ROMER BABY SAFE PLUS SHR II + ISOFIXBASE / PEKE G0 I-SIZE + I-SIZE BASE).● Child seats in the direction of travel (group1): ISOFIX and Top Tether (ROMER DUOPLUS + TOP TETHER / PEKE G1 TRIFIX I-SIZE).● Child seats directed towards the front ofthe vehicle (group 2): safety belt and ISOFIX(ROMER BRITAX KIDFIX2 S).● Child seats directed towards the front ofthe vehicle (group 3): safety belt (TAKATAMAXI).

Follow the manufacturer's instructions andobserve any statutory requirements when in-stalling and using child seats. Always readand note ››› page 33 .

We recommend you always carry the manu-facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to-gether with the on-board documentation.

Child seats group classification

Fig. 24 Examples of child seats.

Use only child seats that are officially ap-proved and suitable for the child.

These seats are subject to the ECE-R44 orECE-R129 standards. ECE-R stands for: Eco-nomic Commission for Europe Regulation.

Child seats by weight groupThe child seats are grouped into 5 catego-ries:

Age group Weight of the child

Group 0 Up to 10 kg

Group 0+ Up to 13 kg

Group 1 From 9 to 18 kg



Child seats that have been tested and ap-proved under the ECE R44 or ECE-R129standards bear the ECE-R44 or ECE-R129test marks on the seat (the letter E in a circlewith the test number below it).

Follow the manufacturer's instructions andobserve any statutory requirements when in-stalling and using child seats.

We recommend you to always include themanufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manualtogether with the on-board documentation.

CUPRA recommends you use child seatsfrom the Original Accessories Catalogue.These child seats have been designed andtested for use in our vehicles. You can findthe right child seat for your model and agegroup at our dealers.

Child seats by approval categoryChild seats may have the approval categoryof universal, semi-universal, vehicle specific(all according to the ECE-R44 standard) or i-Size (according to the ECE-R129 standard).

● Universal: child seats with universal appro-val can be installed in all vehicles. There is noneed to consult any list of models. In thecase of universal approval for ISOFIX, thechild seat is additionally provided with a TopTether belt.● Semi-universal: semi-universal approval,in addition to the standard requirements of

32


universal approval, requires safety devices tolock the child seat, which require additionaltesting. Child seats with semi-universal ap-proval include a list of vehicle models forwhich they can be installed.● Vehicle-specific: vehicle-specific approvalrequires a dynamic test of the child seat foreach vehicle model separately. Child seatswith vehicle-specific approval also include alist of vehicle models for which they can beinstalled.● i-Size: child seats with i-Size approval mustmeet the requirements prescribed in theECE-R 129 standard in relation to installationand safety. Child seat manufacturers can tellyou which seats have i-Size approval for thisvehicle.

Fitting and using child seats

Fig. 25 Airbag sticker: on the passenger’s sun visor

Fig. 26 Airbag sticker: on the rear frame of thepassenger side door

Warnings about fitting a child seatTake the following general warnings into ac-count if you are going to fit a child seat. Theyare valid for all child seats regardless of theirattachment system.

● Please read and follow the child seat man-ufacturer's operating instructions.● The child seat should preferably be fittedto the rear seat behind the front passengerseat so that the child can exit the vehicle onthe pavement side.● Set the height of the seat belt such that itadapts to the child seat naturally, withouttwisting. The lowest position of the seat beltheight regulator must be used with rear-fac-ing child seats.

● To correctly use a child seat in the back,the front backrest must be adjusted so thatthere is no contact with the child seat in theback in the case that it goes opposite to thedirection of the car. In the case of front fac-ing restraint systems, the front backrest mustbe adjusted so that there is no contact withthe child's feet.● For a correct assembly of the child's seaton the rear seats, adjust or dismount theheadrest, in order to prevent contact withthe seat.● If a semi-universal type chair is to be instal-led, in which the method of attachment tothe car is through the seat belt and supportbracket, it should never be installed in thecentral rear seat as the ground clearance islower than in other places and the supportbracket will not allow the seat to remain suffi-ciently stable.● When fitting a child seat on the front pas-senger seat, the seat must be moved back-wards as far as possible and placed in the »

33

Safety

highest position. The backrest must also beput in a vertical position1).

Important information about the frontpassenger front airbagA sticker with important information aboutthe passenger airbag is located on the pas-senger's sun visor and/or on the passengerside door frame ››› Fig. 25 .

Read and always observe the safety informa-tion included in the following chapters:

● Safety distance with respect to the passen-ger airbag ››› page 23 .● Objects between the passenger and thepassenger side airbag ››› in Front airbagson page 26.

The passenger side front airbag, when ena-bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facingbackward since the airbag can strike the seatwith such force that it can cause serious orfatal injuries. Children up to 12 years oldshould always travel on the rear seat.

Therefore we strongly recommend you totransport children on the rear seats. This isthe safest location in the vehicle. Alterna-tively, the front passenger airbag can be dis-

abled with a key-operated switch ››› page 27 .When transporting children, use a child seatsuitable for the age and size of each child››› page 32.

WARNING● If a child seat is secured to the front pas-senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain-ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of anaccident increases.● An inflating front passenger airbag canstrike the rear-facing child seat and projectit with great force against the door, the roofor the backrest.● Never install a child seat facing back-wards on the front passenger seat unlessthe front passenger front airbag has beendisabled. Risk of potentially fatal injuries tothe child! However, if necessary, the frontpassenger front airbag must be deactivated››› page 27. If the passenger seat has aheight adjustment option, move it to thehighest, most upright position. If you have afixed seat, do not install any child restraintsystem in this location.● For those vehicles that do not include akey lock switch to deactivate the airbag, thevehicle must be taken to a technical serv-ice. Do not forget to reconnect the airbag

when an adult wants to sit in the front pas-senger seat.● Never allow a child to be transported in avehicle without being properly secured, orto stand up or kneel on a seat while travel-ling. In an accident, the child could be flungthrough the vehicle, causing possibly fatalinjuries to themselves and to the other ve-hicle occupants.● Never leave a child alone in the child seator in the vehicle.● Children who are less than 1.5 metres tallmust not wear a normal seat belt without achild seat, as this could cause injuries to theabdominal and neck areas during a suddenbraking manoeuvre or in an accident.● When a child seat is mounted in the rearseats, the door child-proof lock should beactivated ››› page 101 .

Attachment systems

Depending on the country, different attach-ment systems are used for safely installingchild seats.

1) Compliance with current national legislationand the manufacturer's instructions is requiredwhen using or installing child seats.

34


Attachment systems overview● ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a standardised attach-ment system allowing quick and safe attach-ment of child seats in the vehicle. ISOFIX at-tachment establishes a rigid connection be-tween the child seat and the car body.

The child seat has two rigid attachment clips,called connectors. These connectors are fit-ted into the ISOFIX attachment rings foundbetween the seat cushion and the backrestof the vehicle's back seat (on the sides). ISO-FIX attachment systems are used mainly inEurope ››› page 36 . If necessary, ISOFIX at-tachment may have to be supplementedwith a Top Tether belt or a support bracket.

● Automatic three-point seat belt. When-ever possible, it is preferable to attach thechild seats with the ISOFIX system ratherthan attaching them with an automaticthree-point seat belt ››› page 40 .

Additional attachment:

● Top Tether: the Top Tether belt is guidedover the back of the rear seat and attachedto an anchor point with a hook. Anchorpoints are located at the back of the rearseat backrest on the boot side ››› page 38 .The rings for retaining the Top Tether beltare marked with an anchor symbol.● Support bracket: some child seats rest onthe floor of the vehicle with a support brack-et. The support bracket prevents the childseat from tipping forward in the event of im-pact. Child seats fitted with a support brack-et should only be used in the passenger seatand side rear seats ››› . For the assembly ofthis type of seat you should also consult thelist of approved vehicles for this assembly,available in the instructions for child restraintsystems.

Recommended systems for attaching childseatsCUPRA recommends attaching child seats asfollows:

● Baby carriers or child seats in the oppo-site direction of travel: ISOFIX and supportbracket or i-Size.● Child seats in the direction of travel: ISO-FIX and Top Tether.

WARNINGIncorrect use of the support bracket cancause serious or fatal injury.● Make sure the support bracket is correct-ly and safely installed.

35

Safety

Fit a child seat with the ISOFIX / i-Size and Top Tether system

Fig. 27 Rear seat: die cut slots to access the ISO-FIX / iSize securing rings.

Fig. 28 Front passenger seat: ISOFIX/i-Size secur-ing rings.

Child seats can be secured quickly, easilyand safely on the rear side seats with the“ISOFIX” and Top Tether system.

Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted oneach rear side seat. In some vehicles, the

rings are secured to the seat frame and, inothers, they are secured to the rear floor.The “ISOFIX” rings are located between therear seat backrest and the seat cushioning››› Fig. 27. The Top Tether rings are locatedon the rear part of the backrests of the rear

seats (behind the seat backrest or in theboot) ››› page 38 .

To understand the compatibility of the “ISO-FIX” systems in the vehicle, check the tablebelow.

36


Vehicle ISOFIX positions

Weight group Size classa) Electricalequipment

Front passenger seatRear side seat Rear central seat

airbag enabled airbag disabled

Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X IL IL X

Group 0+ to 13 kg

E ISO/R1 X IL IL X

D ISO/R2 X IL IL X

C ISO/R3 X IL IL X

Group I 9 to 18 kg

D ISO/R2 X IL IL X

C ISO/R3 X IL IL X

B ISO/F2 X IL, IUF IL, IUF X

B1 ISO/F2X X IL, IUF IL, IUF X

A ISO/F3 X IL, IUF IL, IUF X

Group II 15 to 25 kg --- --- X IL IL X

Group III 22 to 36 kg --- --- X IL IL X

IUF: Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX universal child restraint systems approved for use in this weight group.IL: It is suitable for certain ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) that can be for the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. Take the child seat manufacturer's vehiclelist into account.X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this weight group or size class.

a) The indication of class according to size corresponds to the authorised bodyweight for the child seat. In child seats with universal or semi-universal approval, the classaccording to size is indicated on the ECE approval label. The indication of class according to size is stated on the corresponding child seat. »

37

Safety

Vehicle i-Size positions

Front passenger seatRear side seat Rear central seat

airbag enabled airbag disabled

X i-U i-U X

i-U: Position suitable for forward- or rear-facing i-Size child restraint systems with universal certification.X: Position not suitable for i-Size child restraint systems.

Securing the child seat with the “ISOFIX/i-Size” systemYou must follow the child seat manufactur-er's instructions.

● Open the cut-out section behind themarked grooves to access the retaining rings››› Fig. 27.● Press the child seat onto the “ISO-FIX/iSize” retaining rings until it is heard toengage securely. If the child seat is equippedwith Top Tether anchor points, secure it tothe correspondent ring ››› page 38 . Followthe child seat manufacturer’s instructions.● Pull on both sides of the child seat to en-sure that it is properly anchored.

Child seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tetherattachment system are available from Tech-nical Services.

WARNINGThe retaining rings are designed only foruse with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether systemchild seats.● Never secure other child seats that donot have the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether sys-tem, or retaining belts or objects to the fas-tening rings – this can result in potentiallyfatal injuries to the child.● Ensure that the child seat is secured cor-rectly using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tethersecuring rings.

Top Tether securing belts

Fig. 29 Rear seats: adjustment and assembly ac-cording to the Top Tether belt.

38


Fig. 30 Front passenger seat: adjustment and as-sembly according to the Top Tether belt.

Child seats with the Top Tether system comewith a strap for securing the seat to the vehi-

cle anchor point, located at the back of therear seat backrest and provide greater re-straint.

The objective of this strap is to reduce for-ward movements of the child seat in a crash,to reduce the risk of injuries to the head fromhitting the inside of the vehicle.

Using the Top Tether in rear-facing moun-ted seatsCurrently, there are very few rear-facingchild safety seats that have Top Tether.Please carefully read and follow the seatmanufacturer instructions to learn the prop-er way to install the Top Tether strap.

Securing the retainer strap● Follow the manufacturer's instructions todeploy the child seat Top Tether retainingstrap.● Position the belt under the headrest (de-pending on the instructions of the seat itself,

lift or remove the headrest if necessary)››› Fig. 29 /, ››› Fig. 30 /.● Slide the strap and secure it properly withthe anchorage of the backrest ››› Fig. 29 ,››› Fig. 30 .● Firmly tighten the strap following the man-ufacturer's instructions.

Releasing the retaining strap● Loosen the strap following the manufac-turer's instructions.● Push the lock and release it from the an-choring support.

WARNINGAn undue installation of the safety seat willincrease the risk of injury in the event of acrash.● Never tie the retainer strap to a hook inthe luggage compartment.● Never secure or tie luggage or otheritems to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) orthe upper ones (Top Tether).

39

Safety

Fitting a child seat using the seat belt

Fig. 31 On the rear seats: installing the child seat.

If you want to fit a universal approval catego-ry (U) child seat in your vehicle, you mustcheck that the seat is approved for your ve-hicle. You will find any necessary informationon the child seat’s orange ECE approval la-bel. The following table shows the differentfitting options.

Weight groupFront passenger seata)

Rear side seat Rear central seatb)

Airbag activated airbag disabledc)

Group 0 to 10 kg X U U U

Group 0+ to 13 kg X U U U

Group I 9 to 18 kg X U U U

Group II 15 to 25 kg X UF UF UF

Group III 22 to 36 kg X UF UF UF

X: Not compatible for the installation of seats install chairs in this configuration.U: Suitable for universal restraint systems for use in this weight group.UF: Acceptable for front-facing universal-category child restraint systems approved for this mass group.

a) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats.b) For semi-universal chairs where the securing system is the car safety belt and the support bracket, do not use them in the centre rear seat.c) Seats without height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost position. Seats with height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost and highest position.

40


Fitting a child seat using the seat belt● Set the height of the seat belt such that itadapts to the child seat naturally, withouttwisting. The lowest position of the seat beltheight regulator must be used with rear-fac-ing child seats.● Put the seat belt in place and pass itthrough the child seat according to the in-structions of the child seat manufacturer.● Make sure that the seat belt is not twisted.● Insert the latch plate into the seat's buckleuntil you hear the engagement click.

WARNINGWhen travelling, children must be securedin the vehicle with a restraint system suita-ble for age, weight and size.● Read and always observe information andwarnings concerning the use of child seats››› page 33.

41

Emergencies

Emergencies

Self-help

Information, assistance andemergency call service*

How it works

Fig. 32 On the roof console: voice service con-trols

Depending on the equipment, there is acontrol on the roof console.

By pressing the buttons , and ››› Fig. 32, you can run the following voiceservices:

● information call● assistance call● emergency call service.

A built-in control unit establishes the con-nection.

When a voice service is activated, a connec-tion is established with a phone line.

Control lampThe control has a warning lamp ››› Fig. 32(arrow). It shows the following statuses:

● Off: the eCall service is not available.● Flashes red, approx. 20 seconds afterswitching on the ignition: the eCall serviceis off.● Lights up red: system failure. The eCallservice is available with certain restrictions.CUPRA suggests going to a specialised work-shop.● Lights up green: the eCall service is availa-ble. The system works correctly.● Flashes green: There is an ongoing voiceconnection.

Information call1)

With the information call, a call is made toSEAT, S.A. customer service.

Breakdown call1)

With the assistance call you can directly re-quest specialised help in the event of abreakdown.

Parallel to the voice call, some vehicle data istransmitted, e.g. your current location.

Emergency call service1)

If an emergency call is conducted manuallyor activated automatically in the event of anaccident with an airbag triggering, informa-tion relevant to the emergency is broadcast,e.g. the current location of the vehicle››› page 324.

If the call is public, the person on the otherend of the line uses the language of thecountry in which you are located.

If the call is private, the person on the otherend of the line will assist you in the languageyou have configured in the Infotainment sys-tem. If the configured language is not availa-ble, English will be used.

Diversion to 112 emergency numberIn some situations where the emergency callservice is limited or cannot be carried out, anemergency call is made to 112.

1) Only available in certain countries.42

Self-help

The following conditions may cause theemergency call service to function in a limi-ted manner or the call to be diverted to the112 emergency number:

● The emergency call is made from an areawith weak or no mobile and GPS signal, aswell as e.g. tunnels, between very tall build-ings, garages, underground walkways, moun-tains and valleys.● In areas with sufficient mobile telephoneand GPS coverage, the mobile telephonenetwork of the telecommunications opera-tor in question may not be available.● In some countries, the emergency callservice may not be available due to legal rea-sons. There is no valid license for the use ofthe emergency call service.● The components of the vehicle requiredfor the emergency phone call are damagedor do not get enough power.● In some countries, the emergency callservice may not be available and dependingon the location of the vehicle, the controllamp LEDs, and even the operation of thedifferent types of calls, could have a specificbehaviour.

NoteBreakdown service and information callscan incur an additional cost on your tele-phone bill.

Emergency equipment

Vehicle tool kit

Fig. 33 Underneath the floor panel of the luggagecompartment: vehicle tool kit.

The vehicle tool kit is located under the floorpanel in the luggage compartment. To ac-cess the vehicle tools ››› page 131 .

The tool kit includes:

Adapter for the anti-theft bolt*Towing eye, removableWheel spanner*Crank handle for jackJack*Hook for extracting the central wheeltrims*Clip for removing the wheel bolt caps

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Some of the items listed are only provided incertain model versions, or are optional ex-tras.

WARNINGWhen the vehicle tool kit, tyre mobility setand spare wheel are loose in the interiorthey can be violently thrown in case of asudden manoeuvre or braking and espe-cially in accidents, causing serious injury.● Ensure that the vehicle tool kit, the tyremobility set and the spare wheel or tempo-rary spare wheel are safely secured in theluggage compartment.

WARNINGUnsuitable or damaged vehicle tools cancause injury or accidents.● Never work with inappropriate or dam-aged tools.

NoteThe jack does not generally require anymaintenance. If required, it should begreased using universal type grease.

43

Emergencies

Tyre repairs

TMS (Tyre Mobility System)*

The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System)will reliably seal punctures caused by thepenetration of a foreign body of up to about4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreignobjects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.

After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre,you must again check the tyre pressureabout 10 minutes after starting the engine.

You should only use the tyre mobility set ifthe vehicle is parked in a safe place, you arefamiliar with the procedure and you have thenecessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, youshould seek professional assistance.

Do not use the tyre sealant in the followingcases:● If the wheel rim has been damaged.● In outside temperatures below -20°C(-4°F).● In the event of cuts or perforations in thetyre greater than 4 mm.● If you have been driving with very low pres-sure or a completely flat tyre.● If the sealant bottle has passed its use bydate.

WARNINGUsing the tyre mobility system can be dan-gerous, especially when filling the tyre atthe roadside. Please observe the followingrules to minimise the risk of injury:● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-ble. Park it at a safe distance from sur-rounding traffic to fill the tyre.● Ensure the ground on which you park isflat and solid.● All passengers and particularly childrenmust keep a safe distance from the workarea.● Turn on the hazard warning lights to warnother road users.● Use the tyre mobility system only if youare familiar with the necessary procedures.Otherwise, you should seek professionalassistance.● The tyre mobility set is intended for tem-porary emergency use only until you canreach the nearest specialised workshop.● Replace the repaired tyre with the tyremobility set as soon as possible.● The sealant is a health hazard and mustbe cleaned immediately if it comes intocontact with the skin.● Always keep the tyre mobility set out ofthe reach of small children.● Always switch off the engine, activate theelectronic parking brake and place the se-

lector lever in P to reduce the risk of acci-dental vehicle movement.

WARNINGA tyre filled with sealant does not have thesame performance properties as a conven-tional tyre.● Never drive faster than 80 km/h(50 mph).● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard brakingand fast cornering.● Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximumspeed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then checkthe tyre.

For the sake of the environmentDispose of used or expired sealant observ-ing any legal requirements.

NoteYou can purchase a new bottle of tyre seal-ant in specialised CUPRA dealers or anySEAT dealership.

NoteTake into account the separate instructionmanual of the tyre mobility set* manufac-turer.

44

Self-help

Anti-puncture kit contents*

Fig. 34 Standard representation: anti-puncture kitcontents.

The anti-puncture kit is located underneaththe floor covering in the luggage compart-ment. It includes the following components››› Fig. 34:

Valve insert removerA sticker to be adhered to the instrumentcluster, within the driver's visual field, toremind that the maximum advisablespeed “max. 80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph”Filler tube with capAir compressor (depending on the ver-sion, the model may vary).ON/OFF switch

1

2

3

4

5

Air bleed screw (it can also be integratedin the inflator tube).Warning provided by tyre pressure moni-toring system (it can also be integrated inthe inflator tube).Tube for inflating tyres12 volt connectorBottle of sealantSpare tyre valve

The valve insert remover 1 has a gap at thelower end for a valve insert. The valve insertcan only be screwed or unscrewed in thisway. This also applies to its replacement part11 .

Sealing and inflating a tyre

Sealing the tyre● Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Usethe ››› Fig. 34 1 tool to remove the insert.Place it on a clean surface.● Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously››› Fig. 34 10 .● Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 34 3 intothe sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will breakautomatically.● Remove the lid from the filling tube››› Fig. 34 3 and screw the open end of thetube into the tyre valve.

6

7

8

9

10

11

● With the bottle upside down, empty all ofthe contents into the tyre.● Remove the bottle from the valve.● Place the insert back into the tyre valve us-ing the tool ››› Fig. 34 1 .

Inflating the tyre● Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube››› Fig. 34 8 into the tyre valve.● Check that the air bleed screw is closed››› Fig. 34 6 .● Start the engine and leave it running.● Insert the connector ››› Fig. 34 9 into thevehicle's 12-volt socket ››› page 141 .● Turn the air compressor on with theON/OFF switch ››› Fig. 34 5 .● Keep the air compressor running until itreaches 2.0 to 2.5 bar(29-36 psi/200-250 kPa). A maximum of 8minutes.● Disconnect the air compressor.● If it does not reach the pressure indicated,unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve.● Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant isdistributed throughout the tyre.● Screw the compressor tyre inflator into thevalve.● Repeat the inflation process.● If the indicated pressure still cannot bereached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop »

45

Emergencies

and request assistance from an authorisedtechnician.● Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrewthe tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve.● When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding80 km/h (50 mph).● Attach the sticker ››› Fig. 34 2 to the in-strument cluster, within the driver's visualfield.● Check the pressure again after 10 minutes››› page 46.

WARNINGWhen inflating the wheel, the air compres-sor and the inflator tube may become hot.● Protect hands and skin from hot parts.● Do not place the hot flexible inflator tubeor hot air compressor on flammable mate-rial.● Allow them to cool before storing the de-vice.● If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to atleast 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre istoo badly damaged. The sealant is not in agood condition to seal the tyre. Do not con-tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.

CAUTIONSwitch off the air compressor after a maxi-mum of 8 operational minutes to avoid

overheating! Before switching on the aircompressor again, let it cool for several mi-nutes.

Check after 10 minutes of driving

Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 34 5 againand check the pressure on the gauge 6 .

1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower:● Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot besealed sufficiently with the tyre mobility set.● You should obtain professional assistance››› .

1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher:● Set the tyre pressure to the correct valueagain.● Carefully resume your journey until youreach the nearest specialised workshopwithout exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).● Have the damaged tyre replaced.

WARNINGDriving with an unsealed tyre is dangerousand can cause accidents and serious injury.● Do not continue driving if the tyre pres-sure is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower.● Seek specialist assistance.

Changing a wheel

What to do first

● Park the vehicle on a horizontal surfaceand in a safe place as far away from traffic aspossible.● Apply the electronic parking brake.● Switch on the hazard warning lights.● Move the selector lever to the P position.● If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it fromyour vehicle.● Have the vehicle tool kit ››› page 43 andthe spare wheel* ready ››› page 311 .● Observe the applicable legislation for eachcountry (reflective vest, warning triangles,etc.).● All occupants should leave the vehicle andwait in a safe place (for instance behind theroadside crash barrier).

WARNING● Always observe the above steps and pro-tect yourself and other road users.● If you change the wheel on a slope, blockthe wheel on the opposite side of the carwith a stone or similar to prevent the vehi-cle from moving.

46

Self-help

Wheel bolt caps

Fig. 35 Wheel: wheel nuts with caps.

Removal● Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools››› Fig. 33 )over the cap until it clicks into place››› Fig. 35.● Remove the cap with the plastic clip.

The caps protect the wheel nuts and shouldbe remounted after changing the tyre.

The anti-theft wheel locking bolt has aspecial cap. This only fits on anti-theft lock-ing bolts and is not for use with standardwheel nuts.

Anti-theft wheel nuts*

Fig. 36 Anti-theft wheel bolt with cap and adapt-er.

Loosening the anti-theft wheel bolt● Remove the wheel cover* or the cap*.● Insert the special adapter ››› Fig. 36 1 (ve-hicle tools ››› page 43 ) onto the anti-theftwheel bolt and push it on as far as it will go.● Insert the wheel brace (vehicle tools) ontothe adapter as far as it will go.● Remove the wheel bolt ››› page 47 .

NoteMake a note of the code number of the an-ti-theft wheel bolt and keep it in a safeplace, but not in your vehicle. If you need anew adapter, you can obtain it from thespecialised CUPRA service or the SEAT Of-ficial Service, indicating the code number.

Loosening wheel nuts

Fig. 37 Wheel change: loosen the wheel nuts.

Use only the wheel wrench belonging to thecar to loosen the wheel nuts.

Loosen the wheel nuts only about one turnbefore raising the vehicle with the jack.

If the wheel bolt is very tight, carefully pushon the end of the wheel wrench with yourfoot. Hold on to the vehicle for support andtake care not to slip during this operation.

Loosening wheel nuts● Fit the wheel wrench on as far as it will go››› Fig. 37.● Hold the wrench at the end and rotate thebolt approximately one turn anticlock-wise ››› . »

47

Emergencies

Important information about wheel nutsFactory-fitted rims and wheel nuts are spe-cially matched during construction. There-fore, if different rims are fitted, the correctwheel nuts with the right length and headsmust be used. This ensures that wheels arefitted securely and that the brake systemfunctions correctly.

In certain circumstances, you should noteven use wheel nuts from vehicles of thesame model.

WARNINGIf the wheel nuts are not properly tight-ened, they could come loose while drivingand cause an accident, serious injury andloss of vehicle control.● Use only wheel nuts which correspond tothe rim in question.● Never use different wheel nuts.● Wheel nuts and threads should be clean,free of oil and grease, and it should be pos-sible to screw them easily.● To loosen and tighten wheel nuts, onlyuse the wheel wrench that came with thecar from the factory.● The wheel nuts should only be loosenedslightly (about one turn) before raising thevehicle with the jack. Risk of accident!● Never apply grease or oil to wheel nuts orto the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts

have been tightened to the prescribed tor-que, they could come loose while driving.● Never loosen the screwed joints of wheelrims with bolted ring trims.● If wheel nuts are tightened below theprescribed torque, the bolts and rims couldcome loose while driving. If tightening tor-que is too high, the wheel nuts or threadscan be damaged.

Raise the vehicle

Fig. 38 Jack position points.

Fig. 39 Cross member: positioning the jack on thevehicle.

● Place the jack* (vehicle tools) on firmground. If necessary use a large, strongboard or similar support. If the surface is slip-pery (for example tiles) place the jack on arubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip-ping ››› .● Find the support point on the strut (sunkenarea) closest to the wheel to be changed››› Fig. 38.● Turn the jack* crank handle, located belowthe strut support point, to raise it until thetab 1 ››› Fig. 39 is below the housing provi-ded.● Align the jack* so that tab 1 “grips” ontothe housing provided on the strut and themobile base 2 is resting on the ground. Thebase plate 2 should fall vertically with re-spect to the support point 1 .● Continue turning the jack* until the wheelis slightly lifted off the ground.

48

Self-help

WARNINGThe factory-supplied jack* is only designedfor changing wheels on this model. On noaccount attempt to use it for lifting heaviervehicles or other loads. Risk of injury.● Make sure that the jack* remains stable.If the surface is slippery or soft, the jack*could slip or sink, respectively, with the re-sultant risk of injury.● Only raise the vehicle with the jack* sup-plied by the manufacturer. Other jacks,even those approved for other CUPRAmodels could slip, with the consequent riskof injury.● Only mount the jack* on the supportpoints designed for this purpose on thestrut, and always align the jack correctly. Ifyou do not, the jack* could slip as it doesnot have an adequate grip on the vehicle:risk of injury!● You should never place a body limb suchas an arm or leg under a raised vehicle thatis solely supported by the jack.● If you have to work underneath the vehi-cle, you must use suitable stands addition-ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk ofaccident!.● Never raise the vehicle if it is tilting to oneside or the engine is running.● Never start the engine when the vehicle israised. The vehicle may come loose fromthe jack due to the engine vibrations.

CAUTIONThe vehicle must not be raised on thecrossbar. Only place the jack* on the pointsdesigned for this purpose on the strut. Oth-erwise, the vehicle may be damaged.

Removing and installing a wheel

Change the wheel after loosening the wheelnuts and raising the vehicle with the jack.

When removing/fitting the wheel, the rimmay hit and damage the brake disc. For thisreason, please take care and get a secondperson to assist you.

Taking off the wheel● Unscrew the wheel nuts using the boxspanner and place them on a clean surface.● Take off the wheel.

Putting on the spare wheelCheck the direction of rotation of the tyre››› page 49.

● Place the spare wheel or temporary sparewheel into position.● Screw on the wheel nuts in position andtighten them loosely with a box spanner.● To tighten the anti-theft locking wheelnuts use the corresponding adaptor.

● Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*.● Use the wheel spanner to tighten all of thewheel nuts clockwise. Tighten the bolts in di-agonal pairs (not in a circle).● Put the caps, trim or full hubcap back on.

The wheel nuts should be clean and turneasily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspectthe wheel condition and hub mounting sur-faces. These surfaces must be clean beforefitting the wheel.

Tightening torque of the wheel nutsThe prescribed tightening torque for wheelnuts for steel and alloy wheels is 140 Nm. Af-ter changing a wheel, have the tighteningtorque checked immediately with a torquewrench that is working perfectly.

Before checking tightening torque, haveany rusty wheel nuts that are difficult toscrew replaced and clean the wheel hubthreads.

Never apply grease or oil to wheel nuts or tothe wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts havebeen tightened to the prescribed torque,they could come loose while driving.

Tyres with directional tread pattern

Tyres with directional tread pattern havebeen designed to operate best when »

49

Emergencies

rotating in only one direction. An arrow onthe tyre sidewall indicates the direction of ro-tation on tyres with directional tread. Alwaysobserve the indicated direction of rotation inorder to guarantee optimum grip and helpavoid aquaplaning, excessive noise andwear.

If the tyre is mounted in the opposite direc-tion of rotation, drive with extreme caution,as the tyre is no longer being used correctly.This is of particular importance when theroad surface is wet. Change the tyre as soonas possible or remount it with the correct di-rection of rotation.

Works after changing a wheel

● Replace the wheel bolt caps.● Return all tools to their proper storing loca-tion.● If the replaced wheel does not fit in thespare wheel housing, store it safely in theluggage compartment ››› page 130 .● Check the tyre pressure of the newlymounted tyre as soon as possible.● In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indi-cator, adjust the pressure and store it inmemory ››› page 309 .● Have the tightening torque of the wheelnuts checked as soon as possible with a tor-

que wrench ››› page 49 . Meanwhile, drivecarefully.● Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly aspossible.

Changing the windscreen wiperblades

Wiper service position

Fig. 40 Wipers in service position.

Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.

The wiper arms can be raised when the wip-ers are in service position ››› Fig. 40 .

● Close the bonnet ››› page 289 .● Switch the ignition on and off.● Press the windscreen wiper lever down-wards briefly ››› page 119 4 .

Before driving, always lower the wiper arms.Using the windscreen wiper lever, the wind-screen wiper arms return to their initial posi-tion.

Note● The windscreen wiper arms can bemoved to the service position only whenthe bonnet is properly closed.● You can also use the service position, forexample, if you want to fix a cover over thewindscreen in the winter to keep it clear ofice.

Changing the wiper rear wiper blades

Fig. 41 Changing the windscreen wiper blades

The windscreen wiper blades are supplied asstandard with a layer of graphite. This layer isresponsible for ensuring that the wipe is si-lent. If the graphite layer is damaged, the

50

Self-help

noise of the water as it is wiped across thewindscreen will be louder.

Check the condition of the wiper blades reg-ularly. If the wipers scrape across the glass,they should be changed if they are damaged,or cleaned if they are dirty ››› .

If this does not produce the desired results,the setting angle of the windscreen wiperarms might be incorrect. They should bechecked by a specialised workshop and cor-rected if necessary.

Damaged windscreen wiper blades shouldbe replaced immediately. These are availablefrom qualified workshops.

Raising and lowering windscreen wiperarms● Place the windscreen wipers in the serviceposition ››› page 50 .● Grip the wiper arms only by the blade's fas-tening point.

Cleaning windscreen wiper blades● Raise the wiper arms.● Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirtfrom the windscreen wiper blades.● If the blades are very dirty, a sponge ordamp cloth may be used ››› .

Changing the windscreen wiper blades● Lift and unfold the wiper arms.● Press and hold release button ››› Fig. 41 1and pull gently on the wiper blade in the di-rection of the arrow.● Fit a new wiper blade of the same lengthand design on to the wiper arm and hook itinto place.● Rest the wiper arms back onto the wind-screen.

Changing the rear window wiper blade● Separate the wiper arm from the rear win-dow.● Remove the blade from the holder belowthe centre. During this operation, hold thewiper arm firmly.● Fit the new blade (of the same length andtype) into the housing of the wipe arm bypressing it in place. When doing so, hold thewiper arm by the upper end.● Fold the wiper arm and rest it on the win-dow.

WARNINGWorn or dirty windscreen wiper blades re-duce visibility and increase the risk of acci-dent and serious injury.● Always replace damaged or worn wind-screen wiper blades or blades that no lon-ger clean the windscreen properly.

CAUTION● Damaged or dirty windscreen wiperscould scratch the glass.● If products containing solvents, roughsponges or sharp objects are used to cleanthe blades, the graphite layer will be dam-aged.● Never use fuel, nail varnish remover,paint thinner or similar products to cleanthe windows.● In icy conditions, always check that thewiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-fore using the wipers. In cold weather, itmay help to leave the vehicle parked withthe wipers in service position ››› page 50 .

CAUTION● To prevent damage to the bonnet and thewiper arms, only leave them in the serviceposition.● Before driving, always lower the wiperarms.

Jump start

Jump leads

The jump lead must have a sufficient wirecross section. »

51

Emergencies

If the engine fails to start because of a dis-charged battery, the battery can be connec-ted to the battery of another vehicle to startthe engine.

Jump leads must comply with standard DIN72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc-tions). The wire cross section must be atleast 25 mm2 for petrol engines and at least35 mm2 for diesel engines.

Note● The vehicles must not touch each other,otherwise electricity could flow as soon asthe positive terminals are connected.● The discharged battery must be properlyconnected to the on-board network.

Jump start: description

Fig. 42 Diagram of connections for vehicles withStart-Stop system.

Jump lead terminal connectionsSwitch off the ignition of both vehicles››› .Connect one end of the red jump leadto the positive + terminal of the vehiclewith the flat battery A .Connect the other end of the red jumplead to the positive terminal + in thevehicle providing assistance B .Connect one end of the black jump leadC to a suitable ground terminal, to a

solid piece of metal in the engine block,or to the engine block itself.Connect the other end of the blackjump lead D to a solid metal compo-nent bolted to the engine block or tothe engine block itself of the vehiclewith the flat battery. Do not connect itto a point near the battery.Position the leads in such a way thatthey cannot come into contact with anymoving parts in the engine compart-ment.

StartingStart the engine of the vehicle with theboosting battery and let it run at idlingspeed.Start the engine of the vehicle with theflat battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutesuntil the engine is running.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Removing the jump leadsBefore you remove the jump leads,switch off the dipped beam headlights ifthey are switched on.Turn on the heater blower and heatedrear window in the vehicle with the flatbattery. This helps minimise voltagepeaks which are generated when theleads are disconnected.When the engine is running, disconnectthe leads in reverse order to the detailsgiven above.

Make sure the battery clamps have sufficientmetal-to-metal contact with the battery ter-minals.

If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec-onds, switch off the starter and try again af-ter about 1 minute.

WARNING● Please note the safety warnings referringto working in the engine compartment››› page 289.● The battery providing assistance musthave the same voltage as the flat battery(12V) and approximately the same capacity(see imprint on battery). Failure to complycould result in an explosion.● Never use jump leads when one of thebatteries is frozen. Danger of explosion!Even after the battery has thawed, battery

9.

10.

11.

52

Self-help

acid could leak and cause chemical burns.If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.● Keep sparks, flames and lighted ciga-rettes away from batteries, danger of ex-plosion. Failure to comply could result in anexplosion.● Observe the instructions provided by themanufacturer of the jump leads.● Do not connect the negative cable fromthe other vehicle directly to the negativeterminal of the flat battery. The gas emittedfrom the battery could be ignited by sparks.Danger of explosion.● Never attach the negative cable to fuelsystem components or the brake lines inthe other vehicle.● The non-insulated parts of the batteryclamps must not be allowed to touch. Thejump lead attached to the positive batteryterminal must not touch metal parts of thevehicle, this can cause a short circuit.● Position the leads in such a way that theycannot come into contact with any movingparts in the engine compartment.● Do not lean on the batteries. This couldresult in chemical burns.

NoteThe vehicles must not touch each other,otherwise electricity could flow as soon asthe positive terminals are connected.

Tow start and towing

Introduction

Tow-starting means starting the engine ofthe vehicle while another pulls it.

Towing means one vehicle pulling anotherthat is not roadworthy.

Always consider the legal provisions relatingto tow-starting and towing.

For technical reasons, towing a vehiclewith a discharged battery is not allowed.The jump start should be used instead››› page 51.

If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Accesssystem, towing is only allowed with the igni-tion on!

The vehicle battery drains if the vehicle istowed with the engine switched off and theignition connected. Depending on the bat-tery charge status, the drop in voltage maybe so large, even after just a few minutes,that no electrical device in the vehicle maywork e.g. the hazard warning lights. In vehi-cles with the Keyless Access system, thesteering wheel could lock ››› .

WARNINGA vehicle with no power should never betowed.

● During towing, never switch off the igni-tion using the start button. Otherwise, theelectronic lock of the steering columncould suddenly become blocked and itwould be impossible to steer the vehicle.This could cause an accident, serious injuryand loss of control of the vehicle.● If during towing the vehicle runs out ofpower, stop towing immediately and re-quest the assistance of specialist person-nel.

WARNINGVehicle handling and braking capacitychange considerably during towing. Pleaseobserve the following instructions to mini-mise the risk of serious accidents and in-jury:● As the driver of the vehicle being towed:– You should depress the brake much

harder as the brake servo does not op-erate. Pay the utmost attention to avoidcrashing into the towing vehicle.

– More strength is required at the steer-ing wheel as the power steering doesnot operate when the engine is switch-ed off.

● As the driver of the towing vehicle:– Accelerate with particular care and

caution.– Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. »

53

Emergencies

– Brake earlier than usual and moresmoothly.

CAUTION● To avoid damaging the vehicle, for exam-ple the paint, remove and replace the lidand towing eye carefully.● Unburnt fuel could enter the catalyticconverter and damage it during towing.

Instructions for tow-starting

Vehicle's should not generally be tow-star-ted. The jump start should be used instead››› page 51.

For technical reasons, towing the followingvehicles is not allowed:

● Vehicles with an automatic gearbox.● If the vehicle battery is discharged, be-cause in vehicles with the Keyless Accesslocking and ignition system the steering re-mains locked and the electronic parkingbrake cannot be deactivated nor can theelectronic lock of the steering column be re-leased if they are activated.● If the battery is flat, it is possible that theengine control units may not operate cor-rectly.

CAUTIONWhen tow-starting, unburnt fuel could en-ter the catalytic converter and damage it.

NoteThe vehicle can only be tow-started if theelectronic parking brake and, if appropri-ate, the electronic lock of the steering col-umn are deactivated. If the vehicle has nopower supply or there is an electric systemfault, the engine must be tow-started todeactivate the electronic parking brake andthe electronic lock of the steering column.

Towing instructions

Towing requires some expertise and experi-ence, especially when using a tow rope. Bothdrivers should be familiar with the difficultiesinvolved in towing. For this reason, inexper-ienced drivers should abstain from towing.

During towing, it should be ensured that noimpermissible tractive forces or shocks aregenerated. When towing on an unpavedroad, there is always a risk of overloading anddamaging the anchorage points.

During towing, the towing vehicle can signalthe change of direction even with the hazardwarning lights turned on. To do so, at thesame time, the turn signal lever must be op-erated with ignition switched on. Meanwhile,

the hazard warning lights will go off. Whenthe turn signal lever is returned to the restposition, the hazard warning lights will be au-tomatically reactivated.

Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle● Leave the ignition on, so that the steeringis not blocked, and the electronic parkingbrake may be deactivated and the turn sig-nals and wash/wipe operated.● More strength is required at the steeringwheel as the power steering does not oper-ate when the engine is switched off.● You should depress the brake much harderas the brake servo does not operate. Avoidhitting the towing vehicle.● Bear in mind the information and instruc-tions in the manual of the vehicle to be tow-ed.

Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle● Accelerate with particular care and cau-tion. Avoid sharp manoeuvres.● Brake earlier than usual and smoothly.● Bear in mind the information and instruc-tions in the manual of the towed vehicle.

Tow rope or tow barIt is safer for the vehicle to be towed using atow bar, avoiding damage to the vehicle. A

54

Self-help

tow rope should only be used if a tow bar isnot available.

A tow rope should be slightly elastic to avoiddamage to both vehicles. It is advisable touse a tow rope made of synthetic fibre orsimilarly elastic material.

Only attach the tow rope or the tow bar tothe towing eyes provided or a towing bracket.

If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing de-vice, towing with a tow bar is only permittedif it has been specially designed to be instal-led on a tow hitch ››› page 275 .

When the vehicle has to be towed:Check whether the vehicle may be towed››› page 55, Cases where towing the vehi-cle is not permitted.

The vehicle can be towed using a tow bar ortow rope in the normal way, with all fourwheels on the road; it can also be towed witheither the front or rear wheels lifted off theroad.

● Switch the ignition on.● Move the selector lever to the N››› page 207 position.● Do not allow the vehicle to be towed atspeeds of over 50 km/h (30 mph).● The vehicle must not be towed furtherthan 50 km (30 miles).

● If a breakdown lorry is used, vehicles withautomatic transmission are only allowed tobe towed with the front wheels suspended.

Towing vehicles with four-wheel drive(4Drive)Four-wheel drive vehicles (4Drive) can betowed using a tow bar or tow rope. If the ve-hicle is towed with the front or rear axle sus-pended, the engine must be switched off,otherwise the transmission may be dam-aged.

Cases where towing the vehicle is not per-mitted● If, due to a fault, the gearbox is out of lubri-cant.● If the vehicle battery is discharged, be-cause the steering remains locked and, if ap-propriate, the electronic parking brake can-not be deactivated or the electronic lock ofthe steering column released.● If a distance above 50 km needs to be trav-elled.● When, for example, after an accident, thesmooth rotation of the wheels or the steer-ing operation cannot be guaranteed.

When the vehicle is to tow another vehi-cle:● Observe legal requirements.

● Keep in mind the instructions in the man-ual on towing vehicles.

CAUTIONIf there is no oil in the gearbox or no lubri-cant in the automatic transmission the carmay only be towed with the driven wheelslifted clear of the road, or transported on aspecial car transporter or trailer.

NoteThe vehicle can only be towed if the elec-tronic parking brake and the electroniclock of the steering column are deactiva-ted. If the vehicle has no power supply orthere is an electric system fault, the enginemust be tow-started ››› page 51 to deacti-vate the electronic parking brake and theelectronic lock of the steering column.

55

Emergencies

Front towline anchorage

Fig. 43 On the right side of the front bumper: re-move the cover.

Fig. 44 Right side of the front bumper: towlineanchorage in position.

The housing of the screw towing eye is onthe right side of the front bumper behind alid ››› Fig. 43 .

The towing eye should always be kept in thevehicle.

Bear in mind the instructions for towing››› page 54.

Fitting the towline anchorage● Remove the towing eye from the vehicletool kit in the luggage compartment››› page 43.● Remove the cover by pressing down on itsbase and leave it hanging from the vehicle››› Fig. 43.● Screw the towing eye in the housing byturning it as far as it will go anticlock-wise ››› Fig. 44 ››› . Use a suitable objectthat can completely and securely tighten thetowing eye in its housing.● After towing, unscrew the towing eyeclockwise with a suitable object.● Replace the cover and tighten on its rightside until the tab snaps into the bumper.● Clean the towing eye if necessary and thenstore it in the luggage compartment alongwith the other vehicle tools.

CAUTIONThe towing eye must always be completelyand firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could bereleased while towing and tow-starting.

Rear towline anchorage

Fig. 45 On the right side of the rear bumper: re-move the cover.

Fig. 46 On the right side of the rear bumper: tow-line anchorage in position.

The housing of the screw towing eye is onthe right side of the rear bumper behind a lid››› Fig. 45.

Vehicles equipped as standard with a towingbracket do not have any housing for the

56

Fuses and bulbs

screw towing eye behind the lid. In this case,the tow hitch needs to be extracted or instal-led and used for towing ››› page 275 , ››› .

Bear in mind the instructions for towing››› page 54.

Assemble the rear towing eye (cars with-out a factory-equipped towing bracket)● Remove the towing eye from the vehicletool kit in the luggage compartment››› page 43.● Press the upper side of the lid ››› Fig. 45 tounclip it.● Remove the lid and let it hang from the ve-hicle.● Screw the towing eye in the housing byturning it to the maximum anticlockwise››› Fig. 46 ››› . Use a suitable object thatcan completely and securely tighten thetowing eye in its housing.● After towing, unscrew the towing eyeclockwise with a suitable object.● Replace the cover and press until the tabsnaps into the bumper.● Clean the towing eye if necessary and thenstore it in the luggage compartment alongwith the other vehicle tools.

CAUTION● The towing eye must always be complete-ly and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it couldbe released while towing and tow-starting.● If the vehicle is factory-equipped with atowing bracket, it is only allowed to tow witha tow bar if this has been specially designedto be installed with a tow hitch. If an unsuit-able tow bar is used, both the tow hitch andthe vehicle may be damaged. Instead, a towrope should be used.

Fuses and bulbs

Fuses

Introduction

In general, a fuse can be assigned to variouselectrical components. Likewise, an electri-cal component can be protected by severalfuses.

Only replace fuses when the cause of theproblem has been solved. If a newly insertedfuse blows after a short time, you must havethe electrical system checked by a special-ised workshop as soon as possible.

WARNINGThe high voltages in the electrical systemcan give serious electrical shocks, causingburns and even death!● Never touch the electrical wiring of theignition system.● Take care not to cause short circuits inthe electrical system.

WARNINGUsing unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses orbridging a current circuit without fuses cancause a fire and serious injury.● Never use a fuse with a higher value. Onlyreplace fuses with a fuse of the same »

57

Emergencies

amperage (same colour and markings) andsize.● Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, sta-ple or similar.

CAUTION● To prevent damage to the vehicle’s elec-trical system, before replacing a fuse alwaysturn off the ignition, the lights and all elec-trical elements.● Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre-vent the entry of dust or humidity as theycan damage the electrical system.

Note● One component may have more than onefuse.● Several components may run on a singlefuse.● In the vehicle, there are more fuses thanthose indicated in this chapter.

Fuses inside the vehicle

Fig. 47 On the driver's side dashboard: fuse boxcover.

Opening and closing the fuse box situatedbelow the dash panel● Open: fold the cover down ››› Fig. 47 .● Close: push back the cover it in until itclicks into place.

Identifying fuses below below the dash-board by colours

Colour Amp rating

Light brown 5

Brown 7.5

Red 10

Blue 15

Yellow 20

Colour Amp rating

White or transparent 25

Green 30

Orange 40

CAUTION● Always carefully remove the fuse boxcovers and refit them correctly to avoidproblems with your vehicle.● Protect the fuse boxes when open toavoid the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt andhumidity inside fuse boxes can cause dam-age to the electrical system.

Fuses in the engine compartment

Fig. 48 In the engine compartment: fuse box cov-er.

58

Fuses and bulbs

To open the engine compartment fuse box● Open the bonnet ››› page 289 .● Press the locking tabs to release the fusebox cover ››› Fig. 48 .● Then lift the cover out.● To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box.Push the locking tabs down until they clickaudibly into place.

Replace a blown fuse

Fig. 49 Image of a blown fuse.

Preparations● Switch off the ignition, lights and all electri-cal equipment.● Open the corresponding fuse box››› page 58, ››› page 58 .

Recognise a blown fuseA fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured››› Fig. 49.

● Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it hasblown.

To replace a fuse● Remove the fuse.● Replace the blown fuse by one with anidentical amperage rating (same colour andmarkings) and identical size.● Replace the cover again or close the fusebox lid.

Fuse placement

Fuses in the vehicle interior

No. Consumers/Amps

3 Trailer 25

4 SCR, Adblue 20

5 Automatic gearbox lever 25

6 Interior light 30

8 Sunroof 20

7 Heated seats 30

9 Left door 30

11 Trailer 15

No. Consumers/Amps

12 Right lights 40

13 Central locking 40

14 Beats Audio CAN and MOST. 30

16 Airbag 7.5

17 SCR, engine relay, 1.5 10

18 KESSY 7.5

19 Instrument panel 7.5

20 Connectivity Box 7.5

21 Rear camera 7.5

24 4x4 Haldex Control Unit 15

25 RGS+EBSS front seat belts 25

26 Right door 30

27 RGS+EBSS front seat belts 25

28 PHEV 10

29 Trailer 15

30 Radio 30

31 Trailer 25

34 230V socket 30

35 Left lights 40

36 Air conditioner fan 40

37 Electric rear lid 30 »59

Emergencies

No. Consumers/Amps

39 Heated steering wheel 10

40 Alarm horn 7.5

41 Gateway 7.5

42 Automatic gearbox lever 7.5

43Air conditioning and heating controlpanel, rear window heating, AA com-pressor

10

44Diagnosis, handbrake switch, lightswitch, reverse light, interior lighting,lit-up door sill

7.5

45 Steering column 7.5

46 Radio display 7.5

47 Driving mode. 10

48 USB 7.5

52 12V socket 20

58 Parking sensors, parking assist con-trol unit, front camera, radar 7.5

59 Reverse switch, clima sensor, elec-trochromic mirror 7.5

60 Diagnosis, headlight control unit,headlight adjuster 7.5

61 Starter motor; clutch sensor 7.5

65 Sound amplifier 10

66 Rear window wiper 15

No. Consumers/Amps

67 Heated rear window 30

In-line fuse/Amps

230 V rear power sockets 30

Electric driver's seat 15

Fuse arrangement in engine compartment

No. Consumers/Amps

2 Engine control unit 7.5

3 Fuel pump control unit 10/20

4 Left headlight 15

5 Right headlight 15

7 Automatic gearbox pump 30

8 Brake servo 40

9 Horn 15

10 Front windscreen washer 30

11 PHEV Climate 7.5

12 Automatic gearbox control unit 15

13 ESP control unit 25

14 Standheizung 20

15 ESP control unit 40

16 PHEV 50

No. Consumers/Amps

17 PTC 40

18 PTC 40

20 Front electronic differential 15

21 Engine control unit 7.5

22 Starter motor 30

23 Engine control unit (diesel/pet-rol) 15

24 Engine sensors 7.5/10

25 Engine sensors 10

26 Engine power supply 7.5/10

27 Lambda probe 10/15

28 Engine 10/20

29 Fuel pump control unit 15/20/30

30 Pressure pump 1.0 10

33 PTC 40

Note● In the vehicle, there are more fuses thanthose indicated in this chapter. Theseshould only be changed by a specialisedworkshop.● Positions not containing a fuse do not ap-pear in the following tables.

60

Fuses and bulbs

● Some of the equipment listed in the ta-bles below pertain only to certain versionsof the model or are optional extras.● Please note that the above lists, whilecorrect at the time of printing, are subjectto change.

Changing bulbs

Changing bulbs

Full-LED headlightsFull-LED headlights handle all light functions(daylight, side light, turn signal, dipped beamand route light) with light emitting diodes(LEDs) as a light source.

Full-LED headlights are designed to last thelifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot bereplaced. In case of headlight failure, go toan authorised workshop to have it replaced.

Fog lights, rear lights, license plate light,side turn signals and additional brake lightTaking into account that they use LED bulbs,they should be replaced at a technical serv-ice centre.

61

Operation

Fig. 50 Instruments and controls.

62

Controls and displays

Operation

Controls and displays

Interior view

Overview

Door handleAir vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Control lever for:– Turn signals and main beam

headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Switches for:– Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . 79– On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78– Controls for radio, telephone,

navigation and voice control sys-tem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Steering wheel with horn and– Driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26– Paddle levers for tiptronic gear-

shift (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . 209Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Control lever for:– Windscreen wipers and wash-

er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119– Wipe and wash system . . . . . . . . . . . 119

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

– On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Front passenger airbag switch . . . . . 27Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115USB type-C ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Connectivity Box* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198DSG automatic gearbox lever . . . . . . 207Central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Electronic parking brake switch . . . . 254Auto Hold switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Adjustable steering column. . . . . . . . 15Fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Bonnet lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Control for lighting and demistingwindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Button to open rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Control for the electric adjustmentof the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Note● Some of the equipment listed in this sec-tion is only fitted on certain models or areoptional extras.

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

● The arrangement of switches and con-trols on right-hand drive models* may beslightly different from the layout shown in››› page 62. However, the symbols used toidentify the controls are the same.

63

Operation

Instruments and warn-ing/control lamps

Instrument panel

Introduction

After switching the engine on with a 12-voltbattery that is heavily discharged or newlychanged some system settings (such as thetime, the date, the personalised comfort set-tings and the programming) might be alteredor deleted. Check and correct these settingsonce the battery is sufficiently charged.

WARNINGAny distraction may lead to an accident,with the risk of injury.● Do not operate the instrument panelcontrols when driving.● To reduce the risk of accident and injury,only make adjustments to the instructionson the screen of the instrument panel andto the instructions on the screen of the In-fotainment system when the vehicle is sta-tionary.

64

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Digital instrument panel ( Digital Cockpit)

Fig. 51 Digital Cockpit on the instrument panel (classicview).

Details of the instruments:Control and warning lamps ››› page 80Revolution counter. Revolutions per mi-nute the engine is running ››› page 75 .Gear engaged or position of the selec-tor lever currently selectedScreen display ››› page 67SpeedometerDigital speed displayInformation Profile ››› page 65 .

The Digital Cockpit is a digital instrumentpanel with a high-resolution TFT colour

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

screen. It has a 5 views accessible using thebutton of the multifunction steeringwheel. By selecting different informationprofiles, indications other than the classiccircular instruments can be displayed, suchas navigation data, multimedia informationor travel data.

The 6 views are:● Classic● Dynamic● Assistance systems● Navigation*● Night

● CUPRA

All views will display information on thescreen about audio, phone, travel data, vehi-cle status, navigation1) and driving aids1).

Information profilesThe / buttons on the multifunctionsteering wheel can be used to browsethrough the different Digital Cockpit infor-mation.

Information on the vehicle status, travel dataand assistants will be displayed on the leftside. »

1) Depending on the version.65

Operation

On the right side information will be dis-played on audio, telephone, compass* andnavigation* manoeuvres.

Depending on the view in the central area ofthe Digital Cockpit information about thefollowing will be displayed:

● Classic View and Dynamic View: Initial da-ta, date, distance travelled and autonomy.Turn the right thumbwheel on the multifunc-tion steering wheel: navigation map*, trafficsigns*, travel data (by clicking on , itchanges between the different memories).● Assists View: This is accessed by pressingthe button or the button on the multi-function steering wheel. By turning the rightthumbwheel on the multifunction steeringwheel the different aids are displayed, press to select the desired aid.● Navigation View: By pressing the button on the multifunction steering wheel andthen turning the thumbwheel you can viewthe map in a larger or smaller view. If youpressed the button again, the map returnsto automatic scale.● Night View: The speed is displayed in digitalformat.● CUPRA view: The Centre Clock, RPM andSpeed are displayed.

Classic ViewThe revolutions per minute and speedome-ter needles appear in full length by a longpress on the button on the multifunctionsteering wheel, regardless of the menu dis-played in the central area ››› Fig. 51 .

With another long press on the button ,the display will returns to the previous view.

Or looking in the instrument panel menu forthe Close option using the right handthumbwheel on the multifunction steeringwheel, and then press .

Information that may be displayed in thecentral area of the Digital Cockpit speed-ometer● Audio● Telephone● Compass*● Navigation indications* (the most recentdestinations are displayed by pressing the ar-row on the right of the multifunction steeringwheel)● G-force meter.● > (close classic view).

Information that may be displayed in thecentral area of the SEAT Digital Cockpitrev counter● Consumption and average consumption.By pressing the arrow on the left of the mul-tifunction steering wheel, you can switch be-tween the different memories of the traveldata.● Autonomy (fuel tank level).● Lubricating oil and coolant temperature● Average speed. By pressing the arrow onthe left of the multifunction steering wheel,you can switch between the different memo-ries of the travel data.● Other travel data: km travelled and drivingtime. By pressing the arrow on the left of themultifunction steering wheel, you can switchbetween the different memories of the traveldata.● Assist systems.● Engine power and torque.● > (close classic view).

CUPRA viewTurning the right hand thumbwheel on themulti-function steering wheel scrolls throughthe following information displayed in themiddle of the rev counter:

● Speed.● Lap timer.

66


The following information is displayed out-side the rev counter circle:

● Right-hand area: G-force meter.● Left-hand area: engine power and torque.

Status display

Possible indications on the instrumentpanel displayDifferent pieces of information can be dis-played on the screen of the instrument pan-el, depending on the features of the vehicle.● Doors, bonnet and rear lid open● Warning and information messages● Odometer● Time ››› page 75● Indications of the radio and navigation sys-tem● Indications of the phone● Outside temperature● Indications of the compass● Selector lever positions● Gear recommendation (Triptonic mode)››› page 213● Display of travel data (multifunction dis-play) and menus for different settings››› page 68● Service interval display ››› page 77

● Speed warning ››› page 69● Speed warning for winter tyres● Start-Stop system status display››› page 205● Signals detected by the traffic signal detec-tion system and warning that the maximumallowed speed* has been exceeded››› page 72● Indication of active cylinder managementstatus (ACT®) ››› page 219● Low consumption driving ● Identifying letters on engine (LDM)● Driver assistance system display››› page 221● Copyright

Doors, bonnet and rear lid openWhen the vehicle is unlocked and while driv-ing, the instrument panel display shows if anyof the doors, the bonnet or rear lid areopened and, in some cases, it is also indica-ted by an audible warning. The display mayvary according to the type of instrumentpanel fitted.

Selector lever positions (DSG® dual clutchgearbox)The current position of the selector lever isshown on the side of the lever and on the in-strument panel display. When the lever is inthe D/S position or in the Tiptronic position,

in some cases, the gear engaged in eachcase is shown on the instrument panel dis-play .

Outside temperature indicatorIf the outside temperature is lower than ap-proximately +4 °C (+39 °F), the “ice crystalsymbol” on the outside temperature dis-play also lights up. This symbol remains lituntil the outside temperature exceeds +6 °C(+43 °F) ››› .

When the vehicle is stationary, when theauxiliary heater is switched on or when driv-ing at very low speeds, the outside tempera-ture indicated may be higher than the actualtemperature due to the heat produced bythe engine.

The margin of measurement ranges from-45 °C (-49 °F) to +76 °C (+169 °F).

Gear-change recommendationWhile driving, the instrument panel of cer-tain vehicles may indicate a gear recommen-dation for saving fuel ››› page 213 .

OdometerThe odometer registers the total distancetravelled by the car.

The partial odometer (trip) shows the dis-tance travelled since the last time it was resetto zero. »

67

Operation

To reset the trip odometer (trip ) to 0:

● When in in Travel data select trip.● Press and hold the button of the multi-function steering wheel for approximately 2seconds.

Speed warning for winter tyresIf the maximum set speed is exceeded, this isdisplayed on the instrument cluster display››› page 68.

The speed warning can be adjusted in the In-fotainment system, by using the functionbutton > Exterior > Tyres ››› page 86 .

Indications of the compassDepending on the equipment, when the ig-nition is on, the instrument panel display in-dicates the direction in which you are drivingwith a symbol, e.g. NW for Northwest.

When the Infotainment system is on andthere is no route guidance active, the graph-ic representation of a compass is also shown.

Low consumption driving *Depending on the equipment, when the ve-hicle is moving is displayed on the instru-ment cluster display when the vehicle is in aneconomical consumption status due to ac-tive cylinder management (ACT®)*››› page 219.

Identifying letters on engine (LDM)● See Service menu ››› page 69 .

CopyrightLegal text about the property rights andcopyrights of the instrument cluster.

WARNINGEven when the outside temperature ishigher than freezing temperature, someroads and bridges could be frozen.● The “ice crystal symbol” indicates thatthere may be a risk of freezing.● At outside temperatures above +4 °C(+39 °F), there may be ice even when the“ice crystal symbol” is not on.● The outside temperature sensor takes aguideline measurement.

Note● There are different instrument panelsand therefore the versions and instructionson the display may vary. In the case of dis-plays without warning or information texts,faults are indicated exclusively by the con-trol warning lamps.● Some indications on the instrument pan-el screen may be concealed by a suddenevent, e.g. an incoming call.● Depending on the equipment, some set-tings and instructions can be carried out or

displayed on the infotainment system aswell.● If there are several warnings at the sametime, the symbols will be displayed one af-ter the other for a few seconds. The sym-bols will stay on until you remove the cause.● If when switching on the ignition warn-ings are shown about existing faults, itmight not be possible to change the set-tings or show the information as described.In this case, go to a specialised workshopand request a repair.

Instrument panel menus

The number of menus and information itemsavailable will depend on the vehicle’s elec-tronics and features.

Some menu options can only be read whenthe vehicle is stationary.■ Driving data ››› page 69■ Assist systems.■ Front Assist On/Off ››› page 228■ ACC (only display) ››› page 232■ Lane Assist On/Off ››› page 240■ Travel Assist On/Off ››› page 242■ Side Assist On/Off ››› page 246

■ Navigation.■ Audio.■ Telephone.

68


■ Vehicle status ››› page 70

Service Menu

In the Service menu various settings can beadjusted depending on the features.

Open the Service menu● While in Classic View, go to the InitialData screen, press the button on the mul-tifunction steering wheel for about 5 sec-onds and release it.● Next, the Configuration list menu isdisplayed, where you can choose betweenthe Service menu or the View selectionfrom where the instrument cluster views canbe switched on and off.

Restart the service interval displaySelect the Service menu and follow the in-structions on the screen of the instrumentpanel.

Restart the oil serviceSelect the Restore Oil service menu andfollow the instructions on the instrumentpanel display.

Restart journey dataSelect the Reset trip menu and follow theinstructions on the instrument panel displayto reset the value.

Identifying letters on engine (LDM)Select the menu Engine code. The identify-ing letters of the engine will be shown on theinstrument cluster display at the bottom left.

Setting the clockSelect the Time menu and set the correcttime by turning the right thumbwheel of themultifunction steering wheel.

Tyre pressureTo save the tyre pressure after inflating orchanging tyres ››› page 309 . Follow the in-structions on the instrument cluster.

Driving data indicator (multifunctiondisplay)

The display of the travel data (multifunctiondisplay) shows different values about thejourney and the consumption.

Change from one display to another● Turn the right thumbwheel of the multi-function steering wheel ››› page 78 .

Changing memory

● Depending on the view, select Trip dataand press the left arrow or the button onthe multifunction steering wheel.

Since start: The memory is deleted ifthe journey is interrupted for more than2 hours.Since refuelling: Display and stor-age of the journey data and the con-sumption values collected. When refu-elling, the memory is deleted.Long-term: This memory containstravel data up to a maximum of 19 hoursand 59 minutes or 99 hours and 59 mi-nutes, or up to a maximum of 1999.9 kmor 9999.9 km. When one of these val-ues is exceeded (varies depending onthe version of the instrument panel),the memory is deleted.

Delete journey data presets● When in Travel data select desired memo-ry.● Keep the button on the multi-functionsteering wheel pressed for approximately 2seconds.

Select the instructionsIn the Infotainment system, in the menu Ve-hicle settings, you can display different traveldata ››› page 82 . »

–

–

–

69

Operation

Current consumption: The currentfuel consumption display operatesthroughout the journey, in litres/100km; and with the engine running andthe vehicle stopped, in litres/hour.Average consumption: The averagefuel consumption is displayed after driv-ing for approximately 300 metres.Travelling time: This indicates thehours (h) and minutes (min) since theignition was switched on.Range: Approximate distance in kmthat can still be travelled if the samedriving style is maintained.Distance: Distance covered in km (m)after switching on the ignition.Average speed: The average speedwill be shown after driving for approxi-mately 100 metres.Digital speed: Current speed dis-played in digital format.Eco tips: Recommendations messag-es are shown to reduce consumptionthrough good driving practices, e.g. Airconditioning on: close the win-dow.

Oil and coolant temperature indicationThe engine reaches its operating tempera-ture when, under normal driving conditions,the oil temperature is between 80°C (176°F)and 120°C (248°F). If a great effort is required

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

from the engine and the outside tempera-ture is high, the engine oil temperature mayincrease. This does not present any problemas long as the warning lamps or ››› page 292 do not appear on the display.

Warning and information messages(Vehicle status)

The system runs a check on certain compo-nents and functions when the ignition isswitched on and while the vehicle is moving.Faults are displayed on the instrument clus-ter display as red and yellow warning symbolsaccompanied with messages and, as appli-cable, even an audible signal ››› page 80 .The representation of the messages andsymbols may vary depending on the versionof the instrument panel.

Existing faults can also be checked manually.To do so, open the menu Vehicle info››› page 85.

Priority 1 warning (red)The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac-companied by audible warnings). Stopdriving! Danger! Check the fault and elimi-nate the cause. If necessary, seek professio-nal assistance.

Priority 2 warning (yellow)The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac-companied by audible warnings). Operatingfaults or the lack of operating fluids cancause damage to the vehicle or a fault.Check the faulty function as soon as possi-ble. If necessary, seek professional assis-tance.

Information messageIt provides information about processes inthe vehicle.

Accessing warnings and information● In the infotainment system, press > Vehicle info > Vehicle status > Warnings.

70


Driver alert system (break recommen-dation)*

Fig. 52 On the instrument panel display: driveralert system symbol.

The Fatigue detection informs the driverwhen their driving behaviour shows signs offatigue.

Function and operationFatigue detection determines the driving be-haviour of the driver when starting a journey,making a calculation of tiredness. This isconstantly compared with the current driv-ing behaviour. If the system detects that thedriver is tired, an audible warning is givenwith a sound and an optic warning is shownwith a symbol and complementary messageon the instrument panel display ››› Fig. 52 .The message on the instrument panel dis-play is shown for approximately 5 seconds,

and depending on the case, is repeated. Thesystem stores the last message displayed.

The message on the instrument panel dis-play can be switched off by pressing the button on the multi-function steering wheel››› page 78.

The message can be recalled to the instru-ment panel display using the multifunctiondisplay ››› page 69 .

Conditions of operationDriving behaviour is only calculated onspeeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up toaround 200 km/h (125 mph).

Switching on and offFatigue detection can be activated or deacti-vated in the infotainment system using thefunction button > Driver assistance >Driver Alert System ››› page 86 . A mark in-dicates that the adjustment has been activa-ted.

System limitationsThe Fatigue detection has certain limitationsinherent to the system. The following condi-tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre-vent it from functioning.

● At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph)● At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph)● When cornering

● On roads in poor condition● In unfavourable weather conditions● When a sporty driving style is employed● In the event of a serious distraction to thedriver

Fatigue detection will be restored when thevehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes,when the ignition is switched off or when thedriver has unbuckled their seat belt andopened the door.

In the event of slow driving during a long pe-riod of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) thesystem automatically re-establishes thetiredness calculation. When driving at a fast-er speed the driving behaviour will be recal-culated.

WARNINGDo not let the comfort afforded by the Fati-gue detection system tempt you into takingany risks when driving. Take regular breaks,sufficient in length when making long jour-neys.● The driver always assumes the responsi-bility of driving to their full capacity.● Never drive if you are tired.● The system does not detect the tirednessof the driver in all circumstances. Consultthe information in the section ››› page 71,System limitations. »

71

Operation

● In some situations, the system may incor-rectly interpret an intended driving ma-noeuvre as driver tiredness.● No warning is given in the event of the ef-fect called microsleep!● Please observe the indications on the in-strument panel and act as is necessary.

Note● Fatigue detection has been developed fordriving on motorways and well paved roadsonly.● If there is a fault in the system, have itchecked by a specialised workshop.

Road signs detection system*1)

Fig. 53 On the instrument panel display: examplesof recognised signals.

The traffic signal detection system is activa-ted whenever the vehicle ignition is switchedon.

The system records the standard traffic signsin front of the vehicle with a camera locatedon the base of the interior mirror and pro-vides information about speed limits, hazardwarnings and overtaking prohibitions.

Within its limitations, the system also displaysadditional signals, such as time-specific pro-hibitions, signs for vehicles towing trailers››› page 275 or limitations that only apply inthe event of rain. Even on journeys withoutsigns, the system may display any applicablespeed limits.

The traffic sign detection system does notwork in all countries. Keep this in mind whentravelling abroad.

Shown on the displayIn Germany, on motorways and vehicleroads, besides speed limits and overtakingprovisions the system also displays the end ofprohibition signs. The valid speed limit at thetime in other countries is always shown.

The traffic signs detected by the system aredisplayed on the dash panel display››› Fig. 53 and, depending on the navigation

system fitted in the vehicle, on the infotain-ment system as well ››› page 82 .

Hazard warning signs are not displayed in theinfotainment system.

Road sign detection system messages:There are no traffic signs available● The system is in its start-up phase.● OR: the camera has not recognized anymandatory or prohibitive sign.

Error: Dynamic Road Sign Display● There is a fault in the system. Have the sys-tem checked by a specialised workshop.

Speed warning currently unavailable● The speed warning function of the roadsign detection system is faulty. Have the sys-tem checked by a specialised workshop.

Dynamic Road Sign Display: pleaseclean the windscreen.● The windscreen is dirty in the camera area.Clean the windscreen.

Dynamic Road Sign Display currentlyrestricted.● The navigation system is not transmittingdata. Check if the navigation system has up-dated maps.

1) System available depending on the country.72


● OR: the vehicle is in a region not includedon the navigation system's map.

No data available● The traffic sign detection system does notwork in the current country.

Display of traffic signsWhen the traffic sign detection system isconnected, a camera located on the base ofthe interior rear-view mirror records the traf-fic signs in front of the vehicle. After check-ing and evaluating the information from thecamera, the navigation system and the cur-rent vehicle data, up to two valid road signsare displayed, with their corresponding addi-tional signs:

● First position. The sign that is currentlyvalid for the driver is shown in the screen. Forexample, a maximum speed limit of 130km/h (100 mph) ››› Fig. 53 .● Second position. A second traffic sign maybe displayed in the second position, such asa hazard warning sign, an overtaking prohibi-tion or an alternative speed limit.

Additional sign: If the windscreen wiper isworking while you are driving, the signal withthe additional rain sign will be shown first, onthe left, as it is the one that is applicable atthe time.

A sign valid only with restrictions, e.g. noovertaking at certain times, may be dis-played.

Speed warning (depending on the instru-ment panel)If the system detects that the permittedspeed is exceeded, it may warn the driverwith a “gong” and visually with a message onthe dash panel display.

Trailer modeIn vehicles equipped with a towing bracketdevice from the factory and a trailer that iselectrically connected to the vehicle, it ispossible to activate or deactivate the displayof specific traffic signs for vehicles with trail-er, such as speed limits or overtaking prohib-itions. Activation or deactivation is carriedout in the infotainment system using thefunction button > Driver assistance >Trailer assist ››› page 86 .

For trailer mode, the display of speed limitsapplicable to the type of trailer or to the legalprovisions can be adjusted. The speed is ad-justed in steps of 10 km/h (5 mph) within arange of between 60 km/h (40 mph) and130 km/h (80 mph). If it is adjusted to aspeed greater than that which is permitted inthe country in question for driving with atrailer, the system automatically displays theusual speed limits, e.g. in Germany 80 km/h(50 mph).

If the speed warning for the trailer is deacti-vated, the system displays the speed limits asif there were no trailer hitched.

No entry signThe traffic sign recognition system warnsacoustically and visually in the instrumentpanel when a no entry sign is crossed on aone-way road or an entrance to a motorwayor highway.

Limited operationThe traffic sign detection system has certainlimitations. The following cases may lead thesystem to operate with limitations or not atall:

● In the case of poor visibility, e.g. in snow,rain, fog or intense mist.● In cases of dazzling, e.g. caused by head-on traffic or by the sun.● When driving at high speeds.● If the camera is covered or dirty.● If the traffic signs are out of the camera'sfield of vision.● If the traffic signs are partially or totallycovered, e.g. by trees, snow, dirt or other ve-hicles.● In the case of traffic signs that do not fulfilthe regulations. »

73

Operation

● In the case of damaged or bent trafficsigns.● In the case of variable messages on over-head or gantry signs (LED-based variabletraffic signs or other lighting units).● If the maps on the navigation system arenot up-to-date.● In the case of adhesives affixed to vehiclesthat depict traffic signs, e.g. speed limits onlorries.

WARNINGThe technology in the traffic sign detectionsystem cannot change the limits imposedby the laws of physics and only works withinthe system's limits. Do not let the extraconvenience afforded by the traffic signdetection system tempt you into taking anyrisks when driving. The system is not a re-placement for driver awareness.● Adapt your speed and driving style to suitvisibility, weather, road and traffic condi-tions.● Poor visibility, darkness, snow, rain andfog may lead to the system failing to displaytraffic signs or not displaying them correct-ly.● If the camera's field of vision is dirty, cov-ered or damaged, system operation may beimpaired.

WARNINGThe driving recommendations and trafficindications shown on the traffic sign detec-tion system may differ from the actual cur-rent traffic situation.● The system may not detect or correctlyshow all the traffic signs.● Traffic signs and traffic regulations havepriority over the recommendations and dis-plays provided by the system.

WARNINGIf messages are ignored, the vehicle maystall in traffic and cause accidents and se-vere injuries.● Never ignore the messages displayed.● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunityand in a safe place.

NoteTo avoid affecting the correct operation ofthe system, take the following points intoconsideration:● Regularly clean the area of vision of thecamera and keep it in a clean state, withoutsnow or ice.● Do not cover the field of vision of thecamera.● Always replace damaged or worn bladeswhen required to avoid lines on the cam-era's field of vision.

● Check that the windscreen is not dam-aged in the area of the camera's field of vi-sion.● The use of outdated maps on the naviga-tion system may cause the system to showtraffic signs incorrectly.● In the waypoints mode of the navigationsystem, the traffic sign detection system isonly partly available.● Failure to heed the control lamps andcorresponding text messages when theylight up may result in damage to the vehi-cle.

Eco-efficient driving assistance

Fig. 54 Eco-efficient driving assistance indication(schematic representation).

Eco-efficient driving assistance helps youdrive with care and with low energy con-sumption by following instructions

74


superimposed in the digital cockpit, de-pending on the situation.

When you approach places such as a junc-tion, a roundabout or a section of road with aspeed limit, the symbol is displayed alongwith an event in the digital cockpit ››› Fig. 54 .

WARNINGThe system is not a replacement for driverawareness.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.● Traffic signs on the road and traffic regu-lations have priority over eco-driving notes.

Note● The appearance of the symbols may varyslightly depending on the equipment andmodel. System updates may modify or ex-pand the symbols.● When the system is switched on, eco-ef-ficient driving assistance can also increaserecuperation without any indication beingdisplayed. This can occur in situations suchas when the accelerator pedal is releasedwhen a vehicle is driving in front. In thiscase, energy recuperation is adaptedmatch the speed of the vehicle in frontwithout any indication being displayed.

Time

Setting the time on the infotainment sys-tem● Press / > Settings.● Select the menu option Time and date toset the time ››› page 82 .

Setting the time on an analogue instru-ment panel● In the classic view ››› page 66 hold thebutton of the multifunction steering wheelpressed when you have selected the date,route and autonomy information.● Press and turn the button to make theadjustments.

Revolution counter

The rev counter indicates the number of en-gine revolutions per minute.

Together with the gear-change indicator,the rev counter offers you the possibility ofusing the engine of your vehicle at a suitablespeed.

The beginning of the red zone of the revcounter indicates the maximum speed in anygear after running-in and with the enginehot. However, it is advisable to move the se-lector lever to D or lift your foot off the ac-

celerator before the needle reaches the redzone ››› .

We recommend that you avoid high revs andthat you follow the recommendations on thegear-change indicator. Consult the addition-al information in ››› page 213, Selecting theoptimal gear.

CAUTION● To prevent damage to the engine, the revcounter needle should only remain in thered zone for a short period of time.● When the engine is cold, avoid high revsand heavy acceleration and do not makethe engine work hard.

For the sake of the environmentChanging up a gear early will help you tosave fuel and minimise emissions and en-gine noise.

75

Operation

Fuel gauge

Fig. 55 Fuel gauge located in different positionsdepending on the view.

Control lamps

It lights up yellow

Fuel tank almost empty. The fuel reserve level hasbeen reached ››› . Refuel as soon as you have theopportunity.

The display only works when the ignition isswitched on.

The fuel range is displayed on the instrumentpanel.

You can consult the tank capacity of your ve-hicle in the ››› page 328 section.

WARNINGWhen driving with low fuel, the vehicle maystall in traffic and cause accidents and se-vere injuries.● If the fuel tank level is too low, fuel couldreach the engine irregularly, particularlywhen driving up or down slopes.

● The steering system and the driver assis-tance systems and brakes do not workwhen the engine is running irregularly orswitches off due to lack of fuel or an irregu-lar supply thereof.● Always refuel when there is only onequarter of fuel in tank to prevent the vehi-cle to stop due to lack of fuel.

CAUTIONNever run the fuel tank completely dry. Anirregular fuel supply can cause misfiringand unburnt fuel could enter the exhaustsystem. The catalytic converter or the par-ticulate filter may get damaged!

NoteThe small arrow on the fuel gauge next tothe fuel pump symbol points out towardsthe side of the vehicle with the fuel tankflap.

Engine coolant temperature indica-tor.

The coolant temperature view can be selec-ted in the corresponding menu ››› page 66 .

Control and warning lamp

It lights up red

Do not carry on driving!Engine coolant level too low, coolant temperature toohigh.

Flashes red

Fault in the engine coolant system.

● Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine andlet it cool down.● Check the engine coolant level››› page 294.● If the warning lamp does not switch offeven if the coolant level is correct, requestassistance from specialised personnel.

CAUTION● To ensure a long useful life for the engine,avoid high revs, driving at high speed andmaking the engine work hard for approxi-mately the first 15 minutes when the engineis cold. The phase until the engine is warmalso depends on the outside temperature.If necessary, use the engine oil tempera-ture* ››› page 70 as a guide.● Additional lights and other accessories infront of the air inlet reduce the cooling ef-fect of the coolant. At high outside temper-atures and high engine loads, there is a riskof the engine overheating.

76


● The front spoiler also ensures proper dis-tribution of the cooling air when the vehi-cle is moving. If the spoiler is damaged thiscan reduce the cooling effect, which couldcause the engine to overheat. Seek special-ist assistance.

Service intervals

The service interval display appears on theinstrument cluster screen and in the info-tainment system.

There are different versions of instrumentpanels and infotainment systems, so the ver-sions and instructions on the screens mayvary.

CUPRA distinguishes between services withengine oil change (e.g. Oil change service)and services without engine oil change (e.g.Inspection).

In vehicles with Services established bytime or mileage, the service intervals are al-ready pre-defined.

In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter-vals are determined individually. Thanks totechnological progress, maintenance workhas been greatly reduced. Because of thetechnology used by CUPRA, with this serviceyou only need to change the oil when the ve-hicle so requires. To calculate this variation(max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of use

and individual driving styles are considered.The advance warning first appears 20 daysbefore the date established for the corre-sponding service. The kilometres (miles) re-maining until the next service are alwaysrounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles)and the time is given in complete days. Thecurrent service message cannot be vieweduntil 500 km after the last service. Prior tothis, only lines are visible on the display.

Inspection reminderIf a service or an inspection has to be carriedout soon, a service reminder will be dis-played when the ignition is switched on.

The figure displayed are the kilometres thatcan still be travelled or the time until the nextservice.

Service dueWhen the time for a service or an inspec-tion comes, an audible warning will be emit-ted when the ignition is switched on and thefixed key symbol may appear on the in-strument panel for a few seconds, along withone of the following messages:

● Service now!● Please have your vehicle inspec-ted.● Oil change service due!

● Oil change service and inspectiondue!

Consult a service notificationWith the ignition switched on, the engine offand the vehicle at a standstill, the currentservice notification can be read:

Check the date of the current service on theinfotainment system● Press / > Settings.● Select the Applications and servicesmenu option to display information aboutthe services.

Checking the date on the digital instrumentpanel● The date of the service can only be readthrough the Service menu ››› page 69 .

Resetting service interval displayIf the service was not carried out by a speci-alised CUPRA dealer or any dealer in theSEAT network, the display can be reset asfollows:

● The service interval display can only be re-set through the Service menu ››› page 69 .

Do not restart the indicator between theservice intervals, otherwise the informationdisplayed will be incorrect. »

77

Operation

If the oil change service is reset manually,the service interval display changes to a fixedservice interval, also in vehicles with Flexibleoil change service.

Note● The service message disappears after afew seconds, when the engine is started orwhen the button is pressed on the multi-function steering wheel.● In vehicles with the LongLife system inwhich the battery has been disconnectedfor a long period of time, it is not possible tocalculate the date of the next service.Therefore the service interval display maynot be correct. In this case, bear in mindthe maximum service intervals permitted››› page 313.● If you reset the display manually, the nextservice interval will be indicated as in vehi-cles with fixed service intervals. For thisreason we recommend that the service in-terval display be reset by an authoriseddealer.

Using the instrument panel

Introduction

With the ignition switched on, it is possible toread the different functions of the display byscrolling through the menus.

The multifunction display can only be con-trolled from the buttons on the multi-func-tion steering wheel.

Some menu options can only be read whenthe vehicle is at a standstill.

WARNINGDistracting the driver in any way can lead toan accident and cause injuries.● Never use the menus on the instrumentpanel display while the vehicle is in motion.

NoteAfter loading or changing the 12-volt bat-tery, check the system settings. If the pow-er supply is interrupted, the system settingsmight be incorrect or deleted.

Operation using the multifunctionsteering wheel

Fig. 56 Right side of the multifunction steeringwheel: buttons to the menus and information dis-plays on the instrument panel.

As long as a priority 1 ››› page 70 warning isactive, it will not be possible to access anymenu. Some warnings can be confirmed andhidden with the button of the multifunc-tion steering wheel ››› Fig. 56 .

Select a menu or an informative display● Switch the ignition on.● If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed,press the button ››› Fig. 56 ; if necessary,several times.● To change menus, use buttons or ››› Fig. 56.● To open the menu or the information dis-played, press the button ››› Fig. 56 or wait

78


a few seconds until the menu or the informa-tive display opens automatically.

Changing menu settings● In the menu displayed, turn the rightthumbwheel of the multifunction steeringwheel ››› Fig. 56 until the desired option ofthe menu is highlighted. The option appearsframed.● Press the button ››› Fig. 56 to make therequired modifications. A mark indicates thatthe system or function is activated.

Back to menu selectionPress the button or .

Button for the driver assistance sys-tems*

Fig. 57 On the turn signal and main beam lever:button for driver assistance systems (dependingon versions).

Fig. 58 Left side of the multifunction steeringwheel: button for driver assistance systems (de-pending on versions).

With the turn signal and main beam head-light lever button, you can activate or deacti-

vate the driver assistance systems displayedin the Assistance systems menu .

Activating or deactivating a driver assis-tance system using the turn signal leverand main beam headlight● Briefly press the ››› Fig. 57 1 button toopen the Assistants menu.● Select the driver assistance system and ac-tivate or deactivate it ››› page 78 . A mark in-dicates that driver assistance system isswitched on.● Next, confirm the selection by pressingthe button on the multi-function steeringwheel.

Activating or deactivating a driver assis-tance system using the multifunctionsteering wheel*● Press the button ››› Fig. 58 to open theAids menu.● Select the driver assistance system and ac-tivate or deactivate it. A mark indicates thatdriver assistance system is switched on.● Next, confirm the selection by pressingthe button on the multifunction steeringwheel.

The driver assistance systems can also beswitched on and off in the infotainment sys-tem, in the menu Vehicle settings››› page 86.

79

Operation

Control lamps

Control and warning lamps

The control and warning lamps are indicatorsof warnings ››› , faults or certain functions.Some control and warning lamps come onwhen the ignition is switched on, and switchoff when the engine starts running, or whiledriving.

Depending on the model, additional textmessages may be viewed on the instrumentpanel display. These may be purely informa-tive or they may be advising of the need foraction ››› page 64, Instrument panel .

Depending upon the equipment fitted in thevehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some-times a symbol may be displayed on the in-strument panel.

When certain control and warning lamps arelit, an audible warning is also heard.

Red warning lamps

Notification central lamp: additional infor-mation on the instrument panel display

Parking brake on ››› page 252 .

Fault in the brake system ››› page 252 .

Fault in the steering system ››› page 215 .

Driver or passenger has not fastened seatbelt ››› page 16 .

Engine cooling fluid ››› page 76 .

Engine oil pressure ››› page 292 .

Alternator abnormality ››› page 299 .

Press the foot brake ››› page 232 .

Yellow warning lamps

Notification central lamp: additional infor-mation on the instrument panel display

Front brake pads worn ››› page 252 .

Fault in the ESC or the system caused it toswitch off; OR ESC or TCS operating››› page 256.

TCS switched off manually; OR ESC in Sportmode; OR ESC switched off manually››› page 256.

Fault in the ABS ››› page 256 .

Electronic parking brake faulty.

Rear fog light switched on ››› page 110 .

Fault in the emission control system››› page 287.

Fault in the petrol engine management››› page 287.

Particulate filter blocked ››› page 287 .

Fault in the steering system ››› page 215 .

Tyre pressure monitor system ››› page 309 .

Fuel tank almost empty ››› page 76 .

Fault in airbag system and seat belt tension-ers ››› page 25 .

Front passenger front airbag is disa-bled ››› page 25 .

The front passenger front airbag is activated››› page 25.

Defective cruise control system (GRA)››› page 226.

Defective speed limiter ››› page 228

Defective active cruise control (ACC)››› page 237

Lane Assist (lane keeping system)››› page 240.

Error in the lane assist warning system››› page 240.

OFF

Lane Assist switched off ››› page 240 .

Fault in the lighting of the vehicle››› page 110.

80


Low engine oil level ››› page 292 .

Fault in the gearbox ››› page 213 .

Windscreen cleaning fluid too low››› page 119.

Green indicator lamps

Turn lights or emergency lights on››› page 110.

Trailer turn signals ››› page 110 .

Auto Hold active (lights green), or AutoHold paused (lights white) ››› page 255 .

Press the foot brake ››› page 207 .

Cruise control system (GRA) ››› page 225 .

Speed limiter ››› page 226

Adaptive cruise control (ACC) ››› page 233 .

Lane assist active (Lane Assist) warning››› page 240.

Auxiliary heater* ››› page 152 .

Blue indicator lamps

Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 110 .

Other warning lamps

Door(s), rear lid or bonnet open or notproperly closed ››› page 67 .

Main beam assist (Light Assist) ››› page 110 .

Hill descent control (HDC) ››› page 214 .

Service interval display ››› page 77 .

Mobile phone connected by Bluetooth® .

Mobile telephone battery charge status.

Risk of freezing ››› page 67 .

Start-Stop system activated ››› page 205 .

Start-Stop system unavailable ››› page 205 .

WARNINGIf the warning lamps and messages are ig-nored, faults may occur in the vehicle, itmay stall in traffic, or accidents and seriousinjuries may occur.● Never ignore the warning lamps or textmessages.● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-ble.● A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci-dent for the driver and for other road users.If necessary, switch on the hazard warninglamps and put out the warning triangle toadvise other drivers.● Before opening the bonnet, switch offthe engine and allow it to cool.● In any vehicle, the engine compartmentis a hazardous area and could cause severeinjuries ››› page 289 .

81

Operation

Infotainment system

Introduction

The infotainment system brings together im-portant vehicle functions and systems into asingle central control unit, e.g. air condition-ing, menu settings, radio equipment and thenavigation system.

The actual number of menus available andthe name of the various options will dependon the vehicle’s electronics and equipment.

General operating informationGeneral information on the operation of theinfotainment system, as well as on the warn-ing and safety instructions that must be tak-en into account, is found in ››› page 156 .

How to move through the different menusand select them● Switch the ignition on.● If the infotainment system is off, switch iton.● The different menus are selected directlyon the touch screen using texts, icons orbuttons.

If the box is checked , the function is acti-vated.

Pressing the menu button will always takeyou to the last menu used.

Any changes made using the settings menusare automatically saved on closing thosemenus.

Scroll bar: Some menus and functions showmore content above or below those dis-played on the screen at that time, for exam-

ple, long lists of settings. Press on the scrollbar and pull up or down.

TutorialThe first time you connect the Infotainmentsystem, a system tutorial will open with abrief description of the main functions andhow to use it.

HelpIn the Help menu can be found more infor-mation and tips for using the infotainmentsystem.

WARNINGAny distraction may lead to an accident,with the risk of injury. Operating the Info-tainment system while driving could dis-tract you from traffic.

82


Explanation of the function buttons

Fig. 59 Schematic representation: Overview of thepossible function buttons on the screen

Top part of the screenThe following information is always visible,even when the infotainment system is turnedoff››› Fig. 59 :

Time or Incoming call.Air conditioning menu ››› page 145 .Status bar. System customisation basedon user and notifications.

A

B

C

Bottom part of the screenMain menu display mode:: main menu with the 6 main functionsdivided into 2 screens (3 + 3, customisa-ble by the user by pressing on the func-tion).: main menu in mosaic mode (all func-tions of the Infotainment system)

D

Direct accesses to the functions of theInfotainment system (up to 10 functions,5 + 5, customisable by the user). Bypressing on the icon, you can select/de-select the functions in question.Direct access to the assist systems andvehicle settings ››› page 86 .

E

F

83

Operation

Initial configuration wizard

Fig. 60 Schematic representation: Initial configurationwizard

The initial configuration wizard will help youto set up your Infotainment system the firsttime you switch it on.

Whenever you switch on the infotainmentsystem, the initial setup screen will be dis-played ››› Fig. 60 if any parameters have notbeen set (marked with “”) or if the Don'tshow again function button has not beenpressed.

Function button: Function

Closes the Configuration Wizard.


A Press to set day and time.

BPress to search and store to memorythe radio stations that have the bestreception at that moment.

C Press to go to the Online Media set-tings.

D Press to link your mobile phone to theInfotainment system.


EPress to select your home address us-ing your current position or by man-ually entering an address.

Don't showagain

Disables the possibility of changingthe settings of the Infotainment sys-tem. If you wish to perform the initialconfiguration, you must accessthrough Help.

Start Starts up the Configuration Wizard.

EndOnce one or more settings have beenapplied, press to finalise the setup inthe main menu of the wizard.

84


Vehicle information

Fig. 61 Schematic representation: Vehicle informationand status

Pressing on Vehicle info in the main menuopens the Vehicle info menu with the follow-ing submenus:

Driving data. The average consump-tion, average speed, distance travelled,trip duration and autonomy are shown.It has 3 memories: “From departure”,“Total calculation” and “From refuelling”››› page 69.Vehicle status. The warnings regardingfaults, incidents, memorisation of thetyre pressure or information of the nextinspection service are displayed.

–

–

85

Operation

Assist systems and vehicle settings

Fig. 62 Schematic representation: Assist systems andvehicle settings

Press ››› Fig. 62 A , or Vehicle settings inthe main menu to open the assistants andvehicle settings menu. Next, clicking on anyof the menus located in the left area B , dis-plays the settings menu or the selected as-sist systems on the display.

The number of assist systems and settingsdepend on the version and the country inquestion.

The C points indicate that, by moving yourfinger over the screen, from left to right orvice versa, the rest of the assist services thatthe model is fitted with will be shown.■ Driver assistance■ Automatic parking brake activation

››› page 254.

■ Park assist ››› page 260 .■ Activate / deactivate ESC, stabilisation

systems and brake assist ››› page 256 .■ Activate / deactivate the Start-Stop sys-

tem ››› page 205 .■ Adaptive cruise control (ACC)

››› page 232.■ Lane Assist (lane keeping system)

››› page 240.■ Emergency brake assistance system

(Front Assist) ››› page 228 .■ Fatigue detection ››› page 71 .■ Traffic sign recognition ››› page 72 .■ Lane assist ››› page 246 .■ Emergency Assist ››› page 244 .

■ Drive Profile ››› page 215

■ Ambient lighting ››› page 118■ Interior settings■ Instrument panel ››› page 67 .■ Lighting ››› page 116 .■ Rear view mirrors ››› page 121 .

■ Exterior settings■ Closing ››› page 88 .■ Lights ››› page 110 .■ Windows ››› page 106 .■ Tyres ››› page 309 .

86


Multifunction steering wheel*

Functions

Fig. 63 Controls on the steering wheel.

Fig. 64 Controls on the steering wheel.

The steering wheel includes multifunctionmodules from where it is possible to control

the audio, telephone, navigation, voice con-trol and assist functions without the driverneeding to be distracted from the road.

Buttons available depending on the version

Symbol Function

1 Turn: Turn volume up/downPress: Mute volume

2

Turn: Search in the instrument panelmenu. In Navigation mode, turn tozoom in/out of the map in the DigitalCockpitPress: Select the highlighted option inthe instrument panel

Radio: Search for the previous/nextstation.Media: Short press: previous/nexttrack; long press: fast forward/rewind

Activate phone menu (answer call, endcall)

Switch between media and radio sour-ces

Change the instrument panel menu(previous/next)

Enable/disable voice control

Digital Cockpit: Change digital panelviews ››› page 65

Activate or deactivate steering wheelheating ››› page 150

Symbol Function

Connect/disconnect the Cruise con-trol system ››› page 224 / ACC››› page 232 / Speed limiter››› page 226

: Activate ACC / Cruise control sys-tem / Limiter: Reset programmed ACC speed orcruise control system

: Increase programmed speed: Decrease programmed speed

Open the drive assist menu in the in-strument panel

Modify the programmed ACC distance

Driving profile selection ››› page 215

STARTENGINE

STOP

Starting and stopping the engine››› page 201

87

Operation

Opening and closing

Set of vehicle keys

Vehicle key

Fig. 65 Vehicle key

Fig. 66 Centre console: vehicle key socket.

Key to ››› Fig. 65Unlock the vehicle1

Lock the vehicleUnlock only the rear lid. Press the buttonuntil all the turn signals on the vehicleflash briefly. You have 2 minutes to openthe rear lid. Once this time has passed, itwill lock again. In addition, the lamp onthe key flashes.Control lampAlarm button*. Only press in the event ofan emergency! When the alarm button ispressed, the vehicle's sounds and theturn signals light up for a short time.Press again to disconnect.

With the vehicle key the vehicle may belocked or unlocked remotely ››› page 91 .

The vehicle key includes an emitter and bat-tery. The receiver is in the interior of the ve-hicle. The range of the vehicle key with re-mote control and new battery is several me-tres around the vehicle.

If it is not possible to open or close the vehi-cle using the remote control key, this shouldbe re-synchronised ››› page 90 or the bat-tery changed ››› page 90 .

Different keys belonging to the vehicle maybe used.

Control lamp on the vehicle keyWhen a button on the vehicle key is brieflypressed, the indicator lamp flashes 4

››› Fig. 65 once briefly, but if the button is

2

3

4

5

held down for a longer period it will flash sev-eral times, such as for convenience opening.

If the vehicle key control lamp does not lightup when the button is pressed, replace thekey's battery ››› page 90 .

Key socketThere is a key socket near the start button››› Fig. 66 . Warning! Do not confuse withthe location for the emergency start››› page 203.

Spare keyTo obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys,the vehicle ID number is required.

Each new key contains a microchip whichmust be coded with the data from the vehi-cle electronic immobiliser. A vehicle key willnot work if it does not contain a microchip orthe microchip has not been encoded. This isalso true for keys which are specially cut forthe vehicle.

The vehicle keys or new spare keys can beobtained from a specialised CUPRA dealer orSEAT Official Service, a specialised workshopor an approved key service qualified to cre-ate this kind of key.

New keys or spare keys must be synchronisedbefore use ››› page 90 .

88

Opening and closing

WARNING● Never leave children or disabled personsin the vehicle. In case of emergency, theymay not be able to leave the vehicle ormanage on their own.● An uncontrolled use of the key couldstart the engine or activate any electricequipment (e.g. electric windows), causingrisk of accident. The doors can be lockedusing the remote control key. This couldbecome an obstacle for assistance in anemergency situation.● Never forget the keys inside the vehicle.An unauthorised use of your vehicle couldresult in injury, damage or theft. Thereforealways take the key with you when you leavethe vehicle.● Never remove the key from the ignition ifthe vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, thesteering could suddenly block and it wouldbe impossible to steer the vehicle.

CAUTIONAll of the vehicle keys contain electroniccomponents. Protect them from damage,impacts and humidity.

Note● Only use the key button when you requirethe corresponding function. Pushing thebutton unnecessarily could accidentallyunlock the vehicle or trigger the alarm. It is

also possible even when you are outside theradius of action.● Key operation can be greatly influencedby overlapping radio signals close to the ve-hicle working in the same range of frequen-cies, for example, radio transmitters or mo-bile telephones.● Obstacles between the remote controland the vehicle, bad weather conditionsand discharged batteries can considerablyreduce the range of the remote control.● If the buttons of the vehicle key arepressed or one of the central locking but-tons ››› page 93 is pressed repeatedly inshort succession, the central locking brieflydisconnects as protection against over-loading. The vehicle is then unlocked. Lockit if necessary.● Spare remote control keys are available atyour Technical Service, where they must bematched to the locking system.● Up to five remote control keys can beused.

Pull out the key blade

Fig. 67 Vehicle key: remove the key blade.

The central locking remote control has thekey blade inside it for use in case of emer-gency locking/unlocking of the driver's door››› page 100.

● If you press button ››› Fig. 67 1 once thekey blade is unlocked and a ring appears as akey ring.● Press and hold the button 1 and at thesame time pull on the ring in the direction ofarrow ››› Fig. 67 2 to completely remove thekey blade.

89

Operation

To change the battery

Fig. 68 Vehicle key: opening the battery compart-ment cover.

Fig. 69 Vehicle key: removing the battery.

CUPRA recommends you ask a specialisedworkshop to replace the battery.

The battery is located to the rear of the vehi-cle key, under a cover.

Changing the battery● Remove the key blade from the vehicle key››› page 89.● Insert the key blade into the slot ››› Fig. 68 ,press it in the direction of arrow 1 and de-tach the cover by levering it 2 .● Extract the battery from the compartmentusing a suitable thin object ››› Fig. 69 .● Insert the new battery and press it into thebattery compartment ››› .● Place the cover and press it into the vehi-cle key housing until it clicks into place.

WARNINGSwallowing a battery with a 20 mm diame-ter or any other button battery can causeserious and even fatal injuries within a veryshort time.● Keep the vehicle key and key fobs withbatteries out of reach of children.● If you suspect that someone may haveswallowed a battery, seek immediate medi-cal attention.

CAUTION● If the battery is not changed correctly,the vehicle key may be damaged.● Use of unsuitable batteries may damagethe vehicle key. For this reason, always re-place the dead battery with another of thesame voltage, size and specifications.

● When fitting the battery, check that thepolarity is correct.

For the sake of the environmentPlease dispose of your used batteries cor-rectly and with respect for the environ-ment.

Synchronize the vehicle key

If the button is pressed frequently outsideof the vehicle range, it is possible that the ve-hicle can no longer be locked or unlockedusing the key. In this case, the key must beresynchronised as described below:

● Remove the key blade from the vehicle key››› page 88.● Press the button on the vehicle key. Forthis, it must remain with the vehicle.● Open the vehicle within one minute usingthe key blade. The key has been synchron-ised.● If necessary, fit the cap.

90

Opening and closing

Central locking

Introduction

Central locking functions correctly when allthe doors and the rear lid are correctly shut.If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannotbe locked with the key.

The battery of an unlocked vehicle parkedfor a long period (e.g. in a private garage)may run down and fail to start the motor.

WARNINGThe incorrect use of the central lockingsystem may cause serious injuries.● The central locking system will lock alldoors. A vehicle locked from the inside canprevent any non-authorised individualfrom opening the doors and accessing thevehicle. Nevertheless, in case of emergencyor accident, locked doors will complicateaccess to the vehicle interior to help thepassengers.● Never leave children or disabled peoplealone in the vehicle. The central lockingbutton can be used to lock all the doorsfrom within. Therefore, passengers will belocked inside the vehicle. Individuals lockedin the vehicle can be exposed to very highor very low temperatures.● Depending on the time of the year, tem-peratures inside a locked and closed vehi-cle can be extremely high or extremely low

resulting in serious injuries and illness oreven death, particularly for young children.● Never leave individuals locked in a closedand locked vehicle. In case of emergency,they may not be able to exit the vehicle bythemselves or get help.

Description

Central locking allows all doors, the rear lidand the tank flap to be unlocked centrally:

● From outside, using the vehicle key››› page 92.● From outside with the Keyless Access››› page 94 system,● From inside, by pushing the central lockingbutton ››› page 93 .

Various functions are available to improvethe vehicle safety:

● Security system “Safe” ››› page 97● Self-locking system to prevent involuntaryunlocking● Selective unlocking system● Automatic speed dependent locking andunlocking system (Auto Lock)● Emergency unlocking system

Self-locking system to prevent involuntaryunlockingIt is an anti-theft system and prevents theunintentional unlocking of the vehicle. If thevehicle is unlocked and none of the doors(including the boot) are opened within 30seconds, it re-locks automatically.

Unlocking one side of the vehicle onlyWhen you lock the vehicle with the key, thedoors and the rear lid are locked. When youopen the door, you can either unlock onlythe driver door, or all the vehicle doors. Toselect the required option, use the Infotain-ment system setting ››› page 92 .

Automatic locking (Auto Lock)*The Auto Lock function locks the doors andthe rear lid when the vehicle exceeds aspeed of about 15 km/h (9 mph).

The vehicle can be unlocked via the centrallocking switch or by pulling one of the doorhandles.

The Auto Lock function can be activated anddeactivated in the infotainment system››› page 92.

In the event of an accident in which the air-bags inflate, the doors will be automaticallyunlocked to facilitate access and assistance. »

91

Operation

Turn signalsThe turn signals will flash twice when the ve-hicle is unlocked and once when the vehicleis locked.

If it does not flash, this indicates that one ofthe doors, the rear lid or the bonnet is notclosed correctly.

Accidental lock-outThe central locking system prevents youfrom being locked out of the vehicle in thefollowing situations:

● If the driver door is open, the vehicle can-not be locked with the central locking switch››› page 93.

Lock the vehicle with the remote control key,when all the doors and the rear lid have beenclosed. This prevents the accidental lockingof the vehicle.

Note● Never leave any valuable items in the ve-hicle unattended. Even a locked vehicle isnot a safe.● If the LED on the driver door sill lights upfor about 30 seconds when the vehicle islocked, the central locking system or anti-theft alarm* is not working properly. Youshould have the fault repaired at a special-ised CUPRA dealer, SEAT Official Service orspecialised workshop.

● The vehicle interior monitoring of the an-ti-theft alarm* system will only function asintended if the windows and the sunroof*are closed.

Central locking settings

Central locking settings can be changed inthe Infotainment system.

Unlocking doors● Press the function button > Exterior >Closing > Door unlocking.

You can choose to unlock all the doors oronly the driver door when you unlock thevehicle. In all the options, the fuel tank flap isalso unlocked.

With the Driver setting, when you press the button on the remote control key once,only the driver door is unlocked. If that but-ton is pressed twice, the rest of the doorsand the rear lid will be unlocked.

If the button is pressed, all the vehicledoors are locked. At the same time, a confir-mation signal* is heard.

Automatic locking (Auto Lock)● Press the function button > Exterior >Closing > Automatic locking.

If the function is activated, all the vehicledoors are locked at speeds above 15 km/h (9mph).

You can unlock the doors by pressing thecentral locking button ››› page 93 or, in-dividually, by operating the inside door han-dle (e.g. so that a passenger can get out).

Unlock and lock from the outside

Fig. 70 Remote control key: buttons.

● Lock: press the ››› Fig. 70 button.● Locking the vehicle without the “Safe” se-curity system: push the button again andhold for 2 seconds.● Unlock: press the button.● Unlocking the rear lid: hold down the button for at least 1 second.

The vehicle will be locked again automatical-ly if you do not open one of the doors or the

92

Opening and closing

rear lid within 30 seconds after unlocking thecar. This function prevents the vehicle fromremaining unlocked if the unlocking button ispressed by mistake. This does not apply ifyou press the button for at least one sec-ond.

Selective unlocking systemThe selective unlocking system allows you toonly unlock the driver door and the fuel tankflap. All other doors and the rear lid remainlocked.

Unlocking the driver's door and tank flap:● Press (once) the button on the remotecontrol key or turn the key once in the open-ing direction.

Unlocking all the doors, the rear lid and thetank flap simultaneously:● Within 5 seconds, press (twice) the but-ton on the remote control key, or turn thekey twice within 5 seconds in the opening di-rection.

The Safe* security system and the anti-theftalarm* deactivate immediately when onlythe driver door is opened.

In vehicles with Infotainment system, you canprogramme the security central locking sys-tem directly ››› page 92 .

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Lock-ing system “Safe” on page 97.

Note● Do not use the remote control key untilthe vehicle is visible.● Other functions of the remote controlkey ››› page 106, Convenience open/closefunction.

Unlocking and locking from the inside

Fig. 71 In the centre console: central lockingswitch

● Lock: press the ››› Fig. 71 button.● Unlock: Press the button again››› Fig. 71.

Please note the following when using thecentral locking switch to lock your vehicle:

● It is not possible to open the doors or therear lid from the outside (for safety reasons,e.g. when stopped at traffic lights).● The LED in the central locking switch lightsup when all the doors are closed and locked.● You can open the doors individually fromthe inside by pulling the inside door handle.● In the event of an accident in which theairbags inflate, doors locked from the insidewill be automatically unlocked to facilitateaccess and assistance.

WARNING● The central locking switch also workswith the ignition switched off, except whenthe “safe” system is activated.● The central locking switch does not oper-ate if the vehicle is locked from the outsideand the security system is switched on.● Locked doors could delay assistance in anemergency. Do not leave anyone, especial-ly children, in the vehicle.

NoteYour vehicle will lock automatically when itreaches a speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph)(Auto Lock) ››› page 91 . You can unlock thevehicle again using the button on thecentral locking switch.

93

Operation

Unlock and lock the vehicle withKeyless Access

Fig. 72 Keyless Access: proximity zones.

Fig. 73 Door handle: sensor surfaces

››› Fig. 73Unlocking sensor surface on the insideof the door handle.Locking sensor surface on the outsideof the door handle.

A

B

Depending on the equipment, the vehiclemay have the Keyless Access system.

Configure the Keyless Access systemThe behaviour of the Keyless Access systemcan be adjusted in the Vehicle settingsmenu of the Infotainment system.

If the Keyless Access function is disabled, itsoperation is limited.

Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni-tion system to unlock and lock the vehiclewithout actively using its key. For this, it is on-ly necessary that there is a valid vehicle key inthe detection area corresponding to the at-tempted access to the vehicle.

Unlock the vehicle● Touch the surface of the sensor located in-side the handle A. All turn signals will flashtwice.

If the sensor surface is touched twice, theentire vehicle will unlock.

Automatic vehicle unlockThe vehicle can be unlocked automatically.To do this, the function must be activated inthe Infotainment system and the vehicle keymust be in the proximity zone of the vehicle.

If the key is in the proximity zone, the vehicleis automatically unlocked.

If the vehicle is not unlocked for an extendedperiod, the function is deactivated.

The vehicle can be unlocked and locked viathe front doors only. When doing so, the re-mote control key must be no further thanapprox. 1.5 m away from the door handle.

It does not matter where you carry the key,e.g. in your jacket pocket.

Once the doors have been locked, they can-not be opened again immediately. This willenable you to check that the doors are prop-erly closed.

If you wish you may unlock only the corre-sponding door or the entire vehicle. Thenecessary adjustments can be performed invehicles with a driver information system››› page 86.

General informationIf a valid key is in the proximity of the car››› Fig. 72, the Keyless Access locking andstarting system gives the key entry as soon asone of the sensor surfaces on the front doorhandles is touched.

The following features are then availablewithout having to use the vehicle key active-ly:

● Keyless Entry: unlocking the vehicle usingthe handles of the front doors or the soft-touch/handle on the rear lid.

94

Opening and closing

● Keyless Exit: locking the vehicle using thesensor of the driver or passenger door han-dle.● Easy Open: opening the rear lid movingone foot below the rear bumper››› page 104.● Press & Drive: keyless starting of the enginewith the starter button ››› page 201 .

The central locking and locking systems op-erate in the same way as a normal lockingand unlocking system. Only the controlschange.

Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with adouble flash of the indicator lights; lockingby a single flash.

If the vehicle is locked and then all doors andthe rear lid are closed leaving the last keyused inside the vehicle and none outside,the vehicle will not lock immediately. All thevehicle's indicator lights will flash four times.The vehicle will lock after a few seconds ifyou do not open any door or the rear lid.

The vehicle will lock again after a few sec-onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail toopen any door or boot hatch.

Unlocking and opening the doors(Keyless-Entry)● Grip one of the front door handles. Whenyou do this, you touch the sensor surface

››› Fig. 73 A (arrow) of the handle and thevehicle unlocks.● Open the door.

On vehicles with selective opening or info-tainment system configuration, pulling thedoor handle twice will unlock all doors.

In vehicles without the “Safe” security sys-tem: closing and locking the doors(Keyless-Exit)● Switch the ignition off.● Close the driver's door.● Touch (once) the locking sensor surface››› Fig. 73 B (arrow) on one of the front doorhandles. The door that is used must beclosed.

In vehicles with the “Safe” security system:closing and locking the doors (Keyless-Exit)● Switch the ignition off.● Close the driver's door.● Touch (once) the sensor surface ››› Fig. 73B (arrow) on one of the front door handles.

The vehicle locks with the “Safe” securitysystem ››› page 97 . The door that is usedmust be closed.● Touch (twice) the sensor surface ››› Fig. 73B (arrow) of one of the front door handles

to lock the vehicle without activating the“Safelock” security system ››› page 97 .

Unlocking and locking the boot hatchWhen the vehicle is locked, the rear lid auto-matically unlocks on opening if there is a val-id vehicle key in the proximity zone››› Fig. 72.

Open or close the rear lid normally.

After closing, the hatch locks automatically.If the complete vehicle is unlocked, the rearlid will not lock automatically after closing it.

What happens when locking the vehiclewith a second keyIf there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle andit is locked from the outside with a secondvehicle key, the key inside the vehicle isblocked for engine ignition ››› page 201 . Inorder to enable engine ignition, press the button on the key inside the vehicle.

Automatically disabling sensorsIf the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for along period of time, the proximity sensors onthe passenger doors are automatically disa-bled.

If one of the sensor surfaces on the doorhandles is often activated in an unusual man-ner with the vehicle locked (e.g. by thebranches of a bush rubbing against it), allproximity sensors are disabled for a certainperiod of time.

Sensors will again be enabled: »95

Operation

● After a time.● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but-ton on the key.● OR: if the boot is opened.● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked manually withthe key.

Keyless Access temporary disconnectionfunction*You can deactivate the vehicle's KeylessAccess unlocking for one locking and un-locking cycle.

● Move the gear lever to position P sinceotherwise the vehicle cannot be locked.● Close the door.● Push the central locking button on theremote control and touch the locking sensorsurface of the driver door handle››› Fig. 73 B within the following 5 seconds.Do not grasp the door handle; otherwise thevehicle will not unlock. Deactivation is alsopossible if the vehicle is locked through thedriver’s door lock.● To check that the function has been deac-tivated, wait at least 10 seconds, grip and pullon the door handle. The door should notopen.

The next time the door can only be unlockedvia the remote control or the lock cylinder.

The next time the door is locked/unlocked,Keyless Access will be active again.

Keyless Access permanent disconnectionfunction*You can deactivate the vehicle unlock withKeyless Access permanently in the infotain-ment system so that others cannot unlock orstart the vehicle.

Convenience functionsTo close all the electric windows and thesunroof using the comfort function, keep afinger for a few seconds on the locking sen-sor surface ››› Fig. 73 B (arrow) of the doorhandle until the windows and roof haveclosed.

How the doors open when touching thesensor surface on the door handle will de-pend on the settings that have been activa-ted in the infotainment system, using thefunction button > Exterior > Closing.

CAUTIONThe sensor surfaces on the door handlescould engage if hit with a water jet or highpressure steam if there is a valid vehicle keyin the proximity. If at least one of the elec-tric windows is open and the sensor surface››› Fig. 73 B (arrow) on one of the handles isactivated continuously, all windows willclose.

Note● If the vehicle battery has little or nocharge, or the vehicle key battery is almostor entirely out of charge, you will probablynot be able to lock or unlock the vehiclewith the Keyless Access system. The vehiclecan be unlocked or locked manually››› page 100.● To control the proper locking of the vehi-cle, the release function is disabled for ap-prox. 2 seconds.● If the message Keyless access systemfaulty is displayed on the screen of thedash panel, abnormalities may occur in theoperation of the Keyless Access system.Contact a specialised workshop. To do so,CUPRA recommends going to a specialisedCUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealership.● Depending on the function set on the in-fotainment system for the mirrors, the ex-terior mirrors will unfold and the surroundlighting will come on when unlocking thevehicle using the sensor surface on thedriver and passenger door handles››› page 121.● If there is no valid key inside the vehicleor the system fails to detect one, a warningwill display on the dash panel screen. Thiscould happen if any other radio frequencysignal interferes with the key signal (e.g.from a mobile device accessory) or if thekey is covered by another object (e.g. analuminium case).

96

Opening and closing

● If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have alayer of salt, the correct functioning of thesensors on the door handles may be affec-ted. In this case, clean the vehicle.● The vehicle can only be locked if the se-lector lever is in the P position.● To improve the safety of your vehicle, theremote control of the system is equippedwith a position sensor. If this remote con-trol does not detect movement for a cer-tain length of time, the system will con-clude that the vehicle cannot be opened(e.g. on a night table) so it will be disabled.● If, when trying to block the vehicle, thelast used key is still inside, all the turn sig-nals will flash 4 times.

Locking system “Safe”1)

When the vehicle is blocked, the “Safe” se-curity system puts the door handles out ofoperation and prevents unauthorised per-sons for entering. The doors cannot beopened from inside ››› .

Depending on the vehicle, when switchingthe ignition off, a warning may be displayedon the control panel screen stating that the“Safe” security system is activated.

Lock the vehicle and activate the “Safe”security system.● Press the locking button once on the ve-hicle key.

Lock the vehicle without activating the“Safe” system.● Press the locking button on the vehiclekey twice.● OR: touch the sensor surface on the out-side of the door handle twice ››› Fig. 73 B.

When the “Safe” security system is disa-bled, the following needs to be taken intoaccount:● The vehicle can be unlocked and openedfrom the inside using an door handle.● The anti-theft alarm is activated.● The vehicle interior monitoring system andthe anti-tow system are disabled.

“Safe” statusThe flashing frequency of the diode in thedoor sill immediately confirms the process.Initially, the diode flashes in a fast sequencefor a brief period, then it stops for approxi-mately 30 seconds and, lastly continuesflashing slowly.

WARNINGDo not leave anyone (especially children) inthe vehicle if it is locked from the outsideand the “Safe” security system* is activa-ted, as the doors and windows cannot thenbe opened from the inside. Locked doorscould delay assistance in an emergency.

Anti-theft alarm system*

Description

The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficultto break into the vehicle or steal it. The sys-tem will initiate acoustic and optical warningsignals when your vehicle is tried to beforced.

The anti-theft alarm is automatically turnedon when the vehicle is locked with the key.The system is immediately activated and theturn signal light located on the driver doorwill flash along with the turn signals, indicat-ing that the alarm and the locking securitysystem (double lock) have been turned on.

If any of the doors or the bonnet are open,they will not be included in the protectionzones of the vehicle when the alarm is con-nected. If the door or the bonnet are »

1) Available depending on market and version.97

Operation

subsequently closed, they will be automati-cally included in the protection areas of thevehicle and the turn signals will flash accord-ingly when the doors close.

● The turn signal light will flash twice onopening and deactivating the alarm.● The turn signal light will flash once on clos-ing and activating the alarm.

When does the system trigger an alarm?The anti-theft alarm siren will be triggeredfor about 30 seconds alongside a sound andoptical (flashing) warning signals and will berepeated about ten times when the vehicle islocked and the following unauthorised ac-tions are attempted:

● Opening a door that is mechanically un-locked using the vehicle key without switch-ing on the ignition in the next 15 seconds (incertain markets, such as the Netherlands,there is no 15 second waiting time and thealarm is activated immediately on openingthe door).● A door is opened.● Opening the bonnet.● The rear lid is opened.● When the ignition is switched on with anon-authorised key.● Undue manipulation of the alarm.● Disconnection of the vehicle battery.

● Movement inside the vehicle (in vehicleswith interior monitoring ››› page 99 ).● When the vehicle is towed (in vehicles withanti-tow system ››› page 99 ).● When the vehicle is raised (in vehicles withanti-tow system ››› page 99 ).● When the vehicle is transported on a ferryor by rail (vehicles with an anti-tow system orvehicle interior monitoring ››› page 99 ).● When a trailer connected to the anti-theftalarm system is disconnected.

How to turn OFF the alarm● Unlock the vehicle with the unlock button of the key.● OR: turn the ignition on with a valid key.

If the driver’s door is unlocked mechanicallyusing the key, the ignition must be turned onwithin 15 seconds of opening the door.

Otherwise, the alarm will trigger for 30 sec.and the ignition will be blocked.

CAUTIONIf the anti-theft security system is switchedoff, the vehicle interior monitoring and thetow-away protection are automatically dis-connected.

Note● After 28 days, the indicator light will beswitched off to prevent the battery fromexhausting if the vehicle has been leftparked for a long period of time. The alarmsystem remains activated.● If, after the audible warning goes off, an-other monitored area is accessed (e.g. therear lid is opened after a door has beenopened), the alarm is triggered again.● The anti-theft alarm is not activatedwhen the vehicle is locked from within us-ing the central locking button .● If the driver door is unlocked mechani-cally with the key, only the driver door isunlocked, the rest of the doors remainlocked. Only when the ignition has beenturned on will the other doors be available -but not unlocked - and the central lockingbutton will be activated.● If the vehicle battery is run down or flatthen the anti-theft alarm will not operatecorrectly.● Vehicle monitoring remains active even ifthe battery is disconnected or not workingfor any reason.● The alarm is triggered immediately if oneof the battery cables is disconnected whilethe alarm system is active.

98

Opening and closing

Interior monitoring and the anti-towsystem*

It is a monitoring or control function incor-porated in the anti-theft alarm* which de-tects unauthorised vehicle entry by means ofultrasound.

The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-towsensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch-ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switchedon. In order to activate it, all the doors andthe rear lid must be closed.

If the “Safe” security system* ››› page 97 isswitched off, the vehicle interior monitoringand the tow-away protection are automati-cally disconnected.

Activation● It is automatically switched on when theanti-theft alarm is activated.

Deactivation● Open the vehicle with the key, either me-chanically or by pressing the button on theremote control. The time period from whenthe door is opened until the ignition isturned on should not exceed 15 seconds,otherwise the alarm will be triggered.● Press the button on the remote controltwice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sensorswill be deactivated. The alarm system re-mains activated.

The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-tow system are automatically switched onagain next time the vehicle is locked.

If you wish to switch off the vehicle interiormonitoring and the anti-tow system, it mustbe done each time that the vehicle is locked;if not, they will be automatically switched on.

The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-tow system should be switched off if animalsare left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise,their movements will trigger the alarm) orwhen, for example, the vehicle is transportedor has to be towed with only one axle on theground.

Deactivation through the infotainmentsystem● Turn off the ignition and press the functionbutton > Exterior > Closing > Interiormonitoring.● When the vehicle is locked now, the vehi-cle interior monitoring and the tow-awayprotection are switched off until the nexttime the door is opened.

False alarmsInterior monitoring will only operate correct-ly if the vehicle is completely closed. Pleaseobserve related legal requirements.

The following cases may cause a falsealarm:● Open windows (partially or fully).● Panoramic/tilting sunroof open (partiallyor completely).● Movement of objects inside the vehicle,such as loose papers, items hanging fromthe rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc.

Note● If the vehicle is relocked and the alarm isactivated without the volumetric sensorfunction, relocking will activate the alarmwith all its functions, except the volumetricsensor. This function is reactivated whenthe alarm is switched on again, unless it isdeliberately switched off.● If the alarm has been triggered by thevolumetric sensor, this will be indicated bya flashing of the warning lamp on the driverdoor when the vehicle is opened. The flashis different to the flash indicating the alarmis activated.● The vibration of a mobile phone left in-side the vehicle may cause the vehicle inte-rior monitoring alarm to trigger, as bothsensors react to movements and shakes in-side the vehicle.● If on activating the alarm, any door or therear lid is open, only the alarm will be acti-vated. The vehicle interior monitoring andthe anti-tow system will only be activated »

99

Operation

once all the doors are closed (including therear lid).

Doors

Introduction

The doors and rear lid can be locked man-ually and partially opened, for example if thekey or the central locking is damaged.

WARNINGOpening and closing doors carelessly cancause serious injury.● If the vehicle is locked from outside, thedoors and windows cannot be opened fromthe inside.● Never leave children or disabled peoplealone in the car. They could be trapped inthe car in an emergency and will not beable to get themselves to safety.● Depending on the time of the year, tem-peratures inside a locked and closed vehi-cle can be extremely high or extremely lowresulting in serious injuries and illness oreven death, particularly for young children.

WARNINGGetting in the way of the doors and the rearlid is dangerous and can lead to serious in-jury.

● Open and close the doors and the rear lidonly when there is nobody in the way.

CAUTIONWhen opening and closing in an emergen-cy, carefully disassemble components andthen reassemble them carefully to avoiddamage to the vehicle.

Emergency unlocking or locking ofthe driver’s door

Fig. 74 Driver door handle: locking cylinder.

If the central locking system should fail tooperate, the driver door can still be lockedand unlocked by turning the key in the lock.

As a general rule, when the driver door islocked manually all other doors are locked.When it is unlocked manually, only the driverdoor opens. Please observe the instructions

relating to the anti-theft alarm system››› page 97.

● Remove the key blade from the vehicle key››› page 88.● Insert the key blade into the lock cylinderto unlock or lock the vehicle.

Special characteristics● The anti-theft alarm will remain activewhen vehicles are unlocked. However, thealarm will not be triggered ››› page 97 .● After the driver door is opened, you have15 seconds to switch on the ignition. Oncethis time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered.● Switch the ignition on. The electronic im-mobilizer recognises a valid vehicle key anddeactivates the anti-theft alarm system.

NoteThe anti-theft alarm is not activated whenthe vehicle is locked manually using the keyshaft ››› page 91 .

100

Opening and closing

Emergency lock of doors without lockcylinders

Fig. 75 Locking the door manually.

If the central locking system should fail towork at any time, doors with no lock cylinderwill have to be locked separately.

The emergency lock is located on the frontof the front passenger's door and the reardoors. It can only be seen if the door is open.

● Pull the cap out of the opening.● Insert the key in the inside slot and turn itto the right as far as it will go (if the door is onthe right side) or to the left (if the door is onthe left side).● Replace the cap.

Once the door has been closed it can nolonger be opened from the outside. Pull theinterior door handle once to unlock andopen the door.

Childproof locks

Fig. 76 Childproof lock on the left hand side door.

The childproof lock prevents the rear doorsfrom being opened from the inside. This sys-tem prevents minors from opening a dooraccidentally while the vehicle is running.

This function is independent of the vehicleelectronic opening and locking systems. Itonly affects rear doors. It can only be activa-ted and deactivated manually, as describedbelow:

Activating the childproof lock– Unlock the vehicle and open the door in

which you wish to activate the childprooflock.

– With the door open, rotate the groove inthe door using the ignition key, clockwisefor the left hand side doors ››› Fig. 76 and

anti-clockwise for the right hand sidedoors.

Deactivating the childproof lock– Unlock the vehicle and open the door

whose childproof lock you want to deacti-vate.

– With the door open, rotate the groove inthe door using the ignition key, anti-clock-wise for the left hand side doors ››› Fig. 76and clockwise for the right hand sidedoors.

Once the childproof lock is activated, thedoor can only be opened from the outside.

Rear lid

Introduction

WARNINGCareless and unsuitable locking, openingand closing of the rear lid can cause acci-dents and serious injury.● The rear lid must not be opened whenthe reverse or rear fog lights are lit. Thismay damage the tail lights.● Do not close the rear lid by pushing itdown with your hand on the rear window.The glass could smash. Risk of injury! »

101

Operation

● Ensure the rear lid is locked after closingit. If not, it may open unexpectedly whiledriving.● Closing the rear lid without observing andensuring it is clear could cause serious in-jury to you and to third parties. Make surethat no one is in the path of the rear lid.● Never drive with the rear lid open or half-closed, exhaust gases may penetrate intothe interior of the vehicle. Danger of poi-soning!● Never leave the vehicle unattended or al-low children to play inside or next to it, es-pecially if the rear lid is open. Childrencould enter the luggage compartment,close the rear lid and become trapped. Alocked vehicle can reach extremely highand low temperatures, depending on thetime of year, thus causing serious injuries,illness or even death.

CAUTIONBefore opening or closing the rear lid, makesure that there is enough space to open orclose it, e.g. when pulling a trailer or in a ga-rage.

NoteBefore closing the rear lid, make sure thatthe key has not been left inside the luggagecompartment.

Opening and closing the rear lid

Fig. 77 Rear lid: opening from outside.

The rear lid opening system operates electri-cally. It is activated by exerting slight pressureon the handle ››› Fig. 77 .

To lock or unlock the rear lid, press the or buttons of the vehicle key.

A warning appears on the instrument paneldisplay if the rear lid is open or not properlyclosed.* An audible warning is also given if itis opened while the vehicle is moving fasterthan 6 km/h (4 mph)*.

Opening and closing● To open: place slight pressure on the han-dle. The rear lid opens automatically.● To close: hold one of the handles on theinner trim and close it by moving it down-wards, or press the button on the rear lid*››› Fig. 78.

If the doors are locked, the rear lid is alsolocked.

Rear lid with electric opening andclosing*

Fig. 78 Rear lid: button to close the rear lid.

Fig. 79 On the driver’s door: button to open andclose the rear lid.

102

Opening and closing

Opening the rear lid● Unlock the vehicle ››› page 91 and brieflypress the handle of the rear lid. On vehicleswith Keyless Access you can directly pressthe handle of the rear lid. The rear lid is un-locked if an authorised key is recognised inthe proximity of the vehicle.● OR: depending on the features, pull the button on the driver door upwards ››› Fig. 79 .The button also works when the ignition isswitched off.● OR: press and hold the button of thevehicle key for approx. 1 second. If the vehi-cle is locked, only the rear lid is unlocked (thedoors remain locked).● OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access andsensor-controlled opening you can open therear lid by moving one foot in the area of thesensors located below the rear bumper (EasyOpen ››› page 104 ). The rear lid will be auto-matically opened.

Closing the rear lid● Briefly press the button on the rear lid››› Fig. 78 ››› in Introduction on page 101.● OR: depending on the features, pull the button on the driver door upwards ››› Fig. 79 .● OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access, pressand hold the vehicle key button until therear lid is closed, or move one foot into thearea of the sensors located below the rearbumper (Easy Open) ››› page 104 . The key

of the vehicle must not be further away than1.5 m from the boot or inside the vehicle.● OR: manually move the rear lid in the di-rection of closing until it closes automatical-ly.● The rear lid goes down automatically to thefinal position and also closes automatically››› in Introduction on page 101.

Interrupting opening or closingAfter beginning to open or close the rear lid,the action can be halted by pressing one ofthe buttons.

Continue opening or closing the rear lid byhand. To do this, some force will have to beused.

If you press one of the buttons again, therear lid will move again in the original direc-tion.

If the rear lid is met with resistance or an ob-stacle during the automatic opening or clos-ing, opening or closing will be interruptedimmediately. For the closing process, therear lid opens again slightly.

● Check why it has not been possible toopen or close the rear lid.● Try to open or close the rear lid again.● If necessary, the rear lid can be opened orclosed by hand using reasonable force.

Particular features if towing a trailerIf the factory-fitted towing bracket is electri-cally connected to a trailer ››› page 275 , theelectric rear lid can only be opened or closedwith the buttons on the rear lid itself.

Acoustic warningsThroughout the process of opening or clos-ing the rear lid, acoustic warnings can beheard. Exception: when the rear lid isopened manually using the handle or theEasy Open function with the movement ofthe foot or closed using the button on therear lid itself ››› Fig. 78 .

Modifying and memorising the openingangleIf the space behind or above the vehicle isless than the travel area of the rear lid, youcan change the opening angle of the rear lid.

To memorise a new opening angle, the rearlid must be open at least halfway.

● Interrupt the opening process in the de-sired position.● Press the button ››› Fig. 78 on the rearlid for at least 3 seconds.

The opening angle is memorised. Memorisa-tion is indicated by blinking of the hazardwarning lights and an audible warning. »

103

Operation

Resetting and memorising the openingangleFor the rear lid to reopen completely, theopening angle must be reset and memorisedagain.

● Release the rear lid and open it to thememorised height.● Lift the rear lid by hand as far as it goes. Todo this, some force will have to be used.● Press the button ››› Fig. 78 on the rearlid for at least 3 seconds.● This resets and memorises the factory-setopening angle. Memorisation is indicated byblinking of the hazard warning lights and anaudible warning.

Automatic protection against overheatingIf the system is operated repeatedly in ashort space of time, it automatically switchesoff to prevent overheating.

Once the system is cool again, the functioncan be reused. Until then, the rear lid canonly be opened and closed by hand usingreasonable force.

If with the rear lid open the vehicle battery isdisconnected ››› page 298 or the corre-sponding fuse burns out ››› page 57 , the sys-tem will have to be reset. This requires clos-ing the rear lid completely once.

Emergency unlocking

››› page 105

WARNINGIf a lot of snow builds up on the rear lid or itis heavily loaded, the rear lid may not openor, after opening, it may lower by itself dueto the extra weight and cause serious in-jury.● Do not open the rear lid when there is alot of snow on it or when carrying a load(e.g. on a rack).● Before opening the rear lid, remove thesnow or the load.

Rear lid with sensor-controlled open-ing and closing (Easy Open)

Fig. 80 Rear lid with sensor-controlled opening(Easy Open).

If there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity of the rear lid, it is possible to unlock andopen or close it moving one foot in the areaof the sensors located under the rear bump-er.

● Switch the ignition off.● Stand in front of the rear bumper, in themiddle.● With a brisk movement, bring your footand lower leg as close as you can to thebumper. The lower part of the leg needs tobe close to the upper sensor area and yourfoot must be close to the lower sensor area››› Fig. 80 1 .● Quickly remove your foot and lower legfrom the sensor areas ››› Fig. 80 2 . The rearlid will be automatically opened.● If the rear lid fails to open, repeat the pro-cedure after a few seconds.

The rear lid can be closed with another footmovement similar to the opening one (provi-ded a valid vehicle key is in the proximity ofthe rear lid).

When closed, the rear lid automatically locksif the vehicle has been locked beforehandand there is no valid key inside.

While the rear lid is in motion (either open-ing or closing), it can be stopped with anoth-er foot movement similar to the opening one(provided a valid vehicle key is in the proximi-ty of the rear lid).

104

Opening and closing

The Easy Open feature is not available or on-ly has limited availability in the following sit-uations (examples):

● If the rear bumper is very dirty.● If the rear bumper is wet with salt water,e.g. after having driven on gritted roads.● If the electrical unlocking tow hitch is notcovered.● If the vehicle has been equipped at a latertime with a tow bracket.

In the event of heavy rain, the Easy Openfeature may take a little longer to open theboot or may deactivate automatically, toavoid the boot opening by accident, e.g. be-cause of the running water.

The Easy Open function can be permanentlyconnected and disconnected in the infotain-ment system using the > Exterior > Clos-ing button.

WARNINGIf there is a valid key in the proximity of therear lid, in some cases the Easy Open func-tion may be accidentally activated and therear lid will open, for example, whensweeping under the rear bumper, when di-recting a water jet or high pressure steam tothe area or when carrying out maintenancework or repairs in that area. If accidentallyopened, the rear lid could injure somebody

situated in its area of operation or causematerial damage.● Therefore, always make sure that there isno unsupervised valid key in the area nearthe rear lid.● Before carrying out any maintenance orrepair work on the vehicle, always disablethe Easy Open feature via the infotainmentsystem.● Before washing the vehicle, always disa-ble the Easy Open feature via the infotain-ment system.● Before attaching a bicycle rack or a trail-er, ››› page 275 , always disable the EasyOpen feature via the infotainment system.

Emergency unlocking of the rear lid

Fig. 81 Detail of the luggage compartment: emer-gency unlocking

The rear lid can be unlocked from inside inthe event of an emergency (e.g. no battery).

There is a groove in the luggage compart-ment allowing access to the emergencyopening mechanism.

Unlocking the rear lid from inside the lug-gage compartment● Using the key blade, break the pre-punched sheet push it out towards the insideof the luggage compartment.● Insert the key blade into the slot and movethe key in the direction of the arrow until thelock unlocks ››› Fig. 81 .

105

Operation

Window controls

Electrically opening and closing thewindows

Fig. 82 Detail of the driver's door: window con-trols.

● Opening the window: press the button .● Closing the window: pull the button .

Buttons on the driver doorWindow on the front left doorWindow on the front right doorWindow on the rear left doorWindow on the rear right doorSafety switch for deactivating the electricwindow buttons in the rear doors.

1

2

3

4

5

The front and rear electric windows can beoperated by using the controls on the driverdoor. The other doors each have a switch fortheir own window.

Always close the windows fully if you park thevehicle or leave it unattended ››› .

You can use the electric windows for approx.10 minutes after switching off the ignition ifneither the driver door nor the front passen-ger door have been opened.

Safety switch *The safety control ››› Fig. 82 5 on the driverdoor can be used to disable the electric win-dow buttons on the rear doors.

Safety switch not pressed: buttons on reardoors are activated.

Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doorsare deactivated.

The safety control symbol lights up in yel-low if the buttons on the rear doors areswitched off.

Convenience open/close functionThe electric windows can be opened orclosed from outside using the vehicle key:

Convenience opening:● Press and hold the button on the remotecontrol key until all the windows and the sun-roof* have reached the desired position.

● OR: First unlock the vehicle using the button on the remote control key and thenkeep the key in the driver door lock until allthe windows and the sunroof* have reachedthe required position.

Convenience closing:● Press and hold button on the remotecontrol key until all the windows and the sun-roof* are closed ››› .● OR: Keep the key in the driver door in the"lock" position until all the windows and thesunroof* are closed.● OR by means of the Keyless Access* (onlyclosing): Press and hold the locking sensorsurface ››› Fig. 84 (arrow) on the door han-dle for several seconds to close the windowsand the sunroof*. If you release the sensorsurface, the closing movement stops.

During convenience closing, first the win-dows and then the sliding sunroof will beclosed.

In the infotainment system different settingscan be adjusted using the function button > Exterior > Windows> Convenience open-ing.

One-touch opening and closingThe one-touch automatic opening and clos-ing is used to open or close the windowscompletely. It will not be necessary to hold

106

Opening and closing

the button of the corresponding electricwindow.

For the automatic raising function: pull thebutton for the corresponding window up-wards until it reaches the second position.

For the automatic lowering function: pullthe button for the corresponding windowupwards until it reaches the second position.

Stop automatic movement: push or pull onthe button of the corresponding window.

Resetting one-touch opening and closingThe one-touch opening and closing functionis not active after the vehicle battery hasbeen disconnected or is flat and will have tobe reset.

● Pull the button of the corresponding win-dow and hold it for one second in this posi-tion.● Release the button and pull upwards andhold again. The one-touch function is nowready for operation.

The automatic one-touch electric windowscan be reinitialised individually or several at atime.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Intro-duction on page 100.

● Incorrect use of the electric windows canresult in injury.● Never close the rear lid without observingand ensuring it is clear, to do otherwisecould cause serious injury to you and thirdparties. Make sure that no one is in the pathof a window.● If the ignition is switched on, the electricequipment could be activated with risk ofinjury, for example, in the electric windows.● The doors can be locked using the re-mote control key. This could become anobstacle for assistance in an emergency sit-uation.● Therefore always take the key with youwhen you leave the vehicle.● The electric windows will work until theignition has been switched off and one ofthe front doors has been opened.● If necessary, use the safety switch to disa-ble the rear electric windows. Make surethat they have been disabled.● For safety reasons, you should only usethe remote control open and close func-tions within about 2 metres of the vehicle.To avoid injuries, always keep an eye on thewindows when pressing the button to closethem. The windows stop moving as soon asthe button is released.

NoteIf the window is not able to close because itis stiff or because of an obstruction, thewindow will automatically open again››› page 107. If this happens, check why thewindow could not be closed before at-tempting to close it again.

Window anti-trap function

The roll-back function reduces the risk of in-jury when the electric windows close.

● If a window is obstructed when closing au-tomatically, the window stops at this pointand lowers immediately ››› .● Next, check why the window does notclose before attempting it again.● If you try within the following 10 secondsand the window closes again with difficulty orthere is an obstruction, the automatic clos-ing will stop working for 10 seconds.● If the window is still obstructed, the win-dow will stop at this point.● If there is no obvious reason why the win-dow cannot be closed, try to close it again bypulling the tab within ten seconds. The win-dow closes with maximum force. The roll-back function is now deactivated. »

107

Operation

● If more than 10 seconds pass, the windowwill open fully when you operate one of thebuttons. One-touch closing is reactivated.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Elec-trically opening and closing the windows onpage 107.● The roll-back function does not preventfingers or other parts of the body gettingpinched against the window frame. Risk ofaccident.

Sunroof*

Introduction

The sunroof consists of two glass parts. Therear part is fixed and cannot be opened. It al-so has a sun blind.

The sunroof only works when the ignition isswitched on. Once the ignition has beenswitched off, you can still open or close thesunroof for a few minutes provided the driverdoor and the front passenger door are notopened.

WARNINGIf the sunroof is used negligently or withoutpaying due attention, it can cause seriousinjury.

● Open or close the sunroof and the sunblind only when no one is in their path ofmovement.● Never leave any key inside the vehiclewhen exiting.● Never leave a child or any other personwho may need help in the vehicle, especial-ly if they have access to the vehicle key. Ifusing they key unattended, they could lockthe vehicle, start the engine, switch on theignition and activate the sunroof.● After switching off, it is still possible toopen or close the sunroof during a shortspace of time provided that neither thedriver nor passenger door is opened.

CAUTION● To prevent damage, during winter tem-peratures remove any ice or snow thatmight be on the car roof before openingthe sunroof or adjusting the tilt position.● Before leaving the vehicle or in case ofrainfall, always close the sunroof. With thesunroof open or in a tilted position, watercan enter the interior and can cause con-siderable damage to the electrical system.As a result, other damage can occur in thevehicle.

Note● Leaves and other loose objects that ac-cumulate on the sunroof rails should be

regularly cleaned away either by hand orwith a vacuum.● If the sunroof does not work correctly,the anti-trap function will not work either.Contact a specialised workshop.

Operating the sunroof

Fig. 83 On the interior roof lining: sunroof button.

Functional area can be operated in twoways: sliding and pressing.

Sliding: The roof is opened or closed totallyor partially.

Pressing: The roof is raised, opened orclosed totally or partially. Press again to stopthe automatic movement.

108

Opening and closing

Raising, opening and closing the sunroofOpening the sunroof:● Automatic movement: slide your fingerback over the functional area ››› Fig. 83 A .● Manual movement: slide back over thefunctional area and keep it there.

Closing the sunroof:● Automatic movement: slide your fingerforward over the functional area A .● Manual movement: slide forward over thefunctional area and keep it there.

Raising the sunroof:● The sunroof can only be raised if it isclosed.● Automatic movement: press briefly in thecentre of the functional area B

Closing the sunroof when raised:● Automatic movement: slide your fingerforward over the functional area A orpress briefly in the centre of the functionalarea B .

Stop the automatic opening or closingmovement:● Press again on the functional area .

Convenience function to open orclose the sunroof*

Fig. 84 Door handle: sensor surface.

The sunroof can be opened and closed withthe convenience function, just like the win-dows.

Using the door lock*● Hold the key in the door lock of the driverdoor in either the unlocking or locking posi-tion to open or close the roof in the tiltedposition. Release the key to interrupt thisfunction.

Using the remote control● Keep the locking or unlocking buttonpressed to open or close the roof. If you re-lease the button is the opening or closing willstop.

Using the Keyless Access* system (onlyclosing)● Press and hold the locking sensor surface››› Fig. 84 (arrow) on the door handle toclose the sunroof. If you release the sensorsurface, the closing movement stops.

Anti-trap function of the panoramicsunroof and sunshade

The anti-trap function can reduce the risk ofinjury when closing the sunroof and the sunblind ››› . If the sunroof or sun blind en-counter resistance or an obstacle when clos-ing, they reopen immediately.

● Check why the sunroof or sun blind do notclose.● Try to close the sunroof or sun blind again.● If the sunroof or sun blind cannot beclosed due to an obstacle or some resist-ance, it stops at the corresponding positionand then opens. For automatic closing, anew closing attempt might take place.● If the sunroof or sun blind is still unable toclose, close it without the anti-trap function.

Closing the sunroof without the anti-trapfunction● Before approx. 5 seconds after activationof the anti-trap function, slide your finger »

109

Operation

forward over the functional area ››› Fig. 83 A and keep pressed until the sun-roof is fully closed.● The sunroof closes without the anti-trapfunction intervening!● If the sunroof will still not close, visit a spe-cialised workshop.

WARNINGClosing the sunroof or sun blind withoutthe anti-trap function can cause serious in-juries.● Always be careful when closing the sun-roof and sun blind.● No person should ever remain in the wayof the sunroof or sun blind, especially whenclosing without the anti-trap function.● The anti-trap function does not preventfingers or other parts of the body from be-coming trapped against the roof frame andinjuries occurring.

Lights

Vehicle lighting

Control lamps

It lights up

Driving light totally or partially faulty.

Fault in the cornering light system.

It lights up

Rear fog light switched on.

It lights up

Left or right turn signal.The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a turn sig-nal is faulty.

Hazard warning lights on ››› page 115 .

It lights up

Trailer turn signals

It lights up

Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 112 .

It lights up

The Light Assist system is on ››› page 113 .

Several warning and control lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-ed on, signalling that the function is beingverified. They will switch off after a few sec-onds.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Con-trol and warning lamps on page 81.

Lighting and visibility buttons

Fig. 85 Dash panel: lights control.

By clicking on the button you can se-lect between (the corresponding indicatorlights up):

Switching on the dipped beam headlights.

Automatic control of dipped beam head-lights and daytime running lights.

110

Lights

Switching on the side lights.

Additionally, the following light functions canbe activated by pressing on the correspond-ing symbol.

When the function is activated, the corre-sponding symbol lights up. To deactivate it,you will need to press on the symbol again.

Turning the fog lights* on or off

Turning the rear fog lights on or off.

Connecting or disconnecting the wind-screen demisting function ››› page 146 .

Connecting or disconnecting the heatedrear window ››› page 146 .

The driver is personally responsible for thecorrect use and adjustment of the lights in allsituations.

Automatic dipped beam headlight control*The automatic dipped beam control is mere-ly intended as an aid and is not able to recog-nise all driving situations.

When the lamp is alight, the vehiclelights and the instrument panel and controls

automatically switch on in the following sit-uations ››› :

● The photo sensor detects darkness, for ex-ample, when driving through a tunnel. Theyswitch off when adequate lighting is detec-ted.● The rain sensor detects rain and activatesthe wipers. They switch off when the wipershave not been activated for a few minutes.

Daytime running lightsThe daytime running lights consist of individ-ual lights, integrated in the front headlights.

The daytime running lights come on everytime the ignition is switched on if the lampsare off or the lamp is alight, if the lightsensor does not detect darkness. The day-light running lights turn off when the ignitionis turned off.

When the lamp is alight, a light sensorautomatically switches dipped beam on andoff (including the control and instrumentlighting) or the daytime running lights de-pending on the level of exterior lighting.

Motorway light*The motorway light is available on vehiclesequipped with LED High lights.

The function is connected and disconnectedvia the corresponding Infotainment systemmenu.

● Activation: when going above 110 km/h(68 mph) for more than 10 seconds, the dip-ped beam raises slightly to increase the driv-er's visibility distance.● Deactivation: when reducing the speed ofthe vehicle below 100 km/h (62 mph), thedipped beam immediately returns to its nor-mal position.

Audible warnings to advise the driver thatthe lights have not been switched offIf the ignition is not connected and the driverdoor is open, an audible warning signal isheard in the following cases: this will remindyou to turn the light off.

● When the parking light is on ››› page 112 .● When the lamp or is on.

WARNINGIf the road is not well lit and other roadusers cannot see the vehicle well enough orat all, accidents may occur.● The automatic dipped beam control( ) only switches on the dipped beamwhen there are changes in light conditionsbut not, for example, when it is foggy.

WARNINGThe side lights or daytime running lights arenot bright enough to illuminate the road »

111

Operation

ahead and to ensure that other road usersare able to see you.● Always use your dipped beam head lightsif it is raining or if visibility is poor.● Never drive with daytime lights if the roadis not well lit due to weather or lightingconditions.

WARNINGIf the headlights are set too high and notused correctly, there is a risk of dazzling ordistracting other road users. This could re-sult in a serious accident.● Always make sure that the headlights arecorrectly adjusted.

Note● The legal requirements regarding the useof vehicle lights in each country must beobserved.● The dipped beam headlights will onlywork with the ignition on. The side lightscome on automatically when the ignition isturned off.● The rear fog light can dazzle drivers be-hind you. You should use the rear fog lightonly when visibility is very poor.

Turn signal and main beam lever

Fig. 86 Turn signal and main beam lever.

More the lever to the required position:

Right turn light or right-hand parkinglight (ignition switched off).Left turn light or left-hand parking light(ignition switched off).Turning main beam headlights on: con-trol lamp lit up on the instrument pan-el.The headlight flasher comes on while wepull the lever. Control lamp lit up.

Place the lever in rest position to turn off thecorresponding function.

Convenience turn signalsWhen the ignition is switched on, move thelever as far as possible upwards or down-

1

2

3

4

wards and release the lever. The turn signalwill flash three times.

The convenience turn signals are activatedand deactivated in the infotainment systemby means of the function button > Exteri-or > Lights > Convenience turn signals››› page 86.

In vehicles that do not have the correspond-ing menu, this function can be deactivated ina specialised workshop.

Parking light The parking lights will only work with the ig-nition off. If said light is on, an audible warn-ing will sound while the driver door is open.

● Switch the ignition off.● Move the turn signal lever up or down.

When the parking light is switched on, thefront side light and the tail light on the corre-sponding side of the vehicle turn on.

Parking light on both sides● Switch the ignition off.● Press the button to select .● Lock the vehicle from the outside.

In doing so, only the side lights of both head-lights light up, and additionally the tail lightswill do so partially.

112

Lights

WARNINGImproper or lack of use of the turn signals,or forgetting to deactivate them can con-fuse other road users. This could result in aserious accident.● Always give warning when you are goingto change lane, overtake or when turning,activating the turn signal in good time.● As soon as you have finished changinglane, overtaking or turning, switch the turnsignal off.

WARNINGIncorrect use of the headlights may causeaccidents and serious injury, as the mainbeam may distract or dazzle other drivers.

Note● When you turn the ignition off withouthaving turned the turn signals off, anacoustic signal sounds while the driver dooris open. This is intended as a reminder toswitch off the turn signal, unless you wish toleave the parking light on.● If the convenience turn signals are oper-ating (three flashes) and the other conven-ience turn signals are switched on, the ac-tive part stops flashing and only flashesonce in the new part selected.● The turn signal only works when the igni-tion is switched on. The hazard warning

lights also work when the ignition is switch-ed off.● If a trailer turn signal malfunctions, thecontrol lamp will stop flashing (trailer turnsignals) and the vehicle turn signal will flashat double speed.● The main beam headlights can only beswitched on if the dipped beam headlightsare already on.● In cold or damp weather conditions, theheadlights, tail lights and turn signals maymist up inside temporarily. This is normaland in no way effects the useful life of thevehicle lighting system.● The parking light does not activate auto-matically if the left- or right-hand turn sig-nal is left on and the ignition is disconnec-ted.

Main beam assist (Light Assist)*

The main beam assist automatically preventsglare from vehicles moving in the oppositedirection or ahead in the same direction. Inaddition, the main beam assist detects illu-minated areas and disconnects the mainbeam headlight when passing, e.g. by popu-lated areas.

Within its limitations, the assist system auto-matically connects or disconnects the mainbeam headlight depending on the environ-

mental and traffic conditions, as well as thespeed ››› .

Switching the main beam assist on ● Turn on the ignition and select the mode in the lights panel ››› Fig. 85 .● From the base position, press the turn sig-nal and main beam headlights lever forwards››› Fig. 86 3 When the lamp is displayedon the instrument panel display, the mainbeam assist is switched on.

Switching the main beam assist off ● Disconnect the mode in the lightspanel ››› Fig. 85 .● OR: while the main beam is on, pull theturn signal light and main beam headlightslever forwards ››› Fig. 86 4 .● OR: push the turn signal and main beamheadlight lever forwards to manually turn onthe main beam. The main beam assist willthen be deactivated.

System limitationsIn the following cases, the main beam head-light must be switched off manually becausethe main beam assist will not disconnect iton time or disconnect it at all:

● On roads with insufficient lighting with veryreflective signs »

113

Operation

● If road users are insufficiently lit up, e.g.pedestrians or cyclists.● On closed curves, when the traffic in theopposite direction is partially hidden, on pro-nounced slopes or inclinations.● On roads with traffic in the opposite direc-tion and with a central reservation barrierwhere the driver can see over it e.g. lorrydrivers.● In the event of fog, snow or heavy rain● In the event of dust or sand storms● If the windscreen is damaged in the cam-era's field of vision.● If the camera's field of vision is misted up,dirty or covered by a sticker, snow or ice.● If the camera is damaged or if the powersupply has been cut off.

WARNINGThe convenience features of the mainbeam assist should not encourage the tak-ing of risks. The system is not a replace-ment for driver concentration.● You are always in control of the mainbeam and adapting it to the light, visibilityand traffic conditions.● It is possible that the main beam head-light control does not recognise all drivingsituations and is limited under certain cir-cumstances.

● When the field of vision of the camera isdirty, covered or damaged, operation ofthe main beam control may be affected.This also applies when changes are made tothe vehicle lighting system, for example, ifadditional headlights are installed.

CAUTIONTo avoid affecting the operation of the sys-tem, take the following points into consid-eration:● Clean the field of vision of the cameraregularly and make sure it is free of snowand ice.● Do not cover the field of vision of thecamera.● Check that the windscreen is not dam-aged in the area of the field of vision of thecamera.

Note● The headlight flasher can be turned onand off manually at any time with the turnsignal and main beam lever ››› page 112 .● If there are objects that radiate light inthe camera's area of influence, e.g. a porta-ble navigation system, this may affect theoperation of the main beam assist system.

Fog lights with cornering light func-tion

The cornering light function is an additionalfunction to the dipped beam headlights toimprove lighting of the side of the road whentaking a sharp turn at low speed.

The cornering light function works when thedipped beam headlights are already on and itis activated when driving at speeds below ap-proximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

● If the steering wheel is turned or the turnsignal is switched on, the front fog light grad-ually turns on. After the turn, the corneringlight function is gradually switched off.● When engaging reverse gear, both frontfog lights turn on.

“Coming home” and “Leaving home”function

The “Coming home” and “Leaving home”function lights up the vehicle’s immediateproximity when getting into and out of it inthe dark. When switched on, the front posi-tion and dipped beam lights, tail lights and li-cense plate light come on.

The “Leaving Home” is controlled by a pho-tosensor.

114

Lights

In the vehicle settings menu of the infotain-ment system you can adjust the duration ofthe light switch-off delay, and activate anddeactivate the function.

Activating the “Coming Home” functionFor vehicles with light and rain sensors.● Turn off the vehicle and turn off the igni-tion with the lights in ››› page 110 mode.● The automatic “Coming Home” function isonly active when the light sensor detectsdarkness.

For vehicles without light and rain sensors.● Switch the ignition off.● Activate the headlight flashers for approxi-mately 1 second.

When the driver door is opened, the “Com-ing Home” lighting comes on. The headlightturning off time counts from when the lastdoor or rear lid are closed.

The “Coming Home” lighting turns off inthe following cases:● Automatically, once the headlight turningoff time has elapsed.● Automatically, when a vehicle door or therear lid is still open 30 seconds after startingthe engine.● If the light panel lamps are off ››› page 110 .● With the ignition is switched on.

Activating the “Leaving Home” function● Unlock the vehicle using the remote con-trol.● The “Leaving Home” function is only acti-vated when the lights are in mode andthe light sensor detects darkness.

The “Leaving Home” lighting switches offin the following cases:● Automatically, when the “Leaving Home”switch-on time ends (default 30 sec).● When the vehicle is locked using the re-mote control.● If the light panel lamps are off ››› page 110 .● With the ignition is switched on.

NoteTo activate the “Coming Home” and “Leav-ing Home” functions, the lamp on themain switch of the lights should be on andthe light sensor should detect darkness.

Hazard warning lights

Fig. 87 Dash panel: hazard warning lights switch

The hazard warning lights are used to drawthe attention of other road users to your ve-hicle in emergencies.

If your vehicle breaks down:

1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance frommoving traffic.

2. Press the button to switch on the hazardwarning lights ››› .

3. Switch the ignition off.

4. Apply the electronic parking brake.

5. Move the selector lever to position P.

6. Use the warning triangle to draw the at-tention of other road users to your vehi-cle.

7. Always take the vehicle key with you whenyou leave the vehicle. »

115

Operation

All turn signals flash simultaneously when thehazard warning lights are switched on. Thetwo turn signal turn signal lamps and theturn signal lamp in the switch will flash atthe same time. The simultaneous hazardwarning lights also work when the ignition isswitched off.

Emergency braking warningIf the vehicle brakes suddenly and continu-ously at a speed of more than 80 km/h (50mph), the brake light flashes several timesper second to warn the vehicles driving be-hind. If you continue braking, the hazardwarning lights will come on automaticallywhen the vehicle comes to a standstill. Theyswitch off automatically when the vehiclestarts to move again.

WARNING● The risk of an accident increases if yourvehicle breaks down. Always use the hazardwarning lights and a warning triangle todraw the attention of other road users toyour stationary vehicle.● Due to the high temperatures that thecatalytic converter can reach, never park inan area where the catalytic converter couldcome into contact with highly inflammablematerials, for example dry grass or spiltpetrol. This could start a fire.

Note● The battery will run down if the hazardwarning lights are left on for a long time,even if the ignition is switched off.● The use of the hazard warning lights de-scribed here is subject to the relevant stat-utory requirements.

Dynamic headlight range control

The headlight range is automatically adjus-ted according to the vehicle load statuswhen they are switched on.

WARNINGHeavy objects in the vehicle may mean thatthe headlights dazzle and distract otherdrivers. This could result in a serious acci-dent.● Adjust the light beam to the vehicle loadstatus so that it does not blind other driv-ers.

Driving abroad

The light beam of the dipped beam lights isasymmetric: the side of the road on whichyou are driving is lit more intensely.

When a car that is manufactured in a countrythat drives on the right travels to a country

that drives on the left (or vice versa), it isnormally necessary to cover part of theheadlight bulbs with stickers or to changethe adjustment of the headlights to avoiddazzling other drivers.

In such cases, the regulations specify certainlight values that must be complied with fordesignated points of the light distribution.This is known as “Tourist light”.

The light distribution of the headlights allowsthe specific “tourist light” values to be metwithout the need for stickers or changes be-ing made to the settings.

Note“Tourist light” is only allowed temporarily. Ifyou are planning a long stay in a countrythat drives on the other side, you shouldtake the vehicle to an Authorised TechnicalService to change the headlights.

Interior lights

Lighting of the instrument panel, dis-plays and switches

Depending on the model, the lighting of theinstrument cluster and controls can be ad-justed in the infotainment system, using the > Interior > Light ››› page 86 functionbutton.

116

Lights

With the ignition switched on and withoutswitching on the lights, the lighting dims asthe exterior light decreases. In some cases,e.g. when driving through a tunnel withoutthe function active, the instrument pan-el lighting may even switch off. The objectiveof this function is to provide the driver with avisual indication that he or she should acti-vate the dipped beam.

If your vehicle is equipped with a digital in-strument cluster (Digital SEAT Cockpit), thefollowing message will appear Turn on thelights on the instrument cluster.

Interior and reading lights

Fig. 88 Detail of roof lining: front lighting of thepassenger compartment.

Turning the interior lights on or off.

Door contact connection.The interior lights come on automaticallywhen you unlock the vehicle, open a dooror disconnect the ignition.The light goes out a few seconds afterclosing all the doors, when locking the ve-hicle or connecting the ignition.

Reading lightThe reading light is tactile, each lens isturned on and off individually by pressing inthe respective central area. In addition, theintensity of the light can be adjusted accord-ing to the pressure exerted.

If you want to turn on the two lenses togeth-er you must press the symbol ››› Fig. 88 .

Glove compartment and luggage com-partment lighting*When opening and closing the glove com-partment on the front passenger side andthe rear lid, the respective light will automati-cally switch on and off.

Footwell lighting*The lights in the footwell area below the dash(driver and front passenger sides) will switch

on when the doors are opened and will de-crease in intensity while driving. This intensitycan be adjusted through the infotainmentsystem menu using the function button >Interior > Light ››› page 86 ).

NoteThe reading lights go out when the vehicleis closed and locked or after a few minutesof turning the ignition off. This prevents thebattery from discharging.

117

Operation

Ambient light*

Fig. 89 Schematic representation: Ambient light

The ambient light lights up the area of thecentre console, the footwell area and, de-pending on the version, the front door pan-els and the instrument panel line.

There are predefined Ambient Light ver-sions ››› Fig. 89 . The intensity of the lightingcan be adjusted using the function button :

● Automatic: lights up the interior of the ve-hicle depending on the selected drivingmode.● Manual: to adjust the intensity of the am-bient light in each of the areas as well as tochange the colour in the versions that havelighting on the front door panel and the in-strument panel line.● Off: turns off the ambient light.

118

Visibility

Visibility

Windscreen wiper and rearwindow wiper systems

Window washer lever

Fig. 90 Operating the windscreen wiper and rearwiper.


0 Windscreen wipers off.

1

Wiper intervals.Use control ››› Fig. 90 A to set the in-terval (vehicles without rain sensor), orthe sensitivity of the rain sensor.

2 Slow sweep adjustable by using control››› Fig. 90 A .

3 Fast sweep adjustable by using control››› Fig. 90 A .


4 Short wipe. Brief press, short clean.Hold the lever down for more time to in-crease the wipe frequency.

5

Windscreen washer. The windscreenwasher function is activated by pushingthe lever towards the steering wheel,and the wipers operate simultaneously.

6 Interval wipe for rear window. The wiperwill wipe the window approximately ev-ery six seconds.

7 The rear window wash function is activa-ted by pressing the lever, and the rearwiper starts simultaneously.

WARNINGIn cold conditions you should not use thewash/wipe system unless you have warmedthe windscreen with the heating and venti-lation system. The windscreen washer fluidcould otherwise freeze on the windscreenand obscure your view of the road.

CAUTIONIf the ignition is switched off with the wind-screen wipers active, they complete theirwipe before returning to the rest position.When switching the ignition back on, thewindscreen wiper will continue to operateat the same wiping level. Ice, snow and oth-er obstacles on the windscreen may dam-

age the wiper and the windscreen wipermotor.● If necessary, remove snow and ice fromthe windscreen wipers before starting yourjourney.● Carefully lift the frozen windscreen wip-ers from the glass. CUPRA recommends ade-icer spray for this operation.● Do not switch on the windscreen wipers ifthe windscreen is dry. Cleaning with thewindscreen wipers while dry can causedamage.● In icy conditions, always check that thewiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-fore using the wipers. In cold weather, itmay help to leave the vehicle parked withthe wipers in service position ››› page 50 .

Note● The windscreen and window wipers onlyfunction when the ignition is switched onand the bonnet or rear lid, respectively, areclosed.● The rear wiper is automatically switchedon when the windscreen wiper is on and thecar is in reverse gear.

119

Operation

Wiper functions

Windscreen wipers performance in differ-ent situations● If you stop the vehicle with the windscreenwiper in position 1 or 2, it will automaticallychange to a lower position speed. The setspeed will be resumed when the vehicle pullsaway.● The air conditioner comes on for approxi-mately 30 seconds in air recirculation modewhen the windscreen washer is activated,to prevent the smell of the windscreenwasher fluid entering the inside the vehicle.● When wiping at intervals, the intervals varyaccording to the speed. The higher the vehi-cle speed the shorter the intervals.

Heated windscreen washer jets*The heating only thaws the frozen jets, itdoes not thaw the water in the washer hoses.When the ignition is switched on the heatedwindscreen washer jets automatically adjustthe heat depending on the ambient temper-ature.

Note● The wiper will try to wipe away any obsta-cles that are on the windscreen. The wiperwill stop moving if the obstacle blocks itspath. Remove the obstacle and switch thewiper back on again.

● The windscreen will be wiped again ap-proximately 5 seconds after the windscreenwasher has been activated, provided thevehicle is moving (“drip” function). If youactivate the wipers less than 10 seconds af-ter the “drip” function, a new wash se-quence will begin without performing thelast wipe. For the “drip” function to workagain, you have to turn the ignition off andthen on again.

Rain sensor

Fig. 91 Wiper lever: adjust the rain sensor A.

Fig. 92 Rain sensor sensitive surface

The rain sensor controls the frequency ofthe windscreen wiper intervals, dependingon the amount of rain ››› . The sensitivityof the rain sensor can be adjusted manually.Manual wipe ››› page 119 .

Move the lever to the required position››› Fig. 91:

Rain sensor off.Rain sensor on; automatic wipe if neces-sary.Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor– Set control to the right: high sensitivity.– Set control to the left: low sensitivity.

When the ignition is switched off and thenback on, the rain sensor remains active andstarts operating again when the windscreenwipers are in position 1 and the vehicle istravelling at more than 16 km/h (10 mph).

0

1

A

120

Visibility

Modified behaviour of the rain sensorPossible causes of faults and mistaken read-ings on the sensitive surface ››› Fig. 92 of therain sensor include:

● Damaged wipers: a film of water on thedamaged blades may lengthen the activationtime, reduce the washing intervals or result ina fast and continuous wipe.● Insects: insects on the sensor may triggerthe windscreen wiper.● Salt on the road: in winter, salt spread onthe roads may cause an excessively longwipe when the windscreen is almost dry.● Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotuseffect) or traces of detergent (car wash) mayreduce the effectiveness of the rain sensoror make it react more slowly, later or not atall.● Windscreen crack: the impact of a stonewill trigger a single wipe cycle with the rainsensor on. Next the rain sensor detects thereduction in the sensitive surface area andadapts accordingly. The behaviour of thesensor will vary with the size of the damagecaused by the stone.

WARNINGThe rain sensor may not detect enough rainto switch on the wipers.

● If necessary, switch on the wipers man-ually when water on the windscreen ob-structs visibility.

Note● Regularly clean the sensitive surface ofthe rain sensor ››› Fig. 92 (arrow) and checkfor possible damage to the wiper blades.● To remove wax and coatings, we recom-mend a window cleaner containing alcohol.● Do not put stickers on the windscreen infront of the rain sensor*. This may causesensor disruption or faults.

Mirrors

Interior mirror anti-dazzle function

Rear view mirror with automatic anti-daz-zle function*The anti-dazzle function is activated everytime the ignition is switched on.

When the anti-dazzle function is enabled,the interior rear vision mirror will darken au-tomatically according to the amount of lightit receives. The anti-dazzle function is can-celled if reverse gear is engaged.

WARNINGIn the event that an automatic anti-dazzlerear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte flu-id may leak. This could cause irritation tothe skin, eyes and respiratory organs. If youcome into contact with this liquid, it mustbe rinsed with large quantities of water. Ifnecessary, get medial help.

CAUTIONIn the event that an automatic anti-dazzlerear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte flu-id may leak. This liquid attacks plastic sur-faces. Clean it with a wet sponge as soon aspossible.

Note● If the light incident in the interior rear vi-sion mirror is obstructed (e.g. with the sunblind*), the anti-dazzle rear vision mirrorwith automatic setting will not operate per-fectly.● When the interior lights are on or reversegear engaged, the mirrors do not darkenwith automatic adjustment for anti-dazzleposition.● If you have to stick any type of sticker onthe windscreen, do not do so in front of thesensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-dazzle function from working well or evenfrom working at all.

121

Operation

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

Fig. 93 Detail of the driver's door: control for theexterior mirror.

Turn the control to the corresponding posi-tion:

Turning the knob to the desired posi-tion, adjust the mirrors on the driverside (L, left) and the passenger side (R,right) to the direction desired.Depending on the equipment fitted onthe vehicle, the mirrors may be heatedaccording to the outside temperature.Folding in mirrors.

L/R

Synchronized regulation of the exteriormirrorsIn the infotainment system, using the func-tion button > Interior > Mirrors, the exte-rior mirrors can be selected to adjust in asynchronised manner.

● Turn the knob to position L1).● Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror. Theright exterior mirror will be adjusted at thesame time (synchronised).● If necessary, correct the right-hand rear-view mirror: rotate the control to position R1).

Tilt function for front passenger exteriormirror*When parking backwards, and in order to beable to see the kerb, the passenger side mir-ror can be automatically tilted towards thepassenger to provide a better view of thekerb. The control must be in the position R1)

for this feature to be operational.

The mirror returns to its original position assoon as you drive forward at over 15 km/h(9 mph) or switch off the ignition. It also re-turns to its original position if the position ofthe control is adjusted.

Storing the rear view mirror settings forthe tilt function● Switch the ignition on.● In the infotainment system, select > In-terior > Mirrors ››› page 86 .● Select the R1) position on the control.● Select reverse gear.● Adjust the front passenger exterior mirrorso that you can see, for example, the kerbarea well.● Release the reverse gear.● The adjusted position for the rear view mir-ror is stored.

Fold the rearview mirrors when locking thevehicle*In the infotainment system, using the func-tion button > Interior > Mirrors, the exte-rior mirrors can be selected to fold in whenthe vehicle is parked and locked ››› page 86 .

When the vehicle is locked with the remotecontrol, the exterior mirrors are retractedautomatically. When the vehicle is openedwith the remote control, the exterior mirrorsare deployed automatically.

1) Regulation in right-hand drive vehicles is sym-metrical.

122

Visibility

WARNINGConvex or wide-angle* exterior mirrorsgive a larger field of vision. However, theymake objects look smaller and further awaythan they really are. If you use these mirrorsto estimate the distance to vehicles behindyou when changing lane, you could mis-judge the distance. Risk of accident!

WARNINGFold and unfold the exterior mirror, takingcare to avoid injuries.● Only fold or unfold the exterior mirrorwhen there is no-one in the way of the mir-ror.● When moving the mirror, take care not totrap fingers between the mirror and themirror bracket.

CAUTION● If for any reason (e.g. a bump when ma-noeuvring) one of the rear view mirrors isknocked out of position, the mirrors mustfirst be fully retracted with the electric con-trol. The rear view mirror must not beplaced by hand in the starting position, asthe folding mechanism can be damaged.● Before washing the vehicle in an auto-matic car wash, please make sure to foldthe exterior mirrors in to prevent themfrom being damaged. Electrically retracta-ble exterior mirrors must not be folded in or

out by hand, always use the electrical pow-er control.

Note● If the electrical adjustment should fail tooperate, both of the mirrors can be adjus-ted by hand by lightly pressing the edge ofthe mirror glass.● The fold-in function on the exterior mir-rors will not activate at speeds over40 km/h (25 mph).

Sun protection

sun blind

Fig. 94 Sun visor

Options for adjusting driver and front pas-senger sun visors● Lower the sun visor towards the wind-screen.● The sun visor can be pulled out of itsmounting and turned towards the door››› Fig. 94 1 .● Swing the sun visor towards the door, lon-gitudinally backwards.

There is a vanity mirror on the sun visor, witha cover. When the cover is opened 2 a lightcomes on.

The lamp goes out when the vanity mirrorcover is closed or the sun visor is pushedback up.

WARNINGFolded sun blinds can reduce visibility.● Always store sun blinds and visors in theirhousing when not in use.

NoteThe light above the sun visor automaticallyswitches off after a few minutes in certainconditions. This prevents the battery fromdischarging.

123

Operation

Seats and headrests

Adjusting seats

Manual adjustment of the front seats

Fig. 95 Front seats: manual seat settings.

Forwards/backwards: pull the lever andmove the seat. The seat must engagewhen the lever is released!Raise/lower: pull the lever up or pushdown (several times if necessary) from itshome position.Tilting the backrest: turn the hand wheel.Lumbar support: move the lever until therequired position is achieved.

1

2

3

4

WARNINGIncorrect seat adjustment may lead to acci-dents and severe injuries.● Only adjust the seats when the vehicle isstationary, as the seats could move unex-pectedly while the vehicle is in motion andyou could lose control of the vehicle. Fur-thermore, an incorrect position is adoptedwhen adjusting the seat.● Adjust the height, position and inclina-tion of the front seats only when theirmovement area is empty.● Make sure there are no objects in thatarea.● Make sure that the movement and lock-ing areas of the seats are clean.

WARNINGIncorrectly using upholstery and seat cov-ers might cause an accidental activation ofthe electrical seat adjustment system andmake it move unexpectedly while driving.This might cause loss of control of the vehi-cle and thus accidents or injuries. More-over, the electrical components of thefront seats might be damaged.● Never attach or place seat upholstery orcovers on the electric controls.● Never use upholstery or seat covers thathave not been explicitly authorised for theseats of the vehicle.

Electric driver's seat adjustment*

Fig. 96 Driver's seat: electric seat settings.

Adjust the lumbar support: press thebutton according to the desired position.Seat forwards/backwards: press the but-ton forwards/backwards.Seat up/down: Press the rear part of thebutton up/down. To adjust the angle ofthe seat cushion, press the front of thebutton up/down.Backrest further upright/further re-clined: press the button forwards/back-wards.

A

B

C

124

Seats and headrests

WARNING● If the electric front seats are used negli-gently or without paying due attention, itcan cause serious injury.● The front seats can also be electricallyadjusted when the ignition is switched off.Never leave a child or any other person whomay need help in the vehicle.● In the event of an emergency, electricaladjustment can be stopped by pressing anycontrol.

CAUTIONTo avoid damaging the electrical compo-nents of the front seats, please refrain fromkneeling on the seat or applying sharppressure at a single point to the seat cush-ion and backrest.

Note● It may not be possible to electrically ad-just the seat if the vehicle battery is verylow.● If the engine is started while the seats arebeing electrically adjusted, the adjustmentwill stop.

Headrest

Introduction

The possibilities for the adjustment and dis-assembly of the headrests are described be-low. Always make sure that the seats are cor-rectly adjusted ››› page 13 .

All seats are equipped with a headrest. Thecentral rear headrest is only intended for thecentral seat of the rear bench. Therefore, donot install it on any other seat.

Correct adjustment of headrestAdjust the headrest so that its upper edge isat the same level as the top of your head andunder no circumstances below eye level.Keep the back of your head always as closeto the headrest as possible.

Adjusting the headrest for short peopleLower the headrest completely, even if yourhead is below its upper edge. In the lowestposition, there may be a small distance be-tween the headrest and the backrest.

Adjusting the headrest for tall peoplePush the headrest up as far as it will go.

WARNINGIf travelling with the headrests removed orimproperly adjusted, the risk of severe orfatal injuries in the event of accidents andsudden braking or manoeuvres increases.● Always travel with the headrest correctlyinstalled and adjusted.● To decrease the risk of cervical injuries inthe event of an accident, adjust the head-rest correctly based on your height, alwaysmaking sure that its upper edge is at thesame height as the top of the head, butnever below eye level. Keep the back ofyour head always as close to the headrest aspossible and centred.● Never adjust the headrest while the vehi-cle is in motion.● Under no circumstances should the rearpassengers travel while the headrests are inthe non-use position.

CAUTIONWhen assembling and disassembling theheadrests, do not let them meet the toplining of the vehicle, the back rest of thefront seat or other parts of the vehicles. Ifnot, this could damage the vehicle.

125

Operation

Adjusting the headrests

Fig. 97 Front seat: headrest adjustment.

Fig. 98 Rear headrest: headrest adjustment.

Adjusting the height of the headrests● Grab the sides of the headrests with bothhands and push upwards to the desired posi-tion. To lower it, repeat the same action,pressing the 1 ››› Fig. 97 ››› Fig. 98 buttonon the side.

● The headrest must lock correctly in oneposition.

Removing and fitting the headrests

Fig. 99 Rear headrest: removal.

Removing and fitting the front headrests● Move the headrest upwards until it arrivesto the top.● Press the side button ››› Fig. 97 1 and re-move the headrest.● To refit, insert the headrest into the holesin the backrest, pushing it down until it en-gages.

Removing the rear headrestsTo remove the headrest, the correspondingbackrest must be partially folded forward.

● Unlock the backrest ››› page 128 .

● Move the headrest upwards until it arrivesto the top.● Press button ››› Fig. 99 1 , while simulta-neously pressing on the security hole 2 witha flat screwdriver a maximum of 5 mm wide,and remove the headrest.● Move the backrest until it engages properly››› in Folding down and raising the rearseat backrest on page 129.

Fitting the rear headrestsTo mount the external headrests, the corre-sponding backrest must be partially foldedforward.

● Unlock the backrest ››› page 128 .● Insert the headrest bars into the guidesuntil they perceptibly engage. It should notbe possible to remove the headrest from thebackrest.● Move the backrest until it engages properly››› in Folding down and raising the rearseat backrest on page 129.

WARNINGRemove the rear headrests only when it isnecessary to fit a child seat. After removinga child seat, refit the headrest immediately.

126

Seats and headrests

Seat functions

Memory function*

Fig. 100 On the outer side of the driver's seat:memory buttons.

Memory buttonsThe memory buttons can be used to saveand turn on settings for the driver seat andthe exterior mirrors.

Save the settings of the driver seat and theexterior mirrors while driving forward● Apply the electronic parking brake.● Move the gearshift to the neutral position.● Switch the ignition on.● Adjust the driver seat and the exterior mir-rors.● Press for longer than 1 second››› Fig. 100.● Press the memory button in which to storethe settings within approx. 10 seconds. A

warning sound will confirm they have beenstored.

Storing the passenger rear view mirror set-tings while driving in reverse● Apply the electronic parking brake.● Move the gearshift to the neutral position.● Switch the ignition on.● Press the required memory button.● Select reverse gear.● Adjust the front passenger exterior mirrorso that you can see, for example, the kerbarea well.● The new position of the mirror will be stor-ed automatically and allocated to the vehiclekey that was used to unlock the vehicle.

Activating settings● With the vehicle stopped and the ignitionswitched on, press and hold the correspond-ing memory button until the saved position isreached.● OR: With the ignition switched off and thedriver's door open, briefly press the corre-sponding button.● The front passenger side exterior mirrorautomatically changes from the positionstored for reversing as soon as the vehiclemoves forward at a speed of at least 15 km/h(10 mph) or when the gear selection lever is

changed to a position other than R››› page 121.

To activate the memory function of thevehicle keyCondition: a position must be memorised inthe memory.

● Open the driver-side door.● Press and hold any memory button.● Within three seconds of the move beingcompleted, push the open button on thevehicle key. An audible warning confirms thesettings have been activated.

Adjusting the wing mirrors for driving andassigning driver seat settings to a vehiclekey● Activate the memory function of the vehi-cle key● With the ignition switched on, adjust theexterior mirrors and the seat.● An audible warning confirms the saved po-sition, both when turning off the ignition andlocking the vehicle. The settings are as-signed to the vehicle key.

To deactivate the memory function of thevehicle keyCondition: a position must be memorised inthe memory. »

127

Operation

● Press and hold the button ››› Fig. 100 .● Within the following 10 seconds, push theopen button on the vehicle key. An audi-ble warning confirms the settings have beendeactivated.

Initialising the seat position memoryThe position memory system must be restar-ted if, for example, the driver seat has beenchanged.

Restarting deletes all memories and assign-ments for the seat with position memory.The memory buttons can then be reprog-rammed and the vehicle keys re-assigned.

● Open the driver door and do not get intothe vehicle.● Operating the seat settings from outsidethe vehicle.● Move the angle of the seat backrest com-pletely forwards.● Release the control to set the angle andthen press again until an audible warning isheard.

WARNINGAdjust the memory function only when thevehicle is stationary.

NoteIf the driver door is opened approx. 10 mi-nutes after the vehicle was unlocked or lat-er, the driver seat and the exterior mirrorsdo not move automatically.

Folding down and raising the rear seatbackrest

Fig. 101 Rear seat: clip to hold the seatbelt inplace.

Fig. 102 Rear seat: folding the backrest.

The rear seat backrest is split and each partbe lowered separately to extend the luggagecompartment.

Folding the backrest forwards● Place the side seat belts in the trim clip››› Fig. 101.● Completely lower the rear headrests››› page 126.● Press the unlock button ››› Fig. 102 1 for-wards and at the same time fold the backrestdown. The rear seat backrest is not engagedwhen the red marking of the button 2 isvisible.

Converting the table to a seat● Raise and lock in the back rest. The redmarking on the tab 2 should no longer bevisible when the backrest is properly se-cured.

128

Seats and headrests

WARNINGSerious injuries can be caused if the rearseat backrest is lowered or lifted withoutdue care and attention.● Never lower or lift the rear seat backrestwhile driving.● Do no trap or damage the seat belt whenraising the rear seat backrest.● When lowering or lifting the rear seatbackrest, keep your hands, fingers, feet andother body parts out of its path.● For the rear seat belts to offer the neces-sary protection all the parts of the rearbackrest must be properly engaged. This isparticularly important in the case of thecentre rear seat. If someone is seated in aseat whose backrest is not properly engag-ed they will fly forward, along with thebackrest, during an accident or a suddendriving or braking manoeuvre.● A red signal on the button 2 warns thatthe backrest is not engaged. Always checkthat the red marking is not visible when thebackrest is in the upright position.● When the rear seat backrest is lowered oris not properly engaged nobody else cantravel in the corresponding seats (not evena child).

CAUTIONSerious damage can be caused to the vehi-cle and other objects if the rear seat back-

rest is lowered or lifted without due careand attention.● Before lowering the rear seat backrest,always adjust the front seats so that neitherthe head restraints nor the cushions of therear backrest can hit them.

Unlock the seat backrest with thecord

Fig. 103 In the luggage compartment: levers tounlock the rear backrest.

● Lower the head restraint properly.● Open the rear lid.● Pull the remote release lever of the leftpart ››› Fig. 103 1 or right part 2 of thebackrest in the direction of the arrow. Thereleased part of the rear seat backrest is fol-ded automatically down and forwards.● If this occurs, close the rear lid.

The rear seat backrest is not engaged whenthe red marking of the button ››› Fig. 102 2is visible.

Front centre armrest

Fig. 104 Front centre armrest

To raise the armrest, pull it fully up in the di-rection of the arrow ››› Fig. 104 up or step bystep depending on the desired opening.

To lower the armrest, first lift it to its highestposition. Then lower it down.

To move the armrest horizontally, move itforward ››› Fig. 104 or backward as much aspossible in the direction of the correspond-ing arrow. »

129

Operation

WARNINGThe front centre armrest may obstruct thedriver's arm movements, which could causean accident and severe injuries.● Keep the storage compartments of thecentre armrest closed at all times while thevehicle is in motion.● Never let anyone sit on the centre arm-rest while the vehicle is in motion, not evena child. This position is incorrect and maycause severe injuries.

Transport and practicalequipment

Storing objects

Positioning the luggage and cargo

It is possible to carry objects and luggage inthe vehicle, in a trailer ››› page 275 and onthe roof ››› page 136 . When doing so, pleaseconsider all legal provisions.

Placing luggage inside the vehicle safely● Distribute the load in the vehicle as evenlyas possible.● Always place equipment and heavy objectsin the boot ››› .● Position heavy items in the boot as far for-ward as possible.● Take into account the maximum author-ised weight per axle, as well as the maximumauthorised weight of the vehicle››› page 328.● Secure the objects to the fastening rings ofthe boot using appropriate chains or belts››› page 134.● Also place small objects safely.● Adapt tyre pressure to the load. Take intoaccount the pressure adhesive of the tyres››› page 305.

● In vehicles equipped with tyre pressurecontrol system, adjust to the new load statusif necessary ››› page 309 .

WARNINGLoose or unsecured objects can cause seri-ous injury in case of sudden manoeuvringor braking or in case of an accident. Partic-ularly if the airbag hits them when deploy-ing and they are thrown across the inside ofthe vehicle. Please observe the followingrules to minimise the risk of injury:● Place all objects inside the vehicle safely.● Secure all objects, little and large.● Place the objects in the cabin in such away that they can never reach the airbagdeployment areas while the vehicle is inmotion.● Keep the storage compartments closedat all times while the vehicle is in motion.● Place the objects in such a way that theynever force any occupant of the vehicle tosit in an incorrect position.● When transporting objects that take up aseat, never let anyone use that seat.● Never leave hard, sharp or heavy objectsloose in open storage compartment of thevehicle, on the cover behind the rear seator on the dashboard.● Remove all hard, sharp or heavy objectsfrom the fabrics and bags inside the cabinand store them safely.

130

Transport and practical equipment

WARNINGThe transport of heavy object changes ve-hicle handling and increases braking dis-tance. Heavy objects that are not properlyplaced or secured may cause loss of controlof the vehicle and thus severe injuries.● Never put too much load in the vehicle.Both the carrying capacity as well as thedistribution of the load in the vehicle haveeffects on the driving behaviour and brak-ing ability.● When transporting heavy objects, thedriving behaviour of the vehicle varies dueto the displacement of the centre of gravi-ty.● Always distribute the load in the vehicleas evenly and horizontally as possible.● Always place heavy objects in the bootbefore the rear axle and as far away from itas possible.● Objects in the luggage compartment thatare unsecured could move suddenly andmodify the handling of the vehicle.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.● Accelerate with particular care and cau-tion.● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.● Brake earlier than usual.

WARNING● Never leave your vehicle unattended, es-pecially when the rear lid is open. Childrencould climb into the luggage compartment,closing the door behind them; they will betrapped and run the risk of death.● Close and lock all the doors and the rearlid when you leave the vehicle. Before youlock the vehicle, make sure that there areno adults or children in the vehicle.

CAUTIONElectrical wires or, depending on the fea-tures, the antenna embedded into the rearwindows could be damaged, even irrepara-bly, if they are in contact with objects.

NoteStraps for securing the load to the fasteningrings are commercially available from ac-cessory shops.

Luggage compartment

Luggage compartment shelf

Fig. 105 In the luggage compartment: removingand fitting the shelf.

Fig. 106 In the luggage compartment: removingand fitting the shelf.

Removing● Detach the cord loops ››› Fig. 105 B fromtheir hooks A . »

131

Operation

● Remove the rear shelf from the side sup-ports ››› Fig. 106 by pulling it upwards andthen take it out.

If necessary, the rear shelf can be stored un-der the luggage compartment double floor››› page 132.

Fitting● Insert the cover horizontally so that the“recess” fits onto the axis of the supports››› Fig. 106 and press down until it engages.● Hook the loops ››› Fig. 105 B to the rearlid.

WARNINGAnimals, loose or unsecured or objects car-ried on the rear shelf can cause serious in-jury in case of sudden manoeuvring orbraking or in case of an accident.● Do not leave hard, sharp or heavy objectsor in bags on the rear shelf.● Never transport animals on the rear shelf.

CAUTION● Before closing the rear lid, ensure thatthe rear shelf is correctly fitted.● An overloaded luggage compartmentcould mean that the rear shelf is not cor-rectly seated and it may be bent or dam-aged.

● If the luggage compartment is overloa-ded, remove the tray.

NoteEnsure that, when placing items of clothingon the luggage compartment cover, rearvisibility is not reduced.

Store the rear shelf

Fig. 107 In the luggage compartment: covers forstoring the rear shelf.

Fig. 108 In the luggage compartment: fitting therear shelf.

Depending on the equipment, once the lug-gage compartment shelf has been removed,it can be stored under the boot floor.

● Remove the left and right covers››› Fig. 107.● Place the rear shelf in the correspondinghousing ››› Fig. 108 .● Put the left and right covers in their originalposition.

132


Variable luggage compartment floor

Fig. 109 Variable luggage compartment floor: raised position; lowered position.

Fig. 110 Variable luggage compartment floor: in-clined position.

Variable floor in high position● To move from the low position to the highposition, lift the floor using the handle››› Fig. 109 1 , and pull it back until the frontof the floor has fully passed the supports››› Fig. 109 2 .● Move the floor forward over the supportsas far as the rear seat backrest and then low-er the floor with the handle 1 .

Variable floor in low position● To move from the high position to the lowposition, lift the floor using the handle››› Fig. 109 1 , and pull it back until the frontof the floor has fully passed the supports››› Fig. 109 2 .● Now let the front part fall to the floor andslide the floor forwards as far as the rear seatbackrest; lower the floor at the same timewith the handle 1 .

Variable floor in the tilted positionWhen the variable floor is tilted you can ac-cess the spare wheel or anti-puncture kitarea.

● Lift the variable floor in the high positionusing handle ››› Fig. 109 1 , pull it up andpush it towards the backrest of the rear seatsuntil it folds along the hinge line and themovable part of the floor is resting on itself.● Rest the floor on its housings ››› Fig. 110(arrows).

WARNING● Always secure objects, even when theluggage compartment floor is properly lif-ted.● Only objects that do not protrude morethan 2/3 the height of the floor may be car-ried between the rear seat and the raisedluggage compartment floor.● Only objects that do not weigh than ap-proximately 7.5 kg may be carried betweenthe rear seat and the raised luggage com-partment floor.

CAUTION● The maximum weight that can be loadedon the luggage compartment variable floorin the top position is 100 kg.● Do not let the luggage compartmentfloor fall when closing it. Always carefully »

133

Operation

guide it downwards in a controlled manner.Otherwise, the lining and the floor of theluggage compartment could be damaged.

Fastening rings*

Fig. 111 In the luggage compartment: fixed anddeployable fastening rings.

There are fastening rings ››› Fig. 111 on thefront and rear of the boot to secure looseobjects and luggage with fastening belts andcords.

WARNINGIf unsuitable or damaged belts or retainingstraps are used, they could break in theevent of braking or an accident. Objectscould then be launched across the passen-ger compartment and cause serious or fatalinjuries.● Always use belts or straps that are suita-ble and in good condition.

● Tighten the belts and straps in a cross lay-out over the load placed on the boot floorand secure them to the fastening ringssafely.● Never exceed the maximum tensile loadof the fastening rings when securing ob-jects.● Make sure that, particularly for flat ob-jects, the upper edge of the load is higherthan the fastening rings.● Depending on the features, take into ac-count the instruction panels on the boot onhow to place the load.● Never secure a child seat to the fasteningrings.

Note● The maximum tensile load that the fas-tening rings can support is approx. 3.5 kN.● Belts, straps and securing systems for theappropriate load can be obtained from spe-cialised dealerships. To do so, CUPRA rec-ommends going to a specialised CUPRAdealer or any SEAT dealership.

Net bag*

Fig. 112 In the luggage compartment: net baghooked up at floor level.

Fig. 113 In the luggage compartment: rings 1and hooks 2 for attaching the net bag.

The luggage compartment prevents lightluggage from moving. The net bag has a zipand can be used to store small objects.

The net bag can be hooked up to the lug-gage compartment in different ways.

134


Hooking the net bag into the luggagecompartment floorIf necessary, the front eyes must be unfoldedfirst ››› page 134 .

● Secure the net hooks to the fastening rings1 and 2 ››› Fig. 112 ››› . The bag zip

should be facing upwards.

Hook the net bag next to the load thresh-old● Secure the short net hooks to the fasten-ing rings ››› Fig. 113 1 ››› . The bag zipshould be facing upwards.● Secure the straps in the bag hooks 2 .

Removing the net bagThe hooked up net bag is taut ››› .

● Release the net bag from the fasteningrings.● Store the net bag in the luggage compart-ment.

WARNINGTo secure the elastic net bag on the fasten-ing rings of the boot it must be stretchedout. Once hooked up it is taut. If the netbag is hooked up or unhooked incorrectlythe hooks could cause injuries.● Always secure the bag hooks properly sothat they do not suddenly release from the

fastening rings when hooking or unhookingthem.● On hooking or unhooking them, protectyour eyes and face in case the hooks are re-leased suddenly.● Always hook up the net bag hooks in thedescribed order. If a hook is unfastenedsuddenly, this may cause injuries.

Bag hooks

Fig. 114 In the luggage compartment: bag hooks.

There may be hooks for hanging bags onboth sides of the luggage compart-ment››› Fig. 114 .

The retaining hooks have been designed tosecure light shopping bags.

WARNINGNever use the hooks to hang luggage orother objects. In case of sudden braking oran accident, the hooks could break.

135

Operation

Trapdoor for transporting long ob-jects*

Fig. 115 In the rear seat backrest: opening thetrapdoor.

Fig. 116 In the luggage compartment: openingthe trapdoor.

On the rear seat, behind the central armrest,there is a tailboard for transporting longitems in the interior, such as skis.

To avoid soiling the interior, dirty objectsshould be wrapped (e.g. in a blanket) beforethey are inserted through the tailboard.

When the armrest is down, nobody may trav-el in the centre rear seat.

Opening the tailboard● Lower the centre armrest.● Pull the release lever in the direction of thearrow and push the tailboard cover››› Fig. 115 1 down and forwards.● Open the rear lid.● Insert the long objects through the gapfrom the luggage compartment.● Secure the objects with the seat belt.● Close the rear lid.

Closing the tailboard● Lift the tailboard cover until it engages. Thered mark on the luggage compartment sideshould never be visible.● Close the rear lid.● Lift the centre armrest if necessary.

NoteThe tailboard can also be opened from theluggage compartment. To do so, press therelease lever down, in the direction of thearrow, and the cover upwards ››› Fig. 116 .

Roof carrier

Introduction

The vehicle roof has been designed to opti-mise aerodynamics. For this reason, crossbars or conventional roof carrier systemscannot be secured to the roof water drains.

As the roof water drains are integrated in theroof to reduce air resistance, only CUPRA-approved cross bars and roof carrier systemscan be used.

Cases in which cross bars and the roof car-rier system should be disassembled.● When they are not used.● When the vehicle is washed in a car wash.● When the vehicle height exceeds the max-imum height, for example, in some garages.

WARNING● Always secure the load properly usingbelts or retaining straps that are suitableand in a good condition.● Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have anegative effect on aerodynamics, the cen-tre of gravity and driving performance.● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.

136


CAUTION● Remove the cross bars and the roof carri-er system before entering a car wash.● Vehicle height is increased by the instal-lation of cross bars or a roof carrier systemand the load secured on them. For this pur-pose, check that your vehicle's height doesnot surpass the headspace limit, for exam-ple, for underpasses or for entering garagedoors.● Cross bars, the roof carrier system andthe load secured on them should not inter-fere with the roof aerial or hamper the pathof the panoramic sun roof and the rear lid.● On opening the rear lid make sure that itdoes not knock into the roof load.

For the sake of the environmentWhen cross bars and a roof carrier systemare installed, the increased air resistancemeans that the vehicle uses more fuel.

Securing the crossbars and the roofcarrier system

Fig. 117 Attachment points for the roof railings forthe roof carrier system.

The crossbars are the basis of a series ofspecial roof carrier systems. For safety rea-sons, special fixtures must be used to safelytransport luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boardsor boats on the roof. The appropriate acces-sories can be purchased at specialised CU-PRA dealers or any SEAT dealership.

Always secure the crossbars and the roofcarrier system properly. Always take the as-sembly instructions that come with thecrossbars and the roof carrier system inquestion into account.

The crossbars are assembled on the roofrailings. The distance between crossbars››› Fig. 117 A should be between 70 and 90

cm and the distance between the crossbarsand the brackets of the roof railings B mustbe 15 cm.

WARNINGIncorrect attachment and use of the cross-bars and the roof carrier system may causethe whole system to detach from the roofand cause an accident and injuries.● Always take the manufacturer assemblyinstructions into account.● Check threaded joints and attachmentstravelling and if necessary tighten them af-ter you have travelled a short distance.When making long trips, check the threa-ded joints whenever you stop for a rest.● Do not modify or repair the crossbars orroof carrier system.

NoteAlways read the assembly instructions thatcome with the crossbars and the roof carri-er system carefully and keep them in thevehicle.

Loading the roof carrier system

The load can only be secured if the crossbarsand the roof carrier system are properly in-stalled ››› . »

137

Operation

Maximum authorised cargo on the roofThe maximum permissible roof load is 50 kg.This figure comes from the combined weightof the roof carrier, the cross bars and theload itself on the roof ››› .

Always check the weight of the roof carriersystem, the cross bars and the weight of theload to be transported and weigh them ifnecessary. Never exceed the maximum au-thorised roof load.

If you are using cross bars and a roof carrierwith a lower weight rating, you will not beable to carry the maximum authorised roofload. In this case, do not exceed the maxi-mum weight limit for the roof carrier which islisted in the fitting instructions.

Distributing a loadDistribute loads uniformly and secure themcorrectly ››› .

Check attachmentsOnce the cross bars and roof carrier systemhave been installed, check the bolted con-nections and attachments after a short jour-ney and subsequently with a certain fre-quency.

WARNING● Never exceed the maximum authorisedload on the roof and on the axles or the ve-hicle's maximum authorised weight.

● Never exceed the load capacity of thecross bars and the roof carrier system, evenif the maximum authorised roof load hasnot been reached.● Secure heavy items as far forward as pos-sible and distribute the vehicle load uni-formly.

WARNINGIf the load is loose or not secured, it couldfall from the roof carrier system or causeaccidents and injuries.● Always use belts or retaining straps thatare suitable and in a good condition.

Storage compartment

Introduction

Use the storage compartments only for smallor light items.

WARNINGObjects inside the vehicle that are not se-cured could be thrown across the cabin inthe event of sudden braking or manoeu-vring. This may cause severe injuries as wellas loss of control of the vehicle.● Do not carry animals or sharp, hard orheavy items in open storage compartmentsof the vehicle, on the dashboard or on the

cover behind the rear seats, or insidepieces of clothing or bags inside the vehi-cle.● Keep the storage compartments closedat all times while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell could diffi-cult the use of the pedals. This may causeloss of control of the vehicle and increasesthe risk of severe injuries.● Make sure that nothing prevents you fromusing the pedals at any time.● Always secure the mat in the footwell.● Never place other mats or other type ofcovers on the factory-fitted mat.● Ensure that no objects can fall into thedriver's footwell while the vehicle is in mo-tion.● When the vehicle is stationary, removethe objects in the footwell.

WARNINGIf you leave lighters inside the vehicle, theymight be damaged or lit inadvertently. Thiscould lead to severe burns and damage tothe vehicle.● Before moving a seat, make sure thereare no lighters in the moving part area ofthe vehicle.

138


● Before closing a storage compartment,make sure there are no lighters in the clos-ing area.● Never leave a lighter inside a storagecompartment or any other surface of thevehicle as it could ignite due to the hightemperatures on such surfaces, particularlyduring the summer.

CAUTION● Do not store heat- or cold-sensitive ob-jects, food or medicines in the cabin. Heatand cold could damage them or renderthem useless.● Objects made from transparent materialsleft inside the vehicle, such as glasses,magnifying glasses or transparent suctionpads stuck to the windows can concentratesunlight and damage the vehicle.

Glove compartment

Fig. 118 On the front passenger side: glove com-partment.

Opening and closing the glove compart-mentOpening: Pull the handle ››› Fig. 118 andopen the glove compartment.

Closing: Press the glove compartment up-wards.

WARNINGIf the glove compartment is left open, therisk of causing severe injuries in the eventof an accident, sudden braking or manoeu-vring increases.● Always keep the glove compartmentclosed while the vehicle is in motion.

Storage compartment under frontseats*

Fig. 119 Storage compartment under the frontseats.

Opening: Press the tab on the drawer handleand take the drawer out.

Closing: Push the drawer under the seat untilit engages.

Depending on the equipment, under thedriver's seat there may be a magazine hold-er* (about the size of the instruction man-ual) instead of the storage compartment.

WARNINGIf the drawer is left open, it could preventuse of the pedals. This may cause seriousaccidents and injuries.● Always keep the drawer closed while thevehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the drawer »

139

Operation

and any objects in it could fall into the driv-er's footwell and obstruct the pedals.

CAUTIONThe drawer can contain 1.5 kg at most.

Drink holder

Fig. 120 In the rear central armrest: drinks holder.

The storage compartments of the driver andpassenger doors contain a bottle holder.

Front drink holdersThere are two cup holders in the centre con-sole ››› Fig. 120 .

Drinks holder in the rear central armrestUse: Lower the centre armrest.

When the drink holder is no longer in use, liftthe armrest again.

WARNINGIncorrect use of the bottle holders maycause injuries.● Never put hot drinks in the drink holders.In the event of sudden braking or an acci-dent while driving, hot beverages in thebottle holders might spill and cause burns.● Ensure that no bottles or other objectsare dropped in the driver footwell whiledriving, as they could get under the pedalsand obstruct their working.● Never place glasses, food or other heavyobjects drink holders. These heavy objectsmay be thrown across the cabin in theevent of an accident and cause serious in-juries.

WARNINGClosed bottles may explode inside the vehi-cle due to cold or heat.● Never leave closed bottles in the vehicleif the temperature inside is very high orvery low.

CAUTIONDo not leave open cans in the drink holderswhen the vehicle is in motion. If the drink isspilled (e.g. due to sudden braking) it may

damage the vehicle and its electrical sys-tem.

NoteThe inside elements of the drink holderscan be extracted for cleaning.

Other object holders

You will find more object holders, compart-ments and supports in other parts of the ve-hicle:

● In the centre console.● In the upper part of the glove compart-ment. The load of the compartment shouldnot exceed 1.2 kg.● Other storage compartments are found inthe rear seat, to the left and the right of theseats.

There are hangers on the struts of the doorsand the rear.

WARNINGHanging clothes may decrease the driver'svisibility, which may cause serious acci-dents and injuries.● Always hang clothes from hangers in sucha way that the driver's visibility is not affec-ted.

140


● Only hang light pieces of clothing fromthe hangers of the vehicle. Never leaveheavy, hard or sharp objects in the pocketsof these pieces of clothing.● Do not use clothes hangers to hang upthe clothing, as this could interfere with thefunction of the head-protection airbags.

Power sockets

Vehicle power sockets

Fig. 121 12 volt power socket: 1 inside the frontarmrest.

Fig. 122 On the right side of the luggage com-partment: 230 volt power socket.

In the front armrest● Lift the power socket cover ››› Fig. 121 .● Insert the plug of the electrical applianceinto the power socket.

USB power socketsDepending on the equipment and the coun-try, the vehicle may also have USB connec-tions exclusively for charging or as a powersocket.

These USB ports are located at the rear ofthe console, between the front seats . Theseconnectors can work at a maximum powerof up to 10.5 W per port.

They are not intended for file playback.

Maximum power consumption

Power socket Maximum power con-sumption

12 Volts 120 Watts

230 Volts 150 watts (300 watts - maximum2 minutes)

Electrical equipment can be connected tothe 12 volt power socket.

Make sure that the maximum power con-sumption displayed on each outlet is not ex-ceeded. The power consumption of devicesis shown on the model plate.

When connecting two or more electrical de-vices at the same time, make sure that theirtotal consumption never exceeds 190 watts››› .

230 volt power socket*With the engine running, the power socket››› Fig. 122 activates automatically as soon asa connector is plugged in. If there is enoughpower available, the socket can still be usedwhile the engine is off ››› Connect an electrical device: Open the cov-er and insert the plug into the power socketas far as possible to unlock the built-in childlock. The socket only supplies power oncethe child lock is unlocked. »

141

Operation

LED on the power socket

Steady greenlight:

The childproof lock is unlocked.The socket is ready to operate.

Flashing greenlight:

The ignition is switched off, butthere is enough power availableto continue supplying the socketwith current for a maximum of 10minutes. If the connector is un-plugged before this time elapses,the socket is disconnected andcannot be used again until the ig-nition is switched on again.

Flashing red light:There is an anomaly, e.g. discon-nection due to a current surge oroverheating.

Disconnection due to overheatingWhen the temperature exceeds a certainvalue, the 230 volt socket inverter is auto-matically disconnected. The disconnectionprevents overheating when the power con-sumption of the connected devices is exces-sive or the ambient temperature is very high.The 230-volt power supply can be used onceagain after a cooling time. First unplug theconnector of the connected device andthen plug it back in again. This prevents theelectrical device from being switched onagain if this is not wanted.

WARNINGThe electrical system is under high voltage!

● Do not spill liquids onto the socket.● Do not plug adapters or extension cordsinto the 230 volt power socket. Otherwise,the integrated child lock will be unlockedand the power socket will operate.● Do not insert conductive objects (a knit-ting needle, for example) into the 230 voltpower socket.

WARNINGThe power socket works only when the ig-nition is on. Improper use may cause seri-ous injury or even fire. Children shouldtherefore not be left in the vehicle unatten-ded if the button is also left behind. Other-wise there is a possibility that they may beinjured.

CAUTIONAlways use the correct type of plugs toavoid damaging the sockets.

CAUTION● 230 volt power socket:– Do not leave devices or connectors that

are too heavy (e.g. a transformer)hanging directly from the power sock-et.

– Do not connect neon lamps.– Only connect devices to the socket if

the device and socket voltage match.

– The built-in overload disconnect func-tion prevents any electrical devicesthat require a high start-up currentfrom turning on. In this case, unplugthe electrical device's power supply andre-try the connection after about 10seconds.

Note● The use of electrical appliances with theengine switched off will cause a battery dis-charge.● Should the connected appliance over-heat, immediately switch it off and discon-nect it from the socket.● Before switching the ignition on or off,unplug the appliances from the USB portsto protect them from any damage causedby fluctuations in voltage.● Some appliances may not work properlywhen connected to the 230 volt socketsdue to a lack of power (watts).

142

Air conditioning

Air conditioning

Heating, ventilation and cool-ing

Introduction

Climatronic of 3 zones: heats, ventilates,cools and dehumidifies the passenger com-partment considering it as 3 independent airconditioning areas (driver, front passengerand rear seats).

There are several ways to switch on the airconditioning:

● Press AUTO on the climabar ››› Fig. 123 A

● OR: Press in the air conditioning menu››› page 146 or in the air conditioning widg-et.● OR: Press in the air conditioning menu››› page 146 or in the air conditioning widg-et.● OR: Change the desired temperature.

The Climatornic operates most effectivelywith the windows and the sunroof* closed.

Some functions and menu tabs depend onthe equipment.

Dust and pollen filterThe dust and pollen filter with its activatedcharcoal cartridge serves as a barrier againstimpurities in the air taken into the vehicle in-terior.

The dust and pollen filter must be changedregularly so that air conditioner performanceis not adversely affected.

If the filter loses efficiency prematurely dueto use in areas with very high levels of air pol-lution, the filter must be changed more fre-quently than stated in the Service Schedule.

WARNINGReduced visibility through the windows in-creases the risk of serious accidents.● Always ensure that all windows are free ofice and snow, and that they are not fogged,so as to maintain good visibility of every-thing outside.● Only drive when you have good visibility.● Always ensure that you use the air condi-tioner and heated rear window to maintaingood visibility.● Never leave the air recirculation on for along period of time. If the cooling system isswitched off and air recirculation modeswitched on, the windows can mist oververy quickly, considerably limiting visibility.● Switch air recirculation mode off when itis not required.

WARNINGStuffy or used air will increase fatigue andreduce driver concentration possibly re-sulting in a serious accident.● Never leave the fresh air fan turned off oruse the air recirculation for long periods oftime; the air in the vehicle interior will notbe refreshed.

CAUTION● To replace the pollen filter, always visit aservice centre.● Switch the air conditioner off if you thinkit may be broken. This will avoid additionaldamage. Have the air conditioner checkedby a specialised workshop.● Repairs to the air conditioner requirespecialist knowledge and special tools. CU-PRA recommends going to a specialisedCUPRA Service or SEAT Official Service.

Note● When the cooling system is turned off, aircoming from the outside will not be dried.To prevent fogging of the windows, CUPRArecommends leaving the cooling system(compressor) turned on. To do this, pressthe function button . The icon shouldlight up.● The maximum heat output required todefrost windows as quickly as possible is »

143

Operation

only available when the engine has reachedits normal running temperature.● Keep the air intake slots in front of thewindscreen free of snow, ice and leaves toensure heating and cooling are not im-paired, and to prevent the windows frommisting over.● The air from the vents flows through thevehicle interior and is extracted by slots inthe luggage compartment designed for thispurpose. Therefore, you should avoid ob-structing these slots with any kind of ob-ject.● Do not smoke while air recirculationmode is on, as smoke drawn into the airconditioning system leaves residue on theevaporator, producing a permanent un-pleasant odour.● It is advisable to turn on the air condi-tioning at least once a month, to lubricatethe system gaskets and prevent leaks. If adecrease in the cooling capacity is detec-ted, a Technical Service should be consul-ted to check the system.● When the engine is under extreme strain,switch off the compressor for a moment.

144

Air conditioning

Climatronic control

Fig. 123 Schematic representation: air conditioningfunctions

A ClimabarFixed bar at the top of the Infotainment Sys-tem ››› Fig. 123 A screen, (even if it is dis-connected) where the following Air Condi-tioning functions are located:

Shows fan status/speed. By pressing it, youcan access the Air conditioning menu››› page 146.

.°CSlide your finger from left to right or vice ver-sa over the numbers to adjust the desiredtemperature.

Press on the same numbers to access thetemperature adjustment submenu.

Or: use the touch zones 1 and 2 (blue /red) to adjust the temperature of the AirConditioning ››› Fig. 123 .

Access the seat heating* submenu››› page 149.

Switching air recirculation on and off››› page 148

Temperature setting submenuSubmenu where the following functions arefound:

.°CSlide your finger from left to right or vice ver-sa over the bar, or, press or to adjustthe desired temperature.

Synchronizes the temperature on the driver'sside with the other zones.

145

Operation

Air Conditioning Menu

Fig. 124 Schematic representation: Air conditioningmenu.

Within the Air Conditioning menu, the fol-lowing submenus are found depending onthe equipment:

Front SubmenuSubmenu for the air conditioning in the frontof the passenger compartment where thefollowing functions are found:

Connect/disconnect the Climatronic››› Fig. 124 A .

Air diffuser outlets (arrows)Selection of the air distribution to one ormore of the following areas: feet, upper bodyor windscreen.

The colour represented by the arrows doesnot indicate the outlet temperature of theair, but the requested temperature depend-ing on the surrounding conditions.

Manual adjustment of fan speed by pressing or .

Activate or deactivate the steering wheelheating*.

It also shows its status (on/off).

You may also use the multifunction steeringwheel to manage the heating levels in addi-tion to turning it on/off ››› page 150 .

The defrost/demist function of the Clima-tronic removes ice and condensation fromthe windscreen. The air is dehumidified andthe fan is set high.

When this function is switched on, the rearair conditioning remains switched off.

The heated rear window only works whenthe engine is running and switches off

146

Air conditioning

automatically after a maximum of 10 mi-nutes. It should be switched off as soon asthe glass is demisted.

By saving electrical power you can also savefuel.

To avoid possible damage to the battery, anautomatic temporary disconnection of thisfunction is possible, coming back on whennormal operating conditions are re-estab-lished.

Switching the cooling and demisting systemon/off.

In mode, the selected temperature willremain constant. Fan speed and air distribu-tion are automatically adjusted.

The mode will be deactivated when thefan speed and/or the air distribution aremodified manually.

Fan speed in mode can be adjusted inthe Climaprofile (low, medium or high) bysuccessive presses on the function button.

Climaprofile adjustment is also possible inthe Settings submenu.

Rear SubmenuSubmenu for the air conditioning in the rearof the passenger compartment where thefollowing functions are found:

Connect/disconnect the Climatronic A.

With the icon lit up, it is not possible to adjustthe temperature from the rear area.

.°CAdjusting the temperature of the rear area bypressing on the icons or .

IClimate submenuSubmenu where different smart and/or au-tomatic functionalities are located:

Warm hands: automatically adjusts for acertain time the air conditioning to heatthe steering wheel area.Cool feet: automatically adjusts for acertain time the air conditioning to coolthe footwell area.Defog the windows: automatically ad-justs for a certain time the air condition-ing to defog the windscreen.

Warm feet: automatically adjusts for acertain time the air conditioning to heatthe footwell area.Fresh Air: automatically adjusts the airconditioning for a certain time to venti-late the passenger compartment.

AirCare Climate submenuThe air conditioning system contains a filterthat can reduce the penetration of allergeniccontaminants.

When the Air Care function is activated, therecirculation mode is on and the air is regula-ted automatically and continuously, as longas there is no detection of fogging hazard.

● Press on to activate/deactivate theAirCare function.● Press to access the information on thestatus of the AirCare system.

Settings submenuSubmenu where the following settings arelocated:

● Automatic recirculation: to switch auto-matic air recirculation on and off››› page 148.● Climaprofile: To adjust the fan speed (low,medium or high) during operation in mode.

147

Operation

Climate control usage instructions

The interior cooling system only works whenthe engine is running and fan is switched on.

Economic use of the air conditioningWhen the air conditioning is switched on,the compressor consumes engine powerand has influence on fuel consumption.

The air conditioning operates most effec-tively with the windows and the sunroof*closed. However, if the passenger compart-ment has heated up after standing in the sunfor some time, the air inside can be cooledmore quickly by briefly opening the windowsand the sunroof*.

Change the temperature unit (Climatron-ic)The temperature display can be changedfrom Celsius to Fahrenheit on the Infotain-ment system screen using the function but-ton > Settings > Units.

The cooling system cannot be activatedIf the air conditioning system cannot beswitched on, this may be caused by the fol-lowing:

● The engine is not running.● The fan is switched off.● The air conditioner fuse has blown.

● The outside temperature is lower than ap-proximately +3°C (+38°F).● The air conditioner compressor has beentemporarily switched off because the enginecoolant temperature is too high.● Another fault in the vehicle. Have the airconditioner checked by a specialised work-shop.

Special characteristicsIf the humidity and temperature outside thevehicle are high, condensation can drip offthe evaporator in the cooling system andform a pool underneath the vehicle. This isnormal and does not indicate a leak!

NoteAfter starting the engine, any residual hu-midity in the air conditioner could mist overthe windscreen. Switch on the defrostfunction as soon as possible to clear thewindscreen of condensation.

Air vents

To ensure proper heating, cooling and venti-lation in the vehicle interior, the air ventsmust remain open.

● To close the air vents on the left side, movethe corresponding diffuser vent lever fully tothe right. To close the air vents on the rights

side, move the corresponding diffuser ventlever fully to the left.● Change the air direction using the ventila-tion grille lever.

There are other additional, non-adjustableair vents in the dash panel, in the footwellsand in the rear area of the passenger com-partment.

NoteFood, medicine and other heat or cold sen-sitive objects should never be placed infront of the air outlets as they may be dam-aged or made unsuitable for use by the air.

Air recirculation

Air recirculation mode prevents the ambientair from entering the interior.

When the outside temperature is very high,selecting manual air recirculation mode for ashort period refreshes the vehicle interiormore quickly.

For safety reasons, the air recirculation is dis-connected when is pressed.

Switching the manual air recirculationmode on and off● Press the button to connect or discon-nect manual air recirculation.

148

Air conditioning

Climatronic automatic air recirculationmodeWith the automatic air recirculation modeactivated, the entry of fresh air into the cabininterior is enabled. If the system detects ahigh concentration of hazardous substancesin the ambient air, air recirculation mode isswitched on automatically. When the level ofimpurities drops to within a normal range, re-circulation mode is switched off.

The system is unable to detect unpleasantsmells.

● Automatic air recirculation is activated anddeactivated in the Air conditioning settingsmenu ››› page 145 .

Front seat heating*

With the engine on, the front seat cushionand backrest can be heated electrically.

Control seat heatingPress the icon on the Climabar››› Fig. 123 A to view the seat heating menu.

● Press the left or right seat icon to connectthe seat heating to maximum power.● Press the left or right seat icon repeatedlyuntil the desired level is adjusted.

● To switch off seat heating, press the corre-sponding seat icon several times until no LEDis on.● You can also adjust the seat heating levelby using two fingers to press the sensor field››› Fig. 123 1 or 2 (left or right seat).

If the ignition is switched on again in approx.the next 10 minutes, the driver seat heatingis automatically turned on to the level set thelast time.

Cases in which the heat seating should notbe switched onDo not switch the seat heating on if any ofthe following conditions are met:

● The seat is not occupied.● The seat has a cover.● A child seat has been installed on the seat.● The seat cushion is wet or damp.● The outdoor or indoor temperature isgreater than +25°C (77°F).

WARNINGPeople who cannot perceive pain or tem-perature because of medications, paralysisor chronic diseases (e.g. diabetes) or have alimited perception of these, may sufferburns to the back, buttocks or legs whenusing seat heating.

● People with limited pain and temperaturethresholds must never use seat heating.● If an abnormality in the device's tempera-ture control is detected, have it checked bya specialist workshop.

WARNINGIf the fabric of the cushion is wet, this canadversely affect the operation of the seatheating, increasing the risk of burns.● Make sure the seat cushion is dry prior tousing the seat heater.● Do not sit on the seat with clothing that iswet or damp.● Do not leave clothing that is wet or dampon the seat.● Do not spill liquid on the seat.

CAUTION● To avoid damaging the heating elementsof the seat heaters, please do not kneel onthe seat or apply sharp pressure to a singlepoint on the seat cushion or backrest.● Liquids, sharps objects and insulatingmaterials (e.g. covers or child seats) candamage the seat heating.● In the event of smells, switch off the seatheating immediately and have it inspectedby a specialised workshop. »

149

Operation

For the sake of the environmentThe seat heating should remain on onlywhen needed. Otherwise, it is an unneces-sary fuel waste.

Steering wheel heating*

Steering wheel heating works only with theengine running.

Steering wheel heating levelsThe selected flywheel heating level will bedisplayed on the instrument panel display.

Level control is carried out using the but-ton on the multifunction steering wheel:

● Brief press (less than 1 second): the heat-ing is switched on at maximum level. Pressthe steering wheel button repeatedly untilthe desired level is adjusted. To switch offsteering wheel heating, press the steeringwheel button repeatedly until the heatedsteering wheel OFF icon is displayed on theinstrument cluster.● Long press (more than 1 second): the heat-ing is switched off directly from the level thatis currently operating. If the steering wheelbutton is pressed again for a long period, theheating is switched on directly at the last lev-el saved before switching off.

Automatic offThe steering wheel heating will be switchedoff automatically when any of the followingconditions are met:

● Power consumption is too high.● The steering wheel heating system is faulty.● If the ignition is switched off.

Parking ventilation*

With the parking ventilation function, thepassenger compartment can be ventilated inspring/summer.

The power required for parking ventilationwill be provided by the vehicle's 12V battery.

The ventilation function is controlledthrough the CUPRA CONNECT mobile Appor the MyCUPRA website.

Connecting parking ventilationThe function will be switched on as follows:

● The parking ventilation function will beturned on through the immediate powerbutton on that App.● By programming a departure time.

In the event of low level charge of the 12Vbattery, the parking ventilation will not turnon.

Disconnecting parking ventilationThe parking ventilation will turn off in the fol-lowing situations:

● When the operating time selected by theuser in the App for the immediate turn onmode has ended.● The parking ventilation function will beturned on through the immediate powerbutton on that App.● When the scheduled departure time hasbeen reached.

The maximum operating period of the park-ing ventilation is 60 min.

Programming a departure/trip startThe activation of the parking ventilation for ascheduled time is only valid for a single venti-lation process. The departure time must befor each newly programmed ventilationprocess.

Before programming the departure time, youmust check that the date and time of the carare correctly set.

When programming a departure time, thecar automatically calculates, depending onthe environmental conditions, the necessaryoperating time of the parking ventilation.

150

Air conditioning

CAUTIONFoods sensitive to heat or cold, medica-tions and other objects can be damaged bythe airflow.● Do not place any type of food, medicinesor other temperature sensitive items infront of the ventilation slots.

NoteIf parking ventilation works repeatedly forlong periods of time, the 12V batterycharge level will drop. It is advisable to takethe vehicle for a long drive to recharge thebattery.

151

Operation

Auxiliary heating (additionalheating)*

Introduction

The auxiliary heater runs on fuel from thevehicle's tank and can be used while you aredriving and when the vehicle is stationary.

The auxiliary heating can be controlledthrough the CUPRA CONNECT mobile app,the MyCUPRA website or with the remotecontrol.

In winter, with the auxiliary heater switchedon, you can defog the windscreen and leaveit free of ice and snow (if it is a thin layer) be-fore you start driving.

If the outside temperature is very high, thevehicle interior can be ventilated with theengine off using the auxiliary heater.

The maximum operating period of the park-ing ventilation is 60 min.

WARNINGThe auxiliary heater exhaust fumes containcarbon monoxide, an odourless and col-ourless toxic gas. Carbon monoxide cancause people to lose consciousness. It canalso cause death.● Never switch on the auxiliary heater orleave it running in enclosed spaces or areaswith no ventilation.

● Never programme the auxiliary heater sothat it switches itself on and is running in anenclosed space or an area with no ventila-tion.

WARNINGThe components of the auxiliary heater areextremely hot and could cause a fire.● Always park your vehicle so that no partof the exhaust system can come in contactwith easily flammable materials that mightbe below the vehicle, such as dried grass.

CAUTIONNever place food, medicines or other tem-perature-sensitive objects close to the airvents. Food, medicines and other objectssensitive to heat or cold may be damagedor made unsuitable for use by the air com-ing from the vents.

Switching the auxiliary heater on andoff

ConnectionThe independent heating can be connectedin the following ways:

● Press the immediate on/off button in theApp or on the MyCUPRA website.

● Press button on the remote control››› page 153.● Automatically programming a departuretime in the App or the MyCUPRA website››› page 154.

DisconnectionThe independent heating can be switchedoff in the following ways:

● Press the immediate on/off button in theApp or on the MyCUPRA website.● Press button on the radio-operated re-mote control ››› page 153 .● Automatically at the scheduled departuretime or after the programmed operatingtime has elapsed .● Automatically when the control lamp (fuel level indicator) lights up ››› page 285 .● Automatically when the 12-volt batterycharge drops too low ››› page 298 .

Things to noteOnce switched off, the auxiliary heater willcontinue to operate for a short period oftime in order to burn the fuel remaining inthe system and also to expel the exhaustfumes.

152

Air conditioning

Radio-operated remote control

Fig. 125 Auxiliary heating: radio-operated remotecontrol.

Fig. 125Switch the auxiliary heater on

Switch the auxiliary heater offControl lamp

If the buttons of the remote control arepressed unnecessarily, it could switch on theauxiliary heater involuntarily, even when it isout of range or when the control lamp isflashing.

To switch on and off the independent heat-ing, the button must be pressed and held forapproximately 1 second.

1

Control lamp on the remote controlWhen the buttons are pressed, the controllamp on the remote control 1 provides theuser with different information:

It lights up for approx. 2 seconds● In green: The auxiliary heater has beenswitched on using the button.● In red: The auxiliary heater has beenswitched off con with button .

Flashes slowly for approx. 2 seconds● In green: No on signal has been received.The remote control is out of range. Movecloser to the vehicle.● In red: No off signal has been received. Theremote control is out of range. Move closerto the vehicle.

Flashes quickly approx. 2 seconds● In green: The independent heating isblocked. Possible causes: the fuel tank is al-most empty, the 12-volt battery charge isvery low or there is a fault.

It lights up for approx. 2 seconds● In orange (then in green or in red): The re-mote control battery is almost flat. However,the on or off signal has been received.● In orange (then flashes green or red): Theremote control battery is almost flat. No onor off signal has been received.

Flashes for around 5 seconds● In orange: The remote control battery isflat. No on or off signal has been received.

Changing the battery of the radio-operat-ed remote controlWhen pressing the buttons, if the controllamp of the remote 1 flashes for approx. 5orange or does not light up, the batteriesmust be replaced.

The battery is located beneath a cover onthe back of the remote control.

● To open the cover, lift it slightly at the bot-tom and slide it down.● Remove the old battery.● Insert the new battery. When doing so,take into account the polarity and use bat-teries of the same type ››› .● Replace the battery cover by inserting thetabs at the top and pressing the bottom.

RangeThe receiver is inside the vehicle. The re-mote control, when fitted with new batteries,has a range of several hundred metres. Ob-stacles between the remote control and thevehicle, bad weather conditions and dis-charged batteries can considerably reducethe range of the remote control. »

153

Operation

WARNINGSwallowing a battery with a 20 mm diame-ter or any other button battery can causeserious and even fatal injuries within a veryshort time.● Always keep the remote control, keyringswith batteries, the spare batteries, buttonbatteries and all other batteries over 20mm out of reach of children.● If you suspect that someone may haveswallowed a battery, seek immediate medi-cal attention.

CAUTION● The radio frequency remote control con-tains electronic components. Therefore,avoid getting it wet and exposing it toknocks or direct sunlight.● The use of inappropriate batteries maydamage the radio frequency remote con-trol. For this reason, always replace theused battery with another of the same volt-age, size and specifications.

For the sake of the environment● Please dispose of your used batteriescorrectly and with respect for the environ-ment.● The remote control battery may containperchlorate. Observe the legal provisionsregarding disposal.

● Care should be taken so as not to operatethe remote control unintentionally so as toprevent the auxiliary heater being switchedon accidentally.

Programming the auxiliary heater*

The activation of the parking ventilation for ascheduled time is only valid for a single venti-lation process. The departure time must befor each newly programmed ventilationprocess.

Before programming the departure time, youmust check that the date and time of the carare correctly set.

When programming a departure time, thecar automatically calculates, depending onthe environmental conditions, the necessaryoperating time of the parking ventilation.

WARNINGNever programme the auxiliary heater sothat it switches itself on and is running in anenclosed space or an area with no ventila-tion. The auxiliary heater exhaust fumescontain carbon monoxide, an odourlessand colourless toxic gas. Carbon monoxidecan cause people to lose consciousness. Itcan also cause death.

Usage instructions

The auxiliary heater exhaust system locatedbelow the vehicle must be kept clear ofsnow, mud and other objects. The exhaustfumes must be able to exit freely. The emis-sions generated by the auxiliary heater areremoved via an exhaust pipe fitted under-neath the vehicle.

On heating the vehicle interior, dependingon the outside temperature, the warm air isfirst directed at the windscreen and then tothe rest of the vehicle interior through the airvents. Directing the diffusers – towards thewindows for example – can affect air distri-bution.

When the auxiliary heater is not switchedon● The auxiliary heater requires about asmuch power as the dipped beam headlights.If the 12-volt battery charge is too low, theauxiliary heater switches off automaticallyand cannot be switched on. This avoidsproblems when starting the engine.● The heating must be activated every timeyou want to set off. Similarly, the departuretime must reactivate each time.● The control lamp (fuel level indicator)lights up.

154

Air conditioning

Note● Noises will be heard while the auxiliaryheater is running.● When the air humidity is high and the in-side temperature low, condensation fromthe heating and ventilating system mayevaporate when the auxiliary heater isswitched on. In this case, steam may be re-leased from underneath the vehicle. Thisdoes not mean that there is a vehicle mal-function.● If the vehicle is tilted, e.g. if parked on aslope, the operation of the auxiliary heatermay be restricted if the fuel tank level is low(just above the reserve level).● If the auxiliary heater is used a number oftimes for a long period of time, the 12-voltbattery will lose its charge. To recharge thebattery, the vehicle must be driven for anumber of kilometres from time to time. Asa guideline: the journey should last approx-imately as long as the heater was connec-ted.● At temperatures below +5 °C (+41 °F), theauxiliary heater may switch itself on auto-matically when the engine is switched on.The auxiliary heater is switched off againafter a certain time.

155

Infotainment system

Infotainment system

Introduction

First steps

Introduction

Infotainment functions and settings dependon the country and equipment

Before first useBefore the first use, bear in mind the follow-ing points, to take full advantage of the func-tions and settings offered:

● Observe the basic safety warnings››› page 156.● Reset the Infotainment factory settings.● Search and store favourite radio stations onthe preset buttons so you can tune themquickly.● Use only suitable audio sources and datamedia.● Pair a mobile phone to use phone man-agement through the Infotainment system.● Use current maps for navigation.● Register in CUPRA CONNECT to run thecorresponding services.

Current documentation attachedFor using infotainment and its components,take into account, together with this instruc-tion manual, the following documentation:

● Supplements to your vehicle’s on-boarddocumentation.● Instruction Manual of the mobile phonedevice or audio sources.● Operating instructions for data media andexternal players.● Manuals for the Infotainment accessoriessubsequently installed or used additionally.● Description of services when running CU-PRA CONNECT services.

Safety instructions

Some function areas may include links tothird-party websites. CUPRA is not the ownerof the third-party websites accessiblethrough the links, and assumes no liability fortheir content.

Some function areas may include outside in-formation from third-party providers. CUPRAis not responsible for such information beingcorrect, up-to-date or complete, or for en-suring it does not infringe the rights of thirdparties.

Radio stations and owners of data media andaudio sources are responsible for the infor-mation they transmit.

Bear in mind that parking lots, tunnels, tallbuildings, mountains or due to the operationof other electrical devices, such as chargers,can also interfere with the reception of theradio signal.

Foils or adhesives with metallic layers on theantenna and on the window panes can inter-fere with radio reception.

WARNINGThe infotainment central computer is in-terconnected with the control units moun-ted on the vehicle. Therefore, there is a se-rious danger of accident and injury if thecentral computer is repaired or disassem-bled and reassembled incorrectly.● Never replace the central computer withanother used, recycled or from another ve-hicle at the end of its useful life.● The repair or disassembly and reassemblyof the central computer should only be car-ried out at specialised workshops. To do so,CUPRA recommends going to a specialisedCUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealership.

WARNINGThe factory assembled radio with integra-ted software is interconnected with thecontrol units mounted on the vehicle.

156

Introduction

Therefore, there is a serious danger of acci-dent and injury if the radio is repaired ordisassembled and reassembled incorrectly.● Never replace the radio with another ra-dio that is used, recycled or from anothervehicle at the end of its useful life.● The repair or disassembly and reassemblyof the radio should only be carried out atspecialised workshops. To do so, CUPRArecommends going to a specialised CUPRAdealer or any SEAT dealership.

WARNINGAny distraction affecting the driver in anyway can lead to an accident and cause inju-ries. Reading the information on the screenand managing the infotainment system candistract your attention from traffic andcause an accident.● Always drive as carefully and responsiblyas possible.

WARNINGConnecting, inserting or removing an audiosource or data media while driving can dis-tract your attention from the traffic andcause an accident.

WARNINGSelect volume settings that allow you toeasily hear signals from outside the vehicle

at all times (e.g. emergency services si-rens).● Hearing may be impaired if using too higha volume setting, even if only for short peri-ods of time.

WARNINGThe following circumstances may result inan emergency call, phone call or datatransmission not being made or being in-terrupted:● When in areas with zero or insufficientmobile telephony or GPS signal. Also intunnels, confined areas between very tallbuildings, garages, underpasses, mountainsand valleys.● When in areas with sufficient mobilephone or GPS signal, the telephony net-work of the telecommunications providerhas interference or is not available.● When the vehicle components necessaryto make emergency calls, phone calls andto transmit data are damaged, do not workor do not have sufficient electrical power.● When the battery of the mobile phonedevice is discharged or its charge level is in-sufficient.

WARNINGIn some countries and some telephonenetworks it is only possible to make anemergency call, if a mobile telephone de-

vice is connected to the telephone inter-face of the vehicle, inside it there is an “un-locked” SIM card with sufficient balance tomake calls and with sufficient network sig-nal coverage.

WARNINGRead and observe the operating instruc-tions provided by the manufacturer inquestion when using mobile phone devices,data media, external devices, external au-dio and multimedia sources.

WARNINGPosition the connection cables of the audiosources and external devices so that theydo not interfere with the driver.

WARNINGWhen changing or connecting an audio ormultimedia source may cause suddenchanges in the volume.● Lower the volume before connecting orswitching to audio or multimedia sources.

WARNINGIf mobile phone and radiocommunicationdevices are used without connection to anexternal antenna, the maximum electro-magnetic radiation levels inside the vehiclemight be surpassed, thus posing a risk tothe health of the driver and passengers. »

157

Infotainment system

This is also the case if the external antennahas not been correctly installed.● Keep a distance of at least 20 centime-tres between the antennas of the mobilephone device and an active medical device,such as a pacemaker, as mobile phonesmight alter the functioning of these devi-ces.● Do not carry a mobile phone switched onvery close or directly on top of an activemedical device, for instance in a chestpocket.● Immediately turn off the mobile phone ifyou suspect it is causing interferences in anactive medical device or any other medicaldevice.

WARNINGMobile phones, external devices and acces-sories that are loose or not properly se-cured could move around the passengercompartment during a sudden driving orbraking manoeuvre or an accident andcause damage or injury.● Set mobile phone devices, external devi-ces and their accessories outside the air-bag deployment areas or store them se-curely.

WARNINGThe centre armrest may obstruct the driv-er's arm movements, which could cause anaccident and severe injuries.● Keep the storage compartments of thecentre armrest closed at all times while thevehicle is in motion.

WARNINGIf the light conditions are not good and thescreen is damaged or dirty, the indicationsand information displayed on the screenmay not be read or be read incorrectly.● The indications and information dis-played on the screen should never induceto take any risk that compromises safety.The screen is not a replacement for driverawareness.

WARNINGRadio stations can transmit disaster or haz-ard announcements. The following condi-tions prevent such notices from being re-ceived or issued:● When in areas with zero or insufficient ra-dio signal. Also in tunnels, confined areasbetween very tall buildings, garages, under-passes, mountains and valleys.● When the frequency bands of the radiostation have interference or are not availa-ble in areas with sufficient radio signal re-ception.

● When the speakers and the vehicle com-ponents necessary for radio reception aredamaged, do not work or do not have suffi-cient electrical power.● When the infotainment is switched off.

WARNINGSwitch off mobile phone devices in areaswith a risk of explosion!

WARNINGThe driving recommendations and trafficindications shown on the navigation systemmay differ from the current traffic situa-tion.● Traffic signs, signalling systems, trafficregulations and local circumstances prevailover driving recommendations and naviga-tion system indications.● Adapt your speed and driving style to suitvisibility, weather, road and traffic condi-tions.● Certain circumstances can significantlyinitially planned lengthen both the dura-tion of the trip and the route to the desti-nation, or even temporarily prevent naviga-tion to it, for example, if a road is closed totraffic.

NoteIn areas where special regulations apply orthe use of mobile phones is forbidden, the

158

Introduction

mobile device in question must be switchedoff at all times. The radiation produced by amobile phone device when switched onmay interfere with sensitive technical andmedical equipment, possibly resulting inmalfunction or damage to the equipment.

NoteIf the playback volume is excessive or dis-torted, the speakers may be damaged.

159

Infotainment system

Overview and controls

Connect System

Fig. 126 Overview: control unit and indication in the10-inch version

Touch screen. The infotainment func-tions can be used through the screen.HOME button.: main menu with widget views.: main menu in mosaic mode.Direct access button to the assist sys-tems and vehicle settings.Touch zone (to turn the infotainmentsystem on or off).

1

2

3

4

Touch zones (to raise and lower the airconditioning temperature).Touch zones (to raise and lower the vol-ume).

5

6

160

Introduction

General instructions for use

Operating indications

● The infotainment needs a few seconds forthe complete start-up of the system andduring that time it does not react to inputs.Only the image of the rear view camera* sys-tem can be displayed during system start-up.● The display of all indications and the exe-cution of functions only takes place once theinfotainment system has finished booting.The duration of the system booting dependson the number of infotainment functionsand may take longer than normal in theevent of very high or very low temperatures.● When using the infotainment system andcorresponding accessories, e.g., head-phones, bear in mind country-specific regu-lations and legal provisions.● Some functions of the infotainment systemrequire an active CUPRA CONNECT user ac-count and an Internet connection for the ve-hicle. The data transmission must not belimited to perform the functions.● To use the infotainment system, simplylightly press a button or touch the screen.● For the correct operation of the infotain-ment system it is important that it is switchedon and that, if necessary, the time and dateof the vehicle are set correctly.

● If a function button is missing on thescreen, it is not a device defect, but corre-sponds to the specific equipment of thecountry or version.● Some infotainment functions can only beselected when the vehicle is at a standstill. Insome countries, the selector lever must alsobe in the parking position P or in neutral po-sition N. It is not a malfunction, but is due tocompliance with legal provisions.● Restrictions on the use of devices usingBluetooth® technology may apply in somecountries. For further information, contactthe local authorities.● If you disconnect the 12-volt battery, turnon the ignition before restarting the infotain-ment system.● If the setup is changed, this may changethe display on the screen and in some cases,the infotainment system may behave in amanner different to that described in this in-struction manual.● Ensure that any repairs or modificationsthat need to be carried out on the infotain-ment system are carried out by a specialisedworkshop. To do so, CUPRA recommendsgoing to a specialised CUPRA dealer or anySEAT dealership.● Using a mobile phone device inside the ve-hicle may cause noise in the speakers.● In some countries, the infotainment sys-tem automatically shuts off when the engine

is switched off and the vehicle's 12-volt bat-tery charge level is low.● On vehicles with park assist, the audiosource volume is automatically loweredwhen reverse gear is selected. The volumereduction can be adjusted.● Information about the included softwareand the license conditions can be found inSettings > Copyright.● When selling or lending the vehicle, makesure that all saved data, files and settingshave been deleted and, if necessary, exter-nal audio sources and data media have beenremoved.

NoteYou will find more information and tips forusing the infotainment system in the Helpmenu.

HOME screen

In the control and display unit you can set upthe views and representation on the homescreen or use the factory setting templates.

If an icon is missing on the screen, it is not adevice defect, but corresponds to the spe-cific equipment of the country or version.

The following menus can be included as anicon on the home screen: »

161

Infotainment system

Main menus on the home screen

Navigation ››› page 187

Radio/Multimedia ››› page 180

Telephone ››› page 194

Full Link ››› page 171

Setup ››› page 163

Vehicle ››› page 86

Data ››› page 85

Air conditioning ››› page 143

Sound

Users

a) Privacy mode ››› page 171

Store

Legal

Help

a) Depends on the selected privacy mode.

Managing the infotainment system

Execute the functions and settings with theinfotainment controls.

Depending on the equipment, the infotain-ment system has different controls:● Touch screen.● Touch zones outside the screen, for exam-ple, Volume (+ -).

Opening the Quick GuideYou will find more information and tips forhandling in the Quick Guide of the infotain-ment system.

● Press HOME > .

Connecting and disconnecting the info-tainment systemThe infotainment system turns on when theignition is switched on, unless it has beenmanually turned off beforehand.

The infotainment system starts-up with thelast set volume, provided that this does notexceed the preset maximum start-up vol-ume.

The infotainment system automatically turnsoff when the driver's door is opened, provi-ded the ignition has been switched off be-forehand.

Moving objects and adjusting volumeMove objects on the screen to adapt set-tings, for example, with scrollable buttons orto move the areas of a menu.

Depending on the equipment, customisemenus and views.

Increasing and reducing images or mapsizesTip: use your thumb and index finger.● Press on the map with both fingers at thesame time and leave them on the screen.● To enlarge views, slowly separate one fin-ger from the other. To reduce views, slowlybring one finger towards the other.

NoteIf you turn on the infotainment systemmanually with the ignition off, it will auto-matically turn off after about 30 minutes.

Customising the infotainment system

Customise the menus and infotainmentviews to quickly access your favourite ormost frequently used functions.

The main menu contains function buttonsfor accessing all of the Infotainment apps.

Configuring customised menusIn all views (except Main Menu, StandBy,Parking, Speller and Full Link), you will findshortcuts to customizable system functions

162

Introduction

in the lower part of the screen. Use the set-tings to delete or replace them, or changetheir order.

● Press and hold one of the icons (or presson the icon of an empty position) to displayan additional window.● Select one of the icons from the apps bar.● Press to delete an icon.● Click on an icon in the additional windowto replace the value.● Hold your finger on one of the icons anddrag it to the desired position.● To close the edit mode, press in the ad-ditional window.

Adapting customised menus● Press a function button in a customisedmenu and keep your finger on the screenuntil an additional window is displayed.● Press the function button to which youwant to add a function.● Click close to return to the custom menu.

Note● At least two customised menus are alwaysavailable. These cannot be deleted.● You can add a maximum of two more cus-tomised menus (in total, a maximum of fourcustomised menus).

● For some function buttons, more func-tions are available than those seen at firstsight in the additional window. To find allthe functions, in the additional windowslide the screen to the left or right.● For the drop-down menu, more functionsare available than those seen at first sight inthe additional window. To find all the func-tions, in the additional window slide thescreen to the left or right.● The shortcut bar cannot be edited whenthe vehicle is moving.

Settings (system and sound)

The selection of possible settings varies de-pending on the country, the equipment inquestion and the equipment of the vehicle.

Modifying settingsThe meaning of the following symbols arevalid for all system and sound settings.

All changes are automatically applied whenthe menus are closed.

Symbol and its meaning

The setting is selected and activated orconnected.

The setting is not selected, disabled ordisconnected.

Symbol and its meaning

To open a drop-down list.

To increase a setting value.

To increase a setting value.

To go back step by step.

To go forward step by step.

To change a setting value with the scrol-lable button without adjusting.

Sound settingsAccess the sound settings: HOME >

In the sound settings there may be the fol-lowing functions, information and settingoptions:

● Equaliser● Position.● Settings.

System settingsAccess the system settings: HOME > .

In the system settings there may be the fol-lowing functions, information and settingoptions:

● Screen.● Time and date. »

163

Infotainment system

● Language.● Additional keypad languages.● Units.● Voice control.● Wi-Fi.● Applications and services● Manage mobile devices.● Reset factory settings.● System information.● Copyright.● Configuration wizard.

Adjust the volume of external audio sour-cesIf you need to increase the playback volumefor the external audio source, first lower thevolume on the infotainment system.

If the sound from the connected audiosource is very low, increase the output vol-ume on the external audio source. If this isnot enough, change the input volume tomedium or high.

If the sound from the connected externalaudio source is too loud or distorted, lowerthe output volume on the external audiosource. If this is not enough, change the in-put volume to medium or low.

Clean the screen

Remove persistent dirt carefully and withoutusing aggressive cleaning products. To cleanthe screen we recommend that:

● The infotainment system is switched off.● Use a clean, soft cloth dampened with wa-ter ››› page 316 .● In case of persistent dirt: soften the dirt bymoistening with a little water. Then carefullyremove with a clean, soft cloth.

CAUTIONCleaning the screen with inappropriatecleaning products or when dry, may dam-age it.● When cleaning, only press lightly.● Do not use aggressive cleaning productsor that contain solvents. Such productsmay damage the equipment and “darken”the screen.

Trademarks, licenses and copyrights

Registered trademarks and licensesCertain terms in this manual bear the symbol® or ™. These symbols indicate that it is atrademark or a registered trademark. Theabsence of this symbol, however, does not

necessarily mean that the term in questioncan be used freely.

Other product names are registered trade-marks or trademarks of the respective rightsholders.

● Manufactured under license from DolbyLaboratories. Dolby and the double-D sym-bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.● Manufactured under license from DolbyLaboratories. Dolby and the double-D sym-bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.● Android Auto™ is a trademark of GoogleInc.● Apple CarPlay™ is a trademark of AppleInc.● Bluetooth® is a registered trademark ofBluetooth® SIG, Inc.iPod®, iPad® andiPhone® are trademarks of Apple Inc.● MirrorLink™ and MirrorLink Logo are certi-fied trademarks of Car Connectivity Consor-tium LLC.● Windows® is a registered trademark of Mi-crosoft Corporation, Redmond, USA.● MPEG-4 HE-AAC audio coding technologyand patents are licensed by Fraunhofer IIS.● This product is protected by certain Micro-soft Corporation industrial and intellectualproperty rights. The use or commercializa-tion of technology of this type outside the

164

Introduction

configuration of this product, without a li-cence from Microsoft or an authorised Mi-crosoft branch is prohibited.

CopyrightAs a general rule, audio and video files storedon data media and audio sources are subjectto intellectual property protection in accord-ance with the national and international pro-visions applicable in each case. Please bearin mind all legal provisions!

Technical data

Central computer with control and displayunit (10")1)

The factory-mounted central computer inthe vehicle includes country-specific com-ponents and software for connectivity andfor the execution of vehicle, comfort and in-fotainment functions.

The corresponding indications are shown onthe control and display unit screen and partlyon the instrument panel.■ Capacitive colour screen:■ Using the equipment with:■ Touch zones Touch operation.

■ Buttons on the multifunction steeringwheel.

■ Proximity sensors and gesture control.

Vehicle and comfort functions■ Driver assistance system settings.■ Heating and air conditioning settings.■ Lights and visibility function settings.■ Vehicle comfort settings.■ Parking and manoeuvring settings.

Sound system

Basic equipment:The infotainment system that is suppliedfrom the factory is equipped as follows:■ Speakers in different locations and with

different power levels (watts).■ Internal amplifier depending on the sys-

tem:■ 7 speakers: 5 x 20 W

■ Setting options:■ Equaliser, depending on the system:■ 7 speakers: 5 frequency bands or pre-

defined settings.■ Sound distribution, depending on the

system:

■ 7 speakers: Balance + Fader (left /right / front / rear).

■ Sound optimisation by zones (valid forthe 7 speaker system):■ Manual (Driver and All)■ Automatic depending on the seats oc-

cupied.

Optional sound systemThe infotainment system can be extendedwith an optional sound system as follows:■ 10 speakers in different locations and with

different power levels (watts).■ External amplifier (340 W Ethernet), which

processes the audio signals sent by thecentral computer.

■ Excitation of speaker channels throughclass AB final stages.

■ Audio signal processing in digital internalsignal processor (DSP).

■ Independent subwoofer in the luggagecompartment.

■ Setting options:■ User equaliser: 5 bands.■ Equaliser settings predefined by BEATS®

(Signature, Active, Immersive and Voice).■ Sound distribution: Balance + Fader

(left / right / front / rear).■ Sound optimisation by zones: »

1) Equipment name: Connect System.165

Infotainment system

■ Manual (Driver, Front and All)■ Automatic depending on the seats oc-

cupied.■ Subwoofer volume.■ Surround settings.

Connectivity

Wi-Fi■ Wi-Fi conforming to IEEE 802.11 b/g/n.■ Transfer in 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz.■ Three Wi-Fi modes at the same time:■ Tethering (2.4 GHz).■ 2.4 GHz access point.

■ Simultaneous connection of up to 8 Wi-Fidevices.

■ Internet connection via Wi-Fi:■ Tethering through the customer's

phone.■ Customer access point (clients) in the

vehicle.■ Apple CarPlay and Android Auto over Wi-

Fi.■ Pairing process simplified by WPS or QR

code.

Bluetooth® profilesThere can be a maximum of two mobile de-vices connected to the Bluetooth® hands-

free and a third device connected to theBluetooth® as a music player.

When a mobile phone is connected to thetelephone management system, a data ex-change takes place via one of the Blue-tooth® profiles.

● Hands-free telephone profile (HFP): theHFP can be used to manage calls throughthe infotainment system.● Audio profile (A2DP): This profile allowsaudio to be transmitted with stereo quality. Itmay require connecting other profiles formanaging and controlling playback.● Phone book access profile (PBAP): Al-lows phone book contents to be downloa-ded from the mobile telephone.● Message profile (MAP): It allows shortmessages (SMS) to be downloaded andsynchronised.

166

Data transfer

Data transfer

CUPRA CONNECT

Introduction

To use it, CUPRA CONNECT must first be ac-tivated online by entering into a CUPRACONNECT contract with SEAT, S.A. and issubject to a temporary use limitation de-pending on the country.

Both the CUPRA CONNECT service portfo-lios offered by SEAT and individual servicescan be modified, cancelled, deactivated, re-activated, renamed and extended, evenwithout prior notification.

In myCUPRA.com you can create the useraccount, see the description of services andmore information.

The execution and availability of the CUPRACONNECT services and service portfoliosmay vary depending on the country, as wellas the vehicle, its equipment and connectivi-ty.

Connectivity statuses

(white) Full connectivity, all services active

(grey)Limited connectivity, some servicesmay not be available.

no icon No connectivity, no services available.

CUPRA CONNECT's voice recognition orsearch technology does not recognise or of-fer results for all words.

There are CUPRA CONNECT services forwhich registration is mandatory and othersfor which it is not mandatory.

Description of servicesBefore running CUPRA CONNECT services,read and take into account the description ofthe corresponding services. Descriptions areupdated non-periodically and are availableonline at myCUPRA.com.

● Always use the most up-to-date version ofthe corresponding service description.

WARNINGIn areas with insufficient mobile phone andGPS coverage, neither emergency calls orphone calls can be made, and data cannotbe transmitted. Change location if possible.

CAUTIONThe vehicle may be damaged by factorsoutside CUPRA’s control. These may bespecifically:● Misuse of mobile terminals● Data loss during transmission● Unsuitable or defective third party appli-cations

● Malicious software on data storage devi-ces, computers, tablets or mobile phones

Services portfolio

The initial service allocation shown here cor-responds to the third generation of CUPRACONNECT services and represents the maxi-mum services portfolio. The maximum pos-sible portfolio is only available on some vehi-cle models. During the useful life of the vehi-cle, you can change the assignment shownhere.

After activating the services management inthe infotainment system you can check if thevehicle has services and what they are.

In some countries and in the event of a con-tract renewal, the services offered may becombined differently than indicated here.They may also vary depending on the year ofproduction of the vehicle. The services men-tioned correspond to the third generation ofCUPRA CONNECT.

CUPRA CONNECT services and functionsthat do not require activationThe following services also work without theactivation of CUPRA CONNECT:

● Public emergency call service.● Privacy mode. »

167

Infotainment system

● Legal.

CUPRA CONNECT servicesThe CUPRA CONNECT services are:● Private emergency call● Public emergency call● Roadside assistance call● Customer support● Service appointment planning● Online system update● Customisation● Activating CUPRA CONNECT● Private mode (deactivation of services)● Delete user / Reset factory settings● Remote independent heating● Remote opening● Horn and turn signals● Vehicle status incl. doors and lights● Driving data● Vehicle status report● Anti-theft alarm warning● Zone warning● Speed warning● Online map update● Search for points of interest● Petrol stations● Online traffic information

● Parking lots● Online infotainment system update● Online route calculation● Information on risks● Dictation● Natural voice control for infotainment, me-dia and radio apps● Natural voice control for destinations andaddresses● Online radio● Online media● Online route import● Online destination import● Remote auxiliary ventilation● Parking position● Privacy mode● Legal

CUPRA CONNECT services for hybrid vehi-clesAvailable only in electric and hybrid vehicles.

● Remote air conditioning● Electrical power manager● Departure times● plus all CUPRA CONNECT services in theprevious section ››› page 168 .

CUPRA CONNECT individual options● In-Car Applications. These applicationscan be purchased and installed directly inthe infotainment system through the In-Carstore.● Full Link.● Data package. Pay per use data rates forthe use of online functions, for example, 2GB per month.

Note● The public emergency call service isavailable regardless of whether the info-tainment system is logged in.● Customisation and purchase of In-Carapplications require loggint into infotain-ment system, but the activation of the vehi-cle in a CUPRA CONNECT account is notnecessary.

Activation of CUPRA CONNECT and S-PIN

Activating CUPRA CONNECTThe following steps are necessary for the ac-tivation of CUPRA CONNECT (including reg-istration):

● Create a user account at myCUPRA.com ordirectly through the infotainment system inthe User Management menu.

168

Data transfer

● Place the CUPRA CONNECT order and ac-tivate it.● Add the vehicle to your user account.● Prove ownership.● Prove your identity. It is only necessary ifyou are to run CUPRA CONNECT servicesrelevant to security.● You can activate it at myCUPRA.com or di-rectly through the infotainment system. Toactivate it through the infotainment system,proceed as follows: HOME > User manage-ment > Become a main user.

Follow the rest of the indications and the in-formation shown in the infotainment system.During activation, you may be asked to cre-ate an S-PIN.

Update option

Infotainment yes

CUPRA CONNECT portal yes

CUPRA CONNECT application yes

More information at myCUPRA.com/faqs.

S-PINThe S-PIN is a sequence of several digits,which can be selected when completed theCUPRA CONNECT registration.

When creating the S-PIN, avoid easy-to-guess number sequences and known dates

of birth. You can change the S-PIN in theCUPRA CONNECT user account in “Accountsettings”.

The S-PIN is necessary, for example, to pro-tect your user profile or to run a CUPRACONNECT service relevant to the security ofyour vehicle.

You must manage this S-PIN with absoluteconfidentiality. If you reveal the S-PIN tothird parties, for security reasons you mustchange it immediately.

Ownership and identity accreditation

Become a primary userTo become a main user and thus prove own-ership of the vehicle, you need both of thevehicle’s physical keys. Ownership accredita-tion takes place in the vehicle during regis-tration or, if you already have a CUPRA CON-NECT user account, you must log in throughthe infotainment system and then go to Usermanagement

● Switch on the ignition and the infotainmentsystem.● In the infotainment system, register in CU-PRA CONNECT.● Or: open the menu User management >Settings > Become main user and follow theinstructions.

● Press the unlock button on the first vehiclekey.● Press the unlock button on the second ve-hicle key.

Once the infotainment system has pro-cessed the orders by radiofrequency, the ac-creditation of the ownership will have beencompleted. You can control the current sta-tus in the CUPRA CONNECT portal.

How is ownership accredited?

Infotainment 2-Key method.

CUPRA CONNECT por-tal

No, it is not possible

CUPRA CONNECT ap-plication

No, it is not possible

Identity accreditation (SEAT Ident)Identity accreditation must be done beforeyou can use CUPRA CONNECT services thatare relevant to security, such as the “RemoteOpening” service. Identity accreditation canbe done in two ways:

● In person at a specialised CUPRA dealer orany SEAT dealership.● You can find more information about SEATIdent on the CUPRA CONNECT portal atmyCUPRA.com.

169

Infotainment system

Legal provisions

During the use of CUPRA CONNECT serv-ices, information is transferred and pro-cessed online through the vehicle. Such datacan also provide (at least indirectly) informa-tion about the driver in question, for exam-ple, driving behaviour and location. As acontracting party in the CUPRA CONNECTcontract with SEAT, S.A., you must ensurethat when your vehicle is used by other driv-ers (for example, family or friends), data pro-tection and personal rights are respected.Therefore, you must inform drivers in ad-vance that the vehicle transfers and receivesdata online, and that you can access suchdata.

Not taking into account this obligation to in-form, can infringe certain rights of the occu-pants.

Users can manage data sending and trans-fers through the privacy mode at any time.More information at: myCUPRA.com/faqs.

Follow-up services: ask all occupantsThe follow-up services need geographicaland vehicle data to determine whether thevehicle is being used within defined speedranges, where it has been parked or if it is be-ing used in an established geographical area.This information is displayed on the CUPRACONNECT portal and in the CUPRA CON-NECT app.

Therefore, before moving off, ask all the ve-hicle occupants if they agree with the activa-ted services. If they do not, deactivate theservice in question (if possible) or do not al-low the occupants to use the vehicle.

GPS tracking: markingIf the vehicle has a factory-assembled con-trol unit that transmits the its current geo-graphical position and speed, the vehicleusually has this GPS marking (e.g., on theroof console). The absence of the markingon the vehicle does not guarantee that thecontrol unit does not transmit the vehicle’scurrent geographical position and speed.

Personal informationCUPRA protects your personal data and onlyuses them, as long as the law allows it or youhave given your consent on the occasion ofa use. You will find detailed information ondata processing in relation to CUPRA CON-NECT services in the Privacy Policy, whichyou can access in its corresponding currentversion on the SEAT website.

Permanent transfer of the vehicleIf another person has left you the vehicle forpermanent use (for example, if you buy aused vehicle), CUPRA CONNECT may al-ready be activated and the previous user stillhas the possibility of accessing the data reg-

istered through CUPRA CONNECT and con-trol certain functions of your vehicle.

In the infotainment system you can check ifyour vehicle is assigned to a person as themain user. In this case, you can register your-self as the main user of the vehicle and thusautomatically delete the previous main user.Alternatively, through the infotainment sys-tem you can directly and permanently deletethe previous user as the main user, as well asput the vehicle in offline mode and thus limitboth the communication of your vehicle withthe SEAT, S.A. data server and the processingof personal and vehicle data.

Deactivating CUPRA CONNECT serv-ices

The following functions are available in theinfotainment system to deactivate and acti-vate CUPRA CONNECT services:

● Central deactivation or activation● Individual deactivation or activation

You can rerun the corresponding services af-ter cancelling their deactivation in the info-tainment system.

NoteThe services required by law and their datatransmission, such as the public emergency

170

Data transfer

call system, cannot be disconnected or de-activated.

Faults

Even if the prerequisites for the use of CU-PRA CONNECT services are met, there maybe factors beyond the control of CUPRA thatinterfere with the execution of such servicesor prevent them. These may be specifically:

● Maintenance, repair, deactivation, soft-ware update and technical expansion of tele-communication equipment, satellites, serv-ers and data banks.● Change of the mobile telephony standardfor the transmission of mobile data by thetelecommunications service provider, forexample, from UMTS to EDGE or GPRS.● Disconnection of an existing mobile phonestandard by the telecommunications serviceprovider.● Interference, disturbance or interruption inthe reception of the mobile phone and GPSsignal due to aspects such as high-speeddriving, solar storms, meteorological influen-ces, topography, blocking equipment andthe intensive use of mobile phones in the ra-dio cells in question.● When in areas with zero or insufficient mo-bile telephony or GPS signal. Also, for exam-ple, in tunnels, confined areas between very

tall buildings, garages, underpasses, moun-tains and valleys.● External information from third party sup-plies available with limitations, incomplete orincorrect, e.g. representations of maps.● Countries and regions where CUPRA CON-NECT is not offered.

Service management

Open the settings in Users and go to Privacyand Services. You can do the following in theinfotainment system:

● Check which CUPRA CONNECT servicesare currently available in the vehicle.● The number of CUPRA CONNECT servicesthat are enabled or disabled.● Activate or deactivate CUPRA CONNECTservices.

More information at myCUPRA.com.

Privacy and Services SettingsCUPRA CONNECT services can be activatedand deactivated individually. To do this, justcheck the box corresponding to the serviceyou want to activate or deactivate. Use theprivacy mode option if you want to deacti-vate all of the services at the same time.

Privacy modeAllows you to deactivate or activate the serv-ices depending on the selected privacy level.

Tracking

Share location. Main users and co-users can view position data on the CU-PRA CONNECT portal or app.

Location

Use location. Position, vehicle, anduser data are used for services.

Personal

No location. Only the vehicle data anduser data are used for services.

Incognito

Maximum privacy. Your services aredisabled. Only services required for le-gal reasons use data.

Setting options are not available in all mar-kets or in all vehicle models.

NoteIf you deactivate each and every CUPRACONNECT service, the OCU may continueto transmit data.

Full Link

Introduction

With Full Link it is possible to view and usethe contents and functions that are shown »

171

Infotainment system

on the mobile phone device on the infotain-ment screen.

To do this, the mobile phone device must beconnected with the infotainment systemthrough a USB interface.

Some technologies can also be used byWireless Full Link through the Bluetooth® in-terface and a Wi-Fi connection.

The following technologies may be availa-ble:● Apple CarPlay™● Apple CarPlay™ Wireless● Android Auto™● MirrorLink®

The availability of the technologies that FullLink includes depends on the country andthe mobile phone device used.

You will find more information on the CUPRAwebsite.

Access the Full Link main menuBrowsing the Full Link main menu dependson the infotainment system used.

● View : click on Full link● View : click on Menu > Full Link● OR: press APP.

Configure Wireless Full LinkIn order to use Wireless Full Link, you mustfirst pair the mobile phone device with theinfotainment system. To do this, proceed asfollows:

Connect a mobile phone device for the firsttime.● Unlock the mobile phone device.● Enable Wi-Fi reception and Bluetooth® onthe mobile phone device.● Connect the mobile phone device to theinfotainment system using a USB cable or viaBluetooth®.● Access the Full Link main menu, unless itappears automatically.● Select the mobile phone device and thetechnology you want.● Confirm authorisation inquiries on the mo-bile phone device to grant the necessary au-thorisations to the infotainment system.● Disconnect the USB connection and con-nect with the infotainment system again viaWi-Fi or Bluetooth®. Wireless Full Link is nowconfigured.

The pairing has concluded. The connectedmobile phone device can also use WirelessFull Link from now on without the USB con-nection.

If pop-up menus are rejected during theconnection process, Wireless Full Link will

not be available. In this case, CUPRA recom-mends removing the devices in both theiPhone settings and the infotainment sys-tem, and restarting the connection process.

WARNINGThe use of applications while driving candistract your attention from the traffic. Anydistraction affecting the driver in any waycan lead to an accident and cause injuries.● Always drive as carefully and responsiblyas possible.

WARNINGAny applications that are not suitable orexecute incorrectly may cause damage tothe vehicle, accidents and serious injuries.● Protect the mobile phone device and itsapplications from inappropriate use.● Never carry out modifications to the ap-plications.● Follow instructions in the instructionmanual for the mobile phone device.

CAUTIONCUPRA cannot be held liable for any dam-age caused to the vehicle as a result of theuse of applications that are of poor qualityor are defective, the inadequate program-ming of the applications, the insufficientcoverage of the network, the loss of data

172

Data transfer

during transmission or the improper use ofmobile phone devices.

NoteWireless Full Link may not be compatiblewith all technologies.

Applications (apps)

With Full Link, the display of the contents ofCUPRA applications and other providers in-stalled on mobile phone devices can betransferred to the infotainment screen.

In the case of third-party applications, theremay be compatibility problems.

Applications, their use and the necessarymobile phone connection may be pay peruse.

The offer of applications can be varied anddesigned for a vehicle or a specific country.The content and volume of applications, aswell as the companies that offer them, mayvary. Some applications also depend on theavailability of third-party services.

It cannot be guaranteed that all the applica-tions offered will work on all mobile phonedevices or with all their operating systems.

The applications offered by CUPRA can bemodified, cancelled, deactivated, reactiva-ted and extended without prior notification.

To avoid distracting the driver while driving,only certified applications can be used.

Full Link symbols and settings

To show more informationTo open the Full Link settings menu

Apple CarPlay™

In order to use Apple CarPlay, the followingrequirements must be met:● The iPhone™ must be compatible withApple CarPlay™.● Voice control (Siri ™) must be active on theiPhone™.● Apple CarPlay™ must be active withoutlimitations in the iPhone™ settings.● The iPhone ™ must be connected to theinfotainment system via a USB connection.Only USB connections with data transmis-sion are suitable for the use of Apple Car-Play™.● The USB cable used must be an originalApple™ cable.

Apple CarPlay™ Wireless: Bluetooth® andWi-Fi must also be activate on the iPhone™.

Establish connectionWhen you first connect an iPhone™, followthe instructions on the infotainment systemscreen and on the iPhone ™.

The requirements must be met to use AppleCarPlay™.

Launch Apple CarPlay™:● Press HOME > Full Link to access the FullLink main menu.● OR: press APP to access the Full Link mainmenu.● Press Apple CarPlay™ to establish a con-nection with the iPhone™.

Disconnecting● On the Apple CarPlay™ mode, press theCUPRA icon to access the Full Link mainmenu.● Press to interrupt the active connection.

The representation of function buttons onthe screen may vary. »

173

Infotainment system

Special characteristicsDuring an active Apple CarPlay™ connec-tion, the following characteristics are appli-cable:● Bluetooth® connections between theiPhone™ and the infotainment system arenot possible.● If there is an active Bluetooth® connec-tion, it is automatically interrupted.● The phone functions are only availablethrough Apple CarPlay™. The functions de-scribed for the Infotainment system are notavailable.● The connected iPhone™ cannot be usedas a multimedia device in the Media mainmenu.● It is not possible to use the built-in naviga-tion system and the Apple CarPlay™ naviga-tion system at the same time. The last routestarted interrupts the one that was previouslyactive.● Depending on the infotainment systemyou use, on the instrument panel screen youcan view data from the Telephone mode.● The instrument panel screen does not dis-play any indication to turn.● With the multifunction steering wheel youcan accept or reject incoming calls, as well asend an ongoing telephone conversation.

voice control● Press briefly to start voice control usingthe infotainment system.● Press this button for a long time to startvoice control (Siri™) of the connectediPhone™.

Note● The availability of technologies dependson the country and may vary.● You will find information about technicalrequirements, compatible iPhones, certi-fied applications and their availability onthe CUPRA and Apple CarPlay ™ websites,at specialised CUPRA dealerships or at anySEAT dealership.

Android Auto™

Requirements for Android Auto™In order to use Android Auto™, the followingrequirements must be met:● The mobile phone device, called smart-phone from here on, has to be compatiblewith Android Auto™.● The smartphone must have an AndroidAuto™ application installed.● The smartphone has to be connectedthrough the USB connection with data trans-mission with the infotainment system.

● The USB cable used must be an originalcable provided by the smartphone manufac-turer.

Establish connectionWhen you first connect a smartphone, followthe instructions on the infotainment systemscreen and on the smartphone.

The requirements must be met to use An-droid Auto™.

Launch Android Auto™:● Press HOME > Full Link to access the FullLink main menu● OR: press APP to access the Full Link mainmenu.● Press Android Auto™ to establish a con-nection with the smartphone.

Disconnecting● On the Android Auto™ mode, press Closeto access the Full Link main menu.● Press to interrupt the active connection.

Special characteristicsDuring an active Android Auto™ connection,the following characteristics are applicable:● An active Android Auto™ device can beconnected at the same time via Bluetooth®(HFP profile) with the infotainment system.

174

Data transfer

● It is possible to use the phone’s functionsthrough Android Auto™. If the Android Au-to™ device is connected at the same time viaBluetooth® with the infotainment system,the telephone function of the infotainmentcan also be used.● An active Android Auto™ device cannot beused as a multimedia device in the Mediamain menu.● It is not possible to use the built-in naviga-tion system and the Android Auto™ naviga-tion system at the same time. The last routestarted interrupts the one that was previouslyactive.● On the instrument panel screen you canview data from the Telephone mode.● The instrument panel screen does not dis-play any indication to turn or the Mediamode.● With the multifunction steering wheel youcan accept or reject incoming calls, as well asend an ongoing telephone conversation.

voice control● Press briefly to start voice control usingthe infotainment system.● Press this button for a long time to startvoice control on the connected smart-phone.

Note● The availability of technologies dependson the country and may vary.● You will find information about technicalrequirements, compatible mobile phonedevices, certified applications and theiravailability on the CUPRA and Android Au-to™ websites, at specialised CUPRA dealer-ships or at any SEAT dealership.

MirrorLink®

Requirements for MirrorLink®In order to use MirrorLink™, the following re-quirements must be met:● The mobile device must be compatiblewith MirrorLink™.● The mobile phone device must be con-nected to the infotainment system via a USBconnection that is suitable for data transmis-sion.● The USB cable used must be an originalcable provided by the mobile phone devicemanufacturer.● Depending on the mobile tphone deviceused, a Car-Mode application that is suitablefor using MirrorLink® must be installed.

Establish connectionWhen you first connect a mobile phone de-vice, follow the instructions on the infotain-ment system screen and on the mobilephone device.

The requirements must be met to use Mir-rorLink™.

Launch MirrorLink®:● Press HOME > Full Link to access the FullLink main menu.● OR: press APP to access the Full Link mainmenu.● Press to establish the connection with themobile phone device.

Disconnecting● In the MirrorLink® mode, press the APPicon to access the Full Link main menu.● OR: press to access the MirrorLink®main menu.● Press to interrupt the active connection.

Special characteristicsDuring an active MirrorLink® connection, thefollowing characteristics are applicable:● An active MirrorLink® device can be con-nected to the infotainment system at thesame time via Bluetooth®.● If the MirrorLink® device is connected tothe infotainment system via Bluetooth®, the »

175

Infotainment system

telephone function of the infotainment sys-tem can be used.● You cannot use an active MirrorLink® de-vice as a multimedia device in the Mediamain menu.● On the instrument panel screen you canview data from the Telephone mode.● The instrument panel screen does not dis-play any indication to turn or the Mediamode.● With the multifunction steering wheel youcan accept or reject incoming calls, as well asend an ongoing telephone conversation.

Function buttonsFunction buttons and their function:

Return the Full Link main menu. Hereyou can end the MirrorLink® connec-tion, connect another mobile phonedevice or select another technology.Press to close the open apps. Thenpress the apps to be closed or the Closeall function button to close all the openapplications.Press to display the mobile phone de-vice screen on the infotainment systemscreen.To open the MirrorLink® settings.Press to return to the MirrorLink® mainmenu.

APP

NoteYou will find information about technicalrequirements, compatible mobile phonedevices, certified applications and theiravailability on the CUPRA and MirrorLink®websites, at specialised CUPRA dealershipsor at any SEAT dealership.

WLAN access point*

Introduction3 Not available for model: Media System

The infotainment system can be used toshare a WLAN connection with up to 8 devi-ces ››› page 176, Configuration for sharinga connection over WLAN.

The infotainment system can also use theWLAN hotspot of an external device to pro-vide Internet to the devices connected tothe hotspot (WLAN client) ››› page 177 .

Note● Data transmission may incur charges.Due to the high volume of data exchanged,CUPRA recommends the use of a flat ratetariff for data transmission. Mobile phoneoperators can provide the relevant infor-mation.● The exchange of data packages may gen-erate additional costs, depending on your

mobile phone rate, particularly if you areabroad (for example, roaming rates).

Configuration for sharing a connec-tion over WLAN

Establishing the connection with the wire-less network (WLAN)● Pulse the HOME > button.● Activate the wireless network. To do so,press the WLAN function button.● Activate the wireless network (WLAN) onthe device that is to be connected. If neces-sary, refer to the manufacturer’s instructionmanual.● Activate the mobile device assignment inthe infotainment system. To do so, press theEnable WLAN connection button and acti-vate the checkbox.● Enter and confirm the network key dis-played on the device.

The following settings can also be made onthe menu Share connection:

● Security level: WPA2 encryption automat-ically generates a network key.● Network key: Network key automaticallygenerated. Press the function button to

176

Data transfer

manually change the network key. The net-work key must have a minimum of 8 charac-ters and a maximum of 63.● SSID: WLAN Network name (maximum of32 characters).

The wireless (WLAN) connection is estab-lished. To complete the connection, it maybe necessary to enter other data into the de-vice.

Repeat this process to connect other devi-ces.

Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)3 This depends on the equipment and thecountry in question.

Wi-Fi Protected Setup can be used to createa ciphered local wireless network quickly andsimply.

● Establish the connection with the wirelessnetwork (WLAN).● Press the WPS button on the WLAN routeruntil the warning light on the router startsflashing. If the WLAN router does not sup-port WPS the network must be configuredmanually.● OR: Press and hold the WLAN button onthe WLAN router until the WLAN light on therouter starts flashing.

● Press the WPS button on the WLAN de-vice. The wireless (WLAN) connection is es-tablished.

Repeat this process to connect other devi-ces.

Configure Internet access

The infotainment system can use the WLANhotspot of an external device to establish anInternet connection.

Establishing the connection with the wire-less network (WLAN)● Activate and check the wireless hotspot onthe external device. If necessary, refer to themanufacturer’s instruction manual.● Press the HOME > button; OR accessthe Media mode and press the Settingsmenu.● Press on the menu WLAN > Enable WLANconnection and check the verification box.● Press the Find function button and selectthe device you want from the list.● If necessary, enter the network key of thedevice in the infotainment system and con-firm with OK.

Manual settings:● To manually enter the network settings ofan external (WLAN) device.

The wireless (WLAN) connection is estab-lished. To complete the connection, it maybe necessary to enter other data into the de-vice.

NoteDue to the large number of devices on themarket, it is not possible to guarantee fault-free operation of all functions.

177

Infotainment system

Infotainment operation

voice control*

Introduction

The voice control works both online* andoffline taking into account what is indicatedin page 178, Languages available depend-ing on the market. In online* mode, com-mands are recorded more accurately, asmore data is available.

Voice control understands questions and ex-pressions without having to learn com-mands. Commands can be formulated freelyand can be colloquial. You will find proposalsfor commands in the infotainment system.

Functions are reduced in offline mode.

Loud noises inside or outside the vehicle cancause malfunctions, as well as confusingphrases and answers.

Languages available depending on themarketOnline* and offline: German, American Eng-lish, British English, French, Italian, Spanishand Czech. These languages have advancedfunctions such as Online Commands, airconditioning control, natural interaction, etc.

The other languages of the infotainment sys-tem do not offer Online Commands, air con-ditioning control or natural interaction.

Requirements● Online* and offline: voice control with thecorresponding infotainment mounted on thevehicle.● Online* current CUPRA CONNECT Pluscontract active.

Note● Voice control only recognises commandsin the language that is set in the infotain-ment system.● Test the voice control with the vehiclestopped before starting to move to familiar-ise yourself with its operation.

Activation word and commands

Voice control activation wordsIf you have connected the voice control viathe activation word, the connected infotain-ment responds with How can I help you?. Itthen scans the words spoken in the vehicleafter the activation word.

Voice control starts when the infotainmentrecognises the activation word.

Connect and disconnect the activationword● In HOME press Settings > Voice control >Activate/ deactivate activation word.

Activation word: Hola Hola

CommandsFor voice control to recognise commandsreliably, bear in mind the tips for the com-mands to work properly.

Tips for the commands to work correctly:● Pronounce clearly. Confusing commandsare not recognised. Talk in a normal tone ofvoice. Speak a little louder if you are drivingat high speed.● Avoid outside noises. Open windows anddoors can interfere with voice control.● Avoid other secondary noises, such asconversations in the vehicle. Do not directthe air flow from the outlets towards the mi-crophone or the interior lining of the roof.● Do not use a very strong accent or dialec-tal.● Do not make long pauses.

Voice control is active and recognises thewords pronounced.

178


Note● When the activation word is disconnec-ted, the infotainment system cannot be ac-tivated by means of the activation word.Voice control is still available via the but-ton on the multifunction steering wheel.● Availability depends on country andequipment.● Depending on the content of the phonebook and to ensure reliable recognition ofthe names of the phone book, it may beuseful to change the order of the first andlast name of the contact in question.

Start and stop voice control

Depending on the equipment, you can startvoice control in different ways.

Start voice control● Voice control activation: say the word thatactivates voice control.● Multifunction steering wheel: press thevoice control button .

The voice control ends automatically, if youuse infotainment functions, if the parkingsystem is activated or by incoming calls.

In some cases you can also start voice con-trol of the connected mobile phone device,by pressing and holding the voice controlbutton.

Manually ending voice controlVoice control can be cancelled with theCancel command.

● Multifunction steering wheel: press thevoice control button twice in a row, or along press.

179

Infotainment system

Radio/Multimedia

Radio mode

Fig. 127 Schematic representation: Radio view

In Radio mode you can tune in the availableradio stations in different frequency bandsand memorise your favourites on the presetbuttons to access them quickly.

The types of reception and frequency bandsavailable depend on the equipment and thecountry. In certain countries, frequencybands may stop broadcasting or not be avail-able again.

Access the RADIO menu● Press HOME > > ››› Fig. 127 .

Access the settings● Press HOME > > .

Online* functions in Radio modeOnline* functions in Radio mode are onlyavailable under the following conditions:

● CUPRA CONNECT or CUPRA CONNECTPlus equipment.● You have an active CUPRA CONNECT useraccount.● Add the vehicle is assigned to your user ac-count.

● You have a corresponding data packageacquired from the In-Car store or have a datavolume for your own mobile phone devicevia Wi-Fi access point.

Note● For streaming services you need to havean account with the provider in question.● Radio stations are responsible for thecontent of the information they transmit.Additional electrical equipment connectedto the vehicle can cause interference in thereception of the radio signal and noise inthe speakers.

180


● Foil or metal-coated stickers attached tothe windows may affect reception on vehi-cles with a window aerial.

Radio equipment and symbols

The functions, as well as the types of recep-tion and frequency bands available dependon the equipment and the country.

● AM* tuner.● Dual FM receiver (diversity antenna).● Summarised FM station list.● Fusion of DAB* and FM stations into onelist.● Fusion of all stations stored in preset but-tons into one list. Maximum 36 favourite sta-tions.● Station logos.● DAB presentation (slideshow). Images thatare emitted sequentially.● Online* radio.

Universal symbols in Radio modeTo select the desired AM frequencyband.

To select the desired FM/DAB fre-quency band.

To select the type of Online*radio reception.

AM

FM/DAB

Online radio*

Next to the name of the station, moni-toring of active traffic information sta-tions (TP).

Symbols on the FM/DAB frequency bandTo display the frequency band for man-ual selection of the FM frequency. Onlypossible when the summary station listis disconnected.DAB not available.DAB stations support presentations (sli-deshow).

Symbols on the AM frequency bandManually updating the station list.To display the frequency band for man-ual selection of the AM frequency.

Menus in Online* radio modeShow station selection.Open text search.Show the last online radio stationsheard.Show the 100 most heard online radiostations.Show available online radio podcasts.

Show online radio stations, which origi-nate from the desired country.Show online radio stations, whichbroadcast in the desired language.

TP

Show online radio stations whose pro-gramme belongs to the desired musicalgenre.

Selecting, tuning and saving a station

Select the frequency bandBefore selecting a station you have to selecta frequency band or a type of reception. Dif-ferent stations are available depending onthe frequency band selected or the type ofreception.

The types of reception and frequency bandsavailable depend on the equipment and thecountry.

● Select the frequency band or type of re-ception: AM*, FM/DAB, FM (for devices thatdo not have DAB), Online* radio.

Search and select a stationYou can select radio stations in differentways. The options vary depending on thefrequency band and the type of reception.

Select via the frequency band (AM and FM)● Activate the frequency band.● Click on the cursor, scroll through the fre-quency band and release it when you reachthe frequency band you want. »

181

Infotainment system

● OR: press on a point on the frequencyband. The cursor will automatically jump tothe corresponding frequency.

The station of the set frequency is tuned.

Select from the station list (AM andFM/DAB)The station list shows the stations that arecurrently tunable. In the AM frequency band,you may have to update the station list if youare no longer in the area where you last ac-cessed the station list. In the FM/DAB fre-quency band, the station list is automaticallyupdated.

● Open the station list● Press the station you want.

The selected station is tuned. In the case ofFM/DAB and if the station is available, thebest quality reception is automatically selec-ted.

Search and filter stations (Online* radio)In Online Radio mode, stations can be fil-tered by categories and can be searched bytext.

● Open the station list.● Select the category by which the stationsare to be filtered.

● OR: press to start the text search. Theinput field is displayed.● Enter the name of the station you want.The list of the stations found is updated whileentering the text.● Press the station you want.

The selected station is tuned.

Search in SCAN mode (AM and FM/DAB)In SCAN mode the stations are automaticallytuned in a sequential manner and each ofthem is played for approx. 5 seconds.

● To start the SCAN mode press SCAN.

SCAN mode starts and the station currentlytuned in is shown on the screen. Next to it isa SCAN function button.

● To select a station press SCAN.

SCAN mode stops and the station is tuned.The SCAN function button is hidden.

Storing the station on the preset buttonsYou can store up to 36 stations of differentfrequency bands and reception types as fa-vourites using the preset buttons.

● Tune the station you want.● Access the preset buttons.● Press the preset button and keep it press-ed until the station is stored.

● OR: press the station on the station list andkeep it pressed. The preset buttons are dis-played.● Press the preset button.

The station is stored in the selected presetbutton.

If a station was already stored in the presetbutton, it is overwritten with the new station.

Special functions in Radio mode

Traffic information (TP)The TP function monitors the announce-ments of a station with traffic informationand automatically reproduces them in theRadio mode or in the multimedia playbackthat is active. To do this, you have to be ableto tune into a station with traffic information.

Some stations without their own traffic infor-mation support the TP function by broad-casting traffic information from other sta-tions (EON).

In the AM frequency band or in the Multime-dia mode, a station with traffic information inthe background is automatically tuned whileit is possible to tune into a station with trafficinformation.

If no station with traffic information can betuned in, the device automatically searchesfor stations with tunable traffic information.

182


Stations with traffic information are not avail-able in all countries.

Activating and deactivating the TP func-tion● In Radio mode or Multimedia mode, pressSettings > Traffic station (TP).

Online* radioOnline radio is a type of reception for Inter-net radio stations and podcasts that are in-dependent of AM, FM and DAB. Thanks toInternet transmission, reception is not limi-ted to the region.

Online radio is only available through the In-ternet connection of the active infotainment

system. The use of online radio can generateexpenses due to the transmission of datafrom the Internet.

● In Online radio mode, press and set the au-dio quality to high or low to tune the onlineradio.

Station logosIn the case of some frequency bands, stationlogos may already be pre-installed in the in-fotainment system.

If in the FM/DAB frequency band settingsthe automatic selection of station logos isactivated, station logos are automatically as-signed to the stations.

In the Online radio mode, the infotainmentsystem accesses the station logos of the on-line database and automatically assignsthem to the stations

Assign station logos manually● In FM/DAB mode, press Station logos.● Press on the icon and then select thestation to which a station logo is to be as-signed.● Select the station logo. If desired, repeatthe same process with other stations.● OR, via the menu Settings > Station logos.

183

Infotainment system

Media Mode

Fig. 128 Schematic representation: Multimedia view

In Media mode you can play multimedia filesfrom data media and streaming servicesthrough the infotainment system.

Depending on the equipment, the followingdata media can be used:

● USB storage support (for example, a USBstick, a mobile phone connected vai USB).● Bluetooth® device (for example, a mobilephone or a tablet).

Depending on the equipment, the followingtypes of multimedia files can be played:

● Audio files.● Video files (depends on the system).

You can also use streaming services. Theavailability of streaming services depends onthe equipment and the country.

To use streaming services you need to haveyour own user account in the streamingservice in question.

Access the MEDIA menu● Press HOME > > ››› Fig. 128 .

Access the settings● Press HOME > > .

Limitations and indications of data mediaData media may not work if they have beenexposed to high temperatures or have been

damaged. Please bear in mind the manufac-turer’s indications.

Quality differences between data media pro-duced by different manufacturers can causemultimedia playback malfunctions.

Incorrect configuration on a data media maycause the data media to be unreadable.

Playlists only specify a playback order and re-fer to the storage location of the multimediafiles within the folder structure. In a playlistthere are no multimedia files saved. To play aplaylist, multimedia files have to be found inthe storage places of the data media towhich the playlist refers.

184


Equipment features. Audio, multimediaand connectivity:● Multimedia playback and control via Blue-tooth®.● Audio playback in these formats: AAC,ALAC, AVI, FLAC, MP3, MP4, WMA.● Video playback in these formats: MPEG-1and MPEG-2 (.mpg, .mpeg), ISO MPEG4,DivX 3, 4 and 5 Xvid (.avi), ISO MPEG4 H.264(.mp4, .m4v, .mov), Windows Media Video10 (.wmv, .asf).● Playlists on any type of device.● Multimedia streaming (online*).● Multimedia search.

NoteCUPRA assumes no liability for any deterio-ration or loss of files on data storage devi-ces.

Select and play a multimedia source

Select multimedia sourceBefore playing multimedia files you must firstconnect a multimedia source.

To use streaming services you must be con-nected to the Internet.

● Connect an external multimedia source.

● Select the connected media source to beused for playback.

Playing audio and video filesYou can search and play multimedia filesfrom an available multimedia source in dif-ferent ways.

Search in the folder structureMultimedia files can be catalogued by cate-gories (for example, album, artist, title). In MyMultimedia this category view is always dis-played. The classic folder structure of indi-vidual USB data media is also found in MyMultimedia.

● Activate the folder structure.● The folder structure of the selected multi-media source is displayed. When My multi-media is selected, the categories (music,videos, playlists) and connected multimediasources are displayed first.● Search for the title you want in the folderstructure.● Or: press to start the text search. The in-put field is displayed.● Enter the name of the desired title. The listof the titles found is updated while enteringthe text.● Press the desired title.● If at the beginning of the playback your se-lection is in a folder of a multimedia source,

the multimedia files that are in it are alsoadded to the playback.● If a playlist is played, all available titles inthe playlist are added to the playback.● Close your selection with .

Select favouritesIn favourites you can save titles, music gen-res, artists and albums individually for play-back.

● Access favourites .● Press the favourite you want.

Depending on your selection, all the titlesbelonging to the favourite are added to theplayback.

Configure streaming servicesDepending on the equipment you can usestreaming services directly through the info-tainment system. For this you need to have apremium user account of the streamingservice in question and you have to log inwith it in the infotainment system. You alsoneed to be connected to the Internet.

● Select Streaming as the multimediasource.● A list of available streaming services is dis-played.● Select the streaming service you want. »

185

Infotainment system

● Follow the steps indicated by the infotain-ment system.● The streaming service is added to the listof multimedia sources as a new functionbutton.

Save favouritesOnly multimedia files in My multimedia ofthe infotainment system can be saved as fa-vourites. You can save up to a maximum of30 titles, albums, artists and music genres in-dividually as favourites.

● Start playback.● Access favourites.● Tap a favourite that is not assigned.● Or: click on an existing favourite and pressand hold for approx. 3 seconds.● Select from the selection list: Title, Album,Artist, Musical genres.

● Playlist.

The selection is saved instead of the previ-ously selected favourite. If the favourite wasalready assigned, the previously saved fa-vourite is overwritten.

The selectable options in the selection listdepend on the data attached to the multi-media file. If the music genre is not indicatedin the music files, for example, you cannotsave the music genre as favourite.

If a video file is playing, only that video canbe saved as favourite.

Playing entertainment content in theinfotainment system

Depending on the infotainment system, mu-sic and videos can be played.

Video modeWhen in video mode, a video can be playedon the infotainment screen if this is stored ona data media, in My Multimedia or is sourcedfrom a streaming service. In this case, thevideo sound is played through the vehicle'sspeakers.

The image is only displayed if the vehicle isstopped. When the vehicle is in motion, theinfotainment screen turns off. The sound ofthe video can still be heard.

A stable Internet connection is required forplayback from a streaming service. In thiscase, telephony costs may be generated.

186


Navigation*

Introduction

Fig. 129 Schematic representation: Navigation view

A global satellite system determines the cur-rent position of the vehicle and the sensorsmounted on the vehicle analyse the routestaken. All measured values and possible traf-fic events are compared with the availablemaps to allow optimal navigation to the des-tination.

Navigation announcements and graphic rep-resentations will guide you to your destina-tion.

Navigation management is carried out onthe screen.

Depending on the country, some functionsof the infotainment system will not be availa-

ble on the screen when travelling above acertain speed. It is not a malfunction, but isdue to compliance with legislation.

Navigation announcementsNavigation announcements are acoustic in-dications for driving referred to the currentroute.

The type and frequency of navigation an-nouncements depend on the driving situa-tion, for example, starting the guide to thedestination, driving on the motorway or on aroundabout and the settings.

If the exact destination cannot be reachedbecause, for example, it is in a non-digitisedarea, indications relating to the address andthe distance to the destination are displayedon the screen.

During dynamic route guidance, you will re-ceive information about reported trafficcongestion on the route. An additional navi-gation announcement is provided if theroute is recalculated due to traffic conges-tion.

While a navigation announcement is playing,its volume can be adjusted. The following »

187

Infotainment system

navigation announcements provided will beplayed with the newly adjusted volume.

Limitations during navigationIf the infotainment system cannot receivedata from GPS satellites, for example, in atunnel or in an underground garage, naviga-tion continues using the vehicle's sensors.

In areas that are not digitised or are only par-tially digitised on the infotainment memory,the infotainment system will still attempt toprovide route guidance.

In the case of missing or incomplete naviga-tion data, it may not be possible to deter-mine the exact position of the vehicle. Thismay mean that navigation is not as precise asusual.

Roads and streets are subject to constantchange (e.g. new roads, road works, roadsclosed to traffic, changes to street namesand building numbers). If the navigation datais obsolete, this may lead to errors or inac-curacies during the route guidance.

Managing the navigation mapTo allow an optimal view, you can also man-age the navigation map with additional fingermovements.

Move the map (tip: use your index finger).● Move the map with your finger.

Zoom in the view (tip: use your index fin-ger).● To increase the view in a certain position,double-click on the map.

Zoom out the view (tip: use your index andmiddle fingers).● Press on the map with both fingers at thesame time.

Change view (tip: use your index finger).● Press twice on the map and keep your fin-ger pressed on the screen.● To zoom out the view of the map, moveyour finger upwards. To zoom in the view ofthe map, move your finger downwards.

Change view (tip: use your index and middlefingers).● Press on the map with both fingers at thesame time and keep them pressed.● To zoom out the view of the map, moveone finger towards the other. To zoom in theview of the map, move one finger away fromthe other.

Tilt the view (tip: use your index and middlefingers).● Press on the map with both fingers at thesame time and horizontal to each other,keep them pressed.● To tilt the view of the map forward, moveyour fingers upwards. To tilt the view of the

map backward, move your fingers down-wards.

Rotate view (tip: use your index and middlefingers).● Press on the map with both fingers at thesame time and keep them pressed.● To rotate the map view, turn your fingersclockwise anticlockwise.

Saved dataThe infotainment system saves certain data,for example, frequent routes and positiondata, to make the entry of the destinationmore agile and optimise the route guidance.

Delete saved data● Press Settings > Basic function settings >Delete and then OK

WARNINGSelect the settings, enter the destinationand the modifications for navigation onlywith the vehicle at a standstill.

Note● If a detour is passed during route guid-ance, navigation may recalculate the route.● The quality of the navigation recommen-dations given by the Infotainment systemdepends on the navigation data availableand any reported traffic congestions.

188


● Navigation announcements are not emit-ted if the sound is muted in the infotain-ment system.

Navigation functions and symbols

NavigationNavigation functions depend on the equip-ment and country.

Functions● Entering destination and route calculation(offline and online*).● Indication of two navigation maps at thesame time (screen and instrument panel*).● Update of online* maps.● Predictive navigation.● 3D urban maps.● Online* traffic information● Dynamic POIs (points of interest)

Symbols on the mapThe buttons and indications depend on thesettings and the current driving situation.

Symbols for traffic events and points of inter-est (POIs) are displayed on the map, for ex-ample, petrol stations, train stations or inter-esting stopovers, provided navigation hassuch data ››› page 192 .

Current positionSearch for destinations.Destinations along the route.Final destinationHome addressWork addressFavourite destinationsAdditional window with more options.Additional window with route options.

Centre the map on the current position.

Change view: 2D oriented to the north,or 2D oriented to the direction of travel,or 3D to the direction of travel.Information about the current routeguidance.Map scale.

Symbols in the additional window● To open the additional window, press .

Repeat the last navigation announce-ment.Volume of navigation announcements.Map lighting in Automatic, Day or Nightmode.Offer new guidance routes.360° operating range display (hybrid ve-hicles)

|

Other symbolsEntering the detailed destination for anaddress.Search for destinations.Frequent destinations.Last destinations.Favourite destinationsBack

Symbols in the route detailsCurrent position.Destination of the current guidance.

POI symbols (points of interest)POIs (points of interest) are shown on themap, provided the navigation has said data.

Click on the desired POI (point of interest) tostart a route guidance ››› page 190 .

Petrol station.Parking lot.Tourist information offices.Train station.Restaurant.

Traffic information.POIs (points of interest) are shown on themap, provided the navigation has said data››› page 192. »

189

Infotainment system

Click on a traffic event to open an additionalwindow with further details ››› page 192 .

Slow traffic.

Traffic jam.

Accident.

Broken down vehicle.

Slippery surface (ice or snow).

Road closed to traffic.

Slippery road hazard.

Danger.

Road works.

Strong wind.

Reduced visibility.

Navigation data

The Infotainment system is equipped with abuilt-in navigation data memory. Dependingon the country, the necessary navigation da-ta may already be pre-installed.

To provide correct route guidance and makethe most of the functions offered, the info-tainment system should be updated on aregular basis.

Using obsolete data may lead to errors dur-ing navigation. Current routes cannot betraced or the route guidances will lead tomistaken destinations.

Ensure navigation data is updated at alltimes.

Online* updating of navigation dataThe navigation data of the regions throughwhich you travel frequently is automaticallyupdated in the background if the Internetconnection is established and the privacysettings are valid.

● With the ignition switched on, the naviga-tion data is updated automatically.

Manual update of navigation dataCurrent navigation data for large regions, forexample Western Europe, can be downloa-ded from www.seat.com and stored on USBdata devices. Navigation through USB datadevices is not possible.

● Download the navigation data to a USB da-ta device.● Turn on the ignition of the vehicle.● Connect the USB data device to the info-tainment system. Navigation data is auto-matically updated in the background.

The map version is displayed in HOME > >System information.

WARNINGIf you update the navigation data manuallywhile driving, it may cause accidents withserious injuries.● Update the navigation data only with thevehicle at a standstill.

NoteAutomatic update of the navigation data issubject to the privacy settings. In “Incogni-to” mode, no update is carried out.

Start route guidance

Depending on the country and equipment,different functions are available to enter des-tinations.

The different functions for entering destina-tions are found in the navigation main menu.

Opening the Navigation main menu● Press HOME > .

Select the destination and start navigationPress .Select the desired destination. You canchose from Frequent destinations, Last destinations and Favouritedestinations.

1.2.

190


OR: press and enter the address inthe input screen.OR: detailed address.Press Start.

Frequent destinationsThe destination synopsis uses recorded datato propose possible destinations.

Select the destination and start navigationPress and then .Select the desired destination. Theroute guidance starts automatically.

Quick start: for a quick start, press and holdthe desired destination for a few seconds.

Last destinationsNavigation saves the last destinations tomake them available for a route guidance.

Select the destination and start navigationPress and then .Press the desired destination.Press Start.

Quick start: for a quick start, press and holdthe desired destination for a few seconds.

Favourite destinationsSave up to 20 destinations as favourites.

3.

1.2.

1.2.3.

To save a destination as a favourite press in the split screen when entering the desti-nation.

Select the destination and start navigationPress and then .Press the desired destination.Press Start.

NoteEnter the destination as accurately as pos-sible. If you enter a destination incorrectly,the route guidance will not be able to startor it will guide you to an incorrect destina-tion.

Start route guidance by selecting fromthe map

The navigation map includes active areas atmany points that are suitable for entering thedestination. To do this, press the desired po-sition or place on the map. If there is mapdata at this point, you can start a route guid-ance.

Whether it is possible to enter the destina-tion through the navigation map depends onthe state of the data and it is not possible forall positions.

To start “offroad navigation”, press an emptyarea without position data.

1.2.3.

Start navigation● Press .● Move the view on the map until the desiredposition can be selected. The navigationmap can be used by means of additional fin-ger movements ››› page 188 .● Press the desired destination on the map.● Press Route.

Offroad navigation*“Offroad navigation” calculates routes to se-lected destination points using unknown da-ta. When a destination point is outside theknown roads or position data, navigationfinds the route to the next point of theknown road and completes the path to thenext destination point with a direct connec-tion.

Start navigation● Move the view on the map until the desiredposition can be selected. The navigationmap can be used by means of additional fin-ger movements ››› page 188 .● Press on any point on the map without po-sition data.● Press Route.

191

Infotainment system

Start route guidance using contactdetails

Start route guidance with the saved addressdata of a contact. Contacts saved withoutaddress data cannot be used for route guid-ance.

Start navigation● Press .● Press on the contact you want.● Press Route.

NoteIf the address details of a contact are obso-lete, the route guidance will neverthelesstake you to the registered address. Checkthat the contact address is updated.

Traffic information

The infotainment system receives detailedtraffic information automatically if the Inter-net connection is established. This informa-tion is shown with symbols and highlightingthe road network in colour on the map.

Traffic incidentsTraffic incidents, for example, traffic jams orcongested traffic, are shown on the naviga-tion map using symbols.

With an active route guidance, traffic inci-dents that are on the current route areshown in the route details. Such traffic inci-dents can be avoided ››› page 192 .

Hazard informationHazard information is shown on the naviga-tion map with symbols in the same way astraffic incidents. In this case, the source ofthis information is another vehicle that hasdetected the hazard and has uploaded theinformation to the service provider.

The following hazards are displayed: acci-dent, broken down vehicle and slippery roadsurface.

Traffic flow indicationThe navigation map shows traffic flow ac-cording to current traffic events, highlightingthe road network in colour.

● Orange: Slow traffic.● Red: Traffic jam.

NoteTraffic information receipt is subject to theprivacy settings. In maximum Privacymode, no traffic information is received.Tracking or Location level setting is neces-sary.

Function descriptions

Route detailsThe route details contain information on allincidents, for example, the starting point,stopovers, traffic events, POIs and destina-tion, provided the navigation has such data.

If you press on an incident, an additional win-dow opens providing more options. Theavailable options depend on the incidentand the current settings.

Open and close the route details● To open, press | or swipe it.

● To close, press | or swipe it.

Edit route guidanceTo edit route guidance, move the stopoversto the destination in the TripView view.

● Hold the desired destination pressed untilit is visibly highlighted.● Move the destination to the desired posi-tion.● Remove your finger from the screen. Theroute will recalculate.

Avoid traffic incidentsThe details of the route show the currenttraffic incidents if the navigation has such

192


data. Avoid traffic incidents by editing routedetails ››› page 192 .

● Press on a traffic event.● Press on Avoid. The route will recalculate.

Split screenWhen handling navigation functions, an ad-ditional window with other options mayopen. Possible options depend on the func-tion being used.

Close the additional screen● Press on an empty area outside the addi-tional window.● OR: press .● OR: press Accept.

Functions in the additional window:

Show on map Show what is selected on the map.

Add stopover Add a stopover to the route guid-ance.

Direct route Starts direct route guidance.

Delete Delete a stopover from the routeguidance.

Avoid Avoid traffic jam. The route will re-calculate.

Functions in the additional window:

Stopping routeguidance

Ends the current route guidance.

Close the additional window.

Add a destination to favourites.

Learn usage patternWhen the vehicle is in motion, navigationsaves routes and destinations used to auto-matically generate destination proposals.Destinations are learned based on the timeof day and the day of the week.

Navigation can propose up to 5 routes at thesame time. The proposed routes may be dif-ferent from the routes of the normal routeguidance.

If one of the proposed destinations is selec-ted, the guide to that destination is started.

The route guidance follows the selectedroute until the vehicle deviates from it. Inthat case, the route is recalculated and takesyou back along the most direct path to theinitially selected destination.

Important traffic jams are taken into accountin the route guidance, and are avoided if al-

ternative routes are available, provided navi-gation has such data.

You can activate and deactivate the functionwhenever you want.

Enable and disable learning usage patternThe setting is in the corresponding naviga-tion menu > Basic function settings.

● To activate the function, activate Learn us-age pattern.● To disable the function, disable Learn us-age pattern.● To delete saved data, press Delete usagepattern.

360° operating range display3 Valid for: plug-in hybrid vehicles

The 360° operating range display shows thepossible range with the current charge levelof the high voltage battery.

Switch on the 360° operating range display● Open the additional map window andpress the symbol .

193

Infotainment system

Telephone interface

Introduction

Fig. 130 Schematic representation: Phone view

You can use the telephone interface to con-nect your mobile to the infotainment systemand operate phone functions through it. Thesound is played through the vehicle's speak-ers.

You can connect up to two mobile phonedevices simultaneously to the infotainmentsystem.

High speeds, poor weather or road condi-tions and a noisy ambience (even outside ofthe vehicle), as well as the quality of recep-tion can all affect the quality of a telephoneconversation in the vehicle.

Note● As a general rule, pairing a device (for ex-ample, a mobile phone device) is only nec-essary once. You can restore the deviceconnection via Bluetooth® or Wi-Fi withthe infotainment system whenever youwant without having to pair the deviceagain.● The availability of some telephone func-tions will depend on the mobile phone con-nected to the infotainment system.

Telephone interface equipment andsymbols

Equipment features● Hands-free function.● Use up to two phones at the same time.● Phone book with a maximum of 5,000contacts.● Text message functions via Bluetooth®*:reading Text message, writing Text message(including templates), Text message play-back, message history.

194


● E-mail functions via Bluetooth®*: readingE-mail, writing E-mail.● Connection to wireless charging option.● Connection to the microphone mountedon the vehicle.

Symbols in the main menuContacts.List of incoming and outgoing calls.Enter telephone number.

Text messages (SMS and emails).*Telephone interface settings.

Symbols for callsThe symbols may be different depending onthe infotainment system.

Start a call or bringing it to the fore-ground.End or reject a call.Open contact list.Enter telephone number.

Mute the sound of the hands-freeHold call.Continue call.Start conference call.Pass call to private modeMake an emergency call.

Get help in case of breakdown.Obtain information on the CUPRAbrand and selected additional servicesrelated to traffic and your travel.Voice mail.

Call list symbols● To open the call lists, press .

Incoming call.Outgoing call.Missed call.Telephone number (company).Telephone number (private).Mobile telephone number (company).

Mobile telephone number (private).Fax (private).Fax.

Symbols for text messages*The symbols may be different depending onthe infotainment system.

● To open the text messages, press .

Activate voice control input››› page 178.Templates for text messages.

Places with special regulations

Switch off the mobile telephone and the tel-ephone interface in places with a risk of ex-plosion. These places are not always clearlymarked. They include, for example:

● the vicinity of chemical pipelines and tanks● The lower decks of boats and ferries.● In the proximity of vehicles that run on liq-uefied gas (such as propane or butane).● places where the air is laden with chemi-cals or particles such as flour, dust or metalpowder.● All other places where the vehicle engineor telephone must be switched off.

WARNINGSwitch off the mobile phone in areas with arisk of explosion!

NoteIn areas where special regulations apply orthe use of mobile phones is forbidden, itmust be switched off at all times. The radia-tion produced by the mobile phone whenswitched on may interfere with sensitivetechnical and medical equipment, possiblyresulting in malfunction or damage to theequipment.

195

Infotainment system

Pair, connect and manage

Requirement for pairing:

● Bluetooth® is activated on the mobilephone device.● Bluetooth® is activated on the infotain-ment system.● Depending on the mobile device, it will benecessary to have the Bluetooth® menuopen or activate the Visibility option so thatthe device is visible from the infotainmentsystem.

Pair a mobile phone device suitable for tel-ephony with the infotainment system to usethe telephone interface functions. On thefirst connection, the mobile phone device ispaired with the infotainment system. Doingso saves a user profile ››› page 196 .

The pairing can take a few minutes. Thefunctions available depend on the mobilephone device used and its operating system.

Pair a mobile phone device● Open the list of available Bluetooth® devi-ces on the mobile phone device and selectthe name of the infotainment system.● Please note and, if necessary, confirm themessages that appear on the mobile phonedevice and on the infotainment system. If thepairing was successful, the phone data issaved in the user profile.

● Optional: confirm the data transfer mes-sage on the mobile phone device.

Active and passive connectionTo use the functions of the telephone inter-face, there must be at least one mobilephone device connected to the infotain-ment system. If there are several mobilephone devices connected to the infotain-ment system, you can switch between activeand passive connections. To use the tele-phone interface with the desired mobilephone device, establish the active connec-tion with the infotainment system.

Difference between connection types

PrimaryThe mobile phone device is paired andconnected. The functions of the tele-phone interface are performed with thedata of said mobile phone device.

SecondaryThe mobile phone device is paired andconnected. Calls can be managed butthe phone book, messages or otherfunctions will not be active.

Paired mobile phone devices are stored inthe infotainment system, even if they are notcurrently connected.

Connect a mobile phone deviceRequirement: the mobile phone device ispaired with the infotainment system.● Bluetooth® is activated on the mobilephone device.

Establish an active connectionRequirement: several mobile phone devicesare connected to the infotainment system atthe same time.● Select the desired mobile phone devicefrom the drop-down menu. All other mobilephone devices are automatically in the pas-sive connection.

User profilesFor each of the paired mobile phone devicesan individual user profile is automatically cre-ated. In the user profile, data from the mo-bile phone device is stored, for example,contact details or settings. A maximum offour user profiles can be saved in the info-tainment system at the same time.

WARNINGIf you perform the pairing while driving, itcould cause an accident or injury.● Perform pairing only with the vehicle at astandstill.

196


Note● In the pairing of some mobile phone de-vices, a PIN number is shown on the screenof the mobile phone device. Enter thatnumber in the infotainment system to com-plete the pairing.● While the infotainment system is in theKnown mobile phones menu, the wirelesscharging function is disabled. When youexit this menu, the wireless charging func-tion is activated again.

Basic and Comfort Telephony

Depending on the equipment, two types oftelephone interface can be used:

● Basic telephone interface.● Comfort telephone interface.

Basic telephone interfaceThe Basic telephone interface uses the Blue-tooth® HFP profile for transmission. This in-terface allows the use of telephone functionsthrough the infotainment system and play-back through the vehicle's speakers.

Comfort telephone interfaceLike the Basic telephone interface, the Com-fort telephone interface also uses the Blue-tooth® HFP profile.

The Comfort phone interface can be equip-ped with the wireless charging function››› page 198.

In order to use the functions of the wirelesscharging function, you have to place a suita-ble mobile phone device correctly in thestorage compartment. The mobile phonedevice will then connect to the vehicle an-tenna. This improves the reception andsound quality of calls.

To call

Open the telephone interface● Press HOME > .

Make a callSelect a phone number to start a call. Differ-ent functions are available for selecting aphone number:

ContactsIf a contact has several registered phonenumbers you have to select one.

● Press and press a number on the list tostart the call.● OR: press and enter the contact name inthe input field to search for it. Press on thecontact to start the call.

● OR: press a favourite in the telephone in-terface main menu to start the call.

CallsThe telephone interface shows the call list ofthe mobile telephone device. Start a callfrom the call list.

● Press > All and press a number on thelist to start the call.● OR: press and filter the call list entries(for example, missed calls or dialled num-bers). In filtered list, press a number to startthe call.

DialManually enter a phone number to start acall. While entering the phone number, con-tacts that match that number are shown onthe infotainment screen.

● Press and enter the phone number.● Press to start the call

The last call is dialled by pressing and holdingthe button on the multifunction steeringwheel.

Send messages*

Depending on the mobile phone device andthe infotainment system used, you can send »

197

Infotainment system

and receive SMS and e-mails through the tel-ephone interface.

Send an SMS● Press > Text message > Enter new mes-sage and enter the message on the screen.● Enter the contact you want in the searchbar.● To send the message press OK.

Send an e-mail● Press > E-mail > Enter new messageand enter the message on the screen.● Enter the contact you want in the searchbar.● To send the message press OK.

Phone book, favourites and speed dialbuttons

In the first connection of a telephone withthe infotainment system, the phone book issaved in the infotainment system. It may benecessary to confirm the data transmissionon the mobile phone.

Each time the phone is reconnected, thephone book is updated.

If conference calls are supported, the phonebook can be accessed during a call. If thereis a saved image for a contact, it can be dis-played in the list next to the entry.

FavouritesA speed dial button can be assigned to aphone book favourite up to a maximum ofsix. If there is a registered photo saved to thecontact, it is shown on the speed dial button.

All speed dial buttons have to be manuallyedited and will be assigned to a user profile.

Assign the speed dial button● In the Favourites menu, press the + but-ton, then open the phone book to select acontact as a favourite. If the contact has sev-eral phone numbers, press on the number inthe list.

Edit the speed dial button● To edit or delete a favourite contact presson the icon in the Favourites menuscreen. You can delete one or more favour-ites.

Call a favourite● Press the assigned speed dial button.

NoteFavourites are not updated automatically. Ifyou change a contact's phone number, youhave to reassign the speed dial button.

Connectivity Box*

Fig. 131 In the centre console: pad for the mobilephone connection.

The Connectivity Box includes differentfunctions that will help to use your mobiledevice. These are:

● Wireless Charger1).● Signal amplifier / (Mobile Signal Amplifier)

1) It only includes the wireless charge functional-ity.

198


(Wireless Charger)The Wireless Charger allows mobile deviceswith Qi1) technology to be charged without acable.

To charge your mobile phone wirelessly:

● Place your mobile device in the middle ofthe pad with the screen facing up ››› Fig. 131››› .

Make sure there are no objects between thepad and the mobile phone.

The mobile phone will start charging auto-matically. For further information aboutwhether your mobile device supports Qitechnology, check your phone's user manualor visit the CUPRA website.

Signal amplifier / (Mobile Signal Amplifier)It allows you to reduce radiation in the vehi-cle and have better reception.

For safety reasons, it is recommended thatyou pair the system and the mobile usingBluetooth® and place it on the ConnectivityBox pad, for the best reception without hav-ing to handle the mobile phone.

To establish a connection with the vehicle'sexternal aerial:

● Place your mobile device in the middle ofthe pad with the screen facing up ››› Fig. 131››› .

Make sure there are no objects between thepad and the mobile phone.

Your mobile phone will automatically beready to make use of the external aerial.

WARNING● The mobile phone may heat up due tothe wireless charging. Think about this be-fore you pick it up, and take care when re-moving it.● There must be no metallic or other ob-jects between the mobile phone and thehousing, to prevent the functionality of theConnectivity Box from being affected.

Note● Your mobile device must support the Qiinductive charging interface standard forproper operation.● The charging time and the temperaturevary in accordance with the device used.● The maximum charging capacity is 5 W.● Qi technology does not allow you tocharge more than one mobile device simul-taneously.

● No improvement in reception can beguaranteed if there is more than one mo-bile phone on the pad.● You are advised to keep the engine run-ning to guarantee proper wireless charging.● When a telephone with Qi technology isconnected by USB, it will be charged by themeans specified by the manufacturer.

1) Qi technology allows you to charge your mo-bile phone wirelessly.

199

Infotainment system

Multimedia

USB port

Fig. 132 Centre console: USB port.

Fig. 133 Rear part of the centre console: USBconnectors with power outlet function.

The USB port can be found in the storagecompartment area of the front centre con-sole ››› Fig. 132 .

Depending on the equipment and the coun-try, the vehicle may also have USB connec-tions exclusively for charging or as a powersocket.

These USB ports are located at the rear ofthe console, between the front seats››› Fig. 133.

200

Start and driving

Driving

Start and driving

Starting and stopping the en-gine

Ignition and start button

Fig. 134 Starter button

The engine can be started with a start button(Press & Drive). For this there must be a validkey inside the passenger compartment.

The button is found at the bot-tom of the centre console or, depending on

the version, on the multi-function steeringwheel.

Opening the driver's door when exiting thevehicle activates the electronic lock on thesteering column if the ignition is disabled.

Switching the ignition on/offIf you only want to switch on the ignition(without starting the engine), briefly pressthe start button once without pressing thebrake pedal or the clutch pedal ››› .

The push-button text flasheslike a heartbeat when the system is ready forthe ignition to be turned on or off1).

Automatic ignition disconnectionWhen the vehicle detects that there is nodriver once the engine has stopped, after acertain time the ignition is switched off auto-matically. If at that time the dipped beamheadlights are on, the side lights will stay onfor approx. 30 minutes. The side lights canbe turned off by blocking the vehicle››› page 93, or manually ››› page 110 .

Automatic deactivation of the ignition onvehicles with the Start-Stop systemThe ignition is switched off automaticallywhen the vehicle is stopped and the auto-matic engine shutdown is active, if:

● The driver's seat belt is not fastened,● the driver does not step on any pedal,● the driver door is opened.

After automatically turning off the ignition, ifthe dipped beam is on, the side light re-mains on for approx. 30 minutes (if there isenough charge in the battery). If the driverlocks the vehicle or manually turns off thelight, the side light goes out.

WARNINGWhen switching on the ignition, do notpress the brake or clutch pedal, otherwisethe engine could start immediately.

WARNINGIf vehicle keys are used negligently or with-out due care, this may cause accidents andserious injury.● Never leave any key inside the vehiclewhen you leave it. Otherwise, a child or un-authorised person could lock the vehicle, »

1) Valid for versions with the start button on thecentre console.

201

Driving

start the engine or connect the ignition andoperate any of the electrical equipment.

Note● Before leaving the vehicle, always discon-nect the ignition and, if appropriate, takeinto account the instructions on the screenof the dash panel.● If the vehicle is stationary for a long timewith the engine off and the ignition on, thevehicle battery might be discharged and itmight not be possible to start the engine.● If during the STOP phase you press the button, the ignition is switch-

ed off and the push-button flashes1).● If the indication is displayed on the in-strument panel display “Start-Stop systemdeactivated: Start the engine manually”;the button will flash1).

Starting the engine

● Vehicles with automatic transmission: putthe selector lever in P or N, press the brakepedal and keep it pressed in this position un-til the engine starts.● Press the starter button ››› Fig. 134 ; do notpress the accelerator. There needs to be a

valid key inside the vehicle for the engine tostart. After starting the engine, the lighting ofthe button remains fixed indi-cating that the engine is running1).● Once the engine starts, release the start-up button.● If the engine does not start, stop and waitfor around 1 minute to try again. If necessary,perform an emergency start ››› page 203 .

WARNINGDo not keep the engine running in confinedspaces, as there is a risk of poisoning.● The exhaust gases contain carbon mon-oxide, an odourless and colourless poison-ous gas that can cause loss of conscious-ness and death.

WARNINGDo not get out of the vehicle with the en-gine running, especially if a gear is engag-ed. The vehicle could then suddenly moveor something strange could happen thatwould cause damage, fire or serious injury.

WARNINGNever use cold start sprays, they could ex-plode or cause the engine to run at highrevs. Doing this risks injury.

CAUTION● The starter motor or the engine may bedamaged if you try to restart the engine im-mediately after switching it off.● When the engine is cold, you shouldavoid high engine speeds, driving at fullthrottle and over-loading the engine, asthis could cause engine damage.

For the sake of the environmentDo not warm-up the engine by running theengine with the vehicle stationary. Start offimmediately, driving gently. This helps theengine reach operating temperature fasterand reduces emissions.

Note● Electrical components with a high powerconsumption are switched off temporarilywhen the engine starts.● When starting with a cold engine, noiselevels may briefly increase. This is quitenormal, and no cause for concern.

1) Valid for versions with the start button on thecentre console.

202

Start and driving

Turning off the engine

● Bring the vehicle to a full stop ››› .● Move the selector lever to the P position.● Apply the electronic parking brake.● Briefly press the start-up button››› Fig. 134.

WARNINGNever switch off the engine while the vehi-cle is moving. This could cause loss of con-trol of the vehicle, accidents and serious in-jury.● The airbags and belt tensioners do notwork when the ignition is switched off.● The brake servo does not work with theengine off. Therefore, you need to pressthe break pedal harder to brake the vehicle.● Power steering does not work when theengine is not running. You need morestrength to steer when the engine is switch-ed off.● If the ignition is switched off, the steeringcolumn could be locked, making it impossi-ble to control the vehicle.

WARNINGAlways take the key with you when youleave the vehicle. This is particularly impor-tant if there are children in the vehicle, asthey might otherwise be able to start theengine or use power-operated equipment

(e.g. the electric windows), which couldcause injuries.

CAUTION● If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-Stop system* switches off the engine, theignition remains switched on. Make surethat the ignition is switched off before leav-ing the vehicle, otherwise the battery coulddischarge.● If the engine has been driven at highspeed for a prolonged period of time, itmay overheat when switched off. To avoiddamage, allow the engine to run for ap-proximately two minutes in neutral beforeswitching it off.

NoteAfter the engine is switched off the radiatorfan may run on for up to 10 minutes, even ifthe ignition is switched off. It is also possi-ble that the fan turns itself on once more ifthe coolant temperature increases due tothe heat accumulated in the engine com-partment or due to its prolonged exposureto solar radiation.

Electronic immobilizer

The electronic immobiliser prevents unau-thorised persons from driving the vehicle.

In the key there is a chip that automaticallydeactivates the electronic immobiliser.

The electronic immobiliser is automaticallyactivated when the key is outside the vehicle.

If the following message is shown on the in-strument panel display: SAFE, the vehiclecannot be started.

The engine can only be started using a genu-ine CUPRA key with its correct code.

NoteA perfect operation of the vehicle is ensur-ed if genuine CUPRA keys are used.

Emergency starting function

Fig. 135 In the centre console: emergency start. »

203

Driving

If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle,an emergency start-up will be required. Therelevant message will appear in the dashpanel display. This may happen when, for ex-ample, the vehicle key battery is very low:

● Immediately after pushing the start button,place the key in the drink holder of the cen-tre console ››› Fig. 135 , as close as possibleto the Kessy logo.● The ignition connects and the enginestarts automatically.

Instructions for the driver on the in-strument panel display

Press the brake● This message appears on vehicles with anautomatic gearbox if the driver tries to startthe engine without having the brake pedalpressed.

Select N or P● This message appears if you try to start orstop the engine when the selector lever ofthe automatic gearbox is not in position P orN. The engine can only be started and stop-ped in those positions.

Engage position P; the vehicle canmove; doors can only close in posi-tion P.● For safety reasons, this driver message ap-pears and an audible warning sounds if theselector lever of the automatic gearbox isnot in position P after you switch off the igni-tion. Move the selector lever to the P posi-tion, otherwise the vehicle could roll away.

Gear change: selector lever in thedrive position!● This driver message is displayed when theselector lever is not in the position P whenthe driver door is opened. Additionally, abuzzing sound is emitted. Put the selectorlever in position P, otherwise the vehiclecould roll away.

Ignition is switched on● This driver message is displayed and a buz-zer is sounded when the driver door isopened with the ignition switched on.

“My Beat” function*3 Valid for: vehicles with the engine start buttonon the centre console.

For vehicles with a convenience key there isthe “My Beat” function. This feature providesan additional indication of the vehicle igni-tion system.

When entering the vehicle, the start button››› Fig. 134 flashes to draw attention to it.

When the ignition is on/off, the engine startbutton flashes. With the ignition is switchedoff, the start button goes off after a few sec-onds.

With the engine running, the start buttonlight stays on, indicating that the engine isrunning. The time elapsed between the mo-ment the user starts the engine with the startbutton button and the lighting changes fromflashing to fixed will depend on specific en-gine size characteristics. When the start but-ton is used to stop the engine, the buttonstarts flashing again.

In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the“My Beat” function also offers additional in-formation:

● When the engine stops during the Stopphase, the light of the start button buttonstays on, as the Start-Stop system remainsactive even though the engine is off.● When the engine cannot be started againwith the Start-Stop system, ››› page 205 , andneeds to be started manually, the start but-ton flashes to indicate this situation.

204

Start and driving

Start-Stop system

Control lamps

It lights up

The Start-Stop system is available, the automatic en-gine shutdown is active.

It lights up

The Start-Stop system is not available or has been dis-connected.

Instructions for the driver on the instru-ment panel displayStart-Stop system deactivated. Startthe engine manually● This indication for the driver shows thatthe Start-Stop system cannot start the en-gine again.

Start-Stop system: Fault! Functionnot available● There is a fault in the Start-Stop system.Take the vehicle to a workshop to have thefault repaired.

Description and operation

The Start-Stop system helps you to save fueland reduce CO2 emissions.

In Start-Stop mode, the engine will automat-ically switch off when the vehicle stops or isstopping. The ignition remains switched on.The engine automatically switches back onwhen required.

In this scenario, the light of the button stays lit1).

When the ignition is switched on, the Start-Stop function is automatically activated.

More information on the Start-Stop systemcan be found in the Infotainment system:press the function button > Vehicle in-fo > Vehicle status ››› page 85 .

Stopping and starting the engine● Brake until it is stopped, and keep your footon the brake pedal or activate the Auto Holdsystem so that the vehicle remains braked.The engine will switch off. The warning lamp will appear in the display. The engine canbe stopped before stopping completely (ap-

proximately 7 or 2 km/h depending on thevehicle's gearbox).2)

● When you take your foot off the brakepedal the engine will start up again. Thewarning lamp will switch off. With the AutoHold system, the engine will not start if youremove your foot from the brake pedal. Thecar starts when you press the acceleratorpedal.

Basic requirements for the Start-Stopmode● The driver door must be closed.● The driver's seat belt must be fastened.● The bonnet must be closed.● The engine has reached operating tem-perature.● The reverse gear must not be engaged.● The vehicle must not be on a very steepslope.

The engine does not turn off for variousreasonsBefore stopping the vehicle, the system veri-fies whether certain conditions are met. The »

1) Valid for versions with the start button on thecentre console.2) In the mHEV version (semi-hybrid) from 20km/h.

205

Driving

engine does not switch off, in the followingsituations for example:

● The engine has not yet reached the re-quired temperature for the Start-Stop mode.● The temperature selected on the climatecontrol has not been reached.● The interior temperature is very high/low.● Defrost function button activated››› page 143.● The parking aid* is switched on.● The battery is very low.● The steering wheel is overly turned or isbeing turned.● If there is a danger of misting.● After engaging reverse gear.● In case of a very steep gradient.

● In a traffic jam after stopping for the fifthtime, the engine will not stop any more.● With ESC disabled.● After emergency braking or loss of adhe-sion.● With a trailer attached.● In a traffic jam after stopping for the fifthtime, the vehicle will not stop any more.● When the battery charge level is low.● While the particle filter is regenerating.

is shown on the instrument panel display,as well as on the driver information system*,.

The engine starts by itselfWhen stopped, the normal system modemay be interrupted in the following situa-tions. The engine restarts by itself without in-volvement from the driver.

● The interior temperature differs from thetemperature selected on the climate control.● Defrost function button activated››› page 143.● The brake has been pressed several timesconsecutively.● The battery is too low.● High power consumption.

● The vehicle rolls forward or backward withthe engine off.● ESC deactivated.● - The accelerator pedal is ignored.● The steering wheel is slightly turned.● When the air conditioning is activated.

Additional information related to the au-tomatic gearboxThe engine stops when the selector lever isin the positions P, D, N and S in addition towhen in Tiptronic mode. With the selector

lever in P, the engine will also remain switch-ed off when you take your foot off the brakepedal. In order to start the engine up againthe accelerator must be pressed, or anothergear engaged or the brake released.

If the selector lever is placed in R while stop-ped, the engine will start up again.

Change from D to P to prevent the enginefrom accidentally starting when passingthrough R.

Additional information about vehicles withAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)In vehicles with ACC function, the engine willstart up again in certain operating conditionsif the radar sensor detects that the vehicleahead drives off again.

WARNING● Never switch the engine off until the ve-hicle is stationary. The operation of thebrake and steering will not be fully guaran-teed. More force will be needed to turn thesteering wheel or to brake. You could sufferan accident and even serious injuries.● To avoid injury, make sure that the Start-Stop system is switched off when working inthe engine compartment ››› page 207 .

206

Start and driving

CAUTIONThe Start-Stop system must always beswitched off when driving through floodedareas ››› page 220 .

Note● You can control whether the engineshould switch off or not by reducing or in-creasing the brake force applied. While thevehicle remains stopped, the engine willnot stop if the brake pedal is slightly press-ed, in traffic jams with frequent stoppingand starting for example. As soon as strongpressure is applied to the brake pedal, theengine will stop.● When stopped, the brake pedal must bekept pressed to ensure that the vehicledoes not move.● If the lever is placed in position D, N or Safter engaging reverse gear, 10 km/h (6mph) in a forwards direction must bereached for the system to be in a conditionto stop the engine.

Manually connecting and disconnect-ing the Start-Stop system

Fig. 136 On the Infotainment system screen.:Start-Stop system connected. View in the mainmenu. View with the Infotainment system off.

If you do not want to use the system, you candisconnect it manually through the Infotain-ment system:

● Select > Driver assistance.

When the symbol appears orange››› Fig. 136 the system is activated and willstop and start. When the symbol appearsin white the system is disconnected.

NoteThe system switches on every time the en-gine is turned off voluntarily.

DSG automatic transmission

Introduction

Your vehicle is equipped with an electroni-cally controlled manual gearbox. Torque be-tween the engine and the gearbox is trans-mitted via two independent clutches. Theyreplace the torque converter found on con-ventional automatic gearboxes and allow forsmooth, uninterrupted acceleration of thevehicle.

The Tiptronic system allows the driver tochange gears manually ››› page 209, Chang-ing gear in Tiptronic mode.

Control lamps

It lights up green

The brake is not pressed.To select a gear range, press the brake pedal.

Flashes green

The selector lever locking button is not engaged.The vehicle is prevented from moving forwards. En-gage the selector lever lock.

207

Driving

Selector lever positions

Fig. 137 In the centre console: selector lever.

The selector lever position is shown whenthe corresponding sign lights up. The engag-ed gear is also displayed on the screen inmanual shift positions M, D, S and E (whenthe ECO engine setting is selected in the In-dividual profile ››› page 215 ).

– Parking lockWhen the P button is pressed, the drivewheels are locked. Only press P when the ve-hicle is stationary ››› .

To press the P button you must press thebrake pedal simultaneously.

– Reverse gearReverse gear must be engaged only whenthe vehicle is stationary and the engine isidling ››› .

To engage reverse gear R, you must press thebrake pedal simultaneously. The reverselights switch on when the reverse gear R isselected and the ignition is on.

– NeutralIn this position, the gear is in neutral.

Press the brake pedal to move the lever fromN to D/S when the vehicle is stationary or atspeeds below 3 km/h (2 mph) ››› .

– Permanent forward drive positionThe D/S position enables the gears to beoperated in normal mode (D) or sport mode(S). To select Sport mode S, move the leverbackwards. Pushing the lever again will selectnormal mode D. The selected driving modeis displayed on the instrument panel screen.

In normal mode (D), the gearbox selects thebest gear ratio. This depends on the engineload, the road speed and the dynamic gearcontrol programme (DCP).

Sport mode (S) should be selected for asporty driving style. This setting makes use ofthe engine's maximum power output. Whenaccelerating the gear shifts will be noticea-ble.

Under certain circumstances (e.g. on moun-tain roads) it can be advantageous to switchtiptronic mode ››› page 209 , to adapt thegears to suit the road conditions.

Selector lever lockIn N, the lever lock prevents a gear rangefrom being engaged, and prevents the vehi-cle from moving off accidentally.

Press and hold the brake pedal with your leftfoot with the engine running.

As a reminder to the driver, when the lever isin position N the following indication will beshown on the screen:

When stationary, apply footbrakewhile selecting a gear.

The lever is not locked if it is moved quicklythrough position N (e.g. when shifting from Rto D). This makes it possible, for instance, to“rock the vehicle backwards and forwards” ifit is stuck in snow or mud. The lever lock en-gages automatically if the brake pedal is notpressed and the lever is in position N formore than about one second at a speed ofless than 5 km/h (3 mph).

WARNING● Take care not to press the acceleratorpedal when the vehicle is stopped. The ve-hicle could start moving immediately (insome cases even if the parking brake is en-gaged) resulting in the risk of an accident.● Never move the lever to R position whendriving. Failure to follow this instructioncould result in an accident or failure.

208

Start and driving

● With lever in any position (except P), thefoot brake must be pushed down wheneverthe engine is running. This is because anautomatic gearbox still transmits powereven at idling speed.● While you are selecting a gear and the ve-hicle is stopped with the engine running, donot accelerate. Failure to follow this in-struction could result in an accident.● As a driver you should never leave yourvehicle if the engine is running and a gear isengaged. Switch on the electronic parkingbrake and select the parking lock (P).

Note● If the lever is moved accidentally to Nwhen driving, release the accelerator andlet the engine speed drop to idling beforeselecting gear range D or S again.● Should the power supply is interruptedwith the P parking block active, it will notbe possible to move the lever. If this shouldhappen the manual release can be used. Inthis case, you should seek professional as-sistance.

Note● If the lever lock does not engage, there isa fault. The transmission is interrupted toprevent the vehicle from accidentally mov-ing. Follow the procedure below in order forthe lever lock to engage again:

– With a 6-speed gearbox: press thebrake pedal and release it again.

– With a 7-speed gearbox: press thebrake pedal. Move the lever to posi-tion N and subsequently engage a gear.

● Despite a gear being engaged, the vehicledoes not move forwards or back. Proceedto the next mode:– When the vehicle does not move in the

required direction, the system may nothave the gear range correctly engaged.Press the brake pedal and engage thegear range again.

– If the vehicle still does not move in therequired direction, there is a systemmalfunction. Seek specialist assistanceand have the system checked.

Changing gear in Tiptronic mode

Fig. 138 Steering wheel: automatic transmissionlevers

Tiptronic gives the driver the option tochange gears manually.

When you change to the Tiptronic pro-gramme, the vehicle remains in the currentlyselected gear. This is possible as long as thesystem is not changing gear automaticallydue to a traffic situation.

Using Tiptronic with the steering wheelpaddlesThe gear shift paddles can be used when theselector lever is in the position D/S.

● Press the gearshift paddle + to select ahigher gear ››› Fig. 138 .● Press the gearshift paddle – to select alower gear.● To exit the Tiptronic mode, pull the right-hand gear shirt paddle towards the steeringwheel for approximately 1 second.

If the paddles are not operated for sometime and the lever is not in the Tiptronic se-lection position, it will automatically exit fromTiptronic mode.

CAUTION● When accelerating, if a higher gear is notselected, it will automatically change short-ly before reaching the maximum permittedRPM. »

209

Driving

● Also, if a lower gear is selected, the sys-tem will not change until it detects that theengine will not reach its maximum RPM.

Driving with an automatic gearbox

The gearbox changes gear ratios automati-cally as the vehicle moves.

The engine can only be started with the leverin the N position and the P button must be litup (the parking lock remains active).

Driving down hillsUnder certain circumstances it may be ad-vantageous to use the Tiptronic mode to se-lect the gear manually according to drivingconditions ››› .

Stop/ParkTo park on flat ground, just press the P but-ton ››› Fig. 137 . On slopes the parking brakeshould first be applied and then press the Pbutton.

If the driver door is opened and the P buttonhas not been activated, the vehicle couldmove. The following warning is displayed onthe instrument panel: Gear change:selector lever in the drive posi-tion!. Additionally, a buzzer will sound.

Stopping on a downhillAlways apply the brake pedal firmly to pre-vent the vehicle from moving; if necessary,apply the electronic parking brake ››› .

Do not accelerate while a range of gears isengaged to prevent the car from rollingdownhill ››› .

Starting off uphill with the Auto Hold func-tion● Once you have engaged a gear, take yourfoot off the brake pedal and gently press theaccelerator.

Starting off uphill without the Auto Holdfunction● Pull on the electronic parking brake but-ton.● Once you have engaged a gear, gentlypress the accelerator and pull on the elec-tronic parking brake button.

Back-up programmeIf all the positions of the lever are shown overa light background on the instrument paneldisplay, there is a system fault and the auto-matic gearbox will operate in with the back-up programme. It is still possible to drive thevehicle, however, at low speeds and within aselected range of gears. Driving in reversegear may not be possible.

Kick-downThe kick-down system provides maximumacceleration when the gear selector lever isin the positions D, S or in the Tiptronicmode.

When the accelerator pedal is pressed rightdown, the automatic gearbox will shift downto a lower gear, depending on road speedand engine speed. This takes advantage ofthe maximum acceleration of the vehicle››› .

The upshift to the next higher gear is delayeduntil the engine reaches maximum rpm.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Selec-tor lever positions on page 208.● Never allow the brake to rub and do notuse the brake pedal too often or for longperiods, as the brakes can overheat. Thisreduces the braking power, increases thebraking distance or even causes a brakesystem fault.● If you have to stop on a hill, keep the ve-hicle’s brakes applied with the brake pedalor parking brake.

WARNINGPlease note that if the road surface is slip-pery or wet, the kick-down feature couldcause the driving wheels to spin, whichcould result in skidding.

210

Start and driving

CAUTION● If you stop the vehicle on a gradient, donot attempt to stop it from rolling by de-pressing the accelerator when a gear hasbeen selected. This could cause overheat-ing and damage the automatic gearbox.● If you allow the vehicle to roll with thelever in position N and the engine off, theautomatic gearbox will be damaged by lackof lubrication.● In certain driving situations or traffic con-ditions, the gears could overheat and bedamaged! If the warning lamp lights up,stop the vehicle as soon as you can and waitfor the gearbox to cool ››› page 213 .● If the gearbox operates with the backupprogramme, take the vehicle to a special-ised workshop and have the fault repairedwithout delay.

Launch-control program*

The Launch-control programme enablesmaximum acceleration from a standstill.

Condition: the engine must have reachedoperating temperature and the steeringwheel must not be turned.

The engine speed for Launch-control is dif-ferent on petrol and diesel engines.

To use the Launch-control you must discon-nect the traction control (TCS) or activate

the ESC Sport mode, using the Infotainmentsystem menu: press the function button >Driver assistance > ESC menu. The warninglamp will remain on.

● Press the brake pedal with your left footand hold it down for at least one second.● Turn the selector lever to the S or Tiptronicposition, or else select the sport drivingmode from the Drive Profile* ››› page 215 .● With your right foot, press the acceleratordown to the full throttle or kick-down posi-tion. The engine speed will stabilise at about3,200 rpm (petrol engine) or about2,000 rpm (diesel engine).● Take your left foot off the brake pedal. Thevehicle starts with maximum acceleration.

WARNING● Always adapt your driving style to thetraffic conditions.● Only use the Launch control programmewhen road and traffic conditions permit,and make sure your manner of driving andaccelerating the vehicle does not incon-venience or endanger other road users.● Make sure that the ESC remains switchedon. Please note that when the TCS and ESCare deactivated, the wheels may start tospin, causing the vehicle to lose grip. Risk ofaccident!● After moving off, you should activate theTCS or deactivate the ESC “sport” mode

again using the Infotainment system: func-tion button > Driver assistance.

Note● After using the Launch control pro-gramme, the temperature in the gearboxmay have increased considerably. In thiscase, the programme could be disabled forseveral minutes. The programme can beused again after the cooling phase.● Accelerating with the launch control pro-gramme places a heavy load on all parts ofthe vehicle. This can result in increasedwear and tear.

downhill assistant*

Downhill speed control is activated when thelever is in the D/S position and the brake isapplied. An appropriate lower gear is engag-ed.

The assistant attempts to maintain the speedat which the vehicle was travelling when thebrake was applied, within logical limits. It maybe necessary to correct the speed by press-ing the brake.

The assistant can only change down as far as3rd gear. It is possible that on very steepslopes you may have to switch to tiptronicmode and thus manually change down to2nd or 1st gear to take advantage of engine »

211

Driving

braking and take the load off the brake sys-tem.

Downhill speed control is deactivated assoon as the road levels out again or you pressthe accelerator pedal.

On vehicles with cruise control system*››› page 224, downhill speed control is acti-vated when you set a cruising speed.

WARNINGThe downhill speed control cannot defy thelaws of physics. Therefore, speed cannot bemaintained constant in all situations. Al-ways be prepared to use the brakes!

Hill Hold Control (HHC)

When driving up a slope or using Offroadwith the lever in position D/S, stopping thevehicle switches on the hill hold control.

When the brake pedal is released, the assis-tant keeps the vehicle’s brakes applied for afew seconds to give the driver time to pressthe accelerator pedal and continue driving.

Inertia mode

The inertia mode allows you to travel certaindistances without using the accelerator,

which saves fuel. Plan ahead and use the in-ertia mode to “let” the vehicle “roll”.

Activation of the inertia modeCondition: lever in position D, slopes of lessthan 12% and speeds between 20 and 130km / h (12 and 80 mph).

● Gently take your foot off the accelerator.

The indication will be shown on the instru-ment panel , the engaged gear and cur-rent consumption will disappear and theword Inertia will appear.

The gears will automatically disengage andthe vehicle will roll freely, without the effectof the engine brake. While the vehicle rolls,the engine runs at idling speed.

Stopping inertia mode● Press the brake or the accelerator pedal.

To take advantage of the engine's inertiamode, simply remove your foot from the ac-celerator.

Applying both the inertia mode (= pro-longed section with less energy) and inertiadisconnection (= shorter section withoutthe need for fuel) facilitates improved fuelconsumption and emission balance.

With Drive Profile ››› page 215 , the inertiamode can be activated in the Comfort or In-dividual profiles. If the engine is set to Eco in

the Individual profile, it activates when theoperating conditions are met, regardless ofhow smoothly you remove your foot fromthe accelerator.

WARNING● If the inertia mode has been switched on,take into account, when approaching anobstacle, that the vehicle will not deceler-ate in the usual manner: risk of accident!● When using inertia mode while travellingdown hills, the vehicle can increase speed:risk of accident!● If other users drive your vehicle, warnthem about inertia mode.

Note● The operation of the inertia mode incombination with hybrid engines (mHEVand pHEV) can cause the combustion en-gine to switch off.● The inertia mode will be automaticallydisconnected on gradients steeper than15%.

212

Start and driving

Indications on the instrument paneldisplay

Clutch Clutch overheating! Please stop!● The clutch has overheated and could bedamaged. Stop and wait for the gearbox tocool with the engine at idling speed and theselector lever in position P. When the warn-ing lamp and the driver message switch off,have the fault corrected by a specialisedworkshop without delay. If they do not turnoff, do not continue driving. Seek specialistassistance.

Faults in the gearbox Gearbox: Fault! Stop the vehicleand place the lever in the positionP.● There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the ve-hicle in a safe place and do not continuedriving. Seek specialist assistance.

Gearbox: System fault! You maycontinue driving.● Have the fault corrected by a specialisedworkshop without delay.

Gearbox: System fault! You cancontinue driving with restrictions.Reverse gear disabled● Take the vehicle to a specialised workshopand have the fault repaired.

Gearbox: System fault! You cancontinue driving in D until switch-ing off the engine● Park the vehicle in a safe place. Seek spe-cialist assistance.

Gearbox: too hot. Adapt yourdriving accordingly● Continue driving at moderate speeds.When the warning lamp switches off, youcan continue driving in a normal manner.

Gearbox: press the brake and en-gage a gear again.● If the warning was caused by the tempera-ture of the gearbox, this driver message willbe displayed when the gearbox has cooledagain.

Gear-change recommendation

Selecting the optimal gear

Depending on the equipment on the instru-ment panel screen, a recommendation is

shown with the gear that should be engagedto optimise consumption.

The lever must be in Tiptronic mode››› page 209.

No recommendation will appear if the opti-mal gear is engaged. The current gear will bedisplayed.

Display Meaning

Optimum gear.

Changing to a higher gear is recom-mended.

Changing to a lower gear is recom-mended.

Information regarding the “cleanliness” ofthe particulate filterWhen the exhaust system detects that theparticulate filter is close to saturation, thissystem’s self-cleaning function recommendsthe optimal gear for that function››› page 288.

WARNINGThe gear change recommendation is anauxiliary function and in no case should bea substitute for careful driving.● Responsibility for selecting the correctgear, depending on the circumstances,rests solely with the driver. »

213

Driving

For the sake of the environmentSelecting the correct gear can help to savefuel.

NoteThe indication of the recommended gearturns off when the lever is taken out of theTiptronic position.

Hill Descent Control (HDC)

Control lamps

It lights up white

Hill Descent Control is active.

It lights up grey

Hill Descent Control is not active. The system is switch-ed on, but is not adjusting.

Some control and warning lamps will light upbriefly when the ignition is switched on tocheck certain functions. They will switch offafter a few seconds.


Description and operation

Hill Descent Control limits the speed onsteep descents by automatically braking allfour wheels, both when moving forward andin reverse. As the anti-lock brake system re-mains active, it prevents the wheels fromlocking.

After starting the descent of a slope below30 km/h (18 mph), speed is limited to a mini-mum of 2 km/h (1 mph) and a maximum of30 km/h (18 mph). When appropriate, thedriver may increase or decrease the speedwithin the limit by pressing the accelerator orthe brake. At this point the function is inter-rupted and, if necessary, it is then reactiva-ted.

Even so, it is imperative that the surfaceguarantees sufficient adhesion. For this rea-son, the Hill Descent Control will not fulfil itsfunction when, for example, descending aslope with a frozen or slippery surface.

Hill Descent Control is available when thedash panel display shows the message .

Hill Descent Control automatically inter-venes if the following conditions are met:

● The vehicle engine is running.● The Offroad driving profile has been se-lected ››› page 215 . Driving at a speed below30 km/h (18 mph) (the message is shownon the instrument panel).

● The slope of the descent is at least 10%when driving forward and 9% when driving inreverse.● The brake and the accelerator are notpressed.

Hill Descent Control is deactivated on press-ing the brake and the accelerator or if theslope is below 5%. The function can beswitched off manually in the infotainmentsystem using the > HDC function button.

WARNINGAlways be ready to brake. Otherwise, an ac-cident could occur and cause injury.● Hill Descent Control is only an auxiliarysystem that in some situations may not suf-ficiently brake the vehicle when goingdown a slope.● The speed of the vehicle may increasedespite the intervention of Hill DescentControl.

Steering

Information relating to different vehi-cle processes.

Electro-mechanical power steering adaptselectronically to the speed of the car, torqueand steering angle.

214

Start and driving

Even if the power steering fails or the engineis stopped, it is possible to continue to rotatethe steering wheel as long as the key remainsin the ignition, but more force must be ap-plied.

Progressive steeringDepending on the vehicle’s features, it mayor may not incorporate a progressive steer-ing system.

In city traffic you do not need to turn somuch on parking, manoeuvring or in verytight turns.

On the road or on the motorway, progressivesteering transmits, for example, in bends, asportier, more direct and noticeably moredynamic driving sensation.

Control lamp

It lights up red

Faulty steering.Do not continue driving, stop the vehicle as soon aspossible and in a safe manner.Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and havethe fault repaired as soon as possible.

It lights up yellow

Limited steering operation.Drive carefully to a specialised workshop to have thesteering checked.If the warning light does not come on again after re-starting the engine and driving a short distance, it isnot necessary to check the steering.

OR: The 12-volt battery was disconnected and recon-nected.Drive a short distance at 15-20 km / h (9-12 mph).

It flashes yellow

The steering column is jammed.When stopped, turn the steering wheel in both direc-tions.

OR: The steering column does not unlock or lock.Turn off the ignition and turn it on again. Consider themessages shown on the instrument panel display.Do not continue driving if the steering column re-mains locked after switching on the ignition. Seek spe-cialist assistance.

The control lamp should light up for a fewseconds when the ignition is switched on. Itshould go out once the engine is started.

WARNINGNever ignore the warning lamps or messag-es.● If the warning lamps and the correspond-ing messages are ignored, the vehicle maystall in traffic, causing serious damage oraccidents and injuries.

● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunityand in a safe place.

Driving modes (Drive Profile)*

Introduction

The Drive Profile enables the driver tochoose between the Comfort, Sport, Cupraand Individual profiles, which modify thebehaviour of several vehicle functions, pro-viding different driving experiences.

In addition, the 4Drive version features theOffroad and Snow profiles.

The Individual profile can be configured ac-cording to personal preferences. The otherprofiles have a fixed configuration.

Description

Depending on the equipment fitted in thevehicle, the Drive Profile can operate on thefollowing functions:

EngineDepending on the profile selected, the en-gine responds more quickly or smoothly tothe accelerator being pressed. »

215

Driving

The behaviour of the transmission is modi-fied, whenever a gear is changed up anddown, and at other times. The idle level mayalso change depending on the selected pro-file and the selector lever position.

In addition, the function for taking advantageof inertia is activated in the Individual pro-file, when the engine is set to ECO, allowingconsumption to be reduced further.

The rest of the driving profiles will activatethe inertia use function when the selectorlever is not in the S position, depending onhow the accelerator pedal is released››› page 212.

Engine sound*Depending on the selected profile, it modi-fies the acoustic sensation in the vehicle's in-terior. Depending on the equipment, it alsomodifies the outside sound levels. It acts onseveral components of the vehicle tostrengthen or weaken the engine and intakenoise, as well as the noise from the exhaustsystem. The configuration is preset for eachprofile and can be modified in the Individualprofile.

Adaptive chassis control (DCC)*The DCC continuously adapts the dampingof the suspension system to the characteris-tics of the road surface and the driving situa-tion (speed, acceleration and steering wheel

angle) according to the selected driving pro-file. The vehicle's dynamic behaviour is alsoadapted to improve grip on curves and turn-ing capacity. Within the Individual profileyou can also adjust the DCC level in a cus-tomised manner.

In the event of a fault in the DCC, the follow-ing message is displayed on the instrumentscreen Fault: shock absorber regula-tion

Four-wheel drive (4Drive)*Modify the transmission to adjust the vehi-cle’s traction capacity to the road surface.The acceleration capacity from a standstillwill also be modified.

SteeringThe power steering varies its driving modesand adapts to the profile selected, thus of-fering the best behaviour for each situation.

Air conditioningClimatronic can operate in Eco mode, espe-cially restricting fuel consumption.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*Depending on the driving profile, the per-formance of the ACC varies, to allow moresporty acceleration and braking or a morerespectful fuel consumption.

PreCrash systemThe PreCrash system adapts according tothe selected configuration. The Sport andOffroad driving profiles have specific set-tings to adapt them to driving and terraincharacteristics ››› page 22 .

Setting the driving profile

Fig. 139 Multifunction steering wheel*: button tochange the driving profile.

There are several ways to select a drivingprofile using the Infotainment System:

● Press the function button > Drive Pro-file, available profiles will be displayed.● OR: Press the function button > Vehiclesettings > Drive Profile, available profiles willbe displayed.● OR: Press the function button , slide yourfinger horizontally across the screen to SEAT

216

Start and driving

Drive Profile. Press on to change the driv-ing profile or double press on the icon toshow the available profiles.● OR: With the Infotainment System turnedoff, by pressing on the SEAT Drive Profileicon, the available driving profiles will be dis-played.● OR: briefly press the CUPRA button* onthe left hand side of the steering wheel››› Fig. 139 to change the driving profile.Press and hold the CUPRA button* to accessthe Cupra profile directly. Press and holdagain to return to the previous profile.

The icon of the selected profile is displayedat all times in the upper central part of theinstrument panel and on the InfotainmentSystem screen when it is turned off››› page 82.

Driving pro-file Characteristics

Convenience

It permits more relaxed and com-fortable driving, for example forlong motorway journeys. Its maincharacteristic is the soft suspen-sion setting (DCC).

Sport

It represents the vehicle's defaultbehaviour, suitable for dynamicdriving.

Cupra

It gives the vehicle a decidedlysportier nature, and makes formaximum performance.

Driving pro-file Characteristics

Individual

It allows you to personalise theconfiguration. The functions thatcan be adjusted depend on theequipment fitted in the vehicle.

Offroada)

It adjusts the vehicle's parametersin order to maintain optimal off-road driving.

a) Only for 4Drive models.

WARNINGWhen operating the Drive Profile, pay at-tention to all traffic: doing otherwise couldcause an accident.

Note● When the engine is switched off it willstore the driving profile that was selectedwhen the ignition was turned off. When re-started, the engine and the gearbox willstart in their Normal mode. To return theengine and gear to your desired mode, re-select the corresponding driving profile.● When the vehicle is restarted after usingthe Offroad or Snow settings, the system isalways activated in the Sport profile.● Your speed and driving style must alwaysbe adjusted to visibility, weather, and trafficconditions.

Driving tips

Running in

Please observe the instructions for running-in new components.

Running-in the engineA new engine must be driven through a run-in period during its first 1500 kilometres(1000 miles). During its first few hours ofrunning, the internal friction in the engine isgreater than later on when all the movingparts have bedded down.

How the vehicle is driven for the first1500 km (1000 miles) influences the futureengine performance. Throughout the life ofthe vehicle, it should be driven at a moderatespeed (especially when the engine is cold)this will reduce engine wear and increase itsuseful life. Never drive at extremely low en-gine speeds. Always engage a lower gearwhen the engine works “irregularly”. For thefirst 1000 km or 600 miles, please note:

● Do not use full throttle.● Do not force the engine above two thirdsof its maximum speed.● Do not tow a trailer.

Between 1000 and 1500 kilometres (600to 1000 miles), gradually increase power »

217

Driving

until reaching the maximum speed and highengine speeds.

Running in new tyres and brake pads● Replacement of wheel rims and new tyres››› page 304.● Information about brakes ››› page 252 .

For the sake of the environmentIf the engine is run in gently, the life of theengine will be increased and the engine oilconsumption reduced.

Four-wheel drive (4Drive)

On four-wheel drive models, the enginepower is distributed to all four wheels

General notesOn four-wheel drive vehicles, the enginepower is distributed to all four wheels. Thedistribution of power is controlled automati-cally according to your driving style and theroad conditions. Also see ››› page 257 .

The four-wheel drive is specially designed tocomplement the superior engine power.This combination gives the vehicle excep-tional handling and performance capabili-ties, both on normal roads and in more diffi-cult conditions, such as snow and ice. Evenso (or perhaps especially for this reason), it is

important to observe certain safety points››› .

Winter tyresThanks to four-wheel drive, your vehicle willhave plenty of traction in winter conditions,even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless,we still recommend that winter tyres or all-season tyres be fitted on all four wheels togive even better braking response.

Snow chainsOn roads where snow chains are mandatory,this also applies to cars with four-wheel drive››› page 308.

Changing tyresOn vehicles with four-wheel drive, all fourtyres must have the same rolling circumfer-ence. Also avoid using tyres with varyingtread depths ››› page 304 .

Off-roader?Your CUPRA vehicle is not an off-roader: itdoes not have enough ground clearance tobe used as such. It is therefore best to avoidrough tracks and uneven terrain as much aspossible.

WARNING● Even with four-wheel drive, you shouldalways adjust your speed to suit the condi-

tions. Do not let the extra safety featurestempt you into taking any risks when driv-ing. Risk of accident!● The braking capability of your vehicle islimited by the tyres' grip. It is therefore nodifferent from a car without four-wheeldrive. So do not be tempted to drive toofast on firm or slippery roads just becausethe vehicle still has good acceleration inthese conditions. Risk of accident!● On wet roads bear in mind that the frontwheels may start to “aquaplane” and losecontact with the road if the car is driven toofast. If this should happen, there will be nosudden increase in engine speed to warnthe driver, as occurs with a front-wheeldrive car. For this reason you should alwayschoose a driving speed suitable for the roadconditions. Risk of accident!

Economical and environmentallyfriendly driving

Fuel consumption, environmental pollutionand wear to the engine, brakes and tyres alldepend largely on driving style. Consump-tion can be reduced between 10-15% withan efficient driving type. The following sec-tion gives you some tips on lessening the im-pact on the environment and reducing youroperating costs at the same time.

218

Start and driving

Active cylinder management (ACT®)*Depending on vehicle equipment, the activecylinder management (ACT®) may deacti-vate some of the engine cylinders if the driv-ing situation does not require too muchpower. The number of active cylinders canbe seen on the instrument panel display.››› page 67.

Foresight when drivingIf you think ahead when driving, you willneed to brake less and thus accelerate less.Take advantage of the inertia of the vehiclewhenever possible, with a gear engaged.This takes advantage of the engine brakingeffect, reducing wear on the brakes andtyres. Emissions and fuel consumption willdrop to zero.

Changing gear to save energyAn effective way of saving is to change in ad-vance to a higher gear.

● Accelerate gradually and without reachingthe “kick-down” position.

Avoid driving at high speedAvoid travelling at your vehicle’s top speed,whenever possible. Fuel consumption, emis-sion of harmful gases and noise pollutionmultiply as speed is increased. Driving atmoderate speeds will help to save fuel.

Reduce idling timeIn vehicles with the Start-Stop system idlingis automatically reduced. In vehicles withoutthe Start-Stop system it is worth switching offthe engine, for example, at level crossingsand at traffic lights that remain red for longperiods of time. When an engine hasreached operating temperature, and de-pending on the cylinder capacity, keeping itswitched off for a minimum of about 5 sec-onds already saves more than the amount offuel necessary for restarting.

The engine takes a long time to warm upwhen it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu-tant emissions are also especially high duringthis initial warm-up phase. It is therefore bestto drive off immediately after starting the en-gine. Avoid running the engine at highspeed.

Regular maintenanceRegular servicing helps in saving fuel evenbefore the engine is started. A well-servicedengine gives you the benefit of improvedfuel efficiency as well as maximum reliabilityand an enhanced resale value. A badly serv-iced engine can consume up to 10% morefuel than necessary.

Avoid short journeysThe engine and catalytic converter need toreach their optimal operating temperature

in order to minimise fuel consumption andemissions.

A cold engine consumes a disproportionateamount of fuel. The engine reaches its work-ing temperature after about four kilometres(2.5 miles), when fuel consumption will re-turn to a normal level.

Check tyre pressureAlways make sure the tyres are inflated to thecorrect pressures ››› page 305 to save fuel. Ifthe pressure is below half bar, fuel consump-tion may increase by 5%. Due to the greaterrolling resistance, under-inflation also in-creases tyre wear and impairs handling.

Do not use winter tyres all year round asthey increase fuel consumption by up to10%.

Avoid carrying unnecessary loadsGiven that every kilo of extra weight will in-crease the fuel consumption, it is advisablemake sure that no unnecessary loads are be-ing transported.

Since the luggage rack increases the aero-dynamic drag of the vehicle, you should re-move it when not needed. At speeds of100-120 km/h (62-75 mph), this will save12% of fuel. »

219

Driving

Save electrical energyThe engine drives the alternator, therebygenerating electricity. This implies that anyincrease in power consumption also increa-ses fuel consumption! For this reason, switchoff any unneeded electrical devices. Devicesthat use a lot of electricity includes the blow-er at a high setting, the rear window heatingor the seat heating*.

Note● If you have the Start-Stop system, it isrecommended that it should not be discon-nected.● It is recommended that you close thewindows when driving at more than60 km/h (37 mph).● Do not drive with your foot resting on theclutch pedal, as the pressure can make theplate slip. This causes wear and can damagethe clutch plate.● Do not ride the clutch on a hill, use thebrake. The fuel consumption will be lowerand you will prevent the clutch plate frombeing damaged.● Use the engine brake on downhills bychanging to the gear that is best suited forthe gradient. Fuel consumption will be“zero” and the brakes will not suffer.

Driving on flooded roads

To prevent damage to the vehicle driving onflooded roads, take the following into ac-count:

● The water should never come above thelower edge of the bodywork.● Drive at pedestrian speed.

WARNINGAfter driving through flooded zones, brak-ing effectiveness can decrease if the brakediscs or pads are damp ››› page 252 .

CAUTION● Driving through flooded areas may dam-age vehicle components such as the en-gine, transmission or electrical system.● Whenever driving through water, theStart-Stop system* must be switched off››› page 205.

Note● Check the depth of the water before en-tering the flooded zone.● Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse,or stop the engine.● Vehicles travelling in the opposite direc-tion cause waves that could exceed yourvehicle's critical height.

● Avoid driving through salt water (corro-sion) ››› page 316 .

Trips abroad

● With petrol vehicles, it should be ensuredthat lead-free petrol is available throughoutthe journey ››› page 286, Fuel types . Seekinformation about service station networksselling unleaded fuel.● In some countries, it is possible that yourvehicle is not sold and some spare parts maynot be available or the technical servicesmay only be able to make limited repairs.

CUPRA distributors and importers will pro-vide information about the technical prepa-ration that your vehicle requires and alsoabout necessary maintenance and repairpossibilities.

CAUTIONCUPRA does not accept liability for anydamage to the vehicle due to the use of alower quality fuel, an inadequate service orthe non-availability of genuine spare parts.

220

Driver assistance systems


General notes

Safety advice

WARNING● Responsibility for driving rests with thedriver at all times. The driver assistancesystems are not a replacement for driverattention. Focus all your attention on driv-ing and be prepared to intervene at alltimes.● Use the driver assistance systems onlywhen conditions allow. The driving stylemust always be suitable for the weather,visibility, road and traffic conditions.● In order for driver assistance systems toreact correctly, sensors and cameras mustoperate without limitations. Please readthe notes on sensors and cameras in thischapter.

Note● Keep in mind the specific rules of eachcountry, especially when it comes to driv-ing, formation of an emergency corridor,braking distance, speed, parking position,wheel position, etc. The driver is solely re-sponsible for always complying with thespecific regulations of each country.

● The area in front of and around the radarsensor should not be covered with adhe-sives, additional headlights or similar items,as this could have a negative impact on theoperation of the assistants. If the vehicle isnot properly repaired or structural modifi-cations are made to it, the operation of theassistants may be affected.● The repair and adjustment of sensors andcameras requires special knowledge andtools. It is recommended to visit a CUPRAdealership for this purpose.

System limits

WARNING● Driver assistance systems can not over-come the laws of physics. Depending onthe circumstances, a collision may not beavoidable.● Warnings, notices and indicator lampsmay not be displayed on time, or may bedisplayed incorrectly, e.g. if a vehicle ap-proaches too quickly.● Corrective interventions by driver assis-tance systems (e.g. interventions in thesteering or brakes) may be insufficient ormay never occur, depending on the cir-cumstances. As a driver, you must be pre-pared to act at all times.

Note● Due to the system's detection limits in thesurroundings, the systems may not givewarnings or intervene on time, or theymight do so even if it is not desired. In addi-tion, the auxiliary systems may incorrectlyinterpret a manoeuvre and, as a result,warn the driver in an unexpected manner.● When the towing mode is selected, someassist systems may react with limitations, inan unusual way or may not be available.Keep in mind the instructions relating tothe towing mode.

221

Driving

Driver assistance sensors andcameras

Front radar

Fig. 140 On the front bumper: radar sensors.

Fig. 141 Detection area.

A radar sensor may be fitted to the frontbumper of the vehicle ››› Fig. 140 . The frontradar detects any objects in its detection

zone ››› Fig. 141 and provides support forthe following functions:

● Front Assist ››› page 228 .● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)››› page 232.

The radar can have a range of up to 120m(400ft) depending on road and weatherconditions.

WARNINGThe visibility of the radar sensor can be im-paired by dirt or environmental influencessuch as rain, fog, snow, mud, dust, insectsetc. In this case the Front Assist and ACCfunctions may stop working. The instru-ment panel displays the following message:No sensor vision! And the Front Assistunavailable or ACC unavailable warninglights come on.● Clean the sensor area on the bumper asindicated in ››› page 318, Cleaning the exte-rior . When the radar sensor starts correctlydetecting again, the message disappearsfrom the screen and the functions becomeavailable again.

CAUTION● If the radar sensor is dirty or poorly adjus-ted, the Front Assist system may give un-necessary warnings and apply the brakesinappropriately.

● The operation of the radar can be affec-ted by strong reflections of the emitted sig-nal. This may occur, for example, in an en-closed car park or due to the presence ofmetallic objects (e.g. guard rails or sheetsused in road works).● The sensor may not be adjusted correctlyif it receives an impact. This may compro-mise the system's efficacy or disconnect it.If you have the feeling that the radar sensoris damaged or adjusted incorrectly, switchoff the Front Assist and ACC functions toavoid any damage. If this occurs have it ad-justed.

Front camera

Fig. 142 On the windscreen: field of vision of theLane Assist system.

Depending on the equipment, the vehiclemay be fitted with a front camera on thefront windscreen ››› Fig. 142 . This camera

222


detects lane boundaries (lines) to providesupport for the following functions:

● Lane Assist ››› page 240 .● Travel Assist ››› page 242 .● Emergency assist ››› page 244 .

CAUTIONTo avoid affecting the operation of the sys-tems, take the following points into consid-eration:● Clean the field of vision of the cameraregularly and make sure it is free of snowand ice.● Do not cover the field of vision of thecamera.● Check that the windscreen is not dam-aged in the area of the camera's field of vi-sion.

Rear radar

Fig. 143 Rear view of the vehicle: radar sensorzones.

Fig. 144 Sensor detection zones

The radar sensors are located on the left andright of the bumper and are not visible fromthe outside ››› Fig. 143 . The sensors monitorboth the blind spot and traffic behind the ve-hicle ››› Fig. 144 .

They support the following functions:

● Lane departure warning (Side Assist)››› page 247.● Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) ››› page 249 .● Door opening warning (Exit Assist)››› page 250.

Automatic deactivation of supportedfunctionsThe rear radar sensors deactivate automati-cally when, among other reasons, one of thesensors is detected to be permanently cov-ered. This may be the case if, for example,there is a layer of snow or ice over one of thesensors.

The relevant text message will appear in thedash panel display.

CAUTION● The radar sensors on the rear bumpermay be damaged or shifted in the event of acollision, for example, when entering or ex-iting a parking space. This may result in thesystem disconnecting itself, or at least pos-sibly having its functionality diminished.● In order to ensure that the radar sensorswork properly, keep the rear bumper freeof snow and ice and do not cover it.● The rear bumper should only be paintedwith paint authorised by CUPRA. The lanedeparture warning's functions may be limi-ted or work incorrectly if other paints areused. »

223

Driving

● The visibility of radar sensors may be af-fected due to leaves, snow, strong haze ordirt, among others. Clean the area in frontof the sensors.● Never use the lane departure warning,the rear cross traffic alert or the dooropening warning if the radar sensors aredirty.

Ultrasound sensors

The bumpers are fitted with ultrasound sen-sors to perform the following functions:

● Park Assist ››› page 260 .● Parking aid Plus ››› page 268 .● Rear parking aid ››› page 271 .

CAUTION● Damage to the radiator grille, bumper,wheel arch and vehicle underbody canmodify the orientation of the sensors. Thiscan affect the parking aid function. Havethe function checked by a specialisedworkshop.● A number plate or number plate holderwith dimensions that exceed the space forthe number plate, or a cured or deformednumber plate can cause false detections ora loss of visibility for the sensors.

Note● In order to guarantee good operation,keep the sensors clean, free of snow andice, and do not cover them with stickers orother objects.● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-ment for cleaning, do not apply it directly,unless you do so very briefly, and alwayskeep a distance of more than 10 cm away.● Fitting certain accessories to the front ofthe vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad-vertising, may interfere with the operationof the Park Assist.

Rear View Camera

Fig. 145 In the rear lid handle: location of the re-verse assist camera.

A camera installed in the rear lid handle as-sists the driver with reverse parking or ma-

noeuvring. This provides support to the fol-lowing function:

● Rear View Camera ››› page 272 .

WARNINGFitting a number plate frame may interferewith the view shown on the screen, as itmay reduce the camera’s field of vision.

CAUTION● In order to guarantee good system opera-tion, keep the cameras clean, free of snowor ice, and do not cover them with stickersor other objects.● Never use abrasive cleaning products toclean the camera lens.● Do not use hot or warm water to removeice or snow from the camera lens. Doing socould damage the camera.

Cruise control system (CCS)

Introduction

The cruise control system (GRA) helps main-tain a constant speed set by you.

224


Speed rangeThe cruise control system is available whendriving in forward gear at a speed of overapprox. 20 km/h (15 mph).

Temporarily switching off the cruise con-trolThe saved speed can be exceeded at anytime, e.g. for overtaking. The cruise control issuspended during acceleration and is thenresumed with the saved speed.

Status displayWhen the cruise control system is switchedon, the instrument cluster display shows thesaved speed and the system status:

It lights up grey

The cruise control system is switched on, but regula-tion is not active.

It lights up green

The cruise control system is switched on and regula-tion is active.

If there is no speed saved, the instrumentcluster display shows instead of speed.

Changing gearsAs soon as the clutch pedal is depressed,regulation is suspended and resumes oncethe gear change has been made.

Driving down slopesShift into a low gear before descending along hill. This makes use of engine brakingand relieves the brakes.

WARNINGIf it is impossible to drive with sufficientbraking distance and at a constant speed,using the cruise control system may causeaccidents and serious injuries may occur.● Do not use Travel Assist when visibility isbad, on steep roads, on windy roads or inslippery circumstances (such as snow, ice,rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads.● Do not use Traffic Jam Assist offroad oron roads where the surface is not firm.● Adapt your speed and safety distance tothe vehicle in front of you at all times to suitthe visibility, weather, road and traffic con-ditions.● After use, always switch off the speedlimiter to prevent the speed being regula-ted against your wishes.● It is dangerous to use a set speed which istoo high for the prevailing road, traffic orweather conditions.

Operating the cruise control with thethird lever

Fig. 146 On the multifunction steering wheel:buttons to operate the speed limiter.

Connecting● Press the button.

There is no speed saved and regulation is notyet operating.

Start regulation● When the vehicle is moving, press the but-ton .

The cruise control system saves and regu-lates the current speed.

Adjusting the speedWhile the GRA is set, the stored speed canbe adjusted: »

225

Driving

+ 1 km/h (1 mph)- 1 km/h (1 mph)+ 10 km/h (5 mph)- 10 km/h (5 mph)

The vehicle adapts the current speed by ac-celerating or stopping accelerating.

Interrupting the adjustment● Briefly press the button on the multi-function steering wheel or press the brakepedal.

The speed is stored.

Reinstating the cruise control● Press the button.

The cruise control system resumes the savedspeed and regulates it.

Switching off● Press and hold the button .

The cruise control system switches off andthe saved speed is deleted.

Switching off the speed limiter● Press the button.● Select the speed limiter on the instrumentcluster display.

The cruise control system is switched off.

Problems and solutions

Temporarily switching off the cruisecontrol

The control lamp switches on yellow.

● Abnormal operation. Switch off the cruisecontrol system and take the vehicle to a spe-cialist workshop.

The adjustment is interrupted unexpect-edly● If the clutch pedal is pressed for a longtime.● The vehicle has exceeded the saved speedfor a long time.● No forward gear has been selected.● A brake assistance system has intervened,e.g. TCS or ESC.● Front Assist has braked the vehicle.● If the fault continues, disconnect theEmergency Assist and consult a specialisedworkshop.

Speed limiter

Introduction

The speed limited helps the driver not to ex-ceed a set speed.

Speed rangeThe speed limiter helps avoid exceeding aprogrammed speed, from 30 km/h (20 mph)approx. and faster.

By selecting the speed limiterThe speed limitation can be interrupted atany time by depressing the accelerator pedalfully, beyond the point of resistance. As soonas the saved speed is exceeded, the greenindicator light flashes and an audible warningsignal may sound. The speed is stored.

The limiter is reactivated automatically afterreturning to less than the set speed.

Status displayWhen the speed limiter is switched on, theinstrument cluster display shows the savedspeed and the system status:

It lights up grey

The speed limiter is switched on but regulation is notactive.

It lights up green

The speed limiter is switched on and active.

226


Driving down slopesShift into a low gear before descending along hill. This makes use of engine brakingand relieves the brakes.

WARNINGAfter use, always switch off the speed limit-er to prevent the speed being regulatedagainst your wishes.● The speed limiter does not relieve thedriver of their responsibility to drive at theappropriate speed. Do not drive at highspeed if not necessary.● Using the speed limiter under adverseweather conditions is dangerous and cancause serious accidents, e.g. aquaplaning,snow, ice, leaves, etc. Only use the speedlimiter when the status of the road and theweather conditions allow it.

Operating the speed limiter with thethird lever

Fig. 147 On the multifunction steering wheel:buttons to operate the speed limiter.

Connecting● Press the button.

It does not take effect yet.

Start regulation● When the vehicle is moving, press the but-ton .

The current speed is saved as a limit speed.

Adjusting the speedThe programmed speed can be set:

+ 1 km/h (1 mph)- 1 km/h (1 mph)+ 10 km/h (5 mph)

- 10 km/h (5 mph)

Interrupting the adjustment● Press the button.

The speed is stored.


The limiter will re-activate as soon as the ve-hicle is moving at a speed lower than thesaved one.

Switching off● Press and hold the button .

The speed limiter switches off and the speedis deleted.

Switch to cruise control (GRA) or adaptivecruise control (ACC)● Press the button.● Observe the corresponding message onthe instrument cluster display.

The speed limiter is switched off.

NoteDepending on the equipment, the speedlimiter can be found on the multifunctionsteering wheel or on the turn signal lever.

227

Driving


The speed limiter is not active.

The control lamp switches on yellow.

● Malfunctions Switch off the speed limiterand go to a specialist workshop.

The adjustment is interrupted unexpect-edly● You have switched off the Electronic Stabi-lization Control (ESC).● The brakes have overheated. Wait for thebrakes to cool down and check the opera-tion again.● If the fault continues, consult a specialisedworkshop.

For safety reasons, the speed limiter onlyswitches off fully whenever the driver stopspressing the accelerator pedal or switchesthe system off manually.

Not possible to start regulation● The selected driving profile does not allowregulation to start. Select another profile andrepeat the procedure.

emergency brake assistancesystem (Front Assist)*

Introduction

The objective of the system is to preventhead-on collisions against objects that maybe in the vehicle’s path or minimise the con-sequences of such impacts.

The function is designed to avoid collisionsagainst:

● Parked vehicles.● Vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists that aretravelling in the same lane and direction.● Pedestrians and cyclists who transverselycross the vehicle path.

The Front Assist records the mentioned ob-jects by means of a camera on the top of thewindscreen and a radar sensor on the frontof the vehicle ››› page 222 .

Depending on several factors and how criti-cal the situation is, the system operates in astaggered manner.

First informing the driver, and if there is no orinsufficient reaction, then activating an au-tonomous emergency braking or an evasivemanoeuvre as indicated by the conditionsthat will be discussed in the following points.

The system can be cancelled if the accelera-tor pedal is pressed or the steering wheel isturned firmly.

Depending on the equipment and the coun-try, the Front Assist also includes the follow-ing functions:

● Pedestrian protection ››› page 229● Cyclist protection ››› page 229● Dodge assist ››› page 230● Turn assist ››› page 230

WARNING● Front Assist is a driving assistance func-tion that can never replace the driver’s at-tention.● Front Assist cannot change the laws ofphysics or replace the driver in terms ofkeeping control of the vehicle and reactingto a possible emergency situation.● Following a Front Assist emergency warn-ing, pay immediate attention to the situa-tion and try to avoid the collision where ap-propriate.

228


Warning levels and brake assist

Fig. 148 On the instrument panel display: ad-vance warning indications.

Front Assist is active between 5 km/h (3mph) and 250 km/h (155 mph). Dependingon different conditions (vehicle speed,speed and type of object recognised, etc.),some of the stages described below areomitted to optimise the performance of thesystem.

Safety distance warningIf the system detects that you are driving tooclose to the vehicle in front, it will warn thedriver with this indication on the instrumentpanel display .

The timing of the warning varies dependingon driver behaviour, vehicle speed and rela-tive speed between both.

The safety distance warning is active be-tween approx. 65 km/h (40 mph) and 250km/h (155 mph).

Advance warningIf the system detects a possible collision withthe vehicle in front, it alerts the driver bymeans of an audible warning and an indica-tion on the instrument panel display ››› Fig. 148.

The warning moment varies depending onthe traffic situation and driver behaviour. Atthe same time, the vehicle will prepare for apossible emergency braking ››› in Intro-duction on page 228.

When Front Assist is connected, the indica-tions of other functions on the screen maybe hidden.

Critical warningIf the driver fails to react to the advancewarning, the system may actively intervenein the brakes and generate a brief jolt to warnthe driver of the imminent danger of a colli-sion.

Automatic brakingIf the driver also fails to react to the criticalwarning, the system may initiate independ-ent emergency braking by progressively in-creasing the braking in accordance with thecriticality of the situation.

Driver emergency braking assistance sys-temIf the driver, after the critical warning, startsbraking but the system detects that thebrake is not being applied with sufficientforce, the braking intensity will be increased.This brake assist only occurs if the pedal ispressed firmly.

WARNING● The system cannot prevent a collision, al-though it can significantly minimise theconsequences by reducing the speed andthe force of the impact.● When the Front Assist causes a braking,the brake pedal is “harder”.● Automatic interventions by the Front As-sist on the brakes may be interrupted bypressing the accelerator or moving thesteering wheel.● The Front Assist may brake the vehicleuntil it stops completely. However, thebrake system does not halt the vehicle per-manently. Use the foot brake!

Pedestrian and cyclist recognition

The system recognises pedestrians and cy-clists who travel in the same lane and direc-tion and pedestrians and cyclists who trans-versely cross the vehicle's path. »

229

Driving

Pedestrian and cyclist recognition technolo-gy cannot exceed the physically prescribedlimits and works exclusively within the sys-tem’s limits. The responsibility for braking al-ways depends on the driver.

The pedestrian and cyclist recognition cancause undesired warnings and braking inter-ventions, e.g. with a hidden radar sensor or adirty camera field of vision.

Be ready to take charge of the vehicle at anytime.

The pedestrian and cyclist recognition oper-ating speed range is lower than that of theFront Assist.

Dodge assist

Dodge assist helps the driver avoid an obsta-cle in critical conditions.

Once the Front Assist has activated a criticalwarning, if the driver intends on dodging theobject, the dodge assist will help correct thetrajectory. The driver must start and finishthe manoeuvre, as this is an assistance sys-tem and not an autonomous one.

Front Assist is active between approx. 30km/h (20 mph) and 150 km/h (90 mph).

LimitationsThis system does not react to objects thatcross transversely or to animals. The basiclimitations of the Front Assist must also betaken into account ››› page 230 .

Turn assist

Turn assist can avoid a collision with a vehicleapproaching in the opposite direction, bybraking the vehicle itself when the intentionis to turn.

This system is active up to 15 km/h (9 mph).

LimitationsThe turn-off assist function is available if youhave indicated your intention to turn by acti-vating the turn signal, you have turned thesteering wheel and the turning path has star-ted.

It only reacts to vehicles that are in the pathof the vehicle (not to animals, people, etc.).

The basic limitations of the Front Assist mustalso be taken into account ››› page 230 .

System limitations

Fig. 149 On the instrument panel display: initialsystem self-calibration indication.

Front Assist has certain limitations inherentto the system. Thus, in certain circumstan-ces, some of the reactions may be inappro-priate from the driver's standpoint. So payattention in order to intervene if necessary.

The following conditions may cause theFront Assist not to react or to do so toolate:● In the first few instants of driving afterswitching on the ignition, due to the system’sinitial auto-calibration. During this phase, theinstrument panel screen will display the fol-lowing indication ››› Fig. 149 .

Unrecognised objects● Vehicles travelling outside the reach of thesensors at close range from your own vehi-cle.

230


● Vehicles that suddenly change to the laneon which your vehicle is travelling.● Pedestrians that cannot be recognised be-cause they are partially or totally hidden.● Objects such as walls, posts, fences, treesor garage doors.● Loads and accessories of other vehiclesthat protrude over the sides, backwards orover the top.● Other vehicles crossing the vehicle’s path.● In the case of pedestrians or cyclists stand-ing or approaching in the opposite direction.

Operating limitations:In the following situations, the Front Assistmay work late or in an undesirable manner.The following icon is displayed (in yellow)in the instrument panel, accompanied by themessage Front Assist with limita-tions.

● If the Front Assist or the front camera aredisabled or broken.● If the radar sensor or the front camera aredirty or covered.● On taking tight bends or complex paths.● When pressing the accelerator firmly or atfull throttle.● If the TCS has been disconnected or theESC is activated in Sport ››› page 259 mode.● If the ESC is adjusting or is broken.

● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-trically connected trailer are damaged.● If the vehicle is reversing.● In case of snow or heavy rain.● In case of dazzling sun or total darkness.● Entrances and exits of tunnels.● In complex driving situations (such as traf-fic islands, cut-through roundabouts, etc),Front Assist may issue warnings and inter-vene in braking in an unnecessary manner.

For more details, see section ››› page 221 .

Manual activation and deactivation ofthe function

Fig. 150 On the instrument panel display: FrontAssist deactivated indication.

Front Assist indicators appear on the instru-ment panel display.

The Front Assist is active whenever the igni-tion is switched on. At the time of starting

the ignition, the Front Assist may not beavailable for a short period of time while thesystem starts. During this phase, the instru-ment panel screen will display the followingindication ››› Fig. 149 .

When the Front Assist is disabled, so too arethe advance warning and the distance warn-ing functions. CUPRA recommends leavingthe Front Assist activated except in the situa-tions presented in ››› page 232 .

Switching the Front Assist on and offWith the ignition switched on, the Front As-sist can be deactivated or activated as fol-lows:● Select the corresponding menu option us-ing the button for the driver assistance sys-tems ››› page 79 .● OR: using the Infotainment system: pressthe function button > Driver assistance>Front Assist››› page 86 .

When the Front Assist is deactivated, the in-dication ››› Fig. 150 will be displayed on theinstrument panel.

Each time the ignition is switched on, theFront Assist will reappear as active.

Activating or deactivating the pre-warning(advance warning)The advance warning can be activated ordeactivated in the infotainment system using »

231

Driving

the function button > Driver assistance >Front Assist ››› page 86 .

The system will store the setting for the nexttime the ignition is switched on.

CUPRA recommends keeping advance warn-ing active.

Depending on the vehicle’s infotainmentsystem the advance warning function maybe adapted in the following modes:

● Advance● Medium● Delayed● Deactivated

CUPRA recommends driving with the func-tion in “Medium” mode.

Switching distance warning on and offThe safety distance warning can be activatedor deactivated in the infotainment systemusing the function button > Driver assis-tance > Front Assist ››› page 86 .


CUPRA recommends having the safety dis-tance warning activated except in the excep-tions described in section ››› page 232 .

Activate or deactivate the dodge and turnassistantThe dodge and turn assistance systems canbe activated or deactivated in the infotain-ment system using the function button >Driver assistance > Front Assist ››› page 86 .


CUPRA recommends having the dodge andturn assistance systems activated except inthe exceptions described in section››› page 232.

Deactivating Front Assist temporarily inthe following situationsIn the following situations the Front Assistshould be deactivated due to the system'slimitations:

● When the vehicle is to be towed.● If the vehicle is on a test bed.● If the radar sensor or the front camera arefaulty.● If the radar sensor or the front camerahave suffered a violent blow.● If it intervenes several times unnecessarily.● If the radar sensor or the front camera aretemporarily covered by an accessory.● When the vehicle is going to be loaded on-to transportation.

● If the windscreen is damaged in an areathat covers the vision of the front camera.

ACC - Adaptive Cruise Control*

Introduction

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) maintains aconstant speed set by the driver.

When approaching another vehicle in front,the ACC detects it and adapts the speed au-tomatically, maintaining a distance set by thedriver.

Does my vehicle have ACC?Your vehicle has ACC if it has a configurationmenu in the infotainment system ››› page 86and if it has the ACC function buttons on themultifunction steering wheel ››› Fig. 151 .

Speed rangeACC regulates speeds between 30 km/h (20mph) and 210 km/h (130 mph).

The ACC can brake vehicle until it stopscompletely before a vehicle that stops.

Driver intervention promptACC is subject to certain limitations in-herent to the system. This means thatthe driver will have to control the speed

232


and distance from other vehicles in cer-tain situations. In this case, the instru-ment cluster display will tell you to in-tervene by applying the brake, and anaudio warning will be played.

Radar sensorsThe ACC uses the front radar technology.Read its maintenance instructions and infor-mation about its limitations ››› page 221 .

WARNINGThe ACC’s technology cannot overcomethe system's inherent limitations or changethe laws of physics. If used negligently orinvoluntarily, it may cause serious acci-dents and injuries. The system is not a re-placement for driver awareness.● Always be prepared to brake or acceler-ate.● If you press the accelerator pedal theACC will stop working. Therefore, it will notbrake or request any braking intervention.● Adapt your speed and safe distance tothe vehicle in front of you at all times to suitvisibility, weather, road and traffic condi-tions.● Do not use the ACC in poor visibility, oron roads that are steep, with lots of curvesor slippery.● Never use ACC when driving off-road oron unpaved roads.

● The system may not react in time to sta-tionary obstacles (such as a traffic jamqueue), particularly at high speeds. Reactsoon enough to avoid a hazardous situa-tion.● The system may not react to stopped ve-hicles in the same lane. You must react ear-ly enough yourself in this case.● The system does not react to people, ani-mals or vehicles that are crossing or ap-proaching in the opposite direction.● If you are driving with a spare wheel fit-ted, the ACC system could automaticallyswitch off. Switch off the system whenstarting off.● Brake immediately if the ACC does notslow down enough.● Brake immediately when a driver inter-vention instruction is displayed on the in-strument cluster screen.● If the vehicle continues to move involun-tarily after a driver intervention prompt,brake the vehicle.● The brake pedal may move downwardsduring braking. Be careful not to positionyour foot under the pedal.

NoteIf the ACC does not work as described inthis chapter, do not use it until it has beenchecked by a specialised workshop. CUPRA

recommends visiting a specialised CUPRAdealer or any SEAT dealership.

ACC operation

Fig. 151 On the multifunction steering wheel: but-tons to operate the ACC

Connecting● Press the button on the multifunctionsteering wheel.

The ACC does not regulate anything yet(standby).

Start regulation● To start regulation, press the button ››› Fig. 151.

The ACC sets the current speed, or the clos-est speed within the valid range (30-210km/h), as the cruise speed. »

233

Driving

Depending on the driving situation, the fol-lowing indicator lamps come on:

It lights up green

ACC connected, no vehicle detected in front.

It lights up green

ACC connected, vehicle detected in front.

When the ACC is in standby, the indicatorlamps light up grey.

Setting speedTo program the speed, press the or ››› Fig. 151 buttons to the desired speed. Thespeed is adjusted at intervals of 10 km/h (5mph).

When the ACC is active, the button canbe pressed to increase the desired speed by1 km/h (1 mph). You can then press to de-crease it by 1 km/h (1 mph).

Setting your distance levelThe distance can be set to one of five levels,from very short to very long:

● Press the button and then the button or ››› Fig. 151 .● Alternatively, press the button as manytimes as necessary to set the desired dis-tance.

Keep in mind each country’s regulations onminimum braking distances.

Suspend regulation (standby)● Briefly press the button on the multi-function steering wheel or press the brakepedal.

The ACC indicator lamp is grey; the speedand distance are saved.

If the ESC TCS ››› page 259 is disconnected,the ACC is automatically suspended.


The ACC regulates to the last speed and dis-tance setting.

Switching off● Press and hold the button . The setspeed is cleared.

Exceeding the speed regulated by the ACCWhile driving with the ACC switched on, thedriver can increase speed by pressing the ac-celerator pedal. ACC regulation is suspen-ded until you release the accelerator pedal››› .

Set the default distance settingIn the Infotainment system, you can pre-se-lect the distance level when connecting theACC from:

● Very short, Short, Medium, Long and Verylong using the Infotainment system: >Driver assistance > ACC ››› page 86 .

Changing the driving profileIn vehicles with SEAT Drive Profile, the driv-ing profile selected can have an influence onthe ACC’s acceleration and braking behav-iour ››› page 215 .

In vehicles without Drive Profile, the behav-iour of the ACC can also be affected if any ofthe following drive profiles are selected inthe infotainment system in Driver assis-tance. ACC settings will be the same asthose in the Drive Profile.

WARNINGBefore driving off, check that the road isclear. The radar sensor may not detect ob-stacles on the road. This could cause an ac-cident and serious injuries. If necessary,apply the brake.

CAUTIONIf you increase speed using the acceleratorpedal, the ACC may not be able to safely

234


adjust the speed of the distance due to thelimitations of the system.● Be prepared to react if required by thesituation.

Status display

Fig. 152 On the instrument panel display: ACC ac-tive.

Vehicle ahead detected. It will light up ifthe distance to the vehicle is adjusted.Selected distance level 2.

This information can be displayed on thecentral panel of the Assists view, or in theleft hand information profile ››› page 65 . Ifthese views are not selected, it will be auto-matically displayed in the lower central part

1

2

of the instrument cluster in a simplified man-ner.

The set speed will be displayed next to thefunction status indicator described in››› page 233, Start regulation.

Special driving situations

Fig. 153 On the instrument panel display: ACC ac-tive, vehicle detected in an outer lane.

Be aware of the limitations and warnings de-scribed at the beginning of this chapter.››› in Introduction on page 233.

Avoid undertaking on the right1)

If a vehicle is detected in the left lane that istravelling at a speed slower than that set by

the driver, it will brake the vehicle within thecomfort limits of the system to avoid passingit on the right ››› Fig. 153 .

You can cancel this regulation by changingthe set speed or by pressing the acceleratorpedal.

The function works at speeds over 80 km/h(50 mph). It may not be available in certaincountries.

OvertakingWhen the turn signal is switched on for over-taking, the ACC reduces the distance fromthe vehicle in front to help with the overtak-ing manoeuvre. The set cruising speed willnot be exceeded.

The function works at speeds over 80 km/h(50 mph). It may not be available in certaincountries.

Stop&Go functionThe ACC can bring the vehicle to a standstill(0 km/h) if the vehicle in front stops.

The ACC remains active and the messageACC ready to start is displayed on the in-strument cluster for a few seconds. You canextend or reactivate this warning by pressingthe button or, depending on your »

1) Or on the left, in countries that drive on theleft hand side of the road.

235

Driving

vehicle’s equipment, by grabbing the steer-ing wheel. During this time, the vehicle willmove off again if the vehicle in front movesforwards.

To move off when the message ACC readyto start is not longer displayed, once thevehicle in front has moved off:

● Press the accelerator pedal.● OR: press the button or on the mul-tifunction steering wheel.

The ACC is deactivated while stopped in thefollowing cases:

● If the vehicle stops for several minutes.● If a door is opened.

WARNINGIf the message ACC ready to start is dis-played on the instrument cluster displayand the vehicle in front moves off, your ve-hicle will move off automatically. In thiscase, any obstacles in the road may not bedetected. This may cause serious accidentsand injuries.● Always check the road before moving off,and apply the vehicle brakes yourself ifnecessary.

ACC system limitations

Fig. 154 Vehicle on a bend. Motorcyclistahead, out of range of the radar sensor.

Fig. 155 Vehicle changing lanes. One vehi-cle turning and another stationary.

The limits of the ACC system mean that it isnot appropriate in all situations ››› in In-troduction on page 233.

CUPRA does not recommend using thefunction in the following cases ››› :

● Heavy rain, snow or fog.● When going through tunnels.● In sections with roadworks.● On routes with curves, e.g. on mountainroads.● On off-road routes.● In covered car parks.

236


● On roads with embedded metal objectssuch as train or tram tracks.● On roads with loose gravel.

Pay special attention when using ACC in thefollowing situations:

On curvesThe ACC may not detect the vehicle in fronton a curve, or may regulate the distancefrom vehicles in other lanes ››› Fig. 154 .

Vehicles outside the sensor zoneIn the following situations the ACC may notreact, or may react slowly or inappropriately:

● Vehicles that are not aligned while drivingor that are outside the sensor's detectionarea, such as motorcycles ››› Fig. 154 ● Vehicles that move into your lane, a shortdistance from your vehicle ››› Fig. 155 .● Vehicles with loads or accessories thatprotrude from the sides, rear or roof.

Objects that are not detectedThe ACC function only detects and reacts tovehicles moving in the same direction.Therefore it does not detect:

● People● Animals

● Vehicles travelling in the opposite directionor crossing the road.● Other stationary obstacles

The ACC may not react to stationary vehi-cles. If, for example, a vehicle detected bythe ACC turns or moves over and there is astationary vehicle in front of it, the ACC willnot react to the second vehicle ››› Fig. 155.

WARNINGUsing the ACC in the above situations cancause serious accidents and injuries, andyou could break the law.


ACC not available

The indicator lamp lights up yellow:

● The radar sensor is dirty or adjusted incor-rectly. Take into account the warnings de-scribed at the beginning of this chapter››› page 222● There is a fault or defect. Turn off the vehi-cle's ignition and turn it on again after a fewminutes.● If the problem persists, consult a special-ised workshop.

The ACC does not work as expected● Make sure that the conditions are met forthe radar sensor to operate properly››› page 222.● If the brakes overheat, regulation stops au-tomatically. Wait for them to cool down andcheck the operation again.● Unusual noises during automatic ACCbraking are normal and do not indicate anyanomalies.

The following conditions may lead the ACCnot to react:● The accelerator or brake is depressed.● No gear is engaged or the vehicle is in gearR.● The vehicle is reversing.● ESC is operating.● The driver is not wearing his/her seat belt.● A vehicle or trailer brake light is faulty.● The RPM is too high or too low.● The parking brake is applied.● Driving on an excessive slope.

237

Driving

Proactive speed adjustment

Introduction

The proactive speed adjustment adapts thespeed to the speed limitations detected andto the road layout (curves, crossings, round-abouts, etc.).

Proactive speed adjustment is an additionalfunction of the ACC ››› page 232 and usesthe traffic signal detection system››› page 72 and the navigation data of the in-fotainment system.

Proactive speed adjustment is available de-pending on the equipment, although not inall countries.

WARNINGThe proactive speed adjustment smarttechnology cannot overcome the limits im-posed by the laws of physics and it onlyworks within the limits of the system. Neverallow the enhanced convenience of thisfunction induce you to take any risk thatcompromises safety. If used negligently orinvoluntarily, it may cause serious acci-dents and injuries. The system is not a re-placement for driver awareness.● Always adapt your speed to suit visibility,weather, road and traffic conditions.● Always pay attention to traffic and alwayskeep the vehicle environment in mind.

● Always be prepared to adjust the speedyourself. If the traffic signal detection sys-tem is not working properly or the naviga-tion data is not up to date, the speed maychange unexpectedly and suddenly or maynot suit the current traffic situation. In ad-dition, the speed adjusted by the systemmay not suit your driving style.● Always be prepared to adjust the speedyourself. If you drive without any active gui-ded route, if you leave the route calculatedby the navigation system or if the positionof the vehicle cannot be determined cor-rectly because the GPS does not provideaccurate data, the speed may change un-expectedly and suddenly or may not adaptto the current traffic situation.● Always use up-to-date navigation data.● Always take into account the maximumpermitted speed. In the case of speed limi-tations that are not included in the naviga-tion data, the maximum permitted speedmay be exceeded.

NoteAlso note the information related to theACC relevant to safety ››› page 232 .

Limitations of the proactive speed ad-justment

In addition to the limitations of the traffic sig-nal detection system ››› page 72 and of thelimitations of the ACC, proactive speed ad-justment has the following limitations inher-ent to the system:

● Proactive speed adjustment only recogni-ses traffic signals that show a speed limita-tion. The proactive speed adjustment doesnot take into account, above all, the rules onpriority of passage or traffic lights.● On roads that are not included in the navi-gation data, or that are included with littleaccuracy, proactive speed adjustment is notavailable.● If a speed limitation is notified based onthe navigation data without it being detectedby the traffic signal detection system, the in-dicated speed will be adjusted to the speedthat was saved the last time.● Proactive speed adjustment is not availablefor speed limitations below approx. 20 km/h(approx. 15 mph). In this case, a relevantmessage is displayed on the instrument pan-el screen.

238


Activating the proactive speed adjust-ment

In the infotainment system, in the assist serv-ices menu, you can individually adjust thetype of incident the vehicle should react to››› page 86:

● Reaction to a road layout.● Reaction at permitted speeds.

Driving with the proactive speed ad-justment

● Connect the ACC ››› page 233 .● Set distance and speed.● Activate the proactive speed adjustment.

As soon as the system recognises a speedlimitation or a relevant road layout during theroute, a warning will appear on the instru-ment panel display. This warning will indicatethe reason and the speed to which the vehi-cle will adjust due to said limitation.

Adjustment due to a speed limitation.

Adjustment due to a road layout.

In the event of adjustment due to a speedlimitation, the detected speed will be savedas the new desired speed. In the event of ad-

justment due to the road layout, the vehiclewill accelerate again after leaving the reasonfor the adjustment behind and the speed willbe adjustment to that which has been saved.

The speeds indicated for curves depend onthe driving profile ››› page 215 .

Interrupting speed adjustment● During the warning, press the button .● During the adjustment, press the button.

Adjust the announced speedThe announced speed can only be adjustedin the event of adjustment due to a speedlimitation.

Multifunction steering wheel:+ 1 km/h (1 mph), only while the ACC isadjusting- 1 km/h (1 mph), only while the ACC isadjusting+ 10 km/h (5 mph)

- 10 km/h (5 mph)

If you adjust the indicated speed excessively,the proactive speed adjustment is interrup-ted.

+–

Note● When a speed limitation is recognised,the proactive speed adjustment also adaptsthe saved speed even if the ACC is switchedoff. However, it will not adjust.● If the speed of travel considerably ex-ceeds the speed limit detected by the traf-fic signal detection system, a relevant warn-ing is displayed in the instrument panel dis-play.● In the event of joining a highway withoutspeed limitation, the recommended speedis automatically saved as the desired speed.If a higher speed has previously been savedfor a motorway without a speed limit, this isused instead of the recommended speed.


A message is displayed indicating that pro-active speed adjustment is not currentlyavailable or not in your country.● If this message is displayed for a long timeand proactive speed adjustment is availablein your country, contact a specialised work-shop.

NoteDepending on the anomaly in question, ad-ditional information may be displayed inVehicle status ››› page 85 .

239

Driving

Lane Assist*

Introduction

The Lane Assist System helps the driverstay in his/her lane within the physical lim-its of the system. This function is not suita-ble and is not designed to keep the vehicleautomatically in the lane.

Using the camera located in the windscreen,the Lane Assist system detects the limits(lane lines) dividing the lanes in which thevehicle is travelling. If the vehicle gets tooclose to the detected lane limits, the systemalerts the driver through a corrective motionof the steering wheel. The driver can cancelthe steering corrective action at any time.

No warning is produced with the turn signalsactivated, given that the Lane Assist systemunderstands that a lane change is required.

System limitsUse the Lane Assist system only on large,well-maintained motorways and highways.

The system is not available under the follow-ing conditions:

● The driving speed allowed is below approx.55 km/h (30 mph).● The system has not detected any lanelines.

● On tight bends.● Temporarily in very sporty driving situa-tions.

WARNINGThe intelligent technology in the Lane As-sist system cannot change the limits im-posed by the laws of physics and by the verynature of the system. Careless or uncon-trolled use of the Lane Assist system maycause accidents and injury. The system isnot a replacement for driver awareness ormanoeuvres when driving.● Always adapt your speed and the distanceto the vehicles ahead in line with visibility,weather conditions, the condition of theroad and the traffic situation.● Always keep your hands on the steeringwheel so it can be turned at any time. Theresponsibility of staying in the lane is alwaysthe driver's.● The Lane Assist system does not detectall road markings. The road surfaces, roadstructures or objects in poor condition canbe incorrectly detected as road markingsunder certain circumstances by the LaneAssist system. Immediately counter any un-wanted intervention of the system.● Please observe the indications on the in-strument panel and act as is necessary ifthe traffic situation permits.● In the following situations there may beundesired interventions of the system or it

may be that the system does not interveneat all. In these situations, special attentionis required from the driver and, where ap-propriate, the temporary deactivation ofthe lane assist warning system:– In very sporty driving situations.– In adverse weather conditions and

roads in poor condition.– When passing through areas undergo-

ing works.– Before gradient changes of grade and

river beds.● Always observe the vehicle surroundingscarefully and drive proactively.● When the area of vision of the camerabecomes dirty, covered or is damaged, theLane Assist system function can be affec-ted.

Control lamp

It lights up green

Lane Assist system active and available.

It lights up yellow

The Lane Assist system intervening with a rectificationof the steering.

240


OFF

It lights up yellow

Lane Assist system

Some control and warning lamps will light upbriefly when the ignition is switched on tocheck certain functions. They will switch offafter a few seconds.


Driving with the Lane Assist System

Fig. 156 On the instrument panel display: indica-tions of the Lane Assist System.

Lane line detected. The system inter-venes assisting on the represented side.

1

Lane line detected. The system does notintervene.

Switching the lane assist system on or offIn some countries, the Lane Assist System isalways activated when the ignition is switch-ed on. The connection status is shown in theDriver assistance menu of the Infotainmentsystem or the driver assistance systemsmenu after pressing the corresponding but-ton. The Lane Assist system can be activatedand deactivated in these menus.

The Lane Assist system is ready to actively in-tervene as of approximately 60 km/h (35mph) and if it has detected the lane limits(system status: active). The control lamp emits a green light. When the system inter-venes by rectifying the direction, the controllamp emits a yellow light.

If the control lamp of the instrument paneldisplay is off, it means that the Lane Assistsystem is connected but not ready to inter-vene or it is disconnected.

When you activate a turn signal, the systemtemporarily goes into a passive state in orderto allow manual lane change.

An energetic rotation or rectification of thesteering wheel by the driver causes the sys-tem to temporarily switch to a passive state.

2 Driver intervention promptIf the steering is not corrected manually, thesystem prompts the driver through an indi-cation on the instrument panel display andacoustic warnings.

If no reaction is obtained from the driver, thesystem switches to a passive state.

Regardless of the steering manoeuvres,through an indication on the instrumentpanel display and acoustic warnings, thedriver is also prompted to drive through thecentre of the lane if the steering correctionlasts more than reasonable.

Steering wheel vibrationThe following situations may result in a steer-ing wheel vibration:

● The lane ceases to be recognised during asudden intervention in the direction of thesystem.

Troubleshooting

Error message, the system disconnects● Clean the windscreen. ››› page 316● Check that the windscreen is not damagedin the area of the camera's field of vision. »

241

Driving

System behaviour is different than expec-ted● Clean the field of vision of the camera reg-ularly and make sure it is free of dirt, snowand ice.● Do not cover the field of vision of the cam-era.● Check that the windscreen is not damagedin the area of the camera's field of vision.● Do not mount objects on the steeringwheel.

In the event of doubts or queries, go to aspecialised workshop.

Driving Assist (Travel Assist)

Introduction

The driving assist (Travel Assist) combinesadaptive cruise control (ACC) and adap-tive lane guidance. Within the limitationsof the system, the vehicle can maintain adistance from the vehicle in front that ispreselected by the driver and remain inthe preferred position within the lane.

Travel Assist uses the same sensors as Adap-tive Cruise Control (ACC) and Lane Assist.Therefore, carefully read the informationabout the ACC ››› page 232 and the Lane As-sist ››› page 240 and take into account the

limitations of the systems and the indicationsgiven in the information.

Speed rangeTravel Assist adjusts at speeds between ap-prox. 30 km/h (approx. 20 mph) and approx.210 km/h (approx. 130 mph); in the case ofthe adaptive lane guidance function, be-tween 0 km/h (0 mph) and approx. 250km/h (approx. 155 mph). This range may varydepending on the market.

Driving with Travel AssistTravel Assist automatically controls the ac-celerator pedal, the brakes and the steering.In addition, Travel Assist may, within its limi-tations, decelerate the vehicle until it stopsbehind another that stops and automaticallystarts again.

You can override assisted adjustment at alltimes.

How to know if the vehicle is fitted withTravel AssistThe vehicle is fitted with Travel Assist if themultifunction steering wheel has the button ››› Fig. 159 .

Driver intervention promptIf you remove your hands from the steeringwheel, after a few seconds the system asksyou to take over the steering with an indica-

tion on the instrument panel display andacoustic warnings.

WARNINGThe Travel Assist smart technology cannotovercome the limits imposed by the laws ofphysics and it only works within the limits ofthe system. If Travel assist is used negli-gently or involuntarily, it may cause seriousaccidents and injuries. The system is not areplacement for driver awareness.● Bear in mind the system limitations andthe indications regarding the control of theAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and LaneAssist.● Adapt your speed and safety distance tothe vehicle in front of you at all times to suitvisibility, weather, road and traffic condi-tions.● Do not use Travel Assist when visibility isbad, on steep roads, on windy roads or inslippery circumstances (such as snow, ice,rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads.● Do not use Travel Assist offroad or onroads where the surface is not firm. TravelAssist has been designed for use on pavedroads only.● Travel Assist does not react to people oranimal or vehicles crossing your path orwhich approach you head-on in the samelane.● Brake immediately if Travel Assist doesnot slow down enough.

242


● Brake immediately when a braking mes-sage is displayed on the instrument panelscreen.● Brake when, after an indication to brake,the vehicle rolls without it being desired.● Keep your hands on the steering wheel atall times, to ensure you have control overthe steering at all times. The driver is alwaysresponsible for keeping the vehicle in itsown lane.● If possible, do not wear gloves while driv-ing. The system could interpret this as nodriving activity.● If driver intervention is requested on theinstrument panel display, immediately re-sume control of the vehicle.● Always be prepared to adjust the speedyourself.

Indications on the instrument paneldisplay

Fig. 157 On the instrument panel display: indica-tion with active adjustment.

Fig. 158 On the instrument panel display: controllamps.

Displays on the screen

››› Fig. 157The adaptive lane guidance function isactive.

1

Distance set.

In addition, depending on the equipment,control lamps indicate the status of the sys-tem on the instrument panel display:

››› Fig. 158Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con-trol and adaptive lane guidance func-tion are active.Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con-trol active and adaptive lane guidancefunction passive.Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con-trol passive and adaptive lane guidancefunction active.Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con-trol and adaptive lane guidance func-tion are passive.Inactive Travel Assist.

Depending on the equipment, more detailsmay be displayed on the instrument cluster,such as dashed lines or other vehicles on theroad.

2

A

B

C

D

E

243

Driving

Operating Travel Assist

Fig. 159 Left side of the multifunction steeringwheel: buttons for operating Travel Assist.

Connecting● Press the button on the multifunctionsteering wheel.

The control lamp will light up green.The following warning is also displayed onthe instrument panel screen: The Travel As-sist maintains the current speed and the pre-set distance from the vehicle in front. At thesame time, if it detects road markings itkeeps the vehicle in the lane by moving thesteering wheel.

Interrupting the adjustment● Briefly press the button on the multi-function steering wheel or press the brakepedal.

The set distance remains saved.

Making other adjustmentsFor all else, Travel Assist is operated like theACC ››› page 233 .


Travel Assist is not available or does notwork as expected

The control lamp switches on yellow. A rele-vant warning is also displayed on the instru-ment panel screen.

● There is a fault in the sensors. Check thecauses and solutions described in››› page 222.● The system limits are exceeded.● If the fault continues, consult a specialisedworkshop.

Take the wheel

The warning lamp comes on white or red,depending on the urgency of the interven-tion. A message is also displayed.

● You released the steering wheel for a fewseconds. Take hold of the steering wheel andtake control of the vehicle.● The system limits have been reached. Takehold of the steering wheel and take controlof the vehicle.

Travel Assist disconnects automaticallyVehicles without Emergency Assist: You havereleased the steering wheel for a long peri-od.

● Abnormal operation. Contact a specialisedworkshop.

The adjustment is interrupted unexpect-edlyVehicles without lane departure warning:You have turned on the turn signal.

Emergency Assist

How it works

Emergency Assist can detect whetherthere is inactivity by the driver and can au-tomatically keep the car within the laneand stop it altogether if necessary. Thisway the system can actively help avoid anaccident or reduce its consequences.

Emergency Assist uses the same sensors asAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and Lane As-sist. Therefore, carefully read the informa-tion about the ACC ››› page 232 and theLane Assist ››› page 240 and take into ac-count the limitations of the systems and theindications given in the information.

244


If the Emergency Assist detects that the driv-er does not perform any activity, it requeststhat the driver take control of the vehicle. Todo this, it emits optical and acoustic warn-ings and causes braking jolts. The seat belt istightened (depending on the equipment).The system slows down the vehicle andkeeps it in its lane.

You can cancel the adjustment at any timeby moving the steering wheel, over-acceler-ating or braking.

While the emergency assistant is in opera-tion, other road users are warned as follows:

● The hazard warning lights are switched onsoon after.● The horn sounds (depending on thespeed).

The following happens as soon as the vehiclestops:

● All doors are unlocked.● The interior lighting comes on.● Depending on the equipment, an emer-gency call (eCall) is made.● The electronic parking brake is activated.

Connecting and disconnectingEmergency Assist can be connected and dis-connected in the infotainment system, in theassist services menu ››› page 86 .

When connected, the Emergency Assist isonly activated if the following requirementsare met:

● The Travel Assist or the Lane Assist areswitched on.● The system has detected a road lane mark-ing on both sides of the vehicle.


SOS

Emergency Assist not available

The control lamp switches on yellow. A rele-vant warning is also displayed on the instru-ment panel screen.

● The field of vision of the camera is dirty.Clean the windscreen.● The visibility of the camera is diminisheddue to weather factors, e.g. snow, or deter-gent residue or some coating. Clean thewindscreen.● The visibility of the camera is diminisheddue to accessories or adhesives. Leave thearea around the camera’s field of vision free.● The camera has been altered or damaged,e.g. because of damage caused to the wind-screen. Check for visible damage.● There is a fault or defect. Switch the engineoff and on again.

● If the fault continues, disconnect theEmergency Assist and consult a specialisedworkshop.

WARNINGThe smart technology fitted into the Emer-gency Assist cannot overcome the limitsimposed by the laws of physics; it onlyworks within the limits of the system. Thedriver is responsible for driving the vehicle.● Adapt your speed and safety distance tothe vehicle in front of you at all times to suitthe visibility, weather, road and traffic con-ditions.● The Emergency Assist cannot alwaysavoid accidents or serious injuries by itself.● If possible, do not wear gloves while driv-ing. The system could interpret this as nodriving activity.● If the radar sensor or the camera are cov-ered or have been altered or damaged, thesystem may intervene on the brakes or onthe direction in an inappropriate manner.● The Emergency Assist does not react topeople or animal or vehicles crossing yourpath or which approach you head-on in thesame lane.

WARNINGIf the Emergency Assist Intervenes inop-portunely, serious accidents and injuriesmay occur. »

245

Driving

● If the vehicle behaves differently than ex-pected, interrupt the intervention of theEmergency Assist by over-accelerating,braking or moving the steering wheel.● Do not use Travel Assist or Lane Assist.Have the system checked by a specialisedworkshop.

Note● Automatic interventions by the Emergen-cy Assist on the brakes may be interruptedby pressing the accelerator or brake or bymoving the wheel.● Hazard warning lights that come on auto-matically can be switched off by pressingthe accelerator or the break, moving thesteering wheel or pressing the hazardwarning light switch.● If this occurs, the Emergency Assist maydecelerate the vehicle until it comes to acomplete stop.● When the Emergency Assist is activated,it is only available again after the ignitionhas been switched off and back on again.

Lane departure warning (SideAssist) with rear cross trafficalert (RCTA) and door openingwarning (Exit Assist)*

Introduction

The lane departure warning (LCA) helpsdetect traffic that is at the rear of the vehi-cle.

The rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) helpsthe driver when backing out of a parallelparking spot and when manoeuvring.

The door opening warning (EWA) alertsthe occupant of a possible danger ap-proaching from behind when opening orwhen any of the vehicle’s doors are open.

WARNINGThe smart technology incorporated intothe lane departure warning (LCA) with rearcross traffic alert (RCTA) and the dooropening warning included cannot over-come the limits imposed by the laws ofphysics; it only works within the limits of thesystem. Accidents and severe injury mayoccur if the lane departure warning or therear cross traffic alert are used negligentlyor involuntarily. The system is not a re-placement for driver awareness.

● Adapt your speed and safe distance tothe vehicle in front of you at all times to suitvisibility, weather, road and traffic condi-tions.● Keep your hands on the wheel at all timesto be ready to intervene in the steering atany time.● Pay attention to the indicator lamps thatmay come on in the external rear view mir-rors and on the instrument cluster, and fol-low any instructions they may give.● The lane departure warning could reactto any special constructions that might bepresent to the sides of the vehicle, e.g. highor irregular dividers. This may cause erro-neous warnings.● Never use the lane departure warning onunpaved roads. The lane departure warninghas been designed for use on paved roads.● Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur-roundings.● The control lamps of the lane departurewarning may have limited functionality dueto solar radiation.

NoteIf the lane departure warning with rearcross traffic alert does not work as descri-bed in this chapter, stop using it and con-tact a specialised workshop.

246


Control lamp

Fig. 160 Control lamp of the lane departure warn-ing.

Fig. 161 Control lamp of the lane departure warn-ing.

It lights up

It turns on once briefly: the lane departure warning isactivated and ready to operate, i.e. when activating thesystem.

It lights up

It lights up continuously: the lane departure warninghas detected a vehicle in the blind spot.

Flashes

A vehicle has been detected in the adjacent lane andthe turn signal has been engaged in the direction ofthe detected vehicle ››› .

For vehicles that are also equipped with Lane Assist››› page 240, a warning to switch lanes will also appeareven though the turn signal has not been engaged(Lane Assist “Plus” ››› page 248 ).

The control lamps light up when the ignitionis switched on and should turn off after ap-proximately 2 seconds. This is the time takenfor the function check.

If there are no indications from the controllamp of the lane departure warning, thismeans that the lane departure warning hasnot detected any other vehicles at the reararea ››› .

When the exterior lighting is low, the intensi-ty with which the control lamps come on isdimmed. The user can modify the intensityof the control lamps with up to 5 levels in theinfotainment system menu.

WARNINGIf the warning lamps and the correspondingmessages are ignored when they light up,

the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause ac-cidents and severe injuries.● Never ignore the warning lamps or mes-sages.● Carry out the necessary operations.

CAUTIONFailure to heed the control lamps and cor-responding text messages when they lightup may result in damage to the vehicle.

Lane departure warning (Side Assist)

The lane departure warning uses radar sen-sors to monitor the areas behind the vehicle››› page 7. The system does this by measur-ing the vehicle's distance from other vehiclesand its speed differential. The lane departurewarning will not work at speeds of less thanapprox. 15 km/h (9 mph).

The lane width is not detected individually,but is rather pre-configured in the system.Thus if you are driving in wide lanes or in be-tween two lanes, the indications may be in-correct. Furthermore, the system can detectvehicles driving in the lane next to you (ifthere are any), and can also detect stationaryobjects such as dividers, and thus give an in-correct indication. »

247

Driving

Light indicationThe control lamp provides an indication onthe corresponding side regarding the trafficsituation behind the vehicle, if it is deemedto be critical. The control lamp of the left-hand side ››› Fig. 160 indicates the traffic sit-uation to the rear left of the vehicle, and thecontrol lamp of the right-hand side››› Fig. 161, indicates the traffic situation tothe rear right of the vehicle.

Keep the warning lamps zone of the lane de-parture warning free of objects, adhesives orthe likes that may interfere with your visibility.

Lane assist Plus.

The Lane Assist Plus function can be used byactivating the Lane Assist ››› page 240 andSide Assist functions. In this case its func-tions are expanded as described below.

If the driver initiates a lane change manoeu-vre in a potential critical situation:

● The lamp flashes in the correspondingrear-view mirror even though the turn signalhas not been activated.● The steering wheel vibrates to warn thedriver of the risk of collision.● torque is applied to correct the steeringand return the vehicle to its lane.

Driving situations

Fig. 162 Schematic representation: Passing sit-uation with traffic behind the vehicle. Indica-tion of the lane departure warning in the controllamp on the left side.

Fig. 163 Schematic representation: Situation ofan overtaking in the centre lane and then movinginto the right-hand lane. Indication of the lanedeparture warning in the control lamp on the rightside.

In the following situations, an indication willbe displayed in the control lamp ››› Fig. 162 (arrow) or ››› Fig. 163 (arrow):

● When being overtaken by another vehicle››› Fig. 162 .● When passing another vehicle ››› Fig. 163 with a speed differential of approx.10 km/h (6 mph). If the vehicle is passing at a

248


considerably higher speed, no indication willbe displayed.

The faster the vehicle approaches, the soon-er an indication will be displayed in the con-trol lamp, because the lane departure warn-ing takes into account the speed differentialwith other vehicles. Thus even though thedistance from the other vehicle is identical,the indication will appear sooner in some ca-ses and later in others.

Physical limitations inherent to the systemIn some situations the lane departure warn-ing may not interpret the traffic situationcorrectly. I.e. in the following situations:

● on tight bends;● in the case of lanes with different widths;● in areas with significant gradient changes;● in adverse weather conditions;● in the case of special constructions to theside of the vehicle, e.g., high or irregular di-viders.

Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA)

Fig. 164 Schematic representation of the rearcross traffic alert assistant: zone monitored aroundthe vehicle while leaving a parking space.

Park Assist uses the radar sensors on the rearbumper ››› page 222 to monitor the trafficcrossing behind the vehicle as it backs out ofa parallel parking space or as it is being man-oeuvred, for example in very low visibilityconditions.

When the system detects a relevant vehicleon the road that is approaching the rear ofthe vehicle ››› Fig. 164 , an acoustic alarmmay sound if the relevance so requires it.

In addition to the acoustic alarm, the driver isalso informed by means of a visual signal oninfotainment system display. This signal is

displayed in the form of a red or yellow stripat the back of the image of the vehicle onthe infotainment system screen. This stripdisplays the side of the vehicle towards whichtraffic is approaching in transverse direc-tion1).

Automatic braking to reduce damagesIf the rear cross traffic alert detects thatsomeone else on the road is approachingthe rear of the vehicle and the driver doesnot step on the brake, the system will engagethe brakes automatically.

The parking system helps the driver by auto-matically engaging the brakes to reduce anydamage. The automatic intervention on thebrakes takes place when driving in reverse atapprox. 1-12 km/h (1-7 mph. After detectingthat the vehicle is stationary, the systemkeeps it that way for around 2 seconds.

After automatically braking to reduce dam-age, the system will not be able to automati-cally brake again for approximately 10 sec-onds.

You can interrupt the automatic braking bystepping hard on the accelerator pedal orthe brake pedal in order to regain control ofthe vehicle. »

1) It is only displayed if the vehicle is equippedwith a parking system.

249

Driving

WARNINGThe smart technology incorporated intothe rear cross traffic alert cannot overcomethe limits imposed by the laws of physics; itonly works within the limits of the system.The parking assistant function should nottempt you into taking any risks. The systemis not a replacement for driver awareness.● The system should never be used in limi-ted visibility conditions or complicatedtraffic, e.g., in high-traffic areas or whencrossing multiple lanes.● Be sure to always be aware of the vehi-cle's surroundings, since the system oftenfails to detect things such as bicycles or pe-destrians.● The rear cross traffic alert itself will notbrake the vehicle to a complete stop.

Door opening warning (Exit Assist)

Fig. 165 Graphic example

Fig. 166 Door: warning lamp

The door opening warning (Exit Assist) warnsoccupants of a possible collision whenopening the door when the vehicle is sta-tionary. The system monitors, within the lim-its of the system itself, the rear and side envi-ronment of the vehicle using the rear sen-sors ››› page 222 . It detects moving objectsthat approach from behind, such as cars››› Fig. 165.

If a critical situation is detected when thedoor is opened, it will be alerted by anacoustic signal on the door speaker of thecorresponding side ››› Fig. 166 . Additionally,the control lamp of the lane departure warn-ing of the corresponding door will flash. Ifthe door has already been opened and an-other road user has been detected in a criti-cal situation, the control lamp of the lanedeparture warning on the correspondingside will light up permanently.

The brightness of the door opening warningindication cannot be adjusted.

When you want to access the vehicle for thefirst time, with the doors closed and locked,the function will be available 3 minutes afterthe first opening of any of the doors. Thefunction will continue to be available as longas the vehicle has the ignition connectedand is not moving.

After switching off the ignition, the functionwill remain available for approximately 3 mi-nutes. After that time, the control lamps willlight up indicating the deactivation of thefunction.

WARNING● Always pay close attention to the trafficand the surroundings of the vehicle. Thedoor opening warning (Exit Assist) cannotreplace the necessary attention to be paidby the vehicle’s occupants. The responsi-bility for opening the doors and exiting thevehicle always lies with the occupants ofthe same.● The door opening warning (Exit Assist)operates continuously as long as the vehi-cle ignition is on. Otherwise, the system isdeactivated and the lamps light up briefly.● It is possible that the traffic situation isnot interpreted correctly and you cannot

250


be aware of all the objects that are ap-proaching, such as pedestrians. Always vis-ually monitor the traffic and the area sur-rounding the vehicle.

WARNINGThe door opening warning (Exit Assist) issubject to system limits and cannot warn ofan imminent collision in all cases:● If your vehicle is too deep in the parkingspace and the adjacent vehicles hide it.● In certain circumstances, objects or peo-ple who approach, e.g. on a bicycle orscooter, are not detected.● The system does not react to stopped ob-jects.

Managing the assist systems

Enabling and disabling the assist systemsSide Assist, Exit Assist and the Rear CrossTraffic Alert (RCTA) can also be switched onand off from the Assistants menu of the in-fotainment system.

Exit Assist and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)can also be found in the Park Assist Settingsmenu.

Side Assist and the Rear Cross Traffic Alert(RCTA) can also be switched off and on in the

instrument cluster Assistants menu››› page 68.

Open the Assistants menu in the infotain-ment system.● Side Assist● Door opening warning● Rear cross traffic alert

Open the Park Assist > Settings menu in theinfotainment system.● Door opening warning● Rear cross traffic alert

Open the Assistants menu on the instru-ment cluster● Side Assist● Rear cross traffic alert

If the verification box on the instrument pan-el or the infotainment system is checked ,the functionality will be automatically activa-ted when switching on the ignition.

When the lane departure warning is ready tooperate, the indications in the control lampswill turn on briefly as confirmation.

When the vehicle is restarted, the last ad-justment in the system will remain active.

Trailer modeThe lane departure warning, the rear crosstraffic alert and the door opening warning

will be automatically deactivated and will beprevented from reactivating if the factory-mounted tow hook is electrically connectedto a trailer or other similar device.

As soon as the driver starts to drive with atrailer connected electrically to the vehicle, amessage will appear on the instrument paneldisplay indicating that the lane departurewarning, the rear cross traffic alert and thedoor opening warning are deactivated. Oncethe vehicle trailer has been disengaged, thelane departure warning, the rear cross trafficalert and the door opening warning will re-turn to the initial state prior to the momentthe trailer was electrically connected.

If the towing hook is not factory-mounted,then the lane departure warning, the rearcross traffic alert and the door openingwarning will have to be deactivated manuallywhen driving with a trailer.

251

Driving

Braking and parking

Braking system

Control lamps

It lights up red

Brake fluid level too low ››› page 296 or fault in thebrake system. Do not carry on driving!

It lights up red

Electronic parking brake ››› page 254 .The warning lamp turns off when the handbrake is re-leased.

It lights up yellow

Front brake pads worn.Contact a specialised workshop immediately.

WARNING● If the brake warning lamp does not goout or if it lights up when driving, the brakefluid level in the reservoir is too lo so thereis a risk of an accident ››› page 296, Brakefluid. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on.Obtain technical assistance.● If the brake warning lamp lights up to-gether with the ABS lamp this could bedue to an ABS fault. When this functionfails, the rear wheels can lock up. Under

certain circumstances, the rear of the vehi-cle may skid, with the danger of losing con-trol. Stop and seek technical assistance.● If the lamp lights up, alone or accom-panied by a warning message on the instru-ment panel display, please go immediatelyto a specialised workshop to check thebrake pads and to replace them if they areworn.

Information about the brakes

New brake padsFor the first 200 to 300 km (100 to 200miles), new brake pads have not yet reachedtheir maximum braking capacity, and needto be “run in” first. However, you can com-pensate for the slightly reduced braking ef-fect by applying more pressure on the brakepedal. Avoid overloading the brakes whilerunning them in.

WearThe rate of wear on the brake pads dependsa great deal on how you drive and the condi-tions in which the vehicle is operated. This isa particular problem in urban traffic andshort stretches, or with very sporty driving.

Depending on the speed, the braking forceand the environmental conditions (e.g. tem-

perature, air humidity, etc.) noises may beproduced when braking.

Wet roads or road saltIn certain situations (for example, on drivingthrough flooded areas, in severe downpoursor after washing the vehicle) the braking ac-tion could be delayed if the discs and padsare damp, or frozen in winter. In this case thebrakes should be “dried” by pressing thebrake pedal several times.

At high speed and with the windscreen wip-ers activated, the brake pads will brieflytouch the brake discs. This takes place, al-though unnoticeable to the driver, at regularintervals to improve the response time of thebrakes when they are wet.

The effectiveness of the brakes can also betemporarily reduced if the vehicle is drivenfor some distance without using the brakeswhen there is a lot of salt on the road in win-ter. The layer of salt that accumulates on thediscs and pads can be removed by gently ap-plying the brakes a few times.

CorrosionThere may be a tendency for corrosion toform on the discs and dirt to build up on thebrake pads if the vehicle is used infrequentlyor the brakes are not used very often.

If the brakes are not used frequently, or ifrust has formed on the disks, it is advisable to

252

Braking and parking

clean off the pads and disks by braking firmlya few times at a moderately high speed ››› .

Fault in the brake systemIf the brake pedal travel should ever increasesuddenly, this may mean that one of the twobrake circuits has failed. Drive immediately tothe nearest specialised workshop and havethe fault repaired. Drive there slowly and re-member that you will have to apply morepressure on the brake pedal and allow forlonger stopping distances.

Low brake fluid levelMalfunctions can occur in the brake system ifthe brake fluid level is too low. The brake fluidlevel is monitored electronically.

Brake servoThe brake servo increases the pressure youapply to the brake pedal. It works only whenthe engine is running.

Electromechanical brake servo (eBKV)The electromechanical brake servo onlyworks when the ignition is switched on andoptimises the force of the foot by increasingthe pressure that the driver exerts on thebrake pedal.

If the electromechanical brake servo is notworking, the brake pedal must be pressedharder, as the braking distance increases due

to the lack of assistance from the servobrake.

WARNINGAny anomaly in the brake system can in-crease the braking distance, with the re-sulting risk of an accident.● New brake pads and discs must be run inand do not have the correct friction duringthe first 200 km (124 miles). This reducedbraking capacity may be offset by pressingon the brake pedal a little harder.● If you are driving on roads which havebeen salted, braking effectiveness may bedecreased.● Brakes can overheat if used excessivelyon slopes. Before driving down a long steepslope, it is advisable to reduce speed andchange down into a lower gear or range.Therefore, using the engine brake relievesthe brakes.● Gentle continuous braking causes thebrakes to overheat and the braking dis-tance will increase. Apply and then releasethe brakes alternately.● Apply the brakes heavily to clean thebrake system only in a suitable traffic situa-tion. Do not put other road users in danger:there is risk of causing an accident.● Ensure the vehicle does not move while inneutral, when the engine is stopped. Thebraking distance is increased considerablywhen the brake servo is not active.

● If the brake is subjected to high stresses,vapour bubbles may form in the brake sys-tem's pipes. This reduces the efficiency ofthe brakes.● Non-standard or damaged front spoilerscould restrict the airflow to the brakes andcause them to overheat. Before purchasingaccessories please read the relevant in-structions.

CAUTION● Never let the brakes “drag” by leavingyour foot on the pedal when it is not neces-sary to brake. This overheats the brakes, re-sulting in longer stopping distances andgreater wear.● Before driving down a long, steep gradi-ent, it is advisable to reduce speed and se-lect a lower gear. This makes use of enginebraking and relieves the brakes. If you stillhave to use the brakes, it is better to brakefirmly at intervals than to apply the brakescontinuously.

Note● If the brake servo is out of action, for ex-ample when the car is being towed, you willhave to press the brake pedal considerablyharder than normal to make up for the lackof servo assistance.● If you wish to equip the vehicle with ac-cessories such as a front spoiler or wheelcovers, it is important that the flow of air to »

253

Driving

the front wheels is not obstructed, other-wise the brakes can overheat.

Electronic parking brake (EPB)

Fig. 167 In the lower part of the centre console:electronic parking brake button

The electronic parking brake replaces thehandbrake ››› .

Applying the electronic parking brakeThe electronic parking brake can be activa-ted whenever the vehicle is at a standstill,even when the ignition is switched off. Acti-vate it whenever you leave or park the vehi-cle.

● Pull and hold the ››› Fig. 167 button.● The parking brake is activated when thecontrol light of button ››› Fig. 167 and the

red control lamp on the instrument panelis always on.● Release the button.

Disconnecting the electronic parkingbrake● Switch the ignition on.● Press the button ››› Fig. 167 . At thesame time step hard on the brake pedal or, ifthe engine is running, press the acceleratorpedal slightly.● The control lamp of button ››› Fig. 167 (ar-row) and the red control lamp on the in-strument panel go out.

Automatic release of the electronic park-ing brake upon moving offThe electronic parking brake is automaticallyswitched off when starting if, after the driv-er's door is closed and the driver's seat beltfastened, any of the following situations takeplace:

● A gear range is engaged or switched to an-other one and the accelerator pedal is lightlypressed.● To facilitate certain manoeuvres there areexceptions that allow the automatic parkingbrake to be released without the driver's seatbelt being fastened.

The parking brake can be prevented frombeing automatically released by continuously

pulling up the ››› Fig. 167 switch whenstarting off.

The electronic parking brake is not discon-nected until the button is released. Thiscan facilitate starting off when a heavy load istowed ››› page 275 .

Automatic activation of the electronicparking brake when exiting the vehicle in-correctlyIn vehicles with automatic transmission, theelectronic parking brake is activated auto-matically when exiting the vehicle incorrectlyif:

● The selector lever is in the D/S or R posi-tion or in the Tiptronic selector gate.● AND: the vehicle is stationary.● AND: the driver door is open.

Automatic activation of the electronicparking brake when turning the ignitionoffThis function can be deactivated throughthe Infotainment system ››› page 86 .

Emergency brake functionOnly use the emergency brake function ifyou are unable to stop the vehicle with thefoot brake ››› .

254

Braking and parking

● Pull and hold the ››› Fig. 167 button inthis position to forcefully stop the vehicle. Atthe same time, an acoustic warning can beheard.● To stop the braking process, release the button or press the accelerator.

WARNINGThe improper use of the electronic parkingbrake can cause accidents and serious in-jury.● Never use the electronic parking brake tostop the vehicle, unless it is an emergency.Braking distances can be considerably lon-ger, since, under certain circumstances,only the rear wheels brake. Always use thefoot brake.● Never accelerate from the engine when agear range or a gear is engaged and the en-gine is running. The vehicle could move,even if the electronic parking brake is acti-vated.● When the electronic parking brake isswitched on or off, there is a slight move-ment of the brake pedal. Be careful not toposition your foot under the pedal.

CAUTIONTo prevent the vehicle from unintentionallymoving when parking it, first apply theelectronic parking brake and then removeyour foot from the brake pedal.

Note● If the vehicle battery is flat, it will not bepossible to disconnect the electronic park-ing brake. Use the jump-start ››› page 51 .● When the electronic parking brake is ap-plied or released, noises may be heard.● The system performs automatic and au-dible tests sporadically in the parked vehi-cle if some time elapses without the elec-tronic parking brake being used.

Auto Hold Function

Fig. 168 In the lower part of the centre console:Auto Hold function button.

The indicator lamp of the Auto Hold››› Fig. 168 button remains on when the Au-to Hold function is connected.

Once connected, the Auto Hold function as-sists the driver in keeping the vehicle station-

ary at repeated intervals or for a certain peri-od of time with the engine running, for ex-ample, when going up a slope, when stop-ped at traffic lights or in heavy traffic with in-termittent stops.

When connected, the Auto Hold functionautomatically prevents the vehicle from roll-ing when stationary without pressing thebrake pedal.

After detecting that the vehicle is stationaryand the brake pedal has been released, theAuto Hold function holds the vehicle. Thedriver can lift their foot off the brake pedal.

When the driver touches the acceleratorpedal or accelerates slightly to continue driv-ing, the Auto Hold function releases thebrake. The vehicle moves according to theslope of the road.

If the vehicle is stationary and one of theconditions required by the Auto Hold func-tion is impaired, it disconnects itself and thebutton's control light goes out ››› Fig. 168 .The electronic parking brake connects auto-matically, if necessary, to park the vehiclesafely ››› .

Conditions for keeping the vehicle station-ary with the Auto Hold function● The driver door must be closed.● The driver's seat belt must be fastened.● The engine is running. »

255

Driving

Switching the Auto Hold function on andoffPress the Auto Hold button ››› . The con-trol lamp on the button goes out when theAuto Hold function is switched off.

Automatically engaging and disengagingthe Auto Hold functionIf the Auto Hold function was switched on viathe Auto Hold button before switching theignition off, the function will remain on thefollowing time the ignition is switched on.

If the Auto Hold function was not switchedon, it will automatically remain off next timethe ignition is engaged.

The Auto Hold function connects auto-matically if the following conditions aremet (all points must be met at the sametime ››› ):

The vehicle is kept stationary with thebrake pedal on a flat surface or on aslope.The engine rotates “correctly”.

The Auto Hold function is automaticallyturned off if the following conditions aremet:

If any of the conditions mentioned on››› page 255, Conditions for keepingthe vehicle stationary with the Au-to Hold function are no longer met.

1.

2.

1.

If the engine is running irregularly or ananomaly is detected.If the engine stalls.If the accelerator is pressedIf any of the tyres has only minimal con-tact with the ground, e.g. in the case ofaxle articulation.

WARNINGThe smart technology incorporated intothe Auto Hold function cannot defy thelaws of physics; it only works within the lim-its of the system. The greater convenienceprovided by the Auto Hold function shouldnever tempt you to take any risk that maycompromise safety.● Never leave the vehicle running and withthe Auto Hold function switched on.● The Auto Hold function cannot alwayskeep the vehicle stationary uphill or down-hill or stop it sufficiently, for example, onslippery or frozen surfaces.

NoteBefore entering a car wash, always switchoff the Auto Hold function, because if theelectronic parking brake is automaticallyconnected, it may cause damage.

2.

3.4.5.

Stabilisation and brake assis-tance systems

Control lamps

It lights up

Fault in the ESC or ABS, or disconnection caused bythe system.The ESC works in combination with the ABS. If the ABSfails, the lamp also lights up.

Flashes

ESC or TCS activated.

It lights up

TCS manually deactivated.

Or: ESC in Sport mode ››› page 259 .

Or: ESC manually deactivated ››› page 259 .

It lights up

ABS faulty or does not work.

The control lamps light up together whenthe ignition is switched on and should turnoff after approximately 2 seconds. This is thetime taken for the function check.

256

Braking and parking

Brake assist systems

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)The ESC helps to improve safety. It reducesthe tendency to skid and improves the stabil-ity and roadholding of the vehicle. The ESCdetects critical handling situations, such asvehicle understeer or oversteer, or wheel-spin on the driving wheels. It stabilises thevehicle by braking individual wheels or by re-ducing the engine torque. The warning lampwill flash on the instrument panel when theESC is intervening .

The ESC includes the anti-lock brake system(ABS), the hydraulic brake assist (HBA), thetraction control system (TCS), electronic dif-ferential lock (EDS), electronic torque con-trol (XDS) and the tractor-trailer sway mitiga-tion*.

ESC also helps stabilise the vehicle by chang-ing the torque.

The TCS can be deactivated when wheel spinis desirable ››› page 259 .

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)ABS prevents the wheels from locking up un-der braking until the vehicle has reached avirtual standstill. You can continue to steerthe vehicle even when the brakes are on full.Keep your foot on the brake pedal and donot pump the brakes. You will feel the brakepedal pulsate while the ABS is working.

If the running gear or brake system is modi-fied, the effectiveness of the ABS could beseverely limited.

Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)The brake assist system can reduce the re-quired braking distance. The braking force isautomatically boosted if you press the brakepedal quickly in an emergency. You mustkeep pressing the brake pedal until the dan-ger has passed.

Traction control (TCS)In the event of the wheels spinning, the TCSreduces the engine torque to adapt to theroad condition. This helps the car to startmoving, accelerate or climb a gradient.

Electronic differential lock (EDL)When the EDL detects wheelspin, it brakesthe spinning wheel and directs the power tothe other driven wheel. This function is ac-tive up to approximately 100 km/h (62 mph).

To prevent the disc brake of the brakedwheel from overheating, the EDL cuts outautomatically if subjected to excessive loads.The vehicle can still be driven. The EDL willswitch on again automatically when thebrake has cooled down.

Tractor-trailer sway mitigation*If the vehicle is pulling a trailer, it will controlthe following: tractor-trailers tend to sway.When the swaying of the trailer is felt by thevehicle and detected by the ESC, it will auto-matically brake the towing vehicle within thelimits of the system and mitigate the sway.Tractor-trailer sway mitigation is not availablein all countries ››› page 281 .

Electronic engine torque management(XDS)When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen-tial allows the outer wheel to turn at a higherspeed than the inner wheel. In this way, thewheel that is turning faster (outer wheel) re-ceives less drive torque than the inner wheel.This may mean that in certain situations thetorque delivered to the inner wheel is toohigh, causing the wheels to spin. On the oth-er hand, the outer wheel is receiving a lowerdrive torque than it could transmit. This cancause a loss of grip on the drive axle, in thiscase the front axle, which results in under-steer or “lengthening” of the trajectory.

The XDS can detect and correct this effectvia the sensors and signals of the ESC.

Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the insidewheel and counter the excess driving torqueof that wheel. This means that the requestedtrajectory is much more precise. »

257

Driving

XDS works in combination with the ESC andis always active, even when TCS is switchedoff, or when the ESC is in Sport mode or dis-connected.

Multi-collision brakeThe multi-collision brake consists of auto-matic braking activated by the Airbag controlunit. It is activated when, in the event of anaccident, the Airbag control unit detects de-celerations above the activation level, andbraking is managed by the ESC system.

In the event of an accident, the multi-colli-sion brake can help the driver by braking toavoid the risk of skidding during the accidentand causing other collisions.

The following actions control automaticbraking during the accident:

● When the driver presses the accelerator,the automatic braking does not take place.● When the braking pressure through press-ing the brake pedal is greater than the sys-tem’s braking pressure the vehicle will brakeautomatically.● Multi-collision braking will not be availableif there is an anomaly in the ESC system.

Electromechanical brake servo (eBKV)With the ignition switched on, the electro-mechanical brake servo supports the forceof the foot by increasing the pressure that

the driver exerts on the brake pedal. Afterdisconnecting the ignition, the assistance ofthe brake servo is progressively reduced.Once stopped, immobilise the vehicle toprevent it from moving.

If the electromechanical brake servo doesnot work, the red symbol indicating failurein the brake system appears in the instru-ment panel. When braking with the faultyelectromechanical brake servo, vibration ofthe brake pedal may occur.

If the electromechanical brake servo is notworking, the brake pedal must be pressedharder, as the braking distance increases dueto the lack of assistance from the servobrake.

WARNINGDriving at high speed on icy, slippery wetground can result in loss of vehicle controland serious injury to the driver and passen-gers.● The ESC, ABS, TCS, EDS and the electron-ic torque control systems cannot exceedthe limits imposed by the laws of physics.Always bear this in mind, especially on wetor slippery roads. If you notice the systemscutting in, you should reduce your speedimmediately to suit the road and trafficconditions. Do not be encouraged to takerisks by the presence of more safety sys-tems. If you do, an accident may occur.

● Please remember that the accident riskalways increases if you drive fast, especiallyin corners or on a slippery road, or if youfollow too close behind the vehicle in frontof you. The ESC, ABS, brake assist, EDS andthe electronic torque control system can-not prevent accidents: risk of accidents!● Accelerate with caution on slippery sur-faces (for example, icy or snow-covered).Despite the control systems, the drivenwheels could spin, affecting the stability ofthe vehicle: risk of accident!

Note● The ABS and TCS will only operate cor-rectly if the four wheels have identicaltyres. Any differences in the rolling radiusof the tyres can cause the system to reduceengine power when this is not desired.● The regulating processes of the systemscan make noises due to their operation.● If the warning lamp or lights up,there could be a fault ››› page 80 .● Any modifications made to the vehicle(for example, to the engine, brake system,running gear or to the combination ofwheels and tyres) may affect the operationof the ABS, TCS and EDS.

258

Braking and parking

Connecting and disconnecting theESC and TCS

Fig. 169 In the lower part of the centre console:button to switch the ESC off/on

The ESC is switched on automatically whenthe engine is started, and only works whenthe engine is running and includes the ABS,EDS and TCS systems.

The TCS function should only be switchedoff in situations in which traction is insuffi-cient.

Depending on the finishes and versions,there is the possibility of disconnecting onlythe TCS or activating the ESC in “Sport”mode.

Disconnecting and connecting the TCS● The TCS can be activated or deactivated inthe infotainment system using the functionbutton > Driver assistance > ESC Menu

››› page 86. In vehicles with a driver informa-tion system* the corresponding indicationwill be displayed.

When the TCS is disconnected the controllamp lights up on the instrument panel.

Disconnecting and connecting the ESC in“Sport” mode● The ECS in “Sport” mode can be activatedor deactivated in the infotainment systemusing the function button > Driver assis-tance > ESC Menu ››› page 86 . In vehicleswith a driver information system* the corre-sponding indication will be displayed.

When “Sport” mode is connected, the inter-ventions of the ESC to stabilise the vehicle,and the traction control (TCS) interventionsare limited. In addition, the control lamplights up on the instrument panel.

Disconnecting and connecting the ESCIn some versions of the model, besides thetraction control system (TCS), the electronicstability programme (ESC) can also beswitched off.

● The ESC can be activated or deactivated inthe infotainment system using the functionbutton > Driver assistance > ESC menu››› page 86. In vehicles with a driver informa-tion system* the corresponding indicationwill be displayed.

When the ESC is disconnected the controlwarning lamp lights up on the instrumentpanel.

ESC in “Offroad” modeSelect the Offroad profile to switch it on››› page 216. The interventions of the ASR, aswell as of the EDS and the ABS system adaptto irregular terrain.

In the following exceptional situations it maymake sense to activate the Offroad mode toallow the wheels to spin:

● When “swinging” the vehicle to get it un-stuck.● Driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces.● When driving on rough terrain with muchof the car's weight is lifted off the wheels(axle articulation).● Steep descents with braking on unpavedterrain.

For your safety we recommend that you turnoff the Offroad mode when it is not abso-lutely necessary.

To disconnect the “Offroad” mode, select adifferent driving mode.

WARNINGThe ESC Sport mode should be activatedonly when traffic conditions and the abilityof the driver allow it. Danger of skidding! »

259

Driving

● With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilisingfunction will be limited to allow for a sporti-er drive. The driving wheels could spin andthe vehicle could skid.● If the ESC is deactivated, the vehicle sta-bilisation function is not available.

Note● If the TCS is disconnected or the Sportmode is selected, cruise control* will bedisconnected.● In ESC OFFmode, the ESC will be tempo-rarily reactivated to assist the driver duringbraking and will then switch back to passivemode when the brake pedal is released (de-pending on the model version).

Parking

To park the vehicle

When parking your vehicle, all legal require-ments should be observed.

Always note the following points when park-ing the vehicle:

● Park the vehicle on a suitable surface ››› .● Connect the electronic parking brake››› page 254.● Set the selector lever to the P position.

● Stop the engine and turn off the ignition.Turn the steering wheel slightly to engagethe steering lock.● When leaving the vehicle, take all keys withyou.

Additionally, on steep slopes and inclinesBefore switching off the engine, rotate thesteering wheel so that if the vehicle shouldmove, it will be held by the kerb.

● On slopes, turn the front wheels so thatthey are against the edge of the kerb.● Uphill, turn the wheels towards the centreof the road.

WARNING● Avoid parking the vehicle where the hotexhaust system could ignite inflammablematerials, such as dry grass, low bushes,spilt fuel or flammable materials.● Do not leave passengers inside a closedvehicle, they may not be able to open doorsor windows. Locked doors hinder the possi-bility of a rescue.● Children should not be left alone in thevehicle. They could tamper with the hand-brake or the gears, which could cause thevehicle to move without control.● Depending on weather conditions, it maybecome extremely hot or cold inside thevehicle. This can be fatal.

Help with parking and ma-noeuvring

Assisted parking system (ParkAssist)*

Introduction

The parking assist system is an additionalfunction of the ParkPilot ››› page 267 andhelps the driver find a suitable parking spacefrom among the following types:

● park driving in reverse in suitable perpen-dicular and parallel spaces,● park driving forwards in suitable perpen-dicular spaces,● exit a parking space driving forwards from aparallel space,● park in a suitable space driving forward onangle partially entering into the selectedparking space. The system will centre the ve-hicle in said parking space.

In vehicles with a Park Assist system and fac-tory infotainment system, the front, rear andside areas are represented, and the positionof obstacles is shown relative to the vehicle.

The Park Assist system is subject to certainlimitations inherent to the system and its userequires special attention by the driver ››› .

260

Help with parking and manoeuvring

WARNINGThe technology used in the park assist sys-tem involves a series of limitations inherentin the actual system and in the use of ultra-sonic sensors. The use of Park Assist shouldnever tempt you to take any risk that maycompromise safety. The system is not a re-placement for driver awareness.● Any accidental movement of the vehiclecould result in serious injury.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.● Certain surfaces of objects and garmentsdo not reflect the ultrasound sensors' sig-nals. The system cannot detect, at leastcorrectly, these objects or people wearingsuch clothes.● Ultrasound sensor signals may be affec-ted by external sound sources. In certaincircumstances this may prevent them fromdetecting people or objects.● The ultrasound sensors may have blindspots in which obstacles and people are notdetected.● Monitor the area around the vehicle at alltimes, since the ultrasound sensors do notdetect small children, animals or certainobjects in all situations.

WARNINGQuick turns of the steering wheel whenparking or exiting a parking space with ParkAssist can cause serious injury.● Do not hold the steering wheel duringmanoeuvres to park or exit a parking spaceuntil the system requests it. Doing so disa-bles the system during the manoeuvre, re-sulting in the parking being cancelled.

CAUTION● In certain circumstances, the ultrasonicsensors do not detect objects such as trail-er tongues, bars, fences, posts or thin trees,or an open (or opening) rear lid, whichcould damage the vehicle.● Retrofitting of certain accessories to thevehicle, such as a bicycle rack, may inter-fere with the operation of the Park Assistsystem and cause damage.● The Park Assist system uses as a refer-ence parked vehicles, curbs and other ob-jects. Make sure that the tyres and wheelsare not damaged while parking. If necessa-ry, opportunely interrupt the parking ma-noeuvre to avoid damaging the vehicle.● The ultrasound sensors on the bumpermay be damaged or shifted in the event of acollision, for example, when entering or ex-iting a parking space.● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, do

not apply it directly unless very briefly andalways from a distance of more than 10 cm.● A registration plate or plate holder on thefront with larger than the space for the reg-istration plate, or a registration plate that iscurved or warped can cause:– False detections.– The sensors to lose visibility.– Cancellation of the parking manoeuvre

or defective parking.● If one of the ultrasonic sensors is dam-aged, the area corresponding to that groupof sensors (front or rear) is deactivated andcannot be activated until the fault is cor-rected. However, you can still use the sen-sors of the other bumper as per usual. Ifthere is a fault in the system, consult a spe-cialist workshop. To do so, CUPRA recom-mends going to a specialised CUPRA dealeror any SEAT dealership.

Note● In order to guarantee good system opera-tion, keep the ultrasound sensors of thebumper clean, free of snow or ice, and donot cover them with adhesives or other ob-jects.● Certain sources of noise, such as roughasphalt or paving stones and the noise ofother vehicles can induce the Park Assistsystem or ParkPilot to give erroneous warn-ings. The presence of metal objects can al-so affect the manoeuvre. »

261

Driving

● To become familiar with the system andits functions, CUPRA recommends that youpractice operating the Park Assist system inan area where there is not too much trafficor in a car park.

Description of the parking assist sys-tem

The components of the Park Assist systemare the ultrasonic sensors located in thefront and rear bumpers, the to switch thesystem on and off and the messages on theinstrument cluster display.

Prerequisites for parking● The traction control (TCS) must be switch-ed on ››› page 259 .● Speed when passing next to the parkingspace: do not exceed approx. 50 km/h (31mph).● Keep a distance between 0.5 and 2.0 me-tres when driving past the parking space.● Space length (parallel parking): vehiclelength + 0.8 meters.● Space width (angle parking): vehicle width+ 0.8 meters.● Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h(4 mph) when parking. The vehicle will per-form an automatic braking only once if thisspeed is exceeded. If you exceed the speed

more than once, the Park Assist systemswitches off.

Requirements for leaving the parkingspace (only for parallel parking)● The traction control (TCS) must be switch-ed on ››› page 259 .● Space length: length of the vehicle + 0.5metres.● Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h(4 mph) when exiting the parking space.

Prematurely stopping or automatically in-terrupting the manoeuvres for parking orexiting a parking spacePark Assist interrupts the manoeuvres forparking or exiting a parking space in any ofthe following cases:

● Press button in the infotainment system, > Driver assistance > Park Assist system.● When exceeding a speed of approximately7 km/h (4 mph) more than once.● The driver takes control of the steeringwheel.● The parking manoeuvre does not endwithin 6 minutes from the activation of auto-matic steering.● There is a fault in the system (the system istemporarily unavailable).● The TCS is disconnected.

● TCS or ESC intervene with regulation.● The driver door is opened.

To restart the manoeuvre it is necessary thatnone of these things occur and that the button on the infotainment system is pressedagain.

Special characteristicsThe Park Assist system is subject to certainlimitations inherent to the system. For exam-ple, it is therefore not possible to enter or ex-it a parking space on sharp bends.

While entering or exiting a parking space, abrief signal sounds to prompt the driver tochange between forward and reverse gears(depending on the case). In successive ma-noeuvres, the assistant tells the driver tochange gears, at the latest, when the contin-uous audible signal is given (object presentat a distance of ≤30 cm) by Park Pilot.

When the Park Assist system turns the steer-ing wheel with the vehicle stationary, the in-strument panel also displays the symbol .Keep the brake pedal depressed while thesymbol remains on the dash panel display toturn the wheels with the vehicle stopped.This way, the system will require fewer ma-noeuvres to complete the parking action.

262


Trailer modeThe Park Assist system cannot be switchedon if the factory-fitted towing bracket››› page 275 is electrically connected to atrailer.

After changing a wheelIf, after changing a wheel, the vehicle stopsentering and exiting parking spaces correct-ly, the circumference of the new wheel maybe different and the system may need toadapt to it. The adaptation is automatic andtakes place during driving. Making turnsslowly and in both directions (20 km/h [12mph]) for a few minutes may contribute tothis adaptation process ››› in Introduc-tion on page 261.

Selecting a parking type

Fig. 170 On the instrument panel display: view ofthe parking assist system with reduced view.

Fig. 171 On the instrument panel display: indica-tion of parking modes.

Park assist has the following 3 parking types:

Reverse parallel parking.Reverse angle parking.Forward angle parking.

Selecting a parking type after passing infront of the spaceAfter activating the Park Assist system andafter detecting a parking space, the displayon the instrument panel proposes a parkingtype. The Park Assist system selects theparking type automatically. The selectedtype is shown on the instrument panel dis-play ››› Fig. 170 and on the Infotainment Sys-tem screen.

● The necessary conditions to park with ParkAssist have to be met ››› page 262 .● Press button in the infotainment system, > Driver assistance > Park Assist system.● When the system is connected, the symbol on the Infotainment System screen ishighlighted. Additionally, the selected park-ing type is shown on the instrument paneldisplay. You can change the type of parkingon the Infotainment System screen.● If there are more spaces available, anotherspace can be selected by clicking on themon the Infotainment System screen.● Follow the instructions displayed on the in-strument panel while paying attention totraffic and drive the vehicle past the parkingspace.

Special case of perpendicular parkingspace to park forwards without drivingpast first● The necessary conditions to park with ParkAssist have to be met ››› page 262 .● Move forward towards the parking spacewhile paying attention to traffic and stop thevehicle with the front part partially inside theparking space.● Press button once in the infotainmentsystem, > Driver assistance > Park Assistsystem.● When the system is connected, the symbol on the Infotainment System screen is »

263

Driving

highlighted. Additionally, the selected park-ing mode is shown on the instrument paneldisplay without reduced display.

● Release the steering wheel ››› in Intro-duction on page 261.

Parking with the parking assist system

Fig. 172 On the instrument panel display: parallelparking. Finding a parking space. Parking posi-tion. Manoeuvring.

Fig. 173 On the instrument panel display: angleparking. Finding a parking space. Parking posi-tion. Manoeuvring.

Message to move forwardsYour vehicleParking space detectedMessage to park

1

2

3

4

Message to press the brake pedalProgress bar

5

6

The necessary conditions have to be met topark with Park Assist ››› page 262 and theparking mode must be selected ››› page 263 .

264


Parking● Look at the display on the instrument pan-el to see if the space has been detected as“appropriate” and if the correct position forparking has been reached ››› Fig. 172 or ››› Fig. 173 . The space is considered“appropriate” if the display on the instru-ment panel shows the message to park 4 .● Stop the vehicle and, after a brief pause,engage the reverse gear, or press the button in the infotainment system, > Driver as-sistance> Park Assist system.● Release the steering wheel ››› in Intro-duction on page 261.● Please note the following message: Inter-vention in active direction. Watchyour surroundings!. While you keepwatch around you, carefully start accelerat-ing up to no more than 7 km/h (4 mph). Dur-ing the parking manoeuvre, the system onlytakes charge of the steering. You, as thedriver, have to accelerate, engage theclutch if necessary, change gears andbrake.● Reverse until the continuous ParkPilot sig-nal sounds; OR: reverse until the indicationto move forward appears on the instrumentpanel display ››› Fig. 172 or ››› Fig. 173 ;OR: reverse until the Park Assist finish-ed message appears on the instrument pan-el display. The progress bar 6 indicates thedistance to cover ››› page 265 .

● Press the brake pedal until the parking as-sist system completes the steering wheelturns; OR: until the symbol goes out onthe instrument panel screen.● Select first gear.● Move forward until the continuous ParkPi-lot signal sounds; OR: move forward until thereverse indication appears on the instrumentpanel display. The Park Assist system steersthe vehicle forward and back until it centresit in the space ››› Fig. 172 or ››› Fig. 173 .● For best results, wait at the end of eachmanoeuvre until the Park Assist system hasfinished turning the steering wheel. Theparking manoeuvre ends when a corre-sponding message is displayed on the instru-ment panel and, in some cases, an acousticsignal sounds.

Progress barsThe progress bar››› Fig. 172 6 and ››› Fig. 173 6 on thescreen of the instrument panel displays therelative distance to be covered. The greaterthe distance, the fuller the progress bar.When driving forward, the content of theprogress bar decreases upwards, and whenreversing, it decreases downwards.

NoteIf the manoeuvre is terminated premature-ly during parking, the result may not be thebest.

Leaving a parking space with theparking assist system (only for parallelparking)

Fig. 174 On the instrument panel display: exit aparallel parking space.

Your vehicle in reverse gearMessage giving the proposed manoeuvreto exit the parking spaceProgress bar to indicate the distance leftto cover »

1

2

3

265

Driving

Leaving a parking space (parallel parking)The necessary conditions to exit a parkingspace with Park Assist have to be met››› page 262.

● Press button in the infotainment system, > Driver assistance > Park Assist system.When the system is connected, the symbol on the Infotainment System screen ishighlighted.● Turn on the corresponding turn signal to-wards the road you will enter when exitingthe parking space.● Engage the reverse gear, or press the but-ton in the infotainment system.● Release the steering wheel ››› in Intro-duction on page 261. Please note the fol-lowing message: Automatic steering en-abled. Pay attention to your sur-roundings. While you keep watch aroundyou, carefully start accelerating up to nomore than 7 km/h (4 mph). When exiting theparking space, the system only takes chargeof the steering. You, as the driver, have toaccelerate, engage the clutch if necessary,change gears and brake.● Reverse until the continuous ParkPilot sig-nal sounds; OR: reverse until the instrumentpanel display shows the forward indication.The progress bar ››› Fig. 174 3 indicates thedistance to cover ››› page 265 .● Press the brake pedal until the parking as-sist system completes the steering wheel

turns; OR: press the brake pedal until thesymbol goes out on the instrument clusterscreen.● Move forward until the continuous ParkPi-lot signal sounds; OR: move forward until thereverse indication appears on the instrumentpanel display. The Park Assist system steersthe vehicle forward and back until it can exitthe space.● The vehicle can exit the space when a cor-responding message is displayed on the in-strument panel and, in some cases, anacoustic signal sounds. Take charge of thesteering with the turning angle set by thePark Assist system.● Paying attention to the traffic, exit theparking space.

Automatic operation of the brakes bythe parking assist system

Park Assist helps the driver by automaticallybraking in certain situations.

The driver is always responsible for braking intime ››› .

Automatic braking intervention to avoidexceeding the speed limitTo avoid exceeding the allowed speed of ap-prox. 7 km/h (4 mph) when entering or leav-ing a parking space, the brakes may activate

automatically. After automatically activatingthe brakes, the manoeuvres to enter or exit aparking space may continue.

The brakes are only automatically activatedonce for each attempt to enter or exit aparking space. If the speed of approximately7 km/h (4 mph) is exceeded again, the cor-responding operation is halted.

Automatic braking to reduce damagesDepending on certain conditions, the ParkAssist system can automatically brake the ve-hicle when faced with an obstacle, briefly ac-tioning and holding down the brake ped-al ››› . Following this the driver must pressthe brake pedal.

Automatic braking intervention to reducedamage leads to the parking manoeuvre fin-ishing.

WARNINGThe automatic braking intervention by ParkAssist should never tempt you to take anyrisk that may compromise safety. The sys-tem is not a replacement for driver aware-ness.● The Park Assist system is subject to cer-tain limitations inherent to the system. Incertain situations, the automatic brakingintervention may only work in a limited wayor not work at all.

266


● Always be ready to use the brakes your-self!● The automatic braking intervention willend after approximately 1.5 seconds. After-wards, brake the vehicle yourself.

Parking aid parking and ma-noeuvring (ParkPilot)

Introduction

These assist systems help you when parkingand manoeuvring:

– Plus Parking Aid ››› page 268 . It is an assis-tant that gives a visual and audio warningof obstacles detected in front and behindthe vehicle ››› page 268 .

– Rear Parking Aid ››› page 271 . An audioand visual assistant that warns of obstacleslocated behind the vehicle ››› page 271 .

WARNING● Always pay attention, by looking directly,to traffic and the area around the vehicle.Assistance systems are not a replacementfor driver awareness. Responsibility alwayslies with the driver.● The sensors have blind spots in which ob-stacles and people are not detected. Payspecial attention to children and animals.

● Always keep visual control of the sur-roundings: use the mirrors for additionalhelp.

CAUTIONParking distance warning system functionscan be affected by different factors thatcan cause damage:● Under certain circumstances, the systemdoes not detect or display certain objects:– Chains, trailer draw bars, bars, fences,

posts and thin trees.– Objects that are located above the sen-

sors, such as protrusions in a wall.– Objects with certain surfaces or struc-

tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow-der snow.

● Certain surfaces of objects and garmentsdo not reflect the ultrasound sensors' sig-nals. The system cannot detect these ob-jects or people wearing such clothes cor-rectly.● Sensor signals may be affected by exter-nal sound sources. This may prevent themfrom detecting people or objects.● If the system warns you of the proximityof a low obstacle, please note that after be-ing detected by the system, the obstacle inquestion may disappear from the measure-ment sensors as the vehicle moves closer,and the system will no longer warn of itspresence. In certain circumstances, objects

such as high kerbs that could damage theunderside of the vehicle are not detected.● If the parking distance warning system isignored, the vehicle could suffer consider-able damage.● Damage to the radiator grille, bumper,wheel arch and vehicle underbody canmodify the orientation of the sensors. Thiscan affect the parking aid function. Havethe function checked by a specialisedworkshop.● A number plate or number plate holderwith dimensions that exceed the space forthe number plate, or a cured or deformednumber plate can cause false detections ora loss of visibility for the sensors.

Note● The display on the Infotainment systemscreen shows a slight time delay.● In certain situations, the system can givea warning even though there is no obstaclein the detected area:– Rough or cobbled surfaces or surfaces

with long grass.– External ultrasound sources, such as

other vehicles equipped with ultra-sound systems.

– Heavy rain or snow, hail or dense ex-haust gases.

– If the number plate is not properly se-cured to the surface of the bumper. »

267

Driving

– Gradient changes.● In order to guarantee good operation,keep the sensors clean, free of snow andice, and do not cover them with stickers orother objects.● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-ment for cleaning, do not apply it directly,unless you do so very briefly, and alwayskeep a distance of more than 10 cm away.● Fitting certain accessories to the front ofthe vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad-vertising, may interfere with the operationof the Park Assist.● We recommend that you practice parkingin an area without traffic.● The volume and tone of the signals andindications can be changed ››› page 271 .● Please observe information on towing atrailer ››› page 272 .

Parking System Plus*

Description

Fig. 175 Parking aid view on the Infotainment sys-tem display.

Parking aid plus assists the driver by givingvisual and audio warnings about obstaclesdetected in front of and behind the vehicle.

The bumpers are fitted with sensors. Whenan obstacle is detected, it is indicated by au-dible signals and in the Infotainment system››› Fig. 175.

When moving close to an obstacle, it is pos-sible to know if the obstacle is in front of thevehicle or behind it by choosing differentsounds.

The approximate measurement range of thesensors is:

1.20 mA

0.60 m1.60 m0.60 m

As you approach the obstacle, the frequencyof the audible signals will increase. The signalwill sound continuously at around 0.30 m:Stop!

If the separation is maintained, the warningvolume is reduced after about 2.5 seconds.

Parking Aid operation

Manually connecting and disconnectingthe parking aid● Press the function button > Driver as-sistance> Parking Aid.

Automatic connection of Parking Aid● Select reverse gear.● OR: if you drive forward at a speed of lessthan 15 km/h (9 mph) and you encounter anobstacle, it is detected when it is opticallyapprox. less than 95 cm. away, or acoustical-ly approx. 50 cm. away. If the automatic con-nection is activated, a reduced display isshown.● OR: if the vehicle moves back a certain dis-tance (between approx. 10 and 20 cm ap-prox depending on whether or not an obsta-cle is detected)

B

C

D

268


Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid● Drive forward at 15 km/h (9 mph) or faster.● OR: move the selector lever to position P.

Temporary suppression of sound in Park-ing Aid● Press the function button.● OR: activate the electronic parking brake.

Change from reduced view to full view● Engage the reverse gear if your vehicle isequipped with a reversing camera.● OR: press the car icon on the reducedview.● OR: if the vehicle moves back a certain dis-tance (between approx. 10 and 20 cm ap-prox depending on whether or not an obsta-cle is detected).

Switch to the reverse assist image (RearView Camera “RVC”)● Select reverse gear.● OR: press the RVC button on the Infotain-ment System screen1).

A short confirmation signal will be heard andthe button symbol will light up when the sys-tem is switched on.

Automatic activation

When the Plus Parking Aid connects auto-matically, a diagram of the vehicle and thesegments will appear on screen. This func-tion will be available unless the user has de-activated it.

It only operates every time the speed is re-duced below 15 km/h (9 mph) for the firsttime.

If disabled using the button in the info-tainment system ( > Driver assistance>Parking Aid) to be automatically activatedagain, one of the following actions must betaken:

● Switch off the ignition and switch it onagain.● OR: drive forward at over 15 km/h (9 mph)approx.● OR: move the lever into position P andpack again.● OR: switch the automatic activation on andoff in the Infotainment system.

The automatic activation of the parking aidcan be switched on and off in the Infotain-ment system››› page 82››› page 86 :

● Switch the ignition on.● Press the function button > Driver as-sistance> Parking Aid.● Select Automatic activation. If the box ischecked, the function is connected.

If activated automatically, an audible soundwarning will only be given when obstacles infront are at a distance of less than 50 cm. ap-prox.

CAUTIONThe automatic connection of the ParkingAid only works when you are driving slowly.If driving style is not adapted to the circum-stances, an accident and serious injury ordamage may be caused.

1) The RVC button will only be displayed whenreverse gear is engaged.

269

Driving

Visual indication segments

Fig. 176 Parking aid view on the Infotainment sys-tem display.

The optical indication of the segments worksas follows:

White and segments: the obstacle ismore than approx. 30 cm away from thepath or in the direction opposite to trav-el. They are also displayed when theelectronic parking brake is activated.Yellow segments: the obstacles lie onthe vehicle’s path and are at a distanceof less than approx. 30 cm away.Red segments: obstacles are less thanapprox. 30 cm away.

A wake will indicate the anticipated forwardor backward trajectory, depending on theengaged gear.

–

–

–

If an obstacle is located in the vehicle’s way,the corresponding audible warning willsound.

When the penultimate segment is displayed,the vehicle has reached the collision zone. Inthe collision zone, the obstacles are repre-sented in red (including those out of thepath). Stop the vehicle! ››› in Introductionon page 267, ››› in Introduction onpage 267 !

Setting the indications and audio sig-nals

The indications and acoustic signals are setin the Infotainment system: function button > Driver assistance> Parking aid:

Setup

Automatic activa-tion On/off

Front volume* Volume in the front and reararea.

Rear volume* Volume in the rear area.

Adjust volume

When the parking aid isswitched on, the volume ofthe audio source will be re-duced, depending on the se-lected option.

Error messages

If a an error or fault message appears on theinstrument cluster in Park Assist, there is afault.

If the fault doesn't disappear before discon-necting the ignition, it will not be indicatednext time the parking aid is connected.

If a rear sensor is faulty, only the obstacles inthe areas A and B are displayed ››› Fig. 175 .If a front sensor is faulty, only the obstacles inthe areas C and D will be displayed. Symbol is displayed.

We recommend taking the vehicle to a spe-cialised workshop to have the fault repaired.

Trailer mode

On vehicles with a factory-mounted trailerhook, when the trailer is connected, the rearsensors will not activate when reverse gear isengaged or button is pressed in the Info-tainment system ( > Driver assistance >Parking aid). Therefore, any objects behindor to the side of the vehicle will not be indi-cated on the screen and no audio signals willsound.

The screen will only display objects detectedat the front, and the vehicle's trajectory willbe hidden.

270


Manoeuvre braking function*

The emergency braking function is used tominimise damage in the event of a collision.

Depending on the equipment, if the ParkingAid is active, the braking while manoeuvringfunction activates emergency braking whenit detects an obstacle in the vehicle’s paththat could cause a collision, driving forwardsor in reverse.

The function will not brake if the Parking Aidis activated automatically. For the system tooperate, manoeuvring speed must be be-tween 2.5-7 km/h (1.5-4 mph) for the frontarea and between 1.5-7 km/h (1-4 mph) forthe rear.

Following an intervention, the braking whilemanoeuvring function will be inactive in thesame direction of travel for 5 metres. Oncethe gear is changed, or the selector lever’sposition is changed, the function will be ac-tive again. The Parking Aid’s limitations ap-ply.

The braking while manoeuvring function isset in the Infotainment system: function but-ton > Driver assistance> Parking aid.

Temporary suppression of emergencybraking● When the function is deactivated with theBraking while manoeuvring button that ap-

pears on the Parking aid screen of the Info-tainment system.● Whenever any of the car doors, rear lid orbonnet are opened.

Rear parking aid*

Description

The rear parking aid is an optical and audi-ble assistant that warns of obstacles locatedbehind the vehicle.

There are sensors integrated in the rearbumper. When they detect an obstacle, youare alerted by audible and visible warnings onthe Infotainment system.

Make particularly sure that the sensors arenot covered by adhesives, residues, dirt andthe like, as this could affect the system's op-eration. Cleaning instructions ››› page 317 .

The approximate measurement range of therear sensors is:

● Side area: 0.60 m● Central area: 1.60 m

As you approach the obstacle, the frequencyof the audible signals will increase. The signalwill sound continuously at around 0.30 m:Stop! ››› in Introduction on page 267,››› in Introduction on page 267!

If the separation is maintained, the warningvolume is reduced after about 2.5 seconds.

Parking Aid connection● Select reverse gear.

Parking Aid disconnection● Drive forward at 15 km/h (9 mph) or faster.● OR: move the selector lever to position P,N or D.

Setting the indications and audio signalsThe indications and acoustic signals are setin the Infotainment system: function button > Driver assistance> Parking aid.

Setup

Rear volume* Volume in the rear area.

Adjust volume

When the parking aid isswitched on, the volume ofthe audio source will be re-duced, depending on the se-lected option.

Error messagesIf a an error or fault message appears on theinstrument panel in Parking assist, there is afault.

If the fault doesn't disappear before discon-necting the ignition, it will not be indicatednext time the parking aid is connected. »

271

Driving

We recommend taking the vehicle to a spe-cialised workshop to have the fault repaired.

Towing deviceIn vehicles equipped with a towing bracketdevice from the factory, when the trailer isconnected, the parking aid will not be activa-ted when reverse gear is engaged.

Reverse Assist (Rear View Cam-era)*

Operating and safety warnings

WARNING● The reverse assist does not make it possi-ble to precisely calculate the distance fromobstacles and nor can it overcome the sys-tem's own limits, hence its negligent usemay cause serious accidents and injuries ifused without due care. The driver shouldbe aware of his/her surroundings at alltimes to ensure safe driving.● The camera lens expands and distorts thefield of view and displays the objects on thescreen in a way that is different from reality.Distance perception is also distorted.● Due to the screen resolution or light con-ditions, some items may be blurry or notdisplayed at all. Take care with thin posts,fences, railings or trees that might not be

seen on the screen and could damage thevehicle.● The reverse assist has blind spots where itcannot see people or objects. Monitor thevehicle's surrounding area at all times.● The system is not a replacement for driv-er awareness. Supervise the parking ma-noeuvre and the vehicle's surrounding areaat all times.● Do not be distracted from the traffic bylooking at the screen.● The images are only two-dimensional.Protruding objects or holes in the road, forexample, are more difficult to detect ormay not be seen at all.● Vehicle load modifies the representationof the guide lines. The width representedby the lines decreases with vehicle load.Pay special attention to the surroundingswhen the inside of the vehicle of the lug-gage compartment are loaded.● In the following situations, objects orother vehicles appear to be further away orcloser than they actually are. Pay specialattention:– If moving from a flat surface to a slope

and vice-versa.– If the vehicle is heavily loaded.– When the vehicle approaches objects

that are not on the ground surface orthat protrude from it. These objectsmay be outside the camera angle whenreversing.

Note● It is important to take great care and payspecial attention if the driver is not familiarwith the system.● The reverse assist reference lines disap-pear when the rear lid is open.

Introduction

A camera installed in the rear lid handle as-sists the driver with reverse parking or ma-noeuvring ››› page 224 .

The camera image is viewed together withorientation lines projected on the Infotain-ment system screen. Part of the bumper canbe seen at the bottom, which can be used bythe driver as a reference point.

Reverse assist modesDepending on the equipment, the followingmodes are available:

● Angle parking: reverse parking perpendic-ular to the road.● Assistance function for hitching a trailer:helps to hitch a trailer.● Cross traffic: traffic is monitored in a trans-verse direction.

272


Connecting and disconnecting

Connect the reverse assist● Select reverse gear.● OR: in the infotainment system select >Driver assistance> Parking aid.

Disconnect the reverse assistDrive forward at least 15 km/h (9 mph).

Shown on the display

The system’s functions and representationsmay vary depending on the equipment.

The assistant's image view changes when thefactory-fitted tow hitch is electronically con-nected to a trailer ››› page 281 .

Reverse assist functions and symbolsWhen the reverse assist is connected, youcan make adjustments using the functionbuttons. Some adjustments are equipment-dependent.

Exit the current display

Switch to angle parking ››› page 274

Switch to the trailer hitching assistancefunctionSwitch to cross traffic

Adjust the display: brightness, contrastand colour.Switch to park assist ››› page 267

Display/hide the parking aid view

Guide linesGreen horizontal lines: extension of the vehi-cle.

Yellow lines: vehicle path depending on thesteering angle.

Assistance function for hitching a trailerOn vehicles with a factory-fitted towing de-vice, this function can be used to move thevehicle close to a tow bar.

Auxiliary lines are shown in the infotainmentsystem.

Green lines: distance to the tow hitch. Thedistance between the lines is approx. 0.30 m.

Orange line: precalculated direction of thetow hitch depending on steering wheel rota-tion.

Cross trafficThis visualization helps to monitor traffic be-hind the vehicle and can be used, for exam-ple, when exiting garages or narrow exits.

|

Requirements

To park with reverse assist, the following re-quirements must be met:

● Do not exceed a speed of approx. 15 km/h(9 mph).● Parking space width: vehicle width +0.15 m (without counting the mirrors).

To display a real image, the following require-ments must be met:

● The luggage compartment rear door isclosed.● The surroundings are on a flat surface.● The vehicle should not be loaded veryheavily at the rear.

273

Driving

Parallel parking

Fig. 177 Display on the Infotainment systemscreen.: parking with reverse assist.

Key to the Fig. 177:Finding a parking spaceGo to the selected parking spaceCentre the vehicle inside the parkingspaceRoadParking spaceLateral boundary of the parking spaceRear boundary of the parking space

1

2

3

4

Parking● In the infotainment system select >Driver assistance> Parking aid before pass-ing in front of the selected parking space.● With reverse assist connected and in work-ing order, press the function button .● Place the vehicle in front of the parkingspace ››› Fig. 177 2 .● Reverse while turning the steering wheel sothat the yellow lines enter the parking space.The green and yellow lines must match theside boundary lines 3 .● Stop the vehicle when the red line hasreached the rear boundary 4 .


The system behaves differently than ex-pectedThere can be several causes:● The camera is dirty ››› page 318 . In addi-tion to dirt and snow, camera visibility can bereduced by detergent residue or any type ofcoating.● The system requirements must be met››› page 273.● The camera is covered with water.● The factory-fitted towing bracket must notbe electrically connected to a trailer››› page 281.

● The vehicle has some type of damage inthe camera area, e.g. due to a parking im-pact.● The field of view of the camera is blockedby an accessory, e.g. a bicycle carrier system.● Changes have been made to the paint inthe camera area, or structural modificationshave been made to a component such asthe running gear.

Camera with no visibility, fault message,the system disconnects● Clean the camera or remove possible ad-hesives or accessories from it ››› page 318 .● Check for visible damage.

Possible solution● Temporarily disconnect the system.● Check if one of the causes indicated abovehas occurred.● Once the source of the problem has beeneliminated, the system may be reconnected.● If the system still behaves unpredictably,have it checked by a specialised workshop.

274

Towing bracket device*


Trailer mode

Introduction

Take into account country-specific regula-tions about driving with a trailer and the useof a towing bracket.

The vehicle has been developed primarily forcarrying people, although it can also be usedto tow a trailer if fitted with the correspond-ing technical equipment. This additional loadhas an effect on the useful life, fuel con-sumption and vehicle performance and insome cases can reduce the service intervals.

Driving with a trailer requires more forcefrom the vehicle, and thus more concentra-tion from the driver.

In winter, winter tyres should be fitted onboth the vehicle and the trailer.

Maximum vertical load technically permit-ted on the coupling deviceThe maximum vertical load technically per-mitted from the trailer draw bar on the tow-ing bracket's tow ball is 80 kg.

Vehicles with the Start-Stop systemIf the vehicle has a factory-fitted towingbracket or one that is retrofitted by CUPRA,

the Start-Stop system operates as normal.No special characteristics need to be takeninto account.

If the system does not recognise the traileror the trailer bracket has not been retrofittedby CUPRA, the Start-Stop system must bedisconnected by pressing the correspondingbutton in the lower part of the centre con-sole before driving with the trailer, and itshould remain off for the rest of the jour-ney ››› .

Vehicles with driving profile selectionIf you are going to be towing a trailer, the useof the Eco driving profile is not recommen-ded. You are advised to select another of theavailable driving profiles before beginning todrive with a trailer.

Trailer weight/drawbar loadNever exceed the authorised trailer weight. Ifyou do not load the trailer up to the maxi-mum permitted trailer weight, you can thenclimb correspondingly steeper slopes.

The maximum trailer weights listed are onlyapplicable for altitudes up to 1000 m abovesea level. Since higher altitude decreases en-gine performance and the ability to climbslopes, the tow load decreases proportional-ly. The weight of the vehicle and trailer com-bination must be reduced by 10% for every1000 m of altitude. When possible, operate

the trailer with the maximum authoriseddrawbar load on the ball joint of the towingbracket, but do not exceed the specifiedlimit.

WARNINGNever use the trailer to transport people,since it would put their life in danger and isalso prohibited.

WARNINGUndue use of the towing bracket may causeinjury and accidents.● Only use the towing bracket if it is in aperfect state of repair and is properly se-cured.● Never modify or repair the towing bracketin any way.● In order to reduce the danger of injury inthe event of rear-end collisions and toavoid injury to pedestrians and cyclistswhen parking the vehicle, cover or removethe tow hook when you are not using a trail-er.● Never fit a towing bracket “with weightdistribution” or “load compensation”. Thevehicle has not been designed for this typeof towing bracket. The towing bracketcould fail and the trailer could be releasedfrom the vehicle. »

275

Driving

WARNINGDriving with a trailer and transportingheavy or large objects can affect drivingproperties and even cause an accident.● Always secure the load properly usingbelts or straps that are suitable and in goodcondition.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.● Trailers with a high centre of gravity aremore likely to overturn than those with alow one.● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.● Take great care when overtaking.● Reduce speed immediately if you noticethat the trailer is swaying, however slightly.● Never drive at more than 80 km/h(50 mph) when towing a trailer (or at morethan 100 km/h (60 mph) in exceptional cir-cumstances). This also applies in countrieswhere driving at higher speeds is permit-ted. Take into account the speed limit forvehicles with trailers in the correspondingcountry, as it could be less than the speedlimit for vehicles without a trailer.● Never attempt to “straighten” the towingvehicle and trailer while accelerating.

WARNINGIf the towing bracket has been retrofittedby a non-CUPRA workshop, the Start-Stop

system must be disconnected manuallywhenever driving with a trailer. Otherwisethe brake system could be damaged andcould consequently cause a serious acci-dent or injury.● Always disconnect the Start-Stop systemmanually when using a towing bracket thathas not been fitted by a CUPRA workshop.

Note● Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, al-ways deactivate the anti-theft alarm››› page 91. Otherwise, the tilt sensor couldcause the alarm to go off.● Do not drive with a trailer for the engine'sfirst 1000 km ››› page 217 .● CUPRA recommends that, if possible, thetow hook be removed or covered when it isnot going to be used. In the event of a rear-end collision, the damage to the vehiclecould be greater if the tow hook is fitted.● Some retrofitted towing brackets coverthe rear towing eye. In these cases, thetowing eye should not be used for tow-starting or for towing other vehicles. Forthis reason, if the vehicle has been retrofit-ted with a towing bracket, always keep thetow hook in the vehicle when you remove it.

Technical requirements

Vehicles that are factory-mounted with atowing device meet all the technical and le-gal requirements for driving with a trailer››› page 281.

If the vehicle is retrofitted with a towingbracket, only a bracket that is authorised forthe maximum authorised load of the trailerthat is to be towed may be fitted. The towingbracket must be suitable for the vehicle andthe trailer and must be properly secured tothe vehicle's chassis. Only use a towingbracket that has been authorised by CUPRAfor this vehicle. Always check and take intoaccount the towing bracket manufacturer'sinstructions.

Towing bracket fitted on the bumperNever fit a towing bracket to the bumper orto the area where the bumper is mounted.The towing bracket should not impair thebumper's function. Do not make modifica-tions or repairs to the exhaust system or thebrake system. Make regular checks to ensurethat the towing bracket is secure.

Engine cooling systemDriving with a trailer increases the load onthe engine and cooling system. The coolingsystem should have sufficient coolant and beprepared for the additional effort involved indriving with a trailer.

276


Trailer brakesIf the trailer has its own brake system, pleasetake the relevant legal requirements into ac-count. Never connect the trailer's brake sys-tem to the vehicle's brake system.

Tow cableAlways use a cable between the vehicle andthe trailer ››› page 277 .

Trailer tail lightsThe trailer's rear lights should comply withthe statutory safety regulations ››› page 277 .

Never connect the trailer's rear lights directlyto the vehicle's electric system. If you are notsure that the trailer's electrical connection iscorrect, have it checked by a specialisedworkshop. To do so, CUPRA recommendsgoing to a specialised CUPRA dealer or anySEAT dealership.

Exterior mirrorsIf you cannot see the area behind the trailerwith the exterior mirrors of the towing vehi-cle, additional mirrors will have to be instal-led in accordance with the regulations of thecountry in question. The exterior mirrorsshould be adjusted before you start drivingand must provide a sufficient field of vision atthe rear.

WARNINGIf the towing bracket is wrongly fitted or isnot the right one, the trailer could becomedetached from the vehicle and cause seri-ous injury.

CAUTION● If the rear lights of the trailer are not cor-rectly connected, the vehicle's electronicsystem may be damaged.● If the trailer absorbs excessive electriccurrent, the vehicle's electronic systemmay be damaged.● Never connect the trailer's electric sys-tem directly to the electrical connectionsof the tail lights or any other power sour-ces. Only use the connections intended forproviding electric current to the trailer.

Hitching and connecting a trailer

Fig. 178 Schematic representation: assignment ofthe pins of the trailer's electrical socket.

Pin Meaning

1 Left turn signal

2 Rear fog light

3 Earth for pins 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8

4 Right turn signal

5 Rear light, right

6 Brake lights

7 Rear light, left

8 Reverse lights

9 Permanent live

10 Live charge cable

11 Earth for pin 10 »

277

Driving

Pin Meaning

12 Unassigned

13 Earth for pin 9

Power socket for trailerThe vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole powersocket for the connection between the trail-er and the vehicle. With the engine running,electrical devices on the trailer receive pow-er from the electrical connection (pin 9 andpin 10 of the trailer power socket).

If the system detects that a trailer has beenconnected, the consumers on the trailer willreceive electricity through this connection(pins 9 and 10). Pin 9 has a permanent live.This powers, for example, the trailer's interiorlighting. Electrical devices such as a fridge ina caravan only receive electrical power if theengine is running (through pin 10).

To avoid overloading the electrical system,you cannot connect the ground wires of pin3, pin 11 or pin 13.

If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, youwill need to use an adapter cable. In this casethe function corresponding to pin 10 will notbe available.

Tow cableThe tow rope must always be securely fixedto the towing vehicle and loose enough so

that the vehicle can handle turns smoothly.However, make sure that the cable does notrub on the ground while driving.

Trailer tail lightsAlways check the trailer's rear lights to en-sure they are working correctly and that theycomply with the relevant safety regulations. Ifyou connect the trailer to the factory-moun-ted system, when you turn on the rear foglamp, the fog lamp of the towing vehicle willturn off to turn on the trailer fog lamp.

Include in the anti-theft alarmThe trailer is included in the anti-theft sys-tem if the following conditions are met:

● If the vehicle is factory-equipped with ananti-theft alarm and towing bracket.● If the trailer is electrically connected to thetowing vehicle through the trailer powersocket.● If the electrical systems of the vehicle andtrailer are in perfect condition and have nofaults or damage.● If the vehicle is locked with the key and theanti-theft alarm is activated.

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig-gered if the electrical connection with thetrailer is cut off.

Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, alwaysturn off the anti-theft alarm. Otherwise, thetilt sensor could cause the alarm to go off.

Trailers with LED tail lightsFor technical reasons, trailers fitted with LEDrear lights cannot be connected to the anti-theft alarm system.

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm doesnot go off when the electrical connectionwith the trailer is cut if it has rear lights withlight-emitting diodes.

WARNINGIf the cables are improperly or incorrectlyconnected, it may lead to an excessiveamount of current supplied to the trailer,which can cause abnormalities in the entirevehicle electronic system, as well as acci-dents and serious injuries.● Ensure that any repairs that need to becarried out on the electrical system arecarried out by a specialised workshop.● Never connect the trailer's electric sys-tem directly to the electrical connectionsof the tail lights or any other power sour-ces.

WARNINGContact between the pins of the trailerpower socket can cause short circuits,overloading of the electrical system or

278


failure of the lighting system, and conse-quently can cause accidents and serious in-juries.● Never connect the pins of the trailerpower socket to each other.● Make sure any work on bent pins is car-ried out by a specialised workshop.

CAUTIONDo not leave the trailer connected to thevehicle when parked; place it on its supportwheel or its supports. If the vehicle rises orfalls due, for example, to a variation of theload or a burst tyre, increased pressure willbe placed on the towing bracket and thetrailer, and both the vehicle and the trailercan be damaged.

Note● In case of anomalies in the electrical sys-tems of the vehicle or trailer, as well as inthe anti-theft alarm system, have them in-spected by a specialised workshop.● If the trailer accessories consume energythrough the power socket to the trailer andthe engine is turned off, the battery willdischarge.● If the vehicle battery is running low, theelectrical connection with the trailer will beautomatically cut.

Trailer loading

Technically permissible maximum trailerweight and vertical load on the couplingdeviceThe technically permissible maximum trailerweight is the weight that the vehicle cantow.››› The vertical load on the coupling isexerted vertically from above on the hook ofthe towing bracket.

The information on the maximum trailerweight and vertical load on the coupling de-vice contained in the type plate of the towingbracket are experimental values only. Thecorrect figures for your specific model,which may be lower than these figures, aregiven in the vehicle documentation. The in-formation in the vehicle documentationtakes precedence at all times.

To promote safety while driving, CUPRA rec-ommends making the most of the maximumvertical load technically permissible on thecoupling device ››› page 275 . An insufficientvertical load has a negative influence on thebehaviour of both the vehicle and trailer.

The vertical load increases the weight on therear axle, reducing the vehicle's carrying ca-pacity.

Gross combination weight of the towingvehicle and trailerThe gross combination weight is the actualweight of the loaded vehicle plus the actualweight of the loaded trailer.

In some countries trailers are classified intodistinct categories. CUPRA recommends ob-taining information from a specialised work-shop regarding which type of trailer is mostsuitable for your vehicle.

Trailer loadingThe weight of the towing vehicle and trailermust be balanced. In order to do this, theload must be as close as possible to the max-imum vertical load technically permissible onthe coupling point, and it must be evenly dis-tributed between the back and front of thetrailer:

● Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavyobjects are as near to the axle as possible orabove it.● Secure the trailer load properly.

Tyre pressureSet the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in ac-cordance with the trailer manufacturer's rec-ommendations.

When towing a trailer, inflate the tyres of thetowing vehicle with the maximum allowablepressure ››› page 305 . »

279

Driving

WARNINGIf the maximum permissible axle weight,the maximum load technically permissibleon the coupling point, the maximum au-thorised vehicle weight or the gross combi-nation weight of the towing vehicle andtrailer are exceeded, accidents and seriousinjuries may occur.● Never exceed the values indicated!● The actual weight on the front and rearaxles must never exceed the maximumpermissible axle weight. The weight on thefront and rear axles must never exceed themaximum permissible weight.

WARNINGA shift in weight could jeopardize the sta-bility and security of the towing vehicle andtrailer, which could lead to accidents andserious injuries.● Always load the trailer correctly.● Always secure the load properly usingbelts or straps that are suitable and in goodcondition.

Driving with a trailer

Adjusting the headlightsThe front part of the vehicle may be raisedwhen the trailer is connected and the lightmay dazzle the rest of the traffic.

Specific features of driving with a trailer● If your trailer has an overrun brake, brakegently at first and then rapidly. This will pre-vent the jerking that can be caused by thelocking of trailer wheels.● Due to the gross combination weight ofthe towing vehicle and trailer, the brakingdistance increases.● When going down a slope, go into a lowergear (in tiptronic automatic gearbox mode)to take advantage of the braking power pro-vided by the engine. Otherwise, the brakingsystem could overheat and even fail.● The trailer weight, as well as the grosscombination weight of the towing vehicleand trailer, change the centre of gravity andthe properties of the vehicle.● If the towing vehicle is empty and the trail-er is loaded, then the load distribution is in-correct. Under these conditions, drive slowlyand with extra caution.

Hill starts with a trailerDepending on the slope of the hill and thecombination weight of the towing vehicleand trailer, the vehicle might start rollingbackwards slightly when you first start up.

For hill-starting with a trailer, do the follow-ing:

● Press and hold the brake pedal.

● Press the button once to disconnect theelectronic parking brake ››› page 254 .● Move the selector lever to the D/S››› page 207position.● Pull out the button and hold it in thatposition to immobilise the towing vehicle andtrailer with the electronic parking brake.● Release the brake pedal.● Start driving slowly.● Do not release the button until the en-gine has sufficient power to start driving.

WARNINGIf a trailer is pulled incorrectly, this maylead to loss of control of the vehicle and se-rious injury.● Driving with a trailer and transportingheavy or large objects will change the vehi-cle handling and braking distances.● Always drive cautiously and carefully.Brake earlier than usual.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions. Slow down, especiallywhen driving down hills or slopes.● Accelerate with particular care and cau-tion. Avoid sudden braking and manoeu-vres.● Take great care when overtaking. Reducespeed immediately if you notice that thetrailer is swaying, however slightly.

280


● Never attempt to “straighten” the towingvehicle and trailer while accelerating.● Take into account the speed limit for ve-hicles with a trailer, as it could be lowerthan for vehicles without a trailer.

Stabilisation of the towing vehicle andtrailer combination

The stabilisation of the vehicle and trailercombination is an additional function of theelectronic stability control (ESC).

If the system detects that the trailer is weav-ing, it intervenes to reduce the swaying ofthe trailer.

Vehicle and trailer combination stabilisa-tion requirements● The vehicle is factory-equipped with atowing bracket or has been retro-fitted witha compatible towing bracket.● The ESC and the TCS are switched on. Thecontrol lamp or is not lit up on the in-strument cluster.● The trailer is connected to the towing vehi-cle through the trailer power socket.● The vehicle is travelling at over 60 km/h(approx. 37 mph).

● The maximum vertical load technicallypermissible is not being exceeded on thecoupling device.● The trailer has a rigid draw bar.● If the trailer has brakes, it must be equip-ped with a mechanical overrun brake.

WARNINGThe enhanced safety provided by the elec-tric stability control of the vehicle and trail-er should not lead you to take any risks thatcould compromise your safety.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.● Accelerate with caution when the road isslippery.● When adjusting any settings, stop accel-erating.

WARNINGThe electric stability control for the vehicleand trailer may not correctly detect all driv-ing conditions.● When the ESC is switched off, the stabili-sation of the towing vehicle and trailer is al-so switched off.● The stability system does not always de-tect light trailers, so it may not stabilisethese correctly.

● When driving on surfaces with poor grip,the trailer can even interfere with the sta-bility system.● Trailers with a high centre of gravity cantip over without having previously weaved.● If a trailer is not attached, but a connec-tor is plugged into the power socket (e.g.installation of a bicycle rack with lights), re-peated automatic braking may occur in ex-treme driving conditions.

Electrically unlocking trailerhook*

Description

Fig. 179 On the left side of the luggage compart-ment: button for unlocking the tow hook. »

281

Driving

The towing bracket’s hook is located in thebumper. Tow hooks for electrical unlockingcannot be removed.

There should be no person, animal or objectin the path of the tow hook ››› .

Unlocking the tow hook and removing it● Stop the vehicle and connect the electron-ic parking brake ››› page 254 .● Switch off the engine.● Open the rear lid.● Pull the ››› Fig. 179 button briefly. The towhook unlocks electrically and automaticallyturns outwards. The button's control lampflashes.● Finish remove the tow hook by hand untilyou feel and hear that it has engaged and thecontrol lamp on the button stays on.● Close the rear lid.● Hitching and connecting a trailer››› page 277.

Retracting the tow hook● Stop the vehicle and apply the electronicparking brake.● Switch off the engine.● Unhook the trailer and interrupt the elec-trical connection between it and the vehicle.If you are using an adapter, remove it fromthe trailer's power socket.

● Open the rear lid.● Pull the ››› Fig. 179 button briefly. The towhook unlocks electrically.● Turn the tow hook under the bumper withyour hand until you feel and hear that it en-gages and the control lamp on the button re-mains on continuously.● Close the rear lid.

The control lamp ● If the warning light on the button››› Fig. 179 flashes, this means that thetow hook has not been attached properly oris damaged.››› ● If the warning lamp ››› Fig. 179 remainson with the rear lid open, the tow hook iscorrectly in place both when extracted andwhen covered.

The control light of the lamp switches off ap-proximately 1 minute after closing the readlid.

WARNINGUndue use of the towing bracket may causeinjury and accidents.● Only use the tow hook if it is properly en-gaged.● Always ensure that no person, animal orobject is to be found in the path of the towhook.

● Never use a tool or instrument while thetow hook is moving.● Never press the ››› Fig. 179 button whenthere is a trailer hooked to the vehicle orwhen a carrier system or other accessoriesare mounted on the tow hook.● If the tow hook is not attached properly,do not use it. Instead, go to a specialisedworkshop and have the towing bracketchecked.● If you detect any fault in the electricalsystem or in the towing bracket, contact aspecialised workshop and ask them tocheck it.● If the ball has a diameter of less than 49mm at any one point, do not use the towingbracket under any circumstances.

CAUTIONIf you clean the vehicle with high-pressureor steam devices, do not point the jet di-rectly towards the retractable tow hook orthe trailer power socket, as this may dam-age the joints or remove the grease neces-sary for lubrication.

NoteAt extremely low temperatures, the towhook may be impossible to operate. In thiscase, place the vehicle in a warmer location(for example, a garage).

282


Fitting a bicycle carrier on the retract-able towbar

The maximum allowed weight of the carriersystem, including the load, is 80 kg. The car-rier system should not protrude more than700 mm backwards from the spherical head.Only carrier systems on which up to 3 bikescan be mounted are allowed. Heavier bicy-cles must be mounted as close to the vehicleas possible (tow hook).

WARNINGThe incorrect use of the tow hitch with a bi-cycle rack mounted on the tow hook cancause accidents and injury.● Never exceed the maximum weight orthe limits indicated above.● The bicycle rack may not be mounted tothe neck of the hook below the ball be-cause, due to the shape of the neck anddepending on the rack model, the rackcould be incorrectly mounted on the vehi-cle.● Always read and take the manufacturerassembly instructions into account.

CAUTIONIf the maximum weight and limits indicatedabove are exceeded, the vehicle may sufferconsiderable damage.● Never exceed the values indicated!

NoteCUPRA recommends removing, as far aspossible, all removable parts of the bicyclesbefore setting off. These parts include, forexample, baskets and saddlebags, childseats or batteries. This improves aerody-namics and the centre of gravity of the racksystem.

Retrofitting a towing bracket

Description

Fig. 180 Limits and attachment points for retrofit-ting a towing bracket.

CUPRA recommends that towing brackets beretrofitted at a specialised workshop. For »

283

Driving

example, it may very well be necessary to ad-just the cooling system or mount thermalprotection plates. To do so, CUPRA recom-mends going to a specialised CUPRA dealeror any SEAT dealership.

If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the distancespecifications should always be kept in mind.

The distance between the centre of the ballhead and the road ››› Fig. 180 C must neverbe less than that indicated. This also applieswhen the vehicle is fully loaded, includingthe technically permissible maximum verticalload on the coupling device.

Distance specifications››› Fig. 180 1):Mounting points on the vehicle65 mm (minimum)350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle)1,043 mm414 mm634 mm959 mm

WARNINGIf the cables are improperly or incorrectlyconnected, this may lead to malfunctions in

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

the entire vehicle electronic system, as wellas to accidents and serious injuries.● Never connect the trailer's electric sys-tem to the electrical connections of the taillights or any other unsuitable power sour-ces. Only use suitable connectors to con-nect the trailer.● The towing bracket should be retrofittedonly at a specialised workshop.

WARNINGIf the towing bracket is badly fitted or un-suitable, the trailer may separate from thevehicle while driving. This could cause seri-ous accidents and fatal injuries.

Note● Only use towing brackets that have beenapproved by CUPRA for the model in ques-tion.● In some versions, the fitting of a conven-tional towing hook solution is not recom-mended. Please consult your TechnicalService.

1) Measurements may vary depending on differ-ent chassis combinations.

284

Checking and refilling levels

Practical tips


Refuelling

Refuelling

Fig. 181 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached.

The fuel tank flap is on the rear right of thevehicle.

The flap that covers the tank cap is unlockedand locked automatically using the centrallocking.

● Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on theleft side.● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left.● Place it in the space on the hinge of theopen flap ››› Fig. 181 .

● Start refuelling. The tank is full as soon asthe pump’s automatic nozzle cuts off thefuel supply. Do not try to put in more fuel af-ter the nozzle cuts out, as this will fill the ex-pansion chamber in the fuel tank.● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the rightas far as it will go.● Close the lid.

The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv-en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tankflap. Further notes on fuel can be found at››› page 286.

The capacity of your vehicle's fuel tank is giv-en in ››› page 328 .

WARNINGFuel is highly flammable and can cause se-rious burns and other injuries.● When refuelling, turn off the engine andturn off the ignition for safety reasons.● Do not smoke when filling the fuel tank ora canister. Naked flames are forbidden inthe vicinity due to the risk of explosion.● Observe legislation governing the use,storage and carrying of a spare fuel canisterin the vehicle.● For safety reasons we do not recommendcarrying a spare fuel canister in the vehicle.In an accident the canister could be dam-aged and could leak.

● If, in exceptional circumstances, you haveto carry a spare fuel canister, please ob-serve the following points:– Never fill fuel into the spare fuel canis-

ter if it is inside or on top of the vehicle.This could cause an explosion. Alwaysplace the canister on the ground to fillit.

– Insert the filling nozzle as far as possi-ble into the spare fuel canister.

– If the spare fuel canister is made ofmetal, the filling nozzle must be in con-tact with the canister during filling. Thishelps prevent an electrostatic chargebuilding up.

– Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in theluggage compartment. Fuel vapour isexplosive. Risk of fatal accident!

CAUTION● If any fuel is spilt onto the vehicle, itshould be removed immediately. It couldotherwise damage the paintwork.● Never run the tank completely dry. Thecatalytic converter can be damaged.● When filling the fuel tank after having runit completely dry on a vehicle with a dieselengine, the ignition must be switched onfor at least 30 seconds before starting theengine. When you then start the engine itmay take longer than normal (up to one mi-nute) to start firing. »

285

Practical tips

For the sake of the environmentDo not overfill the fuel tank, it may causethe fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.

NoteThere is no emergency mechanism for themanual release of the fuel tank flap. If nec-essary, request assistance from specialisedpersonnel.

NoteDiesel vehicles are fitted with a protectivedevice that prevents the insertion of thewrong fuel hose1). It is only possible to re-fuel with Diesel nozzles.● If the pump nozzle is worn, damaged, or ifit is very small, it is possible that it will notbe able to open the protective device. Be-fore trying to insert the pump nozzle byturning it, try a different pump or requestspecialist help.● If you fill the tank from a reserve fuel can-ister, the protective device will not open.One way to resolve this is to pour the fuel invery slowly.

Fuel types

Identification of fuels1)

Fig. 182 Identification of fuels according to Euro-pean Union (EU) Directive 2014/94/

Fuels are identified by different symbols onthe pump and on your vehicle's tank flap.The identification serves to prevent confu-sion when choosing the fuel.

Petrol with ethanol (“E” stands for Etha-nol). The number indicates the percent-age of ethanol in the petrol. “E5” means,for example, an ethanol ratio of 5% max.Diesel with biodiesel (“B” stands for Bio-diesel). The number indicates the per-centage of biodiesel in the diesel. “B7”

1

2

means, for example, a proportion of bio-diesel of max. 7%.Natural gas: “CNG” means CompressedNatural Gas.

Type of petrol

The correct grade of petrol is listed insidethe fuel tank flap.

The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con-verter and must only be run on unleadedpetrol. The petrol must comply with thestandard EN 228 and be sulphur-free. Fuelswith a 10% ethanol ratio can be refuelled(E10)2). The types of petrol are differentiatedby using the octane numbers (RON) or viathe anti-knock index (AKI).

Super unleaded petrol 95 octane petrol ornormal 91 octane petrol at leastWe recommend refuelling with super 95 oc-tane petrol (91 AKI). If not available, normal91 octane petrol (87 AKI) (with a slight powerloss) may be used.

3

1) Depending on country2) Follow the regulations of the country you aredriving in.

286


Super unleaded petrol, 95 octanes at leastYou should use super 95 octane petrol (91AKI) at least.

If super is not available, if necessary, usenormal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this caseonly use moderate engine speeds and a lightthrottle. Refuel with super as soon as possi-ble.

Unleaded super plus 98 octane petrol orsuper 95 octane petrol at leastWe recommend refuelling with super plus 98octane petrol (93 AKI). If not available: super95 octane petrol (91 AKI) (with a slight powerloss).

If super is not available, if necessary, usenormal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this caseonly use moderate engine speeds and a lightthrottle. Refuel with super as soon as possi-ble.

CAUTION● Fuels high percentage of ethanol, e.g.E30 - E100 button must not be used. Thefuel system would be damaged.● A single refuelling with leaded fuel orother metal additives entails a permanentdeterioration of the effectiveness of thecatalytic converter.● Only use fuel additives that have beenapproved by SEAT. The products that con-tain substances to increase the octane rat-

ing or decrease knocking may contain met-al additives that damage the engine andcatalytic converter. This type of productsmust not be used.● Do not use fuels shown in the pump ascontaining metals. LRP (lead replacementpetrol) fuels contain high concentrations ofmetal additives. Risk of engine damage!● High engine speed and full throttle candamage the engine when using petrol withan octane rating lower than the correctgrade for the engine.

Note● Fuel with an octane rating higher thanthe one required by the engine can beused.● In countries in which there is no sulphur-free fuel, it is also allowed to use low sul-phur content fuel.

Engine management and emis-sions control system

Introduction

WARNING● Due to the high temperatures reached bythe exhaust gas scrubbing system, you

should not park your vehicle near a surfacethat can catch fire easily. Fire hazard!● Do not apply wax underneath the vehiclearound the area of the exhaust system: Firehazard!

Control lamps

It lights up

Fault in the emission control system.Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest speci-alised workshop to have the engine checked.

Flashes

Combustion failures that can damage the catalyticconverter.Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest speci-alised workshop to have the engine checked.

It lights up

Particulate filter blocked ››› page 288 .

It lights up

Fault in the petrol engine management.Have the engine checked as soon as possible by a spe-cialised workshop.

When the ignition is switched on, the (ElectronicPower Control) lights up and should go off once theengine has started. »

287

Practical tips

NoteWhile the indicator lamps , or areon, there might be faults in the engine, fuelconsumption may go up and the enginemight lose power.

Catalytic converter

To maintain the useful life of the catalyticconverter● Only use unleaded petrol with petrol en-gines.● Never run the fuel tank dry.● When changing or adding engine oil, donot exceed the necessary amount››› page 293, Topping up the engine oil.● Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jumpleads if necessary ››› page 51 .

If you should notice misfiring, uneven run-ning or loss of power when the car is moving,have the vehicle inspected by a specialisedworkshop. In general, the emissions warninglamp will light up when any of these symp-toms occur. If this happens, any unburnt fuelcan enter the exhaust system and escape in-to the atmosphere. The catalytic convertercan also be damaged by overheating.

CAUTIONNever run the fuel tank completely dry be-cause an irregular fuel supply can cause ig-nition faults. This allows unburnt fuel to en-ter the exhaust system, which could causeoverheating and damage the catalytic con-verter.

For the sake of the environmentEven when the emission control system isworking perfectly, there may be a smell ofsulphur from the gases on occasions. Thisdepends on the sulphur content of the fuelused. This can quite often be avoided bychanging to another brand of fuel.

Particulate filter

The particulate filter eliminates most of thesoot from the exhaust gas system. Undernormal driving conditions the filter cleans it-self. If the filter does not clean itself (e.g. ifshort journeys are made continuously), it be-comes blocked with soot and the followingindication is displayed to the driver: Par-ticulate filter: cleaned while thevehicle is moving. See Manual. Theparticulate filter needs cleaning (regenera-tion).

Regeneration of the particulate filterRequirements for the regeneration journey:the engine is at operating temperature.

● Drive at a speed of at least 80 km/h ››› ● Completely remove your foot from the ac-celerator pedal for a few seconds to let thevehicle roll with the gear engaged.● Consider the legal speed limits as well asthe recommended gears.● Repeat this procedure (accelerate and letroll) until the control lamp turns off.

This procedure involves an autonomous par-ticulate filter cleaning process and may takesome time.

If the warning lamp does not turn off, go im-mediately to a specialised workshop to repairthe fault.

WARNINGAlways adjust your speed to suit the weath-er conditions, roads, braking distance andtraffic if the particulate filter is in its regen-eration phase. Route recommendationsshould never make you disregard eachcountry's specific traffic regulations.

CAUTION● When the exhaust system detects thatthe particulate filter is close to saturation,the self-cleaning function of this system

288


recommends optimal driving for this func-tion.● Due to the high temperatures caused bythe regeneration of the particulate filter, itis possible that the radiator fan will activateafter stopping the engine, even it its oper-ating temperature has not been reached.● Noise, smells and high idle speeds canoccur during regeneration.● Always use the correct engine oil and thecorrect fuel to make sure the useful life ofthe particulate filter is not affected. Alsoavoid making short trips all the time.

Engine compartment

Working in the engine compartment

Always be aware of the danger of injury andscalding as well as the risk of accident or firewhen working in the engine compartment(e.g. when checking and refilling fluids).

Always observe the warnings listed belowand follow all general safety precautions.

The vehicle's engine compartment is a po-tentially hazardous area ››› .

WARNINGWhen work is done in the engine compart-ment, injuries, burns, accidents and evenfires can occur.● Turn off the engine, disconnect the igni-tion e and apply the electronic parkingbrake. Press the P button of the automaticgearbox. Wait for the engine to cool down.● Never open the bonnet if you see steamor drips of coolant being released from theengine compartment. Wait until no steamor coolant can be seen before opening thebonnet.● Keep children away from the engine com-partment.● Never spill liquids used for vehicle opera-tion on the engine compartment, as thesemay catch fire (e.g. the antifreeze in cool-ant).● Avoid causing short-circuits in the elec-trical system, particularly at the pointswhere the jump leads are attached››› page 51. The battery could explode.● If working inside the engine compart-ment, remember that, even when the igni-tion is switched off, the radiator fan maystart up automatically, and therefore thereis a risk of injury.● Never cover the engine with additionalinsulating materials such as a blanket. Riskof fire!

● Do not unscrew the cap on the coolantexpansion tank when the engine is hot. Thecooling system is under pressure.● Protect face, hands and arms by coveringthe cap with a large, thick rag to protectagainst escaping coolant and steam.● Always make sure you have not left anyobjects, such as cleaning cloths or tools, inthe engine compartment.● If you have to work underneath the vehi-cle, you must use suitable stands addition-ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk ofaccident!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient forsecuring the vehicle and there is a risk ofinjury.● If any work has to be performed when theengine is started or with the engine run-ning, there is an additional, potentially fa-tal, safety risk from the rotating parts, suchas the drive belts, alternator, radiator fan,etc., and from the high-voltage ignition sys-tem. You should also observe the following:– Never touch the electrical wiring of the

ignition system.– Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing

and long hair do not get trapped in ro-tating engine parts. Danger of death.Before starting any work remove jewel-lery, tie back and cover hair, and weartight-fitting clothes.

– Never accelerate with a gear engagedwithout taking the necessary precau-tions. The vehicle could move, even if »

289

Practical tips

the handbrake is applied. Danger ofdeath.

● Observe the following additional warn-ings if work on the fuel system or the elec-trical system is necessary:– Always disconnect the battery from the

on-board network.– Do not smoke.– Never work near naked flames.– Always keep an approved fire extin-

guisher immediately available.

For the sake of the environment● Inspect the ground underneath your ve-hicle regularly so that any leaks are detec-ted at an early stage. If you find spots of oilor other fluids in the area where it wasparked, have your vehicle inspected at theworkshop.● Service fluids leaks are harmful to the en-vironment. For this reason you should makeregular checks on the ground underneathyour vehicle. If you find spots of oil or otherfluids, have your vehicle inspected in a spe-cialised workshop.

NoteIn right-hand drive vehicles* some brakefluid reservoirs are on the other side of theengine compartment ››› Fig. 185 .

Opening and closing the bonnet

Fig. 183 Release lever in the driver's footwell area.

Fig. 184 Lever under the bonnet.

Opening the bonnetThe bonnet is released from inside the vehi-cle.

Before opening the bonnet, make sure thatthe windscreen wiper arms are in placeagainst the windscreen.

● Open the door and pull the lever under thedashboard ››› Fig. 183 1 .● To lift the bonnet, press towards the left onthe lever located under the bonnet, in thecentre ››› Fig. 184 2 . The arrester hooks arereleased.● The bonnet can be opened. Release thebonnet stay and secure it in the fixture de-signed for this in the bonnet.

Closing the bonnet● Slightly lift the bonnet.● Release the bonnet stay and replace it in itssupport.● At a height of approximately 30 cm let it fallso it locks.

If the bonnet does not close, do not pressdownwards. Open it again and let it fall asmentioned above.

WARNINGMake sure that the bonnet is properlyclosed. If it opens when driving, it can causean accident.

CAUTIONTo avoid damage to the bonnet and to thewindscreen wiper arms, only open it whenthe windscreen wipers are in place againstthe windscreen.

290


Checking levels

Fig. 185 Diagram for the location of the various ele-ments.

From time to time, the levels of the differentfluids in the vehicle must be checked. Neverfill with incorrect fluids, otherwise seriousdamage to the engine may be caused.

Coolant expansion tank ››› page 294Brake fluid reservoir ››› page 296Engine oil filler cap ››› page 293Engine oil level dipstick ››› page 293Battery ››› page 298Windscreen washer reservoir››› page 297

1

2

3

4

5

6

NoteThe layout of parts may vary depending onthe engine.

Engine oil

General notes

The engine comes with a special, multi-grade oil that can be used all year round.

Because the use of high-quality oil is essen-tial for the correct operation of the engineand its long useful life, when topping up or

changing oil, use only those oils that complywith VW standards.

We recommend that the oil change be doneby a technical service or specialised work-shop.

If the engine oil level is too lowYou can get information about the correctengine oil for your vehicle at your workshop.

If the recommended engine oil is not availa-ble, in the event of an emergency you canchange the oil once with a maximum of 0.5 Lof the next oil until the next oil change: »

291

Practical tips

Petrol engines: standard VW 504 00,VW 502 00, VW 508 00, ACEA C3 orAPI SN.

Have the oil changed by a specialised work-shop.

CUPRA recommends using original SEAT oilto guarantee high performance of CUPRAengines.

Using engine oil that is compliant with theVW 504 00 standard instead of VW 508 00could increase consumption and the vehi-cle’s CO2 emissions.

Engine oil additivesNo type of additive should be mixed with theengine oil. The deterioration caused bythese additives is not covered by the warran-ty.

CAUTIONTake the following into account if you haverefilled with an engine oil different to thosespecified in the aforementioned standards,or by your SEAT technical service centre:● There is no way of completely avoidingthe danger of causing damage to the en-gine and particulate filter*.● You can continue driving with the vehicleif the refill was no more than 0.5 l of engineoil. Go to a specialised workshop as soon aspossible and request an oil change. Other-wise, there is a danger of engine damage.

– ● If you have topped up more than 0.5 l ofengine oil, drive with the engine at low loadlevels and within the medium RPM range asa maximum. Do not drive at more than 80km/h and do not travel more than 300 km(approximately). Go to a specialised work-shop as soon as possible and request an oilchange. Otherwise, there is a danger of en-gine damage.● You are responsible for the risk of possi-ble damage to the vehicle (engine, exhaustsystem). If in doubt, do not start the engineand request assistance from the technicalservice centre.● Do not start the engine if you have top-ped up with a fluid other than engine oil.Request assistance from the technical serv-ice centre. Danger of engine damage!

NoteBefore a long trip, we recommend findingan engine oil that conforms to the corre-sponding VW specifications and recom-mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way,the correct engine oil will always be availa-ble for a top-up if needed.

Warning lamp

It lights up red

Do not carry on driving!Engine oil pressure too low.Switch off the engine. Check the engine oil level.

If this warning lamp starts to flash, and is accompa-nied by three audible warnings, switch off the engineand check the oil level. If necessary, add more oil››› page 293.

If the warning lamp flashes although the oil level iscorrect, stop driving. Do not even run the engine atidle speed! Obtain technical assistance.

It lights up yellow

Check the engine oil level as soon as possible.Replace oil as soon as you have the opportunity to doso ››› page 293 .

It flashes yellow

Fault in the oil level sensor.Have the check done by a specialised workshop. Untilthen it is advisable to check the oil level every time yourefuel.


292


Checking the engine oil level

Fig. 186 Engine oil dipstick.

The engine oil dipstick indicates the level ofthe oil.

Checking oil level– Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

– Briefly run the engine at idle speed untilthe operating temperature is reached andthen stop.

– Wait for about two minutes.

– Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick witha clean cloth and insert it again, pushing itin as far as it will go.

– Then pull it out once more and check theoil level ››› Fig. 186 . Top up with engine oilif necessary.

The oil must leave a mark between zones Aand C . It can never go above zone A .

● Zone A : do not add oil.● Zone B : you can add oil but keep the levelin that zone.● Zone C : add oil until zone B .

Depending on how you drive and the condi-tions in which the vehicle is used, oil con-sumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oilconsumption is likely to be higher for the first5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil levelmust be checked at regular intervals, pref-erably when filling the tank and before ajourney.

WARNINGAny work carried out in the engine com-partment or on the engine must be carriedout cautiously.● When working in the engine compart-ment, always observe the safety warnings››› page 289.

CAUTIONIf the oil level is above area A , do not startthe engine. This could result in damage tothe engine and catalytic converter. Contacta Technical Service.

Topping up the engine oil

Fig. 187 In the engine compartment: Engine oilfiller cap.

Before opening the bonnet, read and ob-serve the warnings ››› in Working in theengine compartment on page 289.

Topping up engine oil● Unscrew cap from engine oil filler opening››› Fig. 187.● Carefully add oil in small quantities (nomore than 0.5 l).● To avoid adding too much oil, wheneveryou add a certain amount, wait about 2 mi-nutes and recheck the oil level ››› page 293 .● If necessary, add some more oil.● When the oil level reaches at least zone››› Fig. 186 B , unscrew the engine oil fillercap carefully ››› . »

293

Practical tips

The position of the oil filler opening is shownin the corresponding engine compartmentillustration ››› page 291 .

Engine oil specification ››› page 291 .

WARNINGOil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oilcomes into contact with hot engine com-ponents when topping up.

CAUTIONIf the oil level is above area ››› Fig. 186 A ,do not start the engine. This could result indamage to the engine and catalytic con-verter. Contact a specialised workshop.

For the sake of the environmentThe oil level must never be above zone››› Fig. 186 A . Otherwise oil can be drawn inthrough the crankcase breather and leakinto the atmosphere via the exhaust sys-tem.

NoteBefore a long trip, we recommend findingan engine oil that conforms to the corre-sponding VW specifications and recom-mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way,the correct engine oil will always be availa-ble for a top-up if needed.

Engine oil change

We recommend that you have the engine oilchanged by a Technical Service.

WARNINGOnly change the engine oil yourself if youhave the specialist knowledge required!● Before opening the bonnet, read and ob-serve the warnings ››› page 289 .● Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oilmay cause burn injuries.● Wear eye protection to avoid injuries,such as acid burns, caused by splashes ofoil.● When removing the oil drain plug withyour fingers, keep your arm horizontal tohelp prevent oil from running down yourarm.● Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes intocontact with engine oil.● Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must bestored in a safe place out of the reach ofchildren.

CAUTIONNo additives should be used with engine oil.This could result in engine damage. Anydamage caused by the use of such additiveswould not be covered by the factory war-ranty.

For the sake of the environment● We recommend that you change the en-gine oil and the filter at a technical servicecentre.● Never pour oil down drains or into theground.● Use a suitable container when drainingthe used oil. It must be large enough tohold all the engine oil.

Cooling system

Coolant specifications

The engine cooling system is supplied fromthe factory with a specially treated mixture ofwater and at least 40 % of the additiveG12evo (TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixturegives the necessary frost protection down to-25°C (-13°F) and protects the light alloyparts of the engine cooling system againstcorrosion. It also prevents scaling and con-siderably raises the boiling point of the cool-ant.

To protect the cooling system, the percent-age of additive must always be at least 40 %,even in warm climates where anti-freezeprotection is not required.

If for weather reasons further protection isnecessary, the proportion of additive may be

294


increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwiseantifreeze protection will diminish and thiswill worsen cooling.

When the coolant is topped up, use a mix-ture of distilled water and at least 40 % ofthe additive G12evo for optimal protectionagainst corrosion. Mixing G12evo with G13(TL-VW 774 J), G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G),G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11(green blue) engine coolants decreases pro-tection again corrosion and should be avoi-ded.

WARNINGIf there is not enough anti-freeze in thecoolant system, the engine may fail leadingto serious damage.● Ensure that the percentage of additive iscorrect for the lowest expected ambienttemperature in the zone in which the vehi-cle is to be used.● When the outside temperature is verylow, the coolant could freeze and the vehi-cle would be immobilised.

CAUTIONThe original additives should never bemixed with coolants which are not ap-proved by SEAT.● If the fluid in the expansion tank is notpurple but is, for example, brown, this indi-cates that the G12evo additive has been

mixed with an inadequate coolant. Thecoolant must be changed as soon as possi-ble if this is the case!

For the sake of the environmentCoolants and additives can contaminatethe environment. If any fluids are spilled,they should be collected and correctly dis-posed of, with respect to the environment.

Refilling coolant

Fig. 188 In the engine compartment: marking oncoolant expansion tank.

Fig. 189 Engine compartment: coolant expansiontank cap.

The coolant tank is located in the enginecompartment ››› page 291 .

Top up coolant when the level is below the (minimum) mark.

Checking coolant level– Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

– Switch the ignition off.

– Read off the coolant level on coolant ex-pansion tank. When the engine is cold, thecoolant level should be between the marks››› Fig. 188. When the engine is hot, it maybe slightly above the upper mark.

Topping up coolant– Wait for the engine to cool down. »

295

Practical tips

– Cover the coolant expansion tank cap witha cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left››› .

– Top up the coolant only if there is still cool-ant in the expansion tank, otherwise youcould damage the engine. If there is nocoolant in the expansion tank, do not con-tinue driving. You should obtain professio-nal assistance ››› .

– If there is still some coolant in the expan-sion tank, top up to the upper mark.

– Top up with coolant until the level be-comes stable.

– Screw the cap back on correctly.

If there is a coolant leak, take the vehiclespecialised workshop to have the coolingsystem examined.

WARNING● The cooling system is under pressure. Donot unscrew the cap on the coolant expan-sion tank when the engine is hot: risk ofburns!● Store the antifreeze in its original con-tainer and keep it out of reach of children.● If working inside the engine compart-ment, remember that, even when the igni-tion is switched off, the radiator fan maystart up automatically, and therefore thereis a risk of injury.

CAUTIONIf you run out of coolant in the expansiontank, park the car in a safe place and do notcontinue driving. Obtain technical assis-tance.

Brake fluid

Check and refill the brake fluid

Fig. 190 Engine compartment: brake fluid reser-voir cap.

The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en-gine compartment ››› page 291 .

Checking the brake fluid levelThe brake fluid level must be between the and markings.

However, if the brake fluid level goes downnoticeably in a short time, or drops belowthe mark, there may be a leak in the brakesystem. Seek specialist assistance. A warninglight on the instrument panel display moni-tors the brake fluid level ››› page 80 .

In right-hand drive vehicles the brake fluidreservoir is on the other side of the enginecompartment.

Changing brake fluidWe recommend that you have the brake fluidchanged by a Technical Service.

WARNINGIf the brake fluid level is low or unsuita-ble/old brake fluid is used, the brake sys-tem may fail or braking power may be re-duced.● Check the brake system and the brakefluid level regularly!● When the brake fluid is used and brakesare subjected to extreme braking forces,bubbles of vapour form in the brake system.These bubbles can significantly reducebraking power, notably increasing brakingdistance, and could result in the total fail-ure of the brake system.● Be sure to always use the correct brakefluid. Only use brake fluid that expresslymeets the VW 501 14 standard.

296


● You can buy VW 501 14 standard brakefluid at a specialised CUPRA service or at aSEAT Official Service. If none is available,use only high-quality brake fluid that meetsDIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards, or USAStandards FMVSS 116 DOT 4.● The replacement brake fluid must benew.● Brake fluid should be stored in the closedoriginal container in a safe place out ofreach of children. Risk of poisoning!

CAUTIONBrake fluid should not come into contactwith the vehicle paintwork, as it is abrasive.

For the sake of the environmentBrake fluid is an environmental pollutant.Collect any spilt service fluids and allow aprofessional to dispose of them.

Windscreen washer reservoir

Checking the level of the windowwasher tank and refilling it

Fig. 191 In the engine compartment: windowwasher tank cap.

The window washer tank is in the enginecompartment ››› page 291 .

Check the water level in the windscreenwasher reservoir regularly and top up as re-quired.

The window washer tank contains liquid de-tergent for the windscreen and rear window.

● Open the bonnet ››› page 289 .● The window washer tank is marked withthe symbol on the cap.● Check there is enough windscreen water inthe reservoir.

Plain water is not enough to clean the wind-screen and headlights. We recommend thatyou always add a product to the windscreenwasher fluid.

Recommended windscreen wipers● For the hottest seasons we recommendsummer G 052 184 A1 for clear glass. Propor-tions of the mixture in the washer fluid tank:1:100 (1 part concentrate per 100 parts wa-ter).● All year round, G 052 164 A2 for clear glass.Approximate proportion of the winter mix-ture, up to -18°C (0°F): 1:2 (1 part concen-trate per 2 parts water); otherwise, a 1:4 pro-portion of mixture in the washer fluid tank.

The capacity of the window washer tank canbe found in ››› page 328 .

CAUTIONIf the water from the windscreen washerdoes not contain enough anti-freeze, itmay freeze on the windscreen and rearwindow, reducing forward and rear visibili-ty.● In winter, ensure the windscreen washercontains enough anti-freeze.● In cold conditions, you should not use thewindscreen wiper system unless you havewarmed the windscreen with the ventila-tion system. The antifreeze could freeze onthe windscreen and reduce visibility. »

297

Practical tips

CAUTIONNever mix an unsuitable antifreeze or othersimilar additives with the windscreen wash-er water. A greasy layer may be formed onthe windscreen which will impair visibility.● Use clean water with a window cleanerrecommended by CUPRA.● If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze tothe water in the reservoir.

CAUTION● Do not mix cleaning products recom-mended by CUPRA with other products.This could lead to flocculation and mayblock the windscreen washer jets.● When topping up service fluids, make ab-solutely certain that you fill the fluids intothe correct reservoirs. Using the wrong flu-ids could cause serious malfunctions andengine damage!● Lack of window washer fluid causes theview through the windscreen to be ob-scured.

12-volt battery

General information

The battery is located in the engine com-partment and is almost maintenance-free.

It is checked as part of the Inspection Serv-ice. Nevertheless, check the terminals areclean and have the correct tightening tor-que, especially in summer and winter.

All work on batteries requires specialistknowledge. Please refer to a specialised CU-PRA Service, SEAT Official Service or a work-shop specialising in batteries: risk of burns orexploding battery!

The battery must not be opened. Never tryto change the fluid level of the battery. Oth-erwise explosive gas is released from thebattery that could cause an explosion.

Battery warning indications

Wear eye protection.

Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear pro-tective gloves and eye protection. Rinse anysplashes of electrolyte with plenty of water.

Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are pro-hibited.

The battery should only be charged in a well-ventilated zone. Risk of explosion!

Keep children away from acid and batteries!

Always follow the instruction manual.

Disconnecting the batteryThe battery should only be disconnected inexceptional cases. When the battery is dis-connected, some of the vehicle's functions

are lost. These functions will require reset-ting after the battery is reconnected.

When disconnecting the battery from thevehicle on-board network, disconnect firstthe negative cable and then the positive ca-ble.

Deactivate the anti-theft alarm* before youdisconnect the battery Otherwise the alarmwill be triggered.

If the vehicle is not used for long periodsThe vehicle has a system for monitoring thecurrent consumption when the engine is leftunused for long periods of time ››› page 301 .Some functions, such as the interior lights,or the remote door opening, may be tempo-rarily disabled to prevent the battery fromrunning flat. These functions will come backon as soon as the ignition is switched on andthe engine started.

Winter conditionsDuring the winter, the starting power may bereduced, and if necessary, the batteryshould be charged ›››

WARNINGAlways be aware of the danger of injury andchemical burns as well as the risk of acci-dent or fire when working on the batteryand the electrical system:

298


● Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes,skin and clothing from acid and particlescontaining lead.● Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wearprotective gloves and eye protection. Donot tilt the batteries. This could spill acidthrough the vents.● Neutralise any electrolyte splashes on theskin, eyes or clothing with a soapy solution,and rinse off with plenty of water. If acid isswallowed by mistake, consult a doctor im-mediately.● Fires, sparks, open flames and smokingare prohibited. When handling cables andelectrical equipment, avoid causing sparksand electrostatic charge. Never short thebattery terminals. High-energy sparks cancause injury.● A highly explosive mixture of gases is re-leased when the battery is under charge.The batteries should be charged in a well-ventilated room only.● Keep children away from acid and batter-ies.● Before working on the electrical system,you must switch off the engine, the ignitionand all electrical devices. The negative ca-ble on the battery must be disconnected.When a light bulb is changed, you need on-ly switch off the light.● Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by un-locking the vehicle before you disconnect

the battery! The alarm will otherwise betriggered.● When disconnecting the battery from thevehicle on-board network, disconnect firstthe negative cable and then the positivecable.● Switch off all electrical devices before re-connecting the battery. Reconnect first thepositive cable and then the negative cable.Never reverse the polarity of the connec-tions. This could cause an electrical fire.● Never charge a frozen battery, or onewhich has thawed. This could result in ex-plosions and chemical burns. Always re-place a battery which has frozen. A flat bat-tery can also freeze at temperatures closeto 0°C (+32°F).● Ensure that the vent hose is always con-nected to the battery.● Never use a defective battery. This couldcause an explosion. Replace a damagedbattery immediately.

CAUTION● Do not expose the battery to direct sun-light over a long period of time, as the in-tense ultraviolet radiation can damage thebattery housing.● If the vehicle is left standing in cold con-ditions for a long period, protect the bat-tery from “freezing”. If it freezes it will bedamaged.

Warning lamp

It lights up

Alternator fault.

The control lamp lights up when the ignitionis switched on. It should go out when the en-gine has started running.

If the control lamp lights up while driving,the alternator is no longer charging the bat-tery. You should immediately drive to thenearest specialised workshop.

You should avoid using electrical equipmentthat is not absolutely necessary because thiswill drain the battery.

Checking the battery electrolyte level

Fig. 192 Sight glass on the top of the 12 volt bat-tery (schematic representation). »

299

Practical tips

The electrolyte level should be checked reg-ularly in high-mileage vehicles, in hot coun-tries and in older batteries.

● Open the bonnet and then lift the coverthat protects the front part of the battery››› in Working in the engine compart-ment on page 289.● Check the colour display in the "magic eye"on the top of the battery.● If there are air bubbles in the window, tapthe window gently until they disperse.

The position of the battery is shown in thecorresponding engine compartment dia-gram ››› page 291 .

The “magic eye” indicator, located on thetop of the battery changes colour, depend-ing on the charge state and electrolyte levelof the battery.

There are two different colours:The battery's electro-

lyte level is too low. Go to a specialisedworkshop to have the battery checkedand replaced if necessary.

The battery’s electrolyte level is cor-rect.

Yellow or colourless:

Black:

Charging or changing the battery

If you often drive short distances or if the ve-hicle is not driven for long periods, the bat-tery should be checked by a specialisedworkshop between the scheduled services.

If the battery has discharged and you haveproblems starting the vehicle, the batterymight be damaged. If this happens, we rec-ommend you have the vehicle batterychecked by a Technical Service where it willbe re-charged or replaced.

Charging the batteryThe vehicle battery should be charged by aspecialised workshop only, as batteries usingspecial technology have been installed andthey must be charged in a controlled envi-ronment.

Replacing a vehicle batteryThe battery has been developed to suit theconditions of its location and has specialsafety features. If the battery must be re-placed, consult a technical service for infor-mation on electromagnetic compatibility,the size and maintenance, performance andsafety requirements of the new battery inyour vehicle before you purchase one. CU-PRA recommends you have the battery re-placed by a technical service.

Start-Stop systems (››› page 205 ) are equip-ped with a special battery. Therefore, it mustonly be replaced with a battery of the samespecifications.

Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligentpower management system to control thedistribution of electrical energy››› page 301. The power management func-tion ensures that the battery is chargedmuch more efficiently than on vehicles with-out a power management system. To main-tain this function after replacing the battery,we recommend that the replacement bat-tery used is of the same make and type asthe original fitted battery. To make properuse of the power management function afterthe battery has been changed, have the bat-tery coded to the power management modeat a specialised workshop.

WARNING● Always use only maintenance free batter-ies that do not run flat alone and whoseproperties, specifications and size corre-spond to the standard battery. The specifi-cations are indicated on the battery case.● Before starting any work on the batteries,you must read and observe the warnings››› in General information on page 298.

For the sake of the environment Batteries contain toxic substances suchas sulphuric acid and lead. They must be

300


disposed of appropriately and must not bedisposed of with ordinary household waste.

Energy management

Optimisation of the starting capacity

The power management controls the distri-bution of electrical energy and thus helps toensure that there is always enough poweravailable to start the engine.

If a vehicle with a conventional electrical sys-tem is left parked for a long time, the batterywill gradually lose its charge because certainelectrical devices, such as the electronicgearbox lock continues to draw current evenwhen the ignition is off. In some cases theremay not be enough power available to startthe engine.

Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligentpower management system to control thedistribution of electrical energy. This signifi-cantly improves reliability when starting theengine, and also prolongs the useful life ofthe battery.

The main functions incorporated in the pow-er management system are battery diagno-sis, residual current management and dy-namic power management.

Battery diagnosisThe battery diagnosis function constantlyregisters the condition of the battery. Sen-sors detect the battery voltage, battery cur-rent and battery temperature. This enablesthe system to calculate the current powerlevel and charge condition of the battery.

Residual current managementThe residual current management reducespower consumption while the vehicle isparked. It controls the supply of power to thevarious electrical devices while the ignition isswitched off. The system takes the batterydiagnosis data into consideration.

Depending on the power level of the battery,switch off the individual electrical devicesone after the other to prevent the batteryfrom losing too much charge and to ensurethat the engine can be started reliably.

Dynamic power managementWhile the vehicle is moving, this functiondistributes the available power to the variouselectrical devices and systems according totheir requirements. The power managementensures that on-board systems do not con-sume more electrical power than the alter-nator can supply, and thus maintains themaximum possible battery power level.

Note● Neither is the power management systemable to overcome the given physical limits.Please remember that the power and use-ful life of the battery are limited.● When there is a risk that the vehicle willnot start, the alternator power failure or lowbattery charge level warning lamp will beshown ››› page 80 .

Flat battery

Starting ability has first priority.

Short trips, city traffic and low temperaturesall place a heavy load on the battery. In theseconditions a large amount of power is con-sumed, but only a small amount is supplied.The situation is also critical if electrical devi-ces are in use when the engine is not run-ning. In this case power is consumed whennone is being generated.

In these situations you will be aware that thepower management system is intervening tocontrol the distribution of electrical power.

When the vehicle is parked for long peri-odsIf you do not drive your vehicle for a periodof several days or weeks, the power manage-ment will gradually shut off the electrical de-vices one by one or reduce the amount of »

301

Practical tips

current they are using. This limits theamount of power consumed and helps toensure reliable starting even after a long pe-riod. Some convenience functions, such asremote vehicle opening, may not be availa-ble under certain circumstances. Thesefunctions will be restored when you switchon the ignition and start the engine.

With the engine switched offFor example, if you listen to the sound sys-tem with the engine switched off the batterywill run down.

If the energy consumption means there is arisk that the engine will not start, a text willappear in vehicles with a driver informationsystem*.

This driver indicator tells you that you muststart the engine so that the battery can re-charge.

When the engine is runningAlthough the alternator generates electricalpower, the battery can still become dis-charged while the vehicle is being driven.This can occur when a lot of power is beingconsumed but only a small amount supplied,especially if the battery is not fully chargedinitially.

To restore the necessary energy balance, thesystem will then temporarily shut off theelectrical devices that are using a lot of pow-

er, or reduce the current they are consum-ing. Heating systems in particular use a largeamount of electrical power. If you notice, forinstance, that the seat heating* or the rearwindow heater is not working, they may havebeen temporarily switched off or regulatedto a lower heat output. These systems will beavailable again as soon as sufficient electricalpower is available.

You may also notice that the engine runs at aslightly faster idling speed when necessary.This is quite normal, and no cause for con-cern. The increased idling speed allows thealternator to meet the greater power re-quirement and charge the battery at thesame time.

Wheels

Wheels and tyres

General notes

– When driving with new tyres, be especiallycareful during the first 500 km (300 miles).

– If you have to drive over a kerb or similarobstacle, drive very slowly and as near aspossible at a right angle to the obstacle.

– Check from time to time if the tyres aredamaged (punctures, cuts, cracks ordents). Remove any foreign objects em-bedded in the treads.

– Damaged wheels and tyres must be re-placed immediately.

– Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.

– Replace any missing valve caps as soon aspossible.

– Mark the wheels before taking them off sothat they rotate in the same direction whenput back.

– When removed, the wheels or tyres shouldbe stored in a cool, dry and preferably darkplace.

302

Wheels

Low profile tyresLow profile tyres have a wider tread, a largerwheel diameter and a lower sidewall height.Therefore, its driving behaviour is more agile.

Low profile tyres may deteriorate morequickly than standard tyres, for instance dueto strong knocks, potholes, manhole coversand kerbs. Correct tyre pressure is very im-portant ››› page 305 .

To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, drivewith special care when driving on roads inpoor condition.

Visually check your wheels every 3000 km.

If the tyres or rims have received a heavy im-pact or have been damaged, have a special-ised workshop check whether or not it isnecessary to change the tyre.

Low profile tyres may deteriorate morequickly than standard tyres.

Concealed damageDamage to tyres and rims is often not readilyvisible. If you notice unusual vibration or thecar pulling to one side, this may indicatethat one of the tyres is damaged. Reducespeed immediately if there is any reason tosuspect that damage may have occurred. In-spect the tyres for damage. If no externaldamage is visible, drive slowly and carefullyto the nearest specialised workshop andhave the car inspected.

Foreign objects inserted in the tyre● Do not remove foreign bodies if they havepenetrated through the tyre wall!● If the vehicle comes with a tyre mobilitysystem, where necessary seal the damagedtyre as shown in section ››› page 44 . Use aspecialised workshop for repair or replace-ment. To do so, CUPRA recommends goingto a specialised CUPRA dealer or any SEATdealership.

The sealant at the lower part of the tyretread wraps around the foreign body andprovisionally seals the tyre.

Tyres with directional tread patternAn arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates thedirection of rotation on single drive tyres. Al-ways note the direction of rotation indicatedwhen mounting the wheel. This makes surethat optimal use is made of tyre properties interms of aquaplaning, grip, excessive noiseand wear.

Subsequent fitting of accessoriesIf you wish to change or fit wheels, rims orwheel trims, we recommend that you con-sult with a specialised CUPRA Service orSEAT Official Service centre for advice re-garding current technical recommendations.

Speed symbolsThe speed rating indicates the maximumspeed permitted for the tyres.

max. 150 km/h (93 mph)max. 160 km/h (99 mph)max. 170 km/h (106 mph)max. 180 km/h (112 mph)max. 190 km/h (118 mph)max. 200 km/h (124 mph)max. 210 km/h (130 mph)max. 240 km/h (149 mph)max. 240 km/h (149 mph)max. 270 km/h (168 mph)max. 300 km/h (186 mph)

Some manufacturers use the letters “ZR” fortyres with a maximum authorised speedabove 240 km/h (149 mph).

WARNING● New tyres do not have maximum gripduring the first 500 km. Drive particularlycarefully to avoid possible accidents.● Never drive with damaged tyres. This maycause an accident.● If you notice unusual vibrations or if thevehicle pulls to one side when driving, stopthe vehicle immediately and check thetyres. »

PQRSTUHVZWY

303

Practical tips

● Never use old tyres or those with an un-known history of use.

New wheels and tyres

It is best to have all wheels and tyres servicedby a specialised workshop. There they havethe required knowledge, the special toolsand the corresponding spare parts.

● Even winter tyres lose their grip on ice. Ifyou have installed new tyres, drive the first500 km carefully and at a moderate speed.● All four wheels must be fitted with tyres ofthe same type, size (rolling circumference)and, if possible, tread pattern.● When changing tyres, do not change justone; change at least two on the same axle.● If you want to equip your vehicle with acombination tyres and rims that are differentto those fitted in the factory, inform yourspecialised workshop before purchasingthem ››› The sizes of the rims and tyres approved foryour vehicle are listed in the vehicle docu-mentation (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformityor COC document1)). The vehicle documen-tation varies depending on the country ofresidence.

If the type of spare wheel is different formthe normal wheels — e.g. in the case of win-ter tyres or particularly wide tyres — thespare wheel should only be used temporarilyin the event of a puncture, and the vehicleshould be driven with care. Refit the normalroad wheel as soon as possible.

In vehicles with four-wheel drive, the 4wheels must be fitted with tyres of the samebrand, type and tread so that the tractionsystem is not damaged by a difference in thenumber of turns of the wheels. Therefore, inthe event of a puncture, only a spare wheelwith the same perimeter as normal tyresshould be used.

Manufacturing dateThe manufacturing date is also indicated onthe tyre sidewall (or on the inside face of thewheel):

DOT ... 2218 ...it means, for example, that the tyre was man-ufactured in the 22nd week of 2018.

WARNING● Use only combinations of tyres and rims,as well as suitable wheel nuts, approved byCUPRA. Otherwise the vehicle may bedamaged, causing an accident.

● For technical reasons it is not possible touse wheels of other vehicles; in some casesnot even wheels from the same vehiclemodel should be used.● Always ensure that the tyres you havechosen have adequate clearance. When se-lecting replacement tyres, do not rely en-tirely on the nominal tyre size marked onthe tyre, since the nominal tyre size can dif-fer significantly depending on the manu-facturer. Lack of clearance can damage thetyres or the vehicle and, as a result, endan-ger road safety. Risk of accident!● Only use tyres that are over 6 years old inan emergency, and drive with due care.● The fitting of tyres with run-flat proper-ties is not permitted on your vehicle! Pro-hibited use can cause accidents or candamage your vehicle.● If decorative hubcaps are subsequentlyfitted, make sure that they allow enough airin to cool the braking system. Risk of acci-dent!● Models with aerodynamic wheel rimsand/or with bolt-on plastic elements (moreclosed design) increase the likelihood of iceand snow accumulating on the inside. Thisshould be taken into account, dependingon the driving situations, as snow or ice ac-cumulated in the wheels can cause vibra-tion in the vehicle when it drives at over 40

1) COC = certificate of conformity.304

Wheels

km/h. It is advisable to remove ice andsnow from the inside of the wheels usinghot water.● If you drive on dirt or gravel tracks, thelikelihood of stones becoming trapped in-side wheel rims with plastic elements in-creases when driving at high speed or in asporty manner. If you see that there arestones trapped between the aluminiumwheel rim and the insert, you can attemptto remove them using pressurised water.

For the sake of the environmentOld tyres must be disposed of according tothe laws in the country concerned.

Note● A CUPRA Service Centre should be con-sulted to find out whether wheels or tyresof different sizes to those originally fittedby CUPRA can be fitted, and to find outabout the combinations allowed betweenthe front axle (axle 1) and the rear axle(axle 2).● Never mount used tyres if you are notsure of their “previous history”.

Tyre life

Fig. 193 Location of the tyre pressure sticker.

Correct inflation pressures and sensible driv-ing habits will increase the useful life of yourtyres.

● Check tyre pressure at least once a month,and also prior to any long trip.● The tyre pressure should only be checkedwhen the tyres are cold. Do not reduce thepressure of warm tyres.● Adjust tyre pressure to the load being car-ried by the vehicle ››› Fig. 193 .● In vehicles with a tyre pressure indicator,save the modified tyre pressure ››› page 309 .

● Avoid fast cornering and hard acceleration.● Inspect the tyres for irregular wear fromtime to time.

Tyre pressureThe tyre inflation pressures are listed on asticker on the rear of the front left doorframe ››› Fig. 193 .

Insufficient or excessive pressure greatly re-duces the useful life of the tyres and ad-versely affects vehicle performance and ride.Correct inflation pressures are very impor-tant, especially at high speeds.

The tyre pressure must be adjusted accord-ing to the load the vehicle is carrying. If thevehicle is going to carry the maximum load,the tyre pressure should be increased to themaximum value indicated on the sticker››› Fig. 193.

Do not forget the spare wheel when check-ing the tyre pressures: Keep this spare wheelinflated to the highest pressure required forthe road wheels.

In the case of a minimised temporary sparewheel (125/70 R18) inflate to a pressure of4.2 bar as indicated on the tyre pressure la-bel ››› Fig. 193 . »

305

Practical tips

Driving styleFast cornering, heavy acceleration and hardbraking (squealing tyres) all increase tyrewear.

Wheel balanceThe wheels on new vehicles are balanced.However, certain circumstances may lead toimbalance (run-out), which is detected as vi-brations in the steering wheel.

Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced,as they otherwise cause excessive wear onsteering, suspension and tyres. A wheel mustalso be rebalanced when a new tyre is fittedor if a tyre is repaired.

Incorrect wheel alignmentIncorrect running gear alignment causes ex-cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of thevehicle. If you notice excessive tyre wear,you should check wheel alignment at a spe-cialised CUPRA Service or SEAT OfficialService.

WARNINGUnsuitable handling of the wheels and tyresmay lead to sudden tyre pressure losses, totread separation or even to a blow-out.● The driver is responsible for ensuring thatall of the vehicle tyres are correctly inflatedto the right pressure. The recommended

tyre pressure is indicated on the label››› Fig. 193.● Check tyre pressures regularly and en-sure they are maintained at the pressuresindicated. Tyre pressure that is too lowcould cause overheating, resulting in treaddetachment or even burst tyres.● When the tyres are cold, tyre pressureshould be that indicated on the label››› Fig. 193.● Regularly check the cold inflation pres-sure of the tyres. If necessary, change thetyre pressure of the vehicle tyres while theyare cold.● Regularly check your tyres for damageand wear.● Never exceed the maximum permittedspeed or loads specified for the type of tyrefitted on your vehicle.

For the sake of the environmentUnder-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-sumption.

Tread wear indicators

Fig. 194 Tyre profile: tread wear indicators.

Fig. 195 Interchanging tyres.

Wear indicators around 1.6 mm high can befound on the base of the original tyre treads,ordered at regular intervals and runningacross the tread ››› Fig. 194 . The letters"TWI" or triangles on the sidewall of the tyremark the position of the wear indicators.

306

Wheels

The minimum permitted profile depth1) havebeen reached when the tyres have worndown to the wear indicators. Replace thetyres with new ones ››› .

Changing wheels aroundTo ensure that the wear is equal on all tyresthe wheels should be changed round fromtime to time according to the system››› Fig. 195. The useful life of all the tyres willthen be about the same time.

WARNINGThe tyres must be replaced at the latestwhen the tread is worn down to the treadwear indicators. Failure to follow this in-struction could result in an accident.● Particularly in difficult driving conditionssuch as wet or icy roads. It is important thatthe tyre tread be as deep as possible and beapproximately the same on the tyres ofboth the front and the rear axles.● The scant driving safety due to insuffi-cient tread depth is particularly evident invehicle handling, when there is a risk of“aquaplaning” in deep puddles of waterand when driving through corners, andbraking is also adversely affected.

● The speed has to be adapted accordingly,otherwise there is a risk of losing controlover the vehicle.

Wheel nuts

The wheel nuts are matched to the rims.When installing different wheels (for instancealloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres) it isimportant to use the correct wheel nuts withthe right length and correctly shaped boltheads. This ensures that wheels are fitted se-curely and that the brake system functionscorrectly.

The wheel nuts must be clean and turn easi-ly.

A special adapter is required to turn the anti-theft wheel nuts* ››› page 47 .

WARNINGWheel nuts should never be greased oroiled.● Use only wheel nuts which belong to thewheel.● If the prescribed torque of the wheel nutsis too low, they could loosen whilst the ve-hicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the

tightening torque is too high, the wheelnuts and threads can be damaged.

CAUTIONSee ››› page 49 to find out the recommen-ded tightening torque for wheel nuts forsteel and alloy rims.

Winter tyres

– Winter tyres must be fitted on all fourwheels.

– Only use winter tyres that are approved foryour vehicle.

– Please note that the maximum permissiblespeed for winter tyres may be lower thanfor summer tyres.

– Also note that winter tyres are no longereffective when the tread is worn down.

– After fitting the wheels you must alwayscheck the tyre pressures. When doing so,take into account the correct tyre pres-sures listed on the rear of the front leftdoor frame ››› page 305 .

In winter road conditions winter tyres willconsiderably improve vehicle handling. The »

1) Follow the regulations of the country you aredriving in.

307

Practical tips

design of summer tyres (width, rubber com-pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on iceand snow. This applies particularly to vehi-cles equipped with wide section tyres orwith high speed tyres (code letters H, V or Yon the sidewall).

Only use winter tyres of the correct type ap-proved for your vehicle. The sizes of thesetyres are specified in the vehicle's docu-ments (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity orCOC1)). The vehicle documentation variesdepending on the country of residence.

Winter tyres lose a great deal of their proper-ties when the tread is worn down to a depthof 4 mm.

The performance of winter tyres is also se-verely impaired by ageing, even if the tread isstill much deeper than 4 mm.

A code letter indicating the speed limit isstamped on all winter tyres ››› page 303 .

Vehicles capable of exceeding these speedsmust have an appropriate sticker attachedso that it is visible to the driver. Suitablestickers are available at specialised CUPRAServices, SEAT Official Service centres andspecialised workshops. Please note the reg-ulations to this effect in your country.

“All-weather” tyres can also be used insteadof winter tyres.

Using winter tyres with V-ratingPlease note that the generally applicable240 km/h (149 mph) speed for winter tyreswith the letter V is subject to technical re-strictions; the maximum permissiblespeed for your vehicle may be significantlylower. The maximum speed limit for thesetyres depends directly on the maximum axleweights for your car and on the listed weightrating of the tyres being used.

It is best to contact a specialised CUPRAService or SEAT Official Service to check themaximum speed which is permissible for theV-rated tyres fitted on your car on the basisof this information.

WARNINGExceeding the maximum speed permittedfor the winter tyres fitted on your car cancause tyre failure, resulting in a loss of con-trol of the vehicle – risk of accident.

For the sake of the environmentWhen winter is over, change back to sum-mer tyres at an appropriate moment. Intemperatures above +7°C (+45°F), perform-ance will be improved if summer tyres areused. Fuel consumption, wear and noiseswhile driving will all be reduced.

Snow chains

Snow chains must only be fitted to the frontwheels, even on vehicles with four-wheeldrive.

● Check that they are correctly seated afterdriving for a few yards; correct the position ifnecessary, in accordance with the manufac-turer's fitting instructions.● Keep your speed below 50 km/h (30 mph).● If there is a danger of being trapped de-spite having fitted the chains, it is best to dis-able the traction control (TCS) in the ESC››› page 259, Connecting and disconnect-ing the ESC and TCS.

Snow chains will improve braking ability aswell as traction in winter conditions.

For technical reasons snow chains may onlybe used with the following wheel rim/tyrecombination.

1) COC = certificate of conformity.308

Wheels

Tyres Wheel rim Chains

215/55 R17 7.5Jx17ET40 Max. link 15 mm

225/55 R17 7.5Jx17ET40

Max. link 9 mm225/50 R18 8x18 ET40

245/45 R18 8x18 ET40

245/40 R19 8x19 ET40

Other dimensions do not allow chains

Remove any central wheel trims before fit-ting snow chains.

WARNINGThe use of unsuitable or incorrectly fittedchains could lead to serious accidents anddamage.● Always the appropriate snow chains.● Observe the fitting instructions providedby the snow chain manufacturer.● Never exceed the maximum permittedspeeds when driving with snow chains.

CAUTION● Remove the snow chains to drive on roadswithout snow. Otherwise they will impairvehicle handling, damage the tyres andwear out very quickly.● Wheel rims may be damaged or scratch-ed if the chains come into direct contact

with them. CUPRA recommends the use ofcoated snow chains.

Tyre pressure monitor system

Control lamp

It lights up

The inflation pressure of one or more wheels is muchlower than the value set by the driver, or the tyre hasstructural damage.In addition, a audible warning sounds and a text mes-sage is displayed on the instrument panel screen. Stop the vehicle! Stop the vehicle safely as soon aspossible. Check all tyres and pressures. Replace anydamaged tyres.

Flashes

System faultThe control lamp flashes for approximately 1 minuteand then lights up permanently.If the tyre is inflated correctly, switch the ignition offand on again. Re-calibrate the tyre pressure monitorindicator ››› page 310 . If the fault continues, go to aspecialised workshop.

Several control and warning lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-ed on while the function is verified. They willswitch off after a few seconds.


Tyre monitor system

Fig. 196 Instrument panel: warning of loss of tyrepressure.

The tyre pressure monitoring system com-pares the individual speeds of each wheeland thus the dynamic radius with the help ofthe ABS sensors.

If the rolling circumference of one or morewheels has changed, the tyre pressure moni-toring indicator will indicate this on the in-strument panel through a warning lamp anda warning to the driver››› Fig. 196 . When on-ly one specific tyre is affected, its positionwithin the vehicle will be indicated. »

309

Practical tips

Loss of pressure: Check lefttyre pressure!

Wheel tread changeThe wheel diameter changes when:

● Tyre pressure is changed manually.● Tyre pressure is insufficient.● The tyre structure is damaged.● The vehicle is unbalanced because of aload.● The wheels on an axle are subject to aheavier load (e.g. with a heavy load).● The vehicle is fitted with snow chains.● The temporary spare wheel is fitted.● The wheel on one axle is changed.

There may be a delay in the reaction of thetyre pressure monitoring indicator or itmay not indicate anything under certain cir-cumstances (e.g. sporty driving, snow-cov-ered or unpaved roads, or when driving withsnow chains).

Calibrate the tyre pressure monitoring in-dicatorAfter changing the tyre pressure or replacingone or more wheels, the tyre pressure moni-toring indicator must be recalibrated. Do thesame, for example, when the front and rearwheels are swapped.

● Switch the ignition on.● Memorise the new inflation pressure in theInfotainment system: function button > Vehicle info > Vehicle status ››› page 85 .● OR: from the instrument cluster's Servicemenu ››› page 69 .

When driving, the system self-calibrates thetyre pressure provided by the driver and thewheels fitted. After a long journey with variedspeeds the programmed values are collectedand monitored.

With the wheels under very heavy loads, thetyre pressure must be increased to the totalrecommended tyre pressure before calibra-tion ››› Fig. 193 .

WARNINGWhen the tyres are inflated at differentpressures or at a pressure that is too lowthen a tyre may be damaged resulting in aloss of control of the vehicle and a seriousor fatal accident.● If the lamp lights up, reduce speed im-mediately and avoid any sudden turning orbraking manoeuvre. Stop when possible,and check the tyre pressure and status.● The tyre pressure monitoring system canonly operate correctly if all of the tyres areinflated to the correct pressure when cold.● If a tyre has not been punctured and itdoes not have to be changed immediately,drive to the nearest specialised workshop

at a moderate speed and have the tyrechecked and inflated to the correct pres-sure.

Note● Driving for the first time with new tyres ata high speed can cause them to slightly ex-pand, which could then produce an airpressure warning.● If excessively low tyre pressure is detec-ted with the ignition on, an audible warningwill sound. In the event that there is a faultin the system, an audible warning willsound.● Driving on dirt tracks for a long period oftime or driving in a sporty style can tempo-rarily deactivate the TPMS. The controllamp shows a fault, but disappears whenroad conditions or the driving style change.● Do not only rely on the tyre pressuremonitoring system. Regularly check yourtyres to ensure that the tyre pressure is cor-rect and that the tyres are not damageddue to puncture, cuts, tears and im-pacts/dents. Remove objects from thetyres only when they have not pierced thetyres.● The tyre pressure monitoring indicatordoes not function when there is a fault inthe ESC or ABS ››› page 257 .

310

Wheels

Spare wheel

Location and use of the temporaryspare wheel

Fig. 197 In the luggage compartment: load floorraised.

Fig. 198 In the luggage compartment: remove thesubwoofer.

The temporary spare wheel is stored underthe floor panel in the luggage compartmentand is attached by a thumbnut.

The temporary spare wheel has been de-signed to be used for short periods of time.Have the tyre checked and replaced as soonas possible at a specialised CUPRA Service,SEAT Official Service or at a specialisedworkshop.

The spare wheel must not be switched for aspare wheel from another vehicle.

Removing the temporary spare wheel● Lift and hold up the floor panel to removethe temporary spare wheel ››› page 133 .● Turn the thumb wheel anti-clockwise››› Fig. 197.

● Take out the temporary spare wheel.

Getting the spare wheel out of vehicleswith BEATS Audio 10 speakers (with sub-woofer)*To remove the spare wheel, you must first re-move the subwoofer.

● Vehicles without a variable floor in the lug-gage compartment: pull the floor of the lug-gage compartment (carpet) upwards to get itout.● Vehicles with a variable luggage compart-ment floor: lift and secure the floor luggagecompartment as explained in ››› page 133 .● Disconnect the subwoofer ››› Fig. 198 1speaker cable.● Turn the securing wheel in an anti-clock-wise direction ››› Fig. 198 2 .● Remove the subwoofer speaker and thespare wheel.● When re-mounting the spare tyre, placethe subwoofer on the base of the wheel rimwith care. When doing so, the tip of the“FRONT” arrow on the subwoofer shouldpoint forward.● Reconnect the speaker cable and firmlyrotate the securing wheel clockwise so thatthe subwoofer system and wheel are firmly inplace. »

311

Practical tips

ChainsFor technical reasons, snow chains must notbe used on the temporary spare wheel.

If you have a puncture on one of the frontwheels when using snow chains, fit the tem-porary spare wheel in place of one of therear wheels. Fit the snow chains on the rearwheel that you have removed and replacethe punctured front wheel with this wheel.

WARNING● After fitting the temporary spare wheel,check the tyre pressures as soon as possi-ble. Failure to do so may cause an accident.The tyre pressure is listed on the back ofthe left front door frame ››› Fig. 193 .● Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph)when the temporary spare wheel is fittedon the vehicle: risk of accident!● Never travel more than 200 km using atemporary spare wheel.● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard brakingand fast cornering: risk of accident!● Never use more than one temporaryspare wheel at the same time, risk of acci-dent.● No other type of tyre (normal summer orwinter tyre) may be fitted on the compacttemporary spare wheel rim.● If you are driving using the spare wheel,the ACC system could automatically switch

off during the journey. Switch off the sys-tem when starting off.

312

Service

Maintenance

Service

Service intervals

Service work and the Digital Mainte-nance Plan

Log of services performed (“Digital Main-tenance Plan”)Specialised CUPRA dealers, SEAT dealer-ships or a specialised workshop recordsService receipts in a central system. Thanksto this comprehensive documentation of theservice history, it is possible to reproduce theservices performed any time. CUPRA recom-mends requesting a Service receipt after ev-ery service carried out containing all theservices carried out on the system.

Whenever there is a new service the receiptis replaced with a current one.

The Digital Maintenance Plan is not availa-ble in some markets. In this case, your spe-cialised CUPRA dealer or a SEAT dealer-ship will inform you about the current doc-umentation of the work.

Service worksIn the Digital Maintenance Plan, your special-ised CUPRA dealer, SEAT dealership or aspecialised workshop will document the fol-lowing information:

● When each one of the services was carriedout.● Whether a specific repair has been sug-gested, e.g. changing the brake pads in thenear future.● If you have expressed a special request forthe maintenance. Your Service Advisor willwrite the work order.● The components or fluids that werechanged.● The date of the next service.

The Long Life Mobility Warranty is valid untilthe next inspection. This information isdocumented in all checks performed.

The type and the volume of the service mayvary from one vehicle to another. A special-ised workshop will be able to provide specificinformation on the jobs for your vehicle.

WARNINGIf the services are insufficient or not per-formed and if the service intervals are notobserved, the vehicle may be immobilisedin traffic cause an accident and severe inju-ries.

● Make sure that any repairs are carried outby a specialised CUPRA dealer, a SEATdealership or a specialised workshop.

CAUTIONCUPRA cannot be held liable for any dam-age to the vehicle due to insufficient workor of lack of availability of spare parts.

NoteRegular services on the vehicle not onlymaintain its value, but also its correct oper-ation and road safety. For this reason, con-duct the services in accordance with CU-PRA guidelines.

Set Service or Flexible Service Inter-vals

Services are classified as oil change serviceand inspection. The service interval displayon the instrument panel display serves as areminder of the next service.

Depending on the features, the engine andthe conditions of use of the car, either theFixed service or the Flexible service will beapplied for an oil change service.. »

313

Maintenance

How to know which type of service needsto his vehicle● Check the tables below:

Oil change servicea)

PR No. Type ofservice Service interval

QI1

Fixed

Every 5000 km or after1 yearb)

QI2 Every 7500 km or after1 yearb)



QI6 Flexible According to the service in-terval display

a) The data are based on normal conditions of use.b) Whatever happens first.

Inspection Servicea)

According to the service interval display

a) The data are based on normal conditions of use.

Particular characteristics of the FlexibleServiceRegarding the Flexible Service, the oilchange service only has to be performedwhen the vehicle needs it. To calculate when

you have to carry out this service, take intoaccount the individual conditions of use andpersonal driving style. A major component ofthe flexible service the use of LongLife oil in-stead of conventional engine oil.

Bear in mind the information about thespecifications of the engine oil according tothe VW standard ››› page 291 .

If you do not want to the flexible serviceyou can select the fixed service However, afixed service may affect service costs TheService Advisor will gladly advise you.

Service interval displayAt CUPRA, the dates of the services are indi-cated by the service interval display on theinstrument cluster ››› page 77 or in the Vehi-cle settings menu of the infotainment sys-tem››› page 82››› page 86 .

The service interval display gives informationfor service dates that involve an engine oilchange or an inspection. When the time forthe corresponding service comes, additionalwork required, such as the change of brakefluid and the spark plugs, can be carried out.

Information about the terms of use

The service intervals and groups are usuallybased on normal conditions of use.

If, on the other hand, the vehicle is underadverse conditions of use, some of thework must be carried out before the nextservice period or even between service in-tervals.

Conditions of use adverse include:

● The use of fuel with a high sulphur con-tent.● Frequent short trips.● Letting the engine idle for a long period oftime, as in the case of taxis.● Using the vehicle in areas with thick dust.● Frequent driving with a trailer (dependingon equipment).● Using the vehicle mostly in situations with alot of traffic and stops (e.g. in a city).● Using the vehicle mostly in winter.

This applies especially for the followingparts (depending on equipment):

● Dust and pollen filter● Air Care allergen filter● Air filter● Toothed chain● Particulate filter● Engine oil

The Service Advisor of your specialisedworkshop will gladly inform you about the

314

Service

need of performing service work betweennormal service intervals, always consideringthe conditions of use of your vehicle.

WARNINGIf the services are insufficient or not per-formed and if the service intervals are notobserved, the vehicle may be immobilisedin traffic and cause accidents and severeinjuries.● Make sure that any repairs are carried outby a specialised CUPRA dealer, a SEATdealership or a specialised workshop.

CAUTIONCUPRA cannot be held liable for any dam-age to the vehicle due to insufficient workor of lack of availability of spare parts.

Service sets

Sets of services include all the maintenanceworks needed to ensure the safety and thesmooth running of the vehicle (dependingon the conditions of use and the featuresof the vehicle, such as the engine, gearbox,or operating fluids). Maintenance servicesare divided into inspection and review serv-ices. Consult the details of the jobs requiredfor your vehicle at:

● Your CUPRA dealer

● Your SEAT dealership● Your specialised workshop

Due to technical reasons (continuous devel-opment of components) the sets of servicesmay vary. Your specialised CUPRA dealer,any SEAT dealership or a specialised work-shop always receives updated informationabout any modifications that are made.

Additional service offers

Approved spare parts

Original SEAT Spare Parts have been con-ceived for their vehicles and approved bySEAT, with a special emphasis on safety.These parts correspond exactly to the man-ufacturer's requirements in terms of design,accuracy of the measurements and materi-als. The original SEAT Spare Parts have beenconceived exclusively for your vehicle. Forthis reason, we always recommend the useof Original SEAT Spare Parts. SEAT cannot beheld liable for the safety and suitability ofparts from other manufacturers.

Approved spare parts

Approved spare parts, following the manu-facturer's requirements, are an additional

service to you, offering the possibility of re-placing complete sets, such as: light engine,gearboxes, heads, control units, electricalcomponents, etc.

These parts are, approved parts, and are thesame as the factory parts, which are also ap-proved spare parts.

Original accessories

We recommend you only use CUPRA Origi-nal Accessories and CUPRA approved acces-sories for your vehicle. The reliability, safetyand suitability of these accessories havebeen inspected specifically for this type ofvehicle. CUPRA cannot be held liable for thesafety and suitability of parts from othermanufacturers.

Mobility Service (Service Mobility)

Since the moment you purchase your CU-PRA vehicle you will be able to enjoy thebenefits and coverage of the CUPRA MobilityService.

For the first two years after the purchase,your new CUPRA vehicle is automaticallycovered by the CUPRA Mobility Service with-out additional costs. »

315

Maintenance

If you wish to enjoy this service after this pe-riod, you can extend the Mobility Service aslong as you carry out the recommended In-spection and Maintenance Services at a spe-cialised CUPRA Service or SEAT OfficialService.

If your CUPRA vehicle is immobilised due to afault or an accident, our assistance serviceswill help you keep moving.

Take into account that the Mobility Servicediffers depending on the country where thevehicle was purchased. For further informa-tion, ask your specialised CUPRA dealer, anySEAT dealership or visit the CUPRA websitein your country.

Warranty

Fault-free operation warranty

Specialised CUPRA Services or SEAT OfficialServices ensure the perfect condition of newvehicles. Check the purchase agreement orcomplementary additional documentationprovided by your Technical Service to seethe conditions and the terms of the warran-ty. Consult further information in this regardin your specialised CUPRA Service or SEATOfficial Service.

Vehicle maintenance

Maintenance and cleaning

Basic observations

Regular and careful care helps to maintainthe value of your vehicle. In addition, it maybecome a prerequisite to demand the war-ranty in the event of corrosion damage anddeficiencies in the paint coat of the body-work.

Specialised workshops have the necessarycare products. Please follow the instructionsfor application on the packaging.

WARNING● Cleaning products and other materialsused for car care can be damaging to yourhealth if misused.● Always keep care products in a safe place,out of the reach of children. Danger of poi-soning!

For the sake of the environment● When purchasing car care products,chose products that are compatible withthe environment.● The waste from car-care products shouldnot be disposed of with ordinary householdwaste.

Washing the vehicle

The longer you take to clean the tanks, e.g.remains of insects, bird excrements, treeresin or anti frost salt adhered to your vehi-cle, the more damage it can cause to thesurface. High temperatures, for instancestrong sunlight, further intensify the dam-age.

Before washing the car, soften the dirt usingplenty of water.

To remove encrusted dirt such as insects,bird droppings or tree resin, use a lot of waterand a microfibre cloth.

Have the underside of the vehicle washedafter the end of the anti frost salts in winter.

High pressure cleaning equipmentWhen washing the vehicle with a high-pres-sure cleaner, always follow the operating in-structions for the equipment. This appliesparticularly to the operating pressure andthe distance between the spraying water. Donot aim the jet directly to the side windowgaskets, doors, covers or the panoramic sun-roof*; the same applies to tyres, rubber ho-ses, soundproofing material, sensors* orcamera lenses*. Keep a distance of at least40 cm.

Do not remove snow and ice with a high-pressure cleaner.

316

Vehicle maintenance

Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water outin a direct stream or one that has a rotatingjet for forcing off dirt.

The water temperature must not exceed60°C.

Automatic car washesSpray the vehicle before starting the carwash.

Make sure that the windows and the panor-amic sunroof* are closed and the wind-screen wipers are deactivated. Bear in mindthe instructions of the car wash tunnel oper-ator, especially if your vehicle has detacha-ble parts.

Use of car washes without brushes if possi-ble.

Washing by handClean your vehicle from top to bottom with asoft sponge or with a brush. Only use clean-ing products that do not contain solvents.

Washing vehicles with a matte paint byhandTo prevent damage to the vehicle whenwashing it, first remove the thicker dust anddirt. To remove traces of insects, grease andfingerprints, it is best to use a special cleanerfor matte paint.

Apply the product with a microfibre cloth. Toavoid damaging the surface of the paint, donot apply too much pressure.

Rinse with plenty of water. Then clean it witha neutral cleaning product and a soft micro-fibre cloth.

Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of waterand then leave it to dry. Remove traces ofwater with a leather cloth.

WARNING● Only wash the vehicle with the ignitionswitched off or according to the specifica-tions of the car wash tunnel operator. Riskof accident!● When cleaning the underbody or the in-side of the wheel arches, protect yourselffrom sharp or pointy metal parts. Risk ofcut!● After cleaning the brakes could act moreslowly due to moisture or, in winter, the iceon the brake discs and pads. Risk of acci-dent! In this case the brakes should bedried by pressing the brake pedal severaltimes.

CAUTION● Before washing the vehicle in an auto-matic car wash, please make sure to retractthe exterior mirrors to prevent them frombeing damaged. Electric exterior rearview

mirrors must always be folded/deployedelectrically!● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.Risk of damaging the paint job!● Do not use sponges, abrasive householdsponges or similar to clean insect remains.Risk of damaging the surface!● Vehicle parts with matte paint:– Do not use polish or hard wax. Risk of

damaging the surface!– Never select washing programs that in-

clude the use of wax. This could dam-age the appearance of matte paint.

– Do not put stickers or magnets on partswith matte paint, as removing themmay damage the paint.

For the sake of the environmentThe car should only be washed in specialwash bays. These places are prepared toprevent oily water from getting into thepublic drains.

Cleaning and maintenance instruc-tions

The cleaning and maintenance of individualcomponents of the vehicle can be checkedin the following tables. The contents shouldbe understood merely as a recommenda-tion. Go to your specialised workshop if you »

317

Maintenance

have special questions or parts that are notlisted. Take he general considerations intoaccount ››› in Take special care with... onpage 321.

Cleaning the exterior

Windscreen wipers

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with wipers

Headlights / Tail lights

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soapsolutiona)

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximumin 1 litre of water

Sensors / Camera lenses

Problem Solution

Dirt

Sensors: soft cloth with a sol-vent-free cleaning productCamera lenses: soft cloth withan alcohol-free cleaning prod-uct

Snow/ice Hand brush/Anti frost spray withno solvents

Wheels

Problem Solution

Antifreeze salt Water

Brake abrasiondust

Acid-free special cleaning prod-uct

End exhausts

Problem Solution

Antifreeze salt Water, if a steel cleaning prod-uct is required

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if a steelcleaning product is required


Paint

Problem Solution

Paint flawsCheck the paint's colour code inan authorised service and re-store with a touch-up pencil

Spilled fuel Immediately rinse with water

Environmental rusttank

Apply rust remover and then ap-ply hard wax. Go you your speci-alised workshop if you have anyqueries

Problem Solution

Corrosion Have your specialised workshoptake care of this

The water does notcreate droplets onthe clean paint

Maintain with hard wax (at least2 times a year)

No shine de-spite sober main-tenance/paint

Treat with suitable wax and ap-ply paint preservative afterwardsif the wax used does not containpreservative ingredients

Tanks, e.g. insectremains, bird drop-pings, tree sap,road salt

Immediately soften with waterand remove with a microfibrecloth

Fat-based dirt, e.g.cosmetic productsor sunscreen

Delete immediately with a neu-tral soap solutiona) and a softcloth


Carbon fibre parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean the same way as paintedparts ››› page 316

318

Vehicle maintenance

Decoration slides

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soapsolutiona)


Interior cleaning

Windows

Problem Solution

Dirt Apply windscreen cleaner andthen dry with a cloth

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona)


Plastic parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Damp cloth

Encrusted dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if possi-ble solvent-free plastic cleaner


Displays/instrument panel

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with a liquid crystaldisplay cleaner

Control panels

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft brush, then soft cloth withneutral soap solutiona)


Seat belts

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona), allowedto dry before retracting


Fabrics, artificial, Alcantara leather

Problem Solution

Particles of dirtstuck to surfaces

Vacuum cleaner

Water-based dirt,e.g. coffee, tea,blood etc.

Absorbent cloth and neutralsoap solutiona)

Problem Solution

Grease-based dirt,e.g. oil, make-up,etc.

Apply a neutral soap solutiona).Absorb the dissolved grease andpaint particles drying with an ab-sorbent cloth, in case you musttreat it with water afterwards

Special dirt, e.g.pens, nail polish,dispersion paint,shoe cream etc.

Special stain remove: dry with anabsorbent cloth, if applicable,apply neutral soap solution af-terwardsa)


Natural leather

Problem Solution

Recent dirt Cotton cloth with neutral soapsolutiona)

Water-based dirt,e.g. coffee, tea,blood etc.

Recent stains: absorbent clothDry stains: stain remover suita-ble for leather

Grease-based dirt,e.g. oil, make-up,etc.

Recent stains: absorbent clothand suitable stain remover forleatherDry stains: grease solvent spray

Special dirt, e.g.pens, nail polish,dispersion paint,shoe cream etc.

Stain remover suitable for leath-er »

319

Maintenance

Problem Solution

Care Apply preservative cream regu-larly to protect from sunlight.Use a colour preservative if re-quired


Carbon fibre parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean like plastic parts

Take special care with...

Headlights/tail lights● Do not clean the headlights/tail lights witha dry cloth or sponge.● Do not use cleaning products that containalcohol. Risk of cracks!

Wheels● Do not use for paint wax or other abrasiveproducts.● If the protective coating on the paint of therim has been damaged due to stone impacts,scratches, etc., the damage should be re-paired immediately.

Camera lenses● Do not use hot or warm water to removeice or snow from the camera lenses. Risk ofcracking the lens!● To clean the camera lens, never use abra-sive cleaning products or products with alco-hol. Risk of scratches and cracks!

Windows● Remove snow and ice from windows andexterior mirrors with a plastic scraper only.To avoid scratches, the scraper should onlybe pushed in one direction and not moved toand fro.● Never remove snow or ice from windowsand rearview mirrors with warm or hot water.Risk of cracks on the windows!● To prevent damage to the heating of therear window, do not put stickers over theheating elements.

Covers/trims● Do not use cleaning products or chromebased cleaning agents.

Paint● The vehicle must be free from dirt and dustbefore applying wax or care products. Risk ofscratches!● Do not apply wax or care products if thevehicle is exposed to direct sunlight. Risk ofdamaging the paint job!

● The ambient rust deposits must not be re-moved through friction. Risk of damagingthe paint job!● Remove cosmetic products and sunlightimmediately. Risk of damaging the paint job!

Displays/instrument panel● The screens, the instrument panel and thetrim around it must not be cleaned dry. Riskof scratches!● Make sure that the instrument panel isswitched off and cooled down before clean-ing.● Make sure that no liquid leaks between theinstrument panel and the trim. Risk of dam-age!

Control panels● Make sure that no liquid leaks into the con-trol panels. Risk of damage!

Seat belts● Do not remove the seat belts to cleanthem.● Seat belts and their components mustnever be cleaned with chemical products,nor should they be allowed to come intocontact with corrosive liquids, solvents orsharp objects. Risk of damaging the fabric!● If you find any damage to the belt webbing,belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle,ask your specialised workshop to replace thebelt in question.

320

Accessories and modifications to the vehicle

Fabrics/artificial leather/microfibre● Do not treat artificial leather/microfibrewith leather cleaning products, solvents, waxpolish, shoe cream, stain removers or similarproducts.● If the stain is very hard to remove, take thevehicle to a specialised workshop to have itremoved there. This will prevent damage.● Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hardsponges, etc. to clean.● Do not turn on seat heating* to dry theseats.● Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-ets or belts can damage the surface.● Open Velcro, e.g. on clothes can damagethe seat upholstery. Make sure that Velcrofasteners are closed.

Natural leather● Never use solvents, wax polish, shoecream, spot removers or similar products onleather.● Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-ets or belts can damage the surface.● Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hardsponges, etc. to clean.● Do not turn on seat heating* to dry theseats.● Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlightfor long periods, otherwise it may tend tolose some of its colour. If the car is left for a

prolonged period in the bright sun, it is bestto cover the leather.

WARNINGDo not use water-repellent coatings on thewindscreen. In bad visibility conditions suchas humid weather, darkness or when thesun is in its lowest point, visibility may beimpacted. Risk of accident! Such coatingscan also cause the windscreen wiper bladesto make noise.

Note● Remains of insects can be removed muchmore easily with previously treated paint.● Regular car care treatments can preventdeposits of ambient rust.

Remove the vehicle from traffic

If you want to leave your vehicle stationaryfor a long period of time, contact a qualifiedworkshop. They will gladly inform you aboutthe necessary measures, such as anti-corro-sion protection, Service and storage.

Also take into account instructions regardingthe vehicle's battery ››› page 298 .

Accessories and modifica-tions to the vehicle

Accessories, spare parts andrepair work

Introduction

Always ask your dealer or specialist retailerfor advice before purchasing accessoriesand replacement parts.

Your vehicle is designed to offer a highstandard of active and passive safety. For thisreason, we recommend that you ask a speci-alised CUPRA Service or SEAT Official Serv-ice for advice before fitting accessories orreplacement parts. Your Official Service hasthe latest information from the manufacturerand can recommend accessories and re-placement parts which are suitable for yourrequirements. They can also answer anyquestions you might have regarding officialregulations.

We recommend you to use only CUPRA ac-cessories and Genuine CUPRA parts®. Spe-cialised CUPRA Services or SEAT OfficialServices have the necessary experience andfacilities to ensure that the parts are installedcorrectly and professionally. »

321

Maintenance

Any retro-fitted equipment which has a di-rect effect on the vehicle and/or the way it isdriven, such as a cruise control system orelectronically-controlled suspension, mustbe approved for use in your vehicle and bearthe e mark (the European Union's authorisa-tion symbol).

If any additional electrical devices are fit-ted which do not serve to control the vehicleitself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptopor ventilator fan, etc.), they must bear the sign (manufacturer conformity declaration inthe European Union).

WARNINGAccessories, for example telephone hold-ers or cup holders, should never be fittedon the covers, or within the working rangeof the airbags. Otherwise, there is a dangerof injury if the airbag is triggered in an acci-dent.

Technical modifications

Unauthorised modifications to the electron-ic components, software, wiring or datatransfer in the vehicle may cause malfunc-tioning.

You will appreciate that your specialised CU-PRA dealer or SEAT dealership cannot beheld liable for any damage caused by modifi-

cations and/or work performed incorrectlyin the vehicle.

We therefore recommend that all workshould be performed by a specialised CUPRAService or a SEAT Official Service using gen-uine CUPRA® parts.

WARNINGIncorrectly performed modifications orother work on your vehicle can lead to mal-functions and cause accidents.

Radio telephones and office equip-ment

Radio transmitters (fixed installation)Any retrofit installations of radio transmittersin the vehicle require prior approval. CUPRAgenerally authorises in-vehicle installationsof approved types of radio transmitters pro-vided that:

● The antenna is installed correctly.● The aerial is installed on the exterior of thevehicle (and shielded cables are used to-gether with non-reflective aerial trimming).● The effective transmitting power does notexceed 10 Watts at the aerial base.

A specialised CUPRA Service, SEAT OfficialService or specialised workshop will be able

to inform you about options for installing andoperating radio transmitters with a highertransmitting power.

Mobile radio transmittersCommercial mobile telephones or radioequipment might interfere with the electron-ics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions.This may be due to:

● No external aerial.● External aerial incorrectly installed.● Transmitting power more than 10 W.

You must, therefore, do not operate portablemobile telephones or radio equipment in-side the vehicle without a properly installedexternal aerial ››› .

Please note also that the maximum range ofthe equipment can only be achieved with anexternal aerial.

Business equipmentRetrofit installation of business or privateequipment in the vehicle is permitted, provi-ded the equipment cannot interfere with thedriver's immediate control of the vehicle andthat any such equipment carries the mark. Any retrofit equipment that could in-fluence the driver's control of the vehiclemust have a type approval for your vehicleand must carry the e mark.

322

Accessories and modifications to the vehicle

WARNINGMobile telephones or radio equipmentwhich is operated inside the vehicle with-out a properly installed external aerial cancreate excessive magnetic fields that couldcause a health hazard.

Note● The posterior fitting of electric and elec-tronic equipment in this vehicle affects itslicence and could lead to the withdrawal ofthe vehicle registration document undercertain circumstances.● Please use the mobile telephone/radiooperating instructions.

323

Information for the user



Information stored by the con-trol units

Storage of accident data (Event DataRecorder)

Your vehicle has an event data recorder(EDR).

The EDR’s function is to record data in theevent of a mild or serious accident. Thesedata are used to support the analysis of howdifferent vehicle systems behaved.

The EDR records, over a reduced time range(normally 10 seconds or less), dynamic driv-ing data and data from the restraint systems,such as:

● How different vehicle systems worked.● Whether the driver and the occupantswere wearing their seat belts.● How hard the acceleration or brake pedalwas pressed.● Vehicle speed.

These data will provide a better understand-ing of the circumstances of the accident.

Data from the driving assist systems are alsorecorded. This includes data such as wheth-er the systems were inactive or active and ifsuch action had an impact on the vehicle’sdynamic behaviour, changing its path in theaforementioned situations, accelerating ordecelerating the vehicle.

Depending on vehicle equipment, this in-cludes data from systems such as:

● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)● Emergency brake assistance system (FrontAssist).● Park Pilot system● Parking aid system (Park Assist).● Lane Assist

The EDR data are only recorded in specificaccident situations. No data are recorded innormal driving conditions.

No audio or video data inside or around thevehicle are recorded. Under no circumstan-ces are personal data such as name, age, orgender recorded. Nevertheless, third parties(such as criminal proceedings authorities)may relate the contents of the EDR data toother data sources and create a personalreference in the context of an accident in-vestigation.

In order to read the EDR data it is necessaryto access (if legally permitted to do so) the

vehicle's ODB (“On-Board-Diagnose”) inter-face while the vehicle is switched on.

CUPRA will not have access to EDR data un-less the owner (or, in “Leasing” cases, thelessee or hirer) gives their consent. Theremay be exceptions to this, depending on le-gal or contractual provisions.

Due to legal requirements in safety-relatedproducts, CUPRA may use the EDR data forfield research and in order to improve vehiclesystem quality. Any data used for the purpo-ses of research will be treated anonymously(in other words, no reference will be made tothe vehicle, their owner or the lessee/hirer).

Other important information

Environmental compatibility

Environmental protection is a top priority inthe design, choice of materials and manu-facture of your new CUPRA.

Constructive measures to encourage recy-cling● Joints and connections designed for easydismantling.● Modular construction to facilitate disman-tling.● Increased use of single-grade materials.

324


● Plastic parts and elastomers are marked inaccordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 andISO 1629.

Choice of materials● Use of recycled materials.● Use of compatible plastics in the same partif its components are not easily separated.● Use of recycled materials and/or materialsoriginating from renewable sources.● Reduction of volatile components, includ-ing odour, in plastic materials.● Use of CFC-free coolants.

Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptionsdictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury,hexavalent chromium.

Manufacturing methods● Reduction of the quantity of thinner in theprotective wax for cavities.● Use of plastic film as protection during ve-hicle transport.● Use of solvent-free adhesives.● Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys-tems.● Recycling and energy recovery from resi-dues (RDF).● Improvement in the quality of waste water.

● Use of systems for the recovery of residualheat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels,etc.).● The use of water-soluble paints.

Recycling of electrical or electronicdevices

All electrical or electronic devices (EED) thatare not permanently fitted in the vehiclemust be marked with the following symbol:

This symbol indicates that EED must not bediscarded as home waste but through selec-tive waste collection.

Information about the EU Di-rective 2014/53/EU

Simplified EU compliance declaration

Your vehicle has different radioelectrical de-vices. The manufacturers of these devicesdeclare that they comply with Directive2014/53/EU when legally required.

The full text of the EU compliance declara-tion is available online at the following ad-dress:

www.cupraofficial.com

Addresses of the manufacturers

According to the Directive 2014/53/EU, allrelevant components must include the ad-dress of the manufacturer.

The address of the manufacturers of com-ponents that, due to their size or nature,cannot include a sticker are listed below, aslong as it is legally required:

Radioelectricalequipment fitted inthe vehicle

Addresses of themanufacturers

Radiofrequency remotecontrol key

Della KGaA Hueck & Co.Rixbecker Straße 7559552 Lippstadt, GERMANY

Radio frequency remotecontrol (auxiliary heat-er) Digades GmbH

Äußere Weberstraße 2002763 Zittau, GERMANYTransmitted-Receiver

(independent heating)

Radar sensors for assis-tance systems

ADC Automotive DistanceControl Systems GmbHPeter-Dornier-Straße 1088131 Lindau, GERMANY

Robert Bosch GmbHPostfach 16 6171226 Leonberg, GERMANY

325


Frequency bands, station power

Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

Radiofrequency remote control (vehicle)

433.05-434.78 MHz 10 mW (ERP)

All CUPRA models433.05-434.79 MHz 10 mW

434.42 MHz 32 µW

Radio frequency remote control (auxiliary heater) 868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 25 mW Formentor

Transmitted-Receiver (independent heating) 868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 23.5 mW Formentor

Bluetooth 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm All CUPRA models

Connection to the external antenna of the car

GSM 900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm

Leon, Formentor

GSM 1800: 1710-1785 MHz 30 dBm

WCDMA FDD I: 1920-1980 MHz 21 dBm

WCDMA FDD lll: 1710-1785 MHz 21 dBm

WCDMA FDD VIII: 880-915MHz 21 dBm

LTE FDD1: 1920-1980 MHz 23 dBm




LTE FFD20: 832-862 MHz 23 dBm

Wireless hotspot 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm All CUPRA models

Keyless Access 434.42 MHz 32 µW All CUPRA models

326


Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

Radar sensors for assistance systems76 GHz-77 GHz

28.2 dBm Leon, Formentor

35.0 dBm Ateca

24050-24250 MHz 20 dBm Ateca

Wireless charging110-120 kHz 10 W Ateca

111-120 kHz 10 W Leon, Formentor

Instrument panel 125 kHz 40 dBµA/m All CUPRA models

Online Connectivity Unit

EGSM900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm

All CUPRA models

DCS1800: 1710-1785 MHz 31 dBm

UMTS FDD 1: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm



E-UTRA FDD 1: 1920-1980 MHz 23.5 dBm

E-UTRA FDD 3: 1710-1785 MHz 23.0 dBm

E-UTRA FDD 7: 2500-2570 MHz 23.5 dBm

E-UTRA FDD 8: 880-915 MHz 23.0 dBm



a) The commissioning or authorisation of radioelectrical technology may be restricted in some European countries, forbidden or only allowed with additional require-ments.

Hereby, Molex CVS Dabendorf GmbH de-clares that the radio equipment type LTE-MBC-EU2 is in compliance with Directive2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declara-

tion of conformity is available at the followinginternet address:

http://www.molex.com/doc327

http://www.molex.com/doc

Technical data

Technical data

Indications about the tech-nical data

Important information

Introduction

The values indicated in the technical datamay differ depending on optional equipmentor version of the model, as well as in the caseof special vehicles and equipment for certaincountries.

The information in the official vehicle docu-mentation takes precedence at all times.

Abbreviations used in the Technical Speci-fications section

kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.

PS Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerlyused to denote engine power.

rpm, 1/min Revolutions per minute - engine speed.

Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

CZ Cetane number, indication of the dieselcombustion power.

RON Research octane number, indication ofthe knock resistance of petrol.

Vehicle identification data

Vehicle ID numberThe vehicle ID number can be found in thefollowing places:

● In the infotainment system using the func-tion button > Interior > instrument clus-ter > Service.● One the vehicle's data label.● In front, under the windscreen.● To the right in the engine compartment.

Type plateThe type plate is located on the vehicle’sright hand door frame. Vehicles for certainexport countries do not have a type plate.

Fuel consumption

Approved consumption values are derivedfrom measurements performed or super-vised by certified EU laboratories, accordingto the legislation in force at the time (formore information, see the Publications Of-fice of the European Union on the EUR-Lexwebsite: © European Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) and apply to the specifiedvehicle characteristics.

The values relating to fuel consumption andCO2 emissions can be found in the docu-

mentation provided to the purchaser of thevehicle at the time of purchase.

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions de-pend on the equipment/features of each in-dividual vehicle, as well as on the drivingstyle, road conditions, traffic conditions, en-vironmental conditions, load or number ofpassengers.

Filling capacities

Tank levelVehicles with front-wheeldrive: 50 l, 7 l reserve

Vehicles with four-wheeldrive: 55 l, 8.5 l reserve

Capacity of the windscreen washer fluid con-tainer

approx. 3 litres

Weights

Load on the roofThe maximum authorised load on the roofof your vehicle is 75 kg.

328

Indications about the technical data

Empty weight, total weight, axle loadsThe empty weight of the vehicle with driver(75 kg) was calculated according to the (EU)1230/2012 standard. Optional equipmentcan increase the empty weight, which meansthat the possible useful load decreases pro-portionally.

Trailer weightThe maximum permitted drawbar load onthe ball head of the towing bracket is 80 kg.

WARNINGThe values indicated for the maximum per-mitted weights must not be exceeded.There is a risk of accident and damage!

329

Technical data

Engine specifications

Petrol engines 2.0 TSI Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 228 (310)/5,450-6,600

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 400/2,000-5,450

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1,984

Fuel Super 98 / Super 95 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox DSG

Top speed (km/h) a)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) a)

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 2,140

a) Data not available as this edition goes to print.

330

Indications about the technical data

Dimensions

Fig. 199 Dimensions.

Fig. 199 Formentor Formentor 4Drive

A/B Front and rear projection (mm) 893/877 893/877

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,680 2,680

D Length (mm) 4,450 4,450

E/F Front/reara) track width (mm) 1,585/1,559 1,585/1,559

G Width (mm) 1,839 1,839

H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,508 1,510

Turning radius (m) 11.4 11.4

a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.

331

Index

IndexNumbers and Symbols12-volt battery

assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51charge level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 298electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300winter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

4Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

AABS

see Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321Activating CUPRA CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Adapting the playback volume . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233special driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Additional heatingsee Auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Adjustfront seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13seat with memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Adjusting the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

activating and deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24for the head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30for the knees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 27description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145parking ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Alternator

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Android Auto™

Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174establish connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 45Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 44

check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45inflating the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45sealing the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Anti-puncture set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Anti-trap function

sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109sunshade blind (glass roof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Apple CarPlay

Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173establish connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Applications (apps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Aspects to think about before starting the

vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Assistance systems

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232assisted parting system (Park Assist) . . . . . 260Auto Hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79door opening warning (Exit Assist) . . . . . . . 246driver alert system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

333

Index

driving assist (Travel Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244emergency braking (Front Assist) . . . . . . . . 228front radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221hill descent control (HDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Hill Hold Control (HHC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212lane departure warning (Side Assist) . . . . . 246parking aid Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268PreCrash system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22proactive speed adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . 246rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271road sign detection system messages . . . . . 72safety advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226system limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Tyre pressure monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . 309Tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Audible warning

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110unbuckled seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Auto Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Auto Hold Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Auto Lock (central locking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

disconnecting the Auto Hold function . . . . 255Automatic dipped beam headlight control . . 111Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207downhill assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

launch-control program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211operating fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208steering wheel with shift paddles . . . . . . . . 209tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207, 209towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152electricity consumers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154radio-operated remote control . . . . . . . . . . 153remote control range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152, 154usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Average consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

BBackrest of the rear seat

folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Bag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135, 140Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

change on the remote control (independ-ent heating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Bicycle carrier

fitting onto the coverable tow hook . . . . . . 283max. load rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Blown bulbschange a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289, 291opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254emergency brake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Braking system

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

CCamera

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Caresee Cleaning the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Central armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93emergency lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92unlock and lock the vehicle (Keyless Ac-

cess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Change the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

334

Index

Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Changing parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321Checking levels

engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Check lists

requirements for Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . 174requirements for Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . 173requirements for MirrorLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . 175reverse assist (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Childproof lockselectric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Child seatsgroup classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33securing with the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 38, 39

Cleaning the vehiclehigh pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . 316special care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319wash the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Climate controlauxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Clocksdigital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75set the time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290panoramic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Clutch (lamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

WLAN access point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Connectivity Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Connectors

faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299anti-lock brake system ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256audible warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252cruise control (GRA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245emissions control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256, 259fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213hill descent control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240lane departure warning (Side Assist) . . . . . . 247lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287, 288press on the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . 247refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 285

remote control (independent heating) . . . 153replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215TCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256, 259tow hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Travel Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Tyre pressure monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Controls and displaysoverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Controls on the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Convenience close function

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Convenience open function

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Cooling system

check the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295refilling coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225CUPRA CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171legal provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Current documentation attached . . . . . . . . . . 156

DDangers of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . 18Data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

335

Index

Deactivating CUPRA CONNECT services . . . 170Deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Digital Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

information profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Disposal

seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Distance control

see Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

child lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Downhill assistance function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Downhill assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Drink holder

bottle holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140in the rear central armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Driver

see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Driver alert system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Driving

driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220economical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218parking on inclines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260park on upward slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116, 220with trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Driving Assist (Travel Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244problems and solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Driving data indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Driving mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Dust and pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . 116

Ee-Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Easy Open

special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104EDL

see Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . 257Electric

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Electrical accessories

see Power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Electric devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Electrolyte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Electronic engine torque management

(XDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Electronic immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100, 203Electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

automatic connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254automatic disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254emergency brake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Electronic self-locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . 257Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300emergency vehicle towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51replace a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . 245problems and solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245see also Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Emergency brake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Emergency braking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . 222

activating and deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231dodge assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229pedestrian and cyclist recognition . . . . . . . 229system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230temporarily deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232turn assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Emergency braking warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Emergency call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Emergency call service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Emergency locking of the front passenger

door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

336

Index

Emergency openingdriver's door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Emergency operationfront passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Emissions control systemcatalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Engine

assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205start (driver instructions with the mechan-

ical contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Engine and ignition

automatic ignition disconnection . . . . . . . . 201emergency start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204preheat the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202starting the engine with Press & Drive . . . . 202switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289, 291battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294, 295engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289window washer tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294check the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76G12evo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294G12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294G13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294temperature indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Engine failurecontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Engine oilchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291, 294checking the oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291maintenance frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Engine oil pressurecontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330Environment

ecological driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Environmental tiprefuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Equipmenttelephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

ESCelectronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . 257multi-collision brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Sport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324Exhaust gases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Exterior lighting

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Exterior mirrors

driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 8External antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322external audio sources

adapting the playback volume . . . . . . . . . . . 164

FFabrics: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Factors that have a negative influence on

safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Filling capacities

fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328window washer tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328window washer water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Fog lights with cornering light function . . . . . 114Four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Frequency bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

337

Index

Front Assistsee Emergency braking assist system . . . . . 228

Front passenger front airbagcontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Fuelfuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Fuel consumptioninertia disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218why does consumption increase? . . . . . . . . 287

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Fuel tank capopening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Fuel tank flapopening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Full-LED headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57colour coded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58preparations for replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . 59recognise blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

GGear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Gearbox DSG

see Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Gear indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

HHandbrake

see Electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Hangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115HDC

see Hill descent control (HDC). . . . . . . . . . . 214Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . 18Headlights

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61headlight washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125, 126Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143HHC

see Hill Hold Control (HHC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Hill descent control (HDC).

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Hill Hold Control (HHC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

IIdentification of fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Identifying letters on engine (LDM)

display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Identity accreditation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Information profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 156

adapt menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173before first use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . 162customise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162customised menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162drop-down menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162executing functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83initial configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Internet access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Media mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184MirrorLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162overview and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156share a WLAN connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194vehicle information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85vehicle settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 177WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Infotainment systemsee Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291, 313Inspection reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80digital (Digital Cockpit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 68menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

338

Index

service intervals display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77use with the multifunction steering wheel . 78

Instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 67Instrument panel lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Interior mirror

anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Interior monitoring and the anti-tow system

activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Interlock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

JJack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

position points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

KKeyless Access

Press & Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202unlocking and locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . 94

Keysassign a key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90instructions for the driver (mechanical

contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204pull out the key blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

synchronise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 100vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Key switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Kick-down

automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

LLane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Lane assist Plus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Lane Assist system

see Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Lane departure warning (Side Assist)

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Light indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Launch-control (automatic transmission) . . . 211Leaving a parking space with the parking as-

sist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Legal provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Levels control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Lift the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Light Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Light range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

ambient light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118audible warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

control lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116controlling the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114daylight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110fog light with cornering light function . . . . . 114headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114main beam headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110motorway light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Loading the luggage compartmentfastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134general advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 130positioning the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130positioning the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . . 136

Load on the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Lock and unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94in the locking cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . 93

339

Index

Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 130electric opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . 102emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105enlarge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128features of the electric rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . 103luggage compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . 117net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134opening and closing controlled by sensors

(Easy Open) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104storing the rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131variable luggage compartment floor . . . . . . 133

Luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Luggage compartment shelf

storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

MMain beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Main beam headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Maintenance

see Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Maintenance frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Malfunctions

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237assisted parting system (Park Assist) . . . . . 260clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213PreCrash system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Microfiber: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

MirrorLink®Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175establish connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Mirrorsadjusting the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . 122anti-dazzle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121see also Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Mobile phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Mobile Signal Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Multi-collision brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180, 200

favourites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185select source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185use streaming services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

NNavigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

decrease the navigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . 188detailed view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193edit route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192enter an address for a guide destination . . 190favourite destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191frequent destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189function: entering destination . . . . . . . . . . . 190increase the navigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188last destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

learn usage pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188managing the map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188, 191navigation announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187offroad mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Other options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193route details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192saved data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188, 193saved destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191save destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191split screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189use contact details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192use the map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191use the map to enter the destination . . . . . 191

Net bagluggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Net for luggageluggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Noiseauxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303, 307

Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

OOctane (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

partial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294One-touch signalling function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

340

Index

Online services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290panoramic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100in the locking cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100panoramic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102rear lid with electric opening and closing . 102tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Operating faultautomatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Operation in winterbattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298heated windscreen washer jets . . . . . . . . . . 120salt on the roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Original accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Original Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Overview (left hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Overview (right hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Ownership accreditation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

PPainting the vehicle

care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Panoramic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108see also Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Park Assistsee the assisted parking system (Park As-

sist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

at an angle with the reverse assist . . . . . . . . 274automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210with the assisted parking system (Park As-

sist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264Parking aid

automatic activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269braking during the manoeuvre . . . . . . . . . . . 271fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270, 271parking aid plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271see the assisted parking system (Park As-

sist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260sensors and camera: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318setting the indications and audio sig-

nals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270, 271surroundings warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270visual indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Parking aid systemsee Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267, 268, 271

Parking aid system (Park Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . 260angle parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264automatic brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266automatic interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262conditions for leaving a parking space . . . . 265leaving a parking space (only when parallel

parked) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

parallel parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264parking conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264stop early . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Parking distance warning systemsee Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267, 268, 271

Parking ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150ParkPilot

see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267, 268, 271Partial odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 16Petrol

additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Places with risk of explosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Places with special regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Power socket

faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Power steering

see Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214PreCrash system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Front Assist monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . 22indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22selecting the driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Preheat the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Press & Drive

start button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Proactive speed adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

341

Index

limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238problems and solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

RRadar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181frequency bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181preset buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181tune station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181(TP) Traffic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Radio-operated remote controlsee Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Radio screen: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Radio telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

function control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Raise the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48RCTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

see Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . 246Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . 246, 249

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Rear fog light

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 105

see also Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . 102Rear mounting

towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Rear seat

fold down with the remote unlocking lever .129Rear Traffic Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Refuelling

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76opening the fuel tank flap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Releasing the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Remote control key

unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Remote control (independent heating) . . . . . 153

changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Repair work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321Requirements for Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . 173Reverse assist (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

angle parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273cross traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273hitching a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273, 274settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Reverse (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Revolution counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 75Road signs

shown on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Road signs detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72limited operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73shown on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73windscreen damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136fix the crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Rotation directiontyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Running innew brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252new engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

SS-PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Safe security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Safety

child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

central airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Save fuelinertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Screenclean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16fitting the seat belt strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 23

342

Index

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149SEAT Ident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Seats

adjusting the headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126backrest of the rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128electric settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124fitting the headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149incorrect positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14removing the headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Selector lever (automatic transmission)

positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Selling the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Service

Digital Maintenance plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313flexible service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313oil change service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313proof of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313service sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315service works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313set service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313terms of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 314Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Service Menuidentifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69restart the oil service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69restart Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69service intervals display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Service Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Service notification: consult . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Set of vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . . . 209Signal amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Sound system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Special characteristics

Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . 281MirrorLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 55tow start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226indication on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Speed symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer

combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Start-Stop systemdisconnect and connect manually . . . . . . . 207driver indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205stopping and starting the engine . . . . . . . . 205the engine does not turn off . . . . . . . . . . . . 205the engine starts by itself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Start the engine by towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

ACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235compass indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68doors, bonnet and rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . 67Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Emergency brake assistance system (Front

Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . 67identifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67PreCrash system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22road signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 208service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Travel Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309warning and information messages . . . . . . . 70

343

Index

Steeringcontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Steering wheeladjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150multifunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . 209

Steering wheel heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139glove compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117on-board documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139on the front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139other object holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Storage compartment accessoriessee Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Storage of accident data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

bag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134positioning the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130positioning the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136, 137trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . . 136

Sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108anti-trap function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Sunshade blindanti-trap function (glass roof) . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Switching offtelephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

TTail lights

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61TCS

see Traction control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328load on the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . 275weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Telephone

contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195favourites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198pairing a mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Phone book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198send messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197speed dial buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198to call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194places with risk of explosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Temperature indicatorexterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Timeadjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 75

Tiptronic (automatic transmission) . . . . 207, 209To change the battery

of the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 38, 39Top Tether System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 38, 39Torque

wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Touch zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Towable loads

loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279Tow cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277, 278Tow hook

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282unlocking electrically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Towing devicefitting a bicycle carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283fitting later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277tow hook with electric unlocking . . . . . . . . . 281

Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 55automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 55four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54front towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56rear towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 55tow bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54towing cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54towing prohibited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54with towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Traction control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Traffic information (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

344

Index

Traffic programmesee Traffic information (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275adjusting the headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277hitching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277LED tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277, 278loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270, 272power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trail-

er combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277, 278technical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276towable loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279towing cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277, 278trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280unlocking the tow hook electrically . . . . . . 281vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . 275, 279

Trailer modesee Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Transportation of children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . . . 136Travel Assist

see Driving Assist (Travel Assist) . . . . . . . . . . 242Trips abroad

headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Turning off the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Turning on the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Tyre Mobility System

see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Tyre pressure monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Tyre pressure monitor systems

Tyre pressure monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . 309Tyre profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

see also Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Tyre repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Tyres

accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49foreign objects inserted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303for winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304speed symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303tread wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305useful life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

UUnlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . 93

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

VVanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Variable luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . 133Vehicle

data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328lending or selling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170parking on inclines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260parking on upward slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48unlocking and locking (Keyless Access) . . . 94vehicle ID number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Vehicle carewiper blade service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Vehicle conservation products . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331Vehicle information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Vehicle location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Vehicle seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Vehicle settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Vehicle wallet compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Siri™ (Apple CarPlay™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Volumeset for external audio sources . . . . . . . . . . . 164

345

Index

WWarning symbols

see Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 80Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Washing the vehicle

conserving the exterior of the vehicle . . . . 316high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . 316sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Wheel balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 307

anti-theft device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Wheelschange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 49changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46new wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Wheel spanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Wheel trim

remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Windows

automatic opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106convenience opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Window washerwindow washer lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Window washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Window washer water

check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297filling quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120headlight washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120lift the blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120reposition the blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119thermal washing ejectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Winter conditionssunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Wiper and rear window wiper bladescleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 318replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Wireless Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Wireless charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

XXDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

346

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.All rights on changes are reserved.

❀This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.07.20

Vehicle identification da a

Model:

Vehicle Registration:

Vehicle identification number:

Date of vehicle registration or vehicle delivery:

SEAT Official Service:

Service advisor:

Telephone:

Confirmation of eceipt of documentation and vehicle keys

The following items were delivered with the vehicle: YES NO

On-board documentation

First key

Second key

Correct working order of all keys was checked

Location: Date:

Signature of owner:

F O R M E N T O R

F

OR

ME

NT

OR

Ingl

és (

07.2

0)

5FF012720

Ingl

és 5

FF01

2720

(07

.20)

Owner’s manual

Documents

(07.20) 5FF012720 Inglés FORMENTOR...This manual describes the features of the vehicle at the time of drafting this text. Some of the features described below will be intro-duced